Specs and contract docs for PS Building- Gee and Jenson1987 SPECIFICATIONS & CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR A
PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING
FOR THE
CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH
ATLANTIC BEACH , FLORIDA
1 4j L
GEE & JENSON
Encineers,
Architects,
Planners, Inc.
BID i
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
for Construction of a
PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING
for the
CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH,
ATLANTIC BEACH, FLA.
Prepared By
GEE & JENSON
Engineers, Architects, Planners, Inc.
Architect' s Job No. 85=663.2
Date of Issue:
March 9y 1987
Pi r
TITLE PAGE
00001-1
SECTION 00005
TABLE OF CONTENTS
faxiaiQn_a___Bld ling_and_eanfcant_@squic.amants:
00001 Title page
00005 Table of contents
00010 invitation to Bid
00100 Instructions to bidders
00310 Bid form
00500 Form of agreement
00700 General conditions
00800 Suppiementary conditions
DiYlslQn_1___Eanscal_6squtcsmants:
01010 Summary of work
01040 Coordination
01060 Regulatory requirements
01070 Abbreviations
01340 '. Submittals
01370 Schedule of values
01500 Temporary facilities and controls
,01530 Barriers
01570 Traffic Regulations
01580 Protect sign_
01670 HVAC test-adjust-balance
01700 Contract closeout
121YlslQn_2___afs_itsmk:
02010 Subsurface investigation
02050 . Demolition
02200 Site clearing, stripping and grubbing
02210 Earthwork
02601 Manholes
02280 Soil treatment
02300 Drainage
02420 . Fencing and gates
02490 Landscape Work
025131 Asphalt paving
02528 Concrete walks
02577, Pavement marking
02610 . Pipe and fittings
Q1Ytalan_l___Danccata:
03400 Concrete work
00005-1
Q1Y1s1Qn_4�=_MasQn[�:
04220 Masonry Work
DixiaiQn_2_=_Matals:
05500. Metal fabrications
D1Yis1Qn_iii_=_KQQs_ansi_Plasfial:
06100 Rough carpentry
06200 Finish carpentry
06300 Wood trusses
Dlil sign_Z_=_Iha[mal_ansi_mQlatu[$_R[QtectiQn:
07100 Waterproofing and dampproofing
07200 Insulation
07300 Roofing - Asphalt Shingle
07310 Wood Shingles
07410 Roofing - Metal (Alternate No. 3)
07500 Flashing and sheet metal
07900 Sealants
,Dixislan_$_=_DQQ[s_ans_IELinsIsrms:
08100 Metal doors and frames
08200 . Plastic faced wood doors
08316'. Security doors
08330 Overhead service doors
08400 Entrances and storefronts
08500 Metal windows
08710 Finish hardware
08800 Glazing
QiY1s1Qn_4___Elnlshas:
09250 . Gypsum drywall
09300 Ceramic tile
09660 Resilient flooring
09680 Carpeting
09900 Painting
p1Y1s1Qn_1�=_�Rsnlalttss:
10160 Plastic laminate toilet partitions
10200 Architectural louvers
10500 Metal lockers and Pistol lockers
10620 . Folding partitions
10800 Toilet accessories
00005-2
Did1s1Qn_11___EQ.uJRment:
11001 Equipment
DiYlalQn_12___Eurnlshlnas:
Not appl icabl e
DixlaiQn_11___apaQial_EQaatruQtian:
Not applicable
DixialQn_11___EQnYficing_sy.atama:
Not applicable
Dh1is1Qf_l._._daQhan1Q.Ai..
15000 Mechanical
15080 Piping Materials & Accessories,
15280 Insulation
15400 Plumbing Work, General
15401 Plumbing Specialties
15402 Plumbing Valves
i15403I Plumbing Hangers & Supports
15404 Testing of Plumbing Piping
15405 Plumbing, Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping
15406". Plumbing Sanitary, Storm ( When Applicable) ,
Vent and Waste Pipings
15407: Plumbing insulation
15408 Plumbing Fixtures, Equipment, Trim and Drains
15409 Plumbing Domestic Water Heating
15650 . Ventilation and Air Conditioning Equipment
15800 Mechanical - Ductwork and Duct Specialties
15900 . Automatic Temperature Controls
DiYlalQn_1�__ElaQtriQni:
16010 . General Provisions
16050 Basic Materials and Methods
16110 Wireway and Plug- In Strip
16111 Conduit, Raceway and Tubing
16120 . Low Voltage Wire and Cable
16125 Wiring Methods
16134 Boxes and Cabinets
16140 . Wiring Devices
• 16160 Panelboards
16180 Disconnect Switches
00005-3
16181 Fuses
16182 Circuit Breakers
16402 Overhead and Underground Electric Service
16451 : Building Grounding
16501 Pumps
16502 Ballasts and Accessories
16504 Diffusers
16510 Interior and Exterior Building Lighting
16511 Fluorescent Fixtures
16512 incandescent Fixtures
165131 High intensity Discharge Fixtures
16530 Site Lighting
16620 . Emergency Generator Set
16622 Automatic Transfer Switch
16721 Fire Alarm System
16740 , Public Telephone Conduit System
16700 internal Communication System
167$1 Television System
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
00005-4
SECTION 00010
INVITATION TO BID
�• CITY OF
r1eaastic each - 96VCida
716 OCEAN BOULEVARD
^1 P.O.BOX 26
ATLANTIC BEACH,FLORIDA 82299
.0p.0" TELEPHONE(904)249-2896
March 4, 1987
CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH
INVITATION TO BID
NOTICE is hereby given that the City of Atlantic Beach, Florida, will
receive sealed bids, submitted in triplicate, for the construction of the
Public Safety Building, Atlantic Beach, Florida, at the Office of the City
Clerk until 2:00 PM Local Time, April 7, 1987, at which time the said bids
will be publicly opened and read aloud.
SCOPE OF WORK: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and supervision to
construct new Public Safety Building of approximately 7400 S.F. and all
associated mechanical and electrical work, and to include site work for
approximately one (1) acre.
All bids must be made on the appropriate proposal forms, properly executed
and placed in an envelope endorsed "Bid No. 8687-2 .- Public Safety Building,
To Be Opened 2:00.PM Local Time, April 7, 1987."
The Contract Documents may be examined at the following locations: City
Hall, 716 Ocean Boulevard, Atlantic Beach, Florida, and Gee & Jenson, Engi-
,peers-Architects-Planners, Inc. , - 101 Century 21 Drive, Suite 215,
Jacksonville, Florida. Copies of the Contract Documents may be obtained at
the office of Gee & Jenson upon payment of a non-refundable charge of $47.00
for each set. Only complete sets of plans and specifications will be dis-
tributed.
All bidders must furnish a bid bond in the amount of 5% of the bid and bid
prices must remain valid for sixty (60) days after the public opening. The
bidder selected by the City Commission for the contract will be required to
furnish the following: references testifying to the quality of their work;
a performance and payment bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%)
of the contract amount which said bond shall remain in effect until the date
of final inspection and acceptance by the owner; certificates of insurance
indicating coverage for Workers' Compensation, public and private liability
and property damage insurance in adequate amounts during the life of the
contract.
The City of Atlantic Beach reserves the right to reject any or all bids,
waive informalities in any bid, make award in part or whole with or without
cause, and to make the award in what is deemed to be in the best interest of
the City of Atlantic Beach.
Richard C. Fellows
City Manager
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
FLORIDA TIMES-UNION: Please publish one time Sunday, March 8, 1987.
Submitted for Joan LaVake (246-2766) by Maureen King
00010-1
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1 .01 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Bid Date : Sealed proposals will be received at the
Office of the City Clerk, . City of Atlantic Beach ,
716 Ocean Boulevard , at 2 : 00 P. M. , Tuesday , April
7, 1987;
B. Proposals: All work described in the Contract Documents
shall. be included in the proposal for the General
Contract. Proposals for this project shall be submitted
in triplicate on the proposal form enclosed with these
Specifications.
C. Contractor ' s License : All bidders shall be Licensed
Contractors as required by State of Florida laws governing
their trades.
D. Site investigation: Each bidder shall , before submitting
his proposal , examine the premises to determine the
extent of the work involved and the conditions under
which he must perform the work . He is required to
examine carefully the drawings and specifications
and contract forms, and to inform himself accurately
regarding any and all conditions and requirements
that may in any manner affect the work to be performed.
1 . The submission of a proposal will be construed
as evidence that such examination has been made
and no subsequent allowance w,i I l be made in this
connection. To gain access to the site the bidder
should contact:
Mr. Richard Fellows
City Manager
P. 0. Drawer 25
Atlantic Beach, FL 32223(
( 904) 249-2395
2 . Differing Conditions:
a. Notify the Architect/Engineer, in writing, .
before disturbing any of the conditions
listed in b and c herein, .or similar conditions.
00100-1
b. Any subsurface or latent physical conditions
at the site differing materially from those
shown on the drawings.
c. Unknown physical conditions at the site,
of an unusual nature, differing materially
from those ordinarily encountered and generally
recognized as inherent in work of the character
provided for in this project.
E. interpretation of Drawings and Specifications: Should
a bidder find discrepancies or ambiguities in, or
omissions from the Drawings and Specifications , or
should he be in doubt as to their mewing, the bidder
shalt at once notify the A/E in writing, in sufficient
time in order that an addendum might be issued to
all prospective bidders. Addendums will be forwarded
to all bidders and each bidder shall acknowledge the
receipt of each addendum on his proposal in the spaces
provided . FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE ANY ADDENDUM ON
THE BID FORM WILL RESULT IN THE REJECTION OF THE BID.
Bidders should address all inquiries for this project
( to:
Gee & Jenson Engineers, Architects, Planners, Inc.
101 Century 21 Drive, Suite 215
Jacksonville, Florida 32216.
Attn: Ms. Melody S. Linger
(904) 724-9660
F. Standard Basis for Bidding:
1 . Equality : Where materials, etc. , are referred
to in the specifications as "equal to", "similar
and equal to", or words of similar import, the
Architect/Engineer shall decide as to the equality.
In addiction to data required under paragraph
"Shop Drawings" and/or Manufacturer' s Description
Data", . the Contractor shall furnish other detailed
data as required by the Architect/Engineer for
comparison if the product proposed is not the
product mentioned by name . No extra will be
allowed because of such substitution, if permitted,
either for the article substituted or for any
revision in other work affected thereby.
00100-2
2 . No changes in the amounts of bids appearing on
the outside of bids will be considered . Only
the amount shown inside the envelope will be
considered. Ali changes, corrections and erasures
must be initialled by the person signing the
bid.
G. Submittal with Bid : Bidders shall furnish names and
class of work to be performed by Subcontractors.
H. Basis of Award : Consideration for the award of a
contract wilt be on the basis of the best proposal
for the base bid or the best proposal for a combination
of base bid and alternates; the Owner reserves the
right of decision regarding acceptance of alternates.
I . Permits , Testing, . Fees and insurance : The cost of
builders risk insurance , building permit fees and
all retesting services for soils, paving , concrete
and the Iike should be included in the bid price.
1 .02 DEFINITIONS
A. Contract Documents:
;.� 1 . The contract documents consist of the Agreement
( A IA Document A101 , Standard Form of Agreement
Between Owner and Contractor- Stipulated Sum ) ;
Generai Conditions , Instructions to Bidders,
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications ,
and Drawings and other Contract Documents.
B. Owner: The Owner is City of Atlantic Beach
P. 0. Drawer 25
Atlantic Beach, Florida
The term Owner referred to throughout these Specifications
means the Owner or his authorized representative.
C. Project: The Project is Publ is Safety ,Bui lding
Atlantic Beach, Florida
D. A/E : The Architect/Engineer is Gee 8 Jenson,
Engineers, Architects, Planners, Inc. ,
101 Century 21 : Drive, Suite 215,
Jacksonville, Florida 32216'.
The term A/E, Architect, Engineer or Owners Representative
referred to throughout these Specifications means
the Architect/Engineer or his authorized represen-
tative.
00100-31
E. Subcontractor: A Subcontractor is a person or organi-
zation who has a direct contract with the Contractor
to perform any of the Work at the Site . The term
Subcontractor means the Subcontractor or his authorized
representative.
F. Vendor: A Vendor is a person or organization having
a contractual agreement with the Contractor to suppiy
materials or equipment but not labor. The term Vendor
referred to throughout these Specifications means
the Vendor or his authorized representative.
G. Work : The term Work includes all labor necessary
and all material and equipment incorporated or to
be incorporated to produce the construction required
by the Drawings and these Specifications.
H. NIC: The term NiC used throughout the Drawings and
these Specifications means "Not Included in this Contract. "
I.. Approved Equal The term Approved Equal and/or Acceptable
and/or used throughout the Drawings and
Acceptable: these Spe cifications means as approved
by the Architect/Engineer.
:as
1 .03, GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. "The General Conditions of The Contract For Construction, "
Document A201 , issued by the American institute of
Architects, 13th edition , August 1970 , relates to
the work of this project and is hereby made a part
of this Contract as though fully contained in these
specifications, except as otherwise provided.
The Contractor is hereby specifically directed, as
a condition of the Contract, to obtain the necessary
number of copies of Document A201 , to acquaint himself
with the Articles contained therein and to notify
and appraise all Subcontractors, suppliers and any
other parties to the Contract or individuals or agencies
engaged on the work as to its contents.
No contractural adjustments shall be due or become
exigent as a result of fa i l ure on the part of the
Contractor to fully acquaint himself and all other
parties to the Contract with the conditions of Document
A201 .
00100-4
Copies of the AIA "General Conditions of the Contract
for Construction" may be examined at the office of
the Architect/Engineer or may be purchased from the
followjng :
American Institute of Architects
1 735 New York Avenue, N. W.
Washington, D. C. 20006
or at most dealers of architects' supplies.
1 .04 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Extent of Work : The Contractor shall furnish labor,
material , services , and equipment to complete the
work in accordance with the drawings and as specified
herein.
B . items Furnished by the Owner and installed by the
Contractor :
1 . Bronze Plaque
2 . Communication Equipment - See Electrical Specifi-
cations
3. Flag Pole
C. Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable
Federal , state or locai requirements. Reference to
codes, specifications and standards shall mean the
latest edition, amendment or revision of such reference
in effect at the project location on the date of the
contract.
1 . Work within Public Property : No work shall be
performed within public property until Contractor
has secured from controlling government agency
written permission and/or permits and where required
furnished bond or guarantee for the accomplishment
of such.
2 . Notice of Commencement: No work shall be commenced
or materials ordered until Notice of Commencement
has been recorded in accord with Chapter 713
Liens , Generally , Part 1 Mechanics ' Lien Law ,
Florida Statute in effect on date of the contract.
Contractor shall either record such or ascertain
that such has been recorded.
00100-5
3 . Government Regulations and Requirements: Contractor
• shall inform himself of and comply with al I tgovernment
regulations and requirements affecting accomplishment
of the work.
1 .05 SITE ACCESS
A. Access to the site or construction work on site shall
at no time interfere with the functioning of adjacent
existing Public Safety Building or cause damage to
existing building, adjacent property or utilities.
B. Work that occurs on public land must be coordinated
by the Contractor with the governing authorities concerning
the use of public streets and other said properties
for the purposes of deliveries, access and construction.
1 .06' BUILDING LAYOUT
A. The Contractor shail immediately, upon entering project
site for purpose of beginning work, locate all general
reference points and take necessary action to prevent
their destruction; lay out his own work and be responsible
for all lines, elevations and measurements of building,
grading, utilities and other work executed by him
under the contract.
B. The Contractor must exercise proper precaution to
verify figures shown on the drawings before layout
work and will be held responsible for any error resulting
from his failure to exercise such precautions.
C. After foundations have been poured and walls erected
to establ i sh the location of the b u i l d i n g , engage
a registered surveyor to prepare a certified survey
showing location of the building on the site.
D. Submit 2 copies of the survey with the Contractor' s
f i r s t request for payment fol i ow ,i ng, completion of
foundation work. Payment will not be made unless
the above is compiled wjth.
1 .07 INSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for fire and wind-
storm insurance on the building during construction ,
insuring Contractor, Subcontractors and Owner as their
interests may appear.
00100-6
B. General Notes Regarding Liability :
1 . Products and Completed Operations coverage shall
be maintained for a minimum period of 1 year
after final payment.
2. Each listed policy shall be endorsed to reflect
the company' s obligation to provide the addressee
30 days written notice prior to cancellation
or non-renewal .
31. Contractual Liability shall include provisions
for covering the indemnity specified under Article
4, Paragraph 4:18 of the General Conditions.
4. The Owner shall be an additionally named insured.
5 . The Certificate of Insurance shall be executed
on AIA Document G7p5:, or an insurance agency
standard form showing the same data and format;
a copy of Form G7Q5: is attached.
6. Contractor shall submit Certificates of insurance
from all Subcontractors.
:1 .08 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to be
fully explanatory and supplementary. However, . shout d
anything be shown, . indicated or specified on one and
not the other, it shall be done the same as If shown,
indicated or specified in both.
B. Should either the drawings and the specifications
and the General Conditions contradict each other in
any point, or require clarification, the Contractor
must call the same to the attention of the Architect/
Engineer ' s interpretation will govern the performance
of the work and no allowance s h a l l be made I n behalf
of the Contractor for error or negligence on his part
in this connection.
C. Should any error or inconsistency appear in Drawings
or Specifications, the Contractor, before proceeding
with the work, must make mention of the same to the
Architect/Engineer for proper adjustment, and in no
case proceed with the work in uncertainty nor with
insufficient Drawings.
00100-7:
D. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall be responsible
for verification of all measurements at the building
before ordering any materials or doing any work .
No extra charge or compensation shall be allowed due
to differences between actual dimensions and dimensions
indicated on the Drawings . Any such discrepancy In
dimensions which may be found shall be submitted to
the Architect/Engineer for his consideration before
the Contractor proceeds with the work in the affected
area.
E. Follow sizes in Specifications or figures on Drawings
in preference to scale measurements.
F. Where it Is obvious that a drawing illustrates only
a part of a given work or of a number of items the
remainder shall be deemed repetitious and so constructed.
G. Under the various sections of the Specifications any
descriptive heading or listing of work in the particular
' branch referred to, are intended to recite generally
to the Contractor the principal items included and
covered thereunder. Should such headings or descriptions
above referred to, fall to mention any item obviously
necessary for the completion of that particular branch
of the work , it shall not relieve the Contractor of
the responsibility of furnishing such items not specifi-
cally listed thereunder.
H. The Owner reserves the right to alter or modify the
Drawings and Specifications in and particular, and
the Architect/Engineer shall be at liberty to make
any reasonable amount of deviation In the construction
detail or execution without In either case, invalidating
or rendering void the Contract . in case any such
alteration or deviation shall increase or diminish
the cost of doing the work, the amount to be allowed
to the Contractor or Owner shall be the cost of the
work plus a fixed percentage fee.
1 .09 PERMITS, UTILITIES, PROTECTION
A. Permits , Fees and Licenses : The Contractor shall
obtain and pay for permits, fees, taxes and licenses
as may be required to complete the work, included
but not necessarily limited to water fees, building
permit, electrical permits, inspection fees, taxes,
. licenses, etc.
00100-8
B. Temporary Utilities : The Contractor shall arrange
and pay for all temporary water, telephone and electricity
used in the course of construction, including the use
of permanent building water and electrical service,
incidental to construction operations. Upon substantial
cost of all utilities, from that date, shall be transferred
or assigned to the Owner' s account.
C. Protection : The Contractor shall arrange and pay
for all fences or barricades for the protection of
the public as required by local city ordinances, protection
of the work or for safety considerations.
1 .1 0 CLEANING UP
A. The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises
free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish
caused by his empioyee' s work.
B. include cleaning mud and debris from streets used
as access to and from the building site.
C. At the completion of the work, . remove all rubbish ,
tools, . scaffolding and surplus material from and about
the site of the work.
1 . 11 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Before starting any construction work on this project,
a conference w i I I be held for the purpose of verifying
general procedures, expediting shop drawings and schedules
and to establish a working understanding between the
parties concerned with this project.
•
B. Present at the conference shall be representatives
of the Owner, the responsible representative of the
Contractor, the Contractor ' s Job Superintendent and
representatives of the Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall also instruct his Plumbing, Mechanical
and Electrical Contractors or their representatives
to attend this meeting.
D. The Contractor shall bring to this meeting the following
information:
1 . Contractor Documents not yet submitted.
2 . Proposed Job Progress Schedule.
00100-9
3� Complete list of Proposed Subcontractors and
material suppliers for all phases of the work ,
Including those not previously submitted with
the Proposal .
1 .12 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Retesting and inspection shall be paid for by the
Contractor and included in the bid proposal .
1 .13( AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Architect/Engineer will provide the Contractor
with a reproducable set of the original bid documents.
B. The Contractor shall , at his expense, provide as-built
drawjngs as follows:
1 . If the Contractor shall elect to vary from the
Contract Documents, and secures prior written
approval of the Architect/Engineer, for any phase
of the work, other than those listed below, he
shall record In a neat readable manner, all such
variances on the prints furnished.
2 . Contractor shall provide as-built drawings for
plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning
( if specified ) , electrical , and fire protection
work. The as-built drawings shall be maintained
as the work progresses.
3 . The foilowing requirements apply to all • as-built
drawjngs:
a. They shall be maintained at the Contractor' s
expense.
b. All drawings maintained on Jobsite shall
be done carefully and neatly in red pencil
on prints furnished.
c. Additional drawings shall be provided as
necessary for clarification.
d. They shall be kept up-to-date during the
entire course of the work and shall be available
upon request for examination for other parts
of the work.
00100-10
e. Final as-built drawings shall be completed
on Mylars provided by Architect and returned
to the Architect/Engineer upon completion
of the work and are subject to the approval
of the Architect/Engineer.
1 . 14 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant that all materials and
equipment furnished for the project will be new unless
otherwise specified , and that all work will be of
good quality , free from faults and defects and in
conformance with the contract documents.
B. All work not so conforming to these standards may
be considered defective. If required by the Architect
/Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory
evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and
equipment.
C. The warranty provided in this paragraph and elsewhere
in the contract documents shall be In addition to
and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy
required by law or by the contract documents.
) . 15 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise spec_ if ied, all materials shall be
new and of types, grades or classes as herein specified.
All materials shall be free from defects impairing
strength, durability or appearance.
B. All materials shall be carefully handled to preclude
damage and shall be properly stored at the site to
prevent deterioration , injury or the intrusion of
foreign matter. Damaged or deteriorated materials
shall be promptly removed from the site.
1 . 16I. LIENS
A. Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained
percentage shall become due until the Contractor shall
deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens
a r i s i n g out of t h i s Contract , . or receipts in f u l l
in lieu thereof and, if required in either case, an
affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information
the releases and receipts include all the labor and
material for which a lien could be filed.
00100-11
B. The Contractor may , If and Subcontractor refuses to
furnish a release or receipt In full , furnish a bond
satisfactory to the Owner, to indemnify him against
any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all
payments are made, the General Contractor shall refund
to the Owner ail monies that the latter may be compelled
to pay In discharging such a lien, including all costs
and reasonable attorney' s fee.
1 . 17: CONTRACTOR' S SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
A. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work
effectively and with his best skill and attention .
He shall be solely responsible for the means, methods,
techniques, . sequences and procedures of construction.
It shall be the Contractor' s responsibility to carefully
study and compare the Contract Documents and to check
and verify all figures shown thereon and all field
measurements.
B. The Contractor shall keep on 'the work at all times
during its progress a resident superintendent satisfactory
to the A/E. The superintendent shall not be replaced
without the consent of the A/E. No superintendent
) shall be assigned more than one Contract. The super-
intendent shall be the Contractor ' s representative
at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf
of the Contractor. Ail communications given to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to
the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
00100-12
SUBMIT IN
TRIPLICATE
SECTION 00310
BID FORM
FOR
PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING
ATLANTIC BEACH, FLORIDA
SUBMITTED BY: SUBMITTED: , 19__
The undersigned, as Bidder, Hereby declares that the only person
or persons interested in the proposal as .Principals is, or are,
named herein and that no other person that herein mentioned
has any interest in this proposal or in the contract to be entered
into; that this proposal is made without connection with any
other person , company , or parties making a bid or proposal ;
and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith, without
collusion or fraud.
The Bidder further declares that he has examined the site of
the work and informed himself fully in regard to. al I conditions
pertaining to the places where the work is to be done; that
he has examined the plans and specifications for the work and
contractural documents relative thereto, and has read all special
provisions furnished prior to the opening of bids, that he has
satisfied himself relative to the work to be performed.
The Bidder proposes and agrees, if this proposal is accepted,
to contract with The City of Atlantic Beach, Atlantic Beach,
Florida, in the form contract specified, to furnish ali
00390-1
necessary materials, equipment, . machinery tools, apparatus,
means of transportation and labor necessary to complete the
contract in full and complete accordance with the shown, noted,
described, and reasonably intended requirements of the plans
and specifications and contract documents to the full satisfaction
on the contract with The City of Atlantic Beach, Atlantic Beach,
Florida, with a definite understanding that no money wiil be
allowed for extra work except as set forth in the attached general
conditions and contract documents, as follows :
aAaE_a1Q�
All materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to
accomplish the work described in the Contract Documents for
The City of Atlantic Beach, dated March 9 , 1987 and addenda
dated below at the following lump sum price :
$
( Numerals)
( Written)
4LIE@NAIE_N.Q _1:
%Lump sum price, either deduct or add, beyond Base Bid to construct
Public Safety Building Pining on foundation - system described
in Earthwork and on Contract Drawings, Sheet S-1A.
ALTERNATE NO. 1 $
( Numerals )
( Written)
ALIEfNAIE_AQ _2:
Lump sum price beyond Base Bid to provide demolition of existing
fire station/police building ( shown on sheet SU of the drawings
with the exception of western most wing) including surrounding
existing pavement. ALL EXISTING TREES iN DEMOLITION AREA SHALL
BE PROTECTED BY FENCING AT DRIP LINE FOR THE DURATION OF THE
PROJECT.
ALTERNATE NO. 2( $
( Numerals)
( Written)
00310-2
ALIEBNAIE_NQL_ .:
Lump sum price beyond Base Bid to provide metal roof system
described in Section 07410 of the Specifications in lieu of
Asphalt Shingle roofing.
ALTERNATE NO. 3 $
( Numerals)
( Written)
ALIEBNAIE_NQ�_4:
Lump sum price beyond Base Bid to provide and install Kitchen
Appliances described in Section 11001 - Equipment.
ALTERNATE NO. 4: $
( Numerals)
( Written)
ALIEBNAIE_NQ :
Lump sum price beyond Base Bid to .provide ceramic tile full
height, ( in lieu of 48 " high wainscot as called for in Base
Bid ) in all rooms specified to receive ceramic tile.
ALTERNATE NO. 5. $
( Numerals)
( Written) •
ALIEBNAIE_NL__fz:
Lump sum price, either deduct or add, beyond Base Bid, to provide
wood lockers in Dorm Area, rooms 134' and 1341, as described
in Section 06200 , in lieu of acoustical metal lockers specified
in Section 10500.
ALTERNATE NO. 6 $
( Numerals)
( Written)
00340-3.
Addendum Receipt : Bidders shall acknowledge below the receipt
of all addenda, if any, to plans and specifications.
ADDENDUM NO. DATED
ADDENDUM NO. DATED
ADDENDUM NO. DATED
ADDENDUM NO. DATED
ADDENDUM NO. DATED
Addresses:
The full names, business addresses and business and emergency
telephone numbers of persons and firms interested in the foregoing
bid, as principals, are as follows:
( if Corporation, President, Secretary and Treasurer Identification. )
f
Signed By :
Title:
00300-4
APPENDIX_A
Proposed Superintendent:
List of Major Subcontractors and Shop Fabricators:
Di1ls.iQn_SURacal llama Addcala
- 1
END OF SECTION
00310-5
. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
AIA DOCUMENT G705
This certificate is issued as a matter of information only and confers no rights upon the addressee. It does not amend, extend
or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed below.
�• Name and Address of Insured
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
A
Covering (Project Name and Location) -Bid No. 8687-2,
Public Safety Building B
C
Addressee: r 1
(Owner) City of Atlantic Beach D
716 Ocean Boulevard
P. O. Box 25 E
L Atlantic Beach, Florida 32233 J F
This is to certify that the following described policies, subject to their terms, conditions and exclusions, have been issued to
the above named insured and are in force at this time.
TYPE OF INSURANCE CO. POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS OF LIABILITY IN THOUSANDS
CODE NUMBER DATE EACH \ AGGREGATE
OCCURRENCE
p .;te.;':� af{i. x`i�:,"u• ;,...4%.;...:.11.:�¢�^... .:--c v`*
1. (a) Workers'Compensation Statutory ,�,,.;„� 3�.Qo4 . ::.:.::.a,
.,,;.•...{,.•a:�r ::::........:::.. ..1,., $ 1 nn,nnn+ Each Accident
(b) Employer's Liability �;f_::;:;::.`..;`.::^c`.s:`::;:?c`•:�e:�;��::.:
2. Comprehensive General
Liability including: Bodily Injury $ 300,000 $ 500,000
)(jt Premises-Operations
);:it Independent Contractors Property Damage $ 300,000 $ 500,000
a Products and Completed
Operations
)(t Broad Form Property Bodily Injury $ 500,000 $ 500,000
Damage and Property •
Contractual Liability Damage Combined •
a Explosion and Collapse
( Hazard
a Underground Hazard 'Applies to Products and Completed $ 500,OOQ
XX Personal Injury with Operations Hazard (Personal
;Employment Exclusion Injury)
` Deleted
3. Comprehensive Automobile Bodily Injury $ 100 ' ?'''
000 * '7:A7: '�'
,
Liability (Each Person) ~�
xx Owned Bodily Injury $ 300,000 ;:-.
s:oit : ;ri :::; :
fl Hired (Each Accident) s`. :0'•'•`%=^'r;""
X (Non-Owned Property Damage $ 100 000 f ::05s�•' •.'� �•v�f~:
Bodily Injury $ •i: . ':•:
XXXXXX �ti :s
and Property J- •J•Yr •:
Damage Combined -.*•:••0.•:-:.,:;,-;.-:::::::::•' 's
4. Excess Liability Bodily Injury $ $
❑ Umbrella Form and Property
❑ Other than Umbrella Damage Combined
5. Other(Specify)
ATLANTIC BEACH IS NAMED AS ADDITION4L INSUPED COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY
1. Products and Completed Operations coverage will be maintained for a minimum period of M(1 ❑ 2 year(s) after final
payment.
2. Has each of the above listed policies been endorsed to reflect the company's obligation to notify the addressee in the event
of cancellation or non-renewal? gk Yes ❑ No
CERTIFICATION
I hereby certify that I am an authorized representative of each of the insurance companies listed above, and that the cover-
ages afforded under the policies listed above will not be cancelled or allowed to expire unless thirty (30) days written notice
has been given to the addressee of this certificate.
•
Name of Issuing Agency Signature of Authorized Representative
Address Date of Issue
AIA DOCUMENT 6785 • CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE • NOVEMBER 1978 EDITION • MA. • m 1978
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 G705-1978
SECTION 00500
FORM OF AGREEMENT
The Form of Agreement Standard for A101a, June 1977 Edition
published by American Institute of Architects, is hereby made
a part of these documents.
END OF SECTION
00500-1
SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, "
Standard for A201 , 13th Edition, August 1976, consisting of
14 articles published by American institute of Architects, is
hereby made a part of these documents and shall apply to the
work of all trades.
END OF SECTION
00700-1
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
ARID LE_L_=_I1ME_EQR_EIlMPLEIIIl11
1 . 1 : The Contractor shall have reached substantial completion
for all work not later than 210 calendar days after receipt
of Notice to Proceed, at which time the new facility shall be
ready for beneficial occupancy . Final completion, including
ALL punch list items and site work shall be completed no later
than 240 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed.
ARIIDLE_2_=_PREMI UMS._A11I_LIQUILAIEQ_LIAMAaEa
2. 1 For each calendar day that any part of the Work remains
unfinished after the expiration of the Contract Time, the sum
per day of $250 .00 shall be deducted from any monies due the
Contractor, "or if no money is due the Contractor , the Owner
shall have the right to recover said sum or sums from the Contractor,
from the Surety, , or from both.
F . 1 . 1 The amount of these deductions is to cover liquidated
damages to the Owner incurred by additional and other expenses
due to the failure of the Contractor to complete the work or
any part of the work within the time specified, and such deductions
are not to be considered as penalties.
ARIlELE_ _=_REWILAIl1RY_REQUI REMENIS
30 Work within Public Property : No work shall be performed
within public property until Contractor has secured from control l ing
government agency written permission and/or permits and where
required furnished bond or guarantee for the accomplishment
of such.
34.2 Notice of Commencement : No work shall be commenced or
materials ordered until Notice of Commencement has been recorded
in accord with Chapter 713k Liens, Generally, Part 1 Mechanic' s
Lien Law, Florida Statute in effect on date of the contract .
Contractor shall either record such or ascertain that such has
been recorded.
3.31 Government Regulations and Requirements: Contractor shall
inform himself of and comply with ail the government regulations
and requirements affecting accomplishment of the work.
END OF SECTION
00800-1
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
EARI_1___aERERAL
1 .01 LOCATION OF WORK : The project site is approximately 1
acre and is bounded to the north by Plaza Road and to the
east by Seminole Road .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. Provide all labor , materials , tools , equipment and
supervision necessary to complete the Work according
to, or reasonably implied , from the Contract Documents .
B. Generally , the parts of the Work include , but are
not necessarily limited to:
1 . Site clearing and grubbing , site preparation
and rough grading, final grading, drainage, utilities,
fencing and paving .
2. Construction of a Public Safety Building of approxi -
mately 7 ,400 square feet and all associated mechanical
and electrical work .
END OF SECTION
01010-1
SECTION 01040 .
COORDINATION
EARI_i_=_aEftERAL
1 .01 GENERAL CONDITIONS :
A. Coordinate the Work of all trades so that each will
have sufficient space and time wirthin which to work
properly and efficiently . Coordinate the Work so
that there shall be NO interruption in service ( either
by access , utility service, or any other interruption )
of the existing Public Safety Building . Schedule
Work in such a manner that interruption of service
and demolition shall take place only after Beneficial
Occupancy of New Faci I ity .
B. The Contractor shall review , approve and submit with
reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause
no delay in his Work or the Work of subcontractors,
( all submittals required by the Contract Documents.
C. The Contractor shall provide for the coordination
of his Work with the required Work of public agencies
and utilities which includes but is not limited to:
1 . The requirements of Temporary Facilities specified.
2 . Public services.
D. Changes in the intended design of the project as a
result of improperly coordinated construction Work
will not be tolerated . Delays in the Work caused
by rejections of installed materials due to improper
coordination , and as otherwise specified , will not
be considered valid justification for extensions of
Contract Time if such are requested by the Contractor .
1 .02 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING :
A. Coordinate the installation of the HVAC system as
required to provide a fully operational system prior
to the installation of architectural woodwork, interior
wood doors , resilient flooring and paint materials
01040-1
4
B. The operational system shall be able to maintain temper-
ature and humidity conditions equal or similar to
those intended by design to be actual conditions after
completion of the Work.
1 .03 ELECTRICAL :
A. Coordinate the installation of lighting, as required
to provide equal or similar lighting to levels intended
by design to actual conditions after completion of
the Work, prior to the installation of resilient flooring
and paint materials.
END OF SECTION
C
END OF SECTION
01040-2
SECTION 01060
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
eeRZ_i_=_aERRRAL
1 .01 SPECIFIED CODES :
A. The design of the Work is based on the requirements
of the latest edition of the Southern Standard Building
Code , Factory Mutual requirements and National Fire
Protection Association requirements , whichever is
most stringent.
B. The site work is based on the latest edition of the
Florida Department of Transportation, Standard Specifi-
cations for Road and Bridge Cosntruction, hereinafter
referred to as Florida D. O. T. Specifications or D. O. T.
Specs .
C. The Contractor shall ensure the Work complies to the
aforementioned codes and regulations as they apply
to the project whether or not specifically referenced
elsewhere.
1 .02 REFERENCE STANDARDS :
A . Except as otherwise required by Paragraph 1 . 02 all
products and workmanship shall conform to best quality
materials and practices recognized by agencies, associ -
ations, councils, etc . , specified in individual sections.
B. In the absence of specified agencies , associations,
councils , etc . , the Contractor shall conform to the
requirements of the most widely recognized standards
for each particular portion of the Work .
END OF SECTION
01060-1
SECTION 01070
ABBREVIATIONS
EAez_i___aERERAL
1 .01 ABBREVIATIONS :
A. References to technical societies, institutions, asso-
ciations , or governmental authorities are made in
accordance with the following abbreviations :
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
C APA American Plywood Association
ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Socity of Heating , Refrigerating,
and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
FM Factory Mutual System
Fed . Spec. or
FS Federal Specifications
iES Illuminating Engineering Society
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
SDi Steel Deck Institute or Steel Door Institute
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors /
National Association
TCA Tile Council of America , Inc.
( UL Underwriters / Laboratories, Inc.
END OF SECTION
01070-1
SECTION 01340.
SUBMITTALS
EARI_l-__EEIYERAL
1 .01 TYPES OF SUBMITTALS:
A. Construction Schedules : The Contractor shall prepare
and submit to the Owner and A/E within two weeks of
the "Notice to Proceed" a construction schedule showing
the proposed dates for starting and completing each
of the various branches of work . The schedule shall
be in the form of a bar graph with a representation
of the schedule of costs by months.
B. Manufacturer' s data shall include all standard published
information describing products , systems , methods
and performance . Include manufacturer ' s name and
address , and associations with which manufacturer
of his products comply.
C. Shop drawings and schedules shall include items, products,
materials, methods, anchorages, details, or any other
information required to fabricate items of the Work
and complete the installation which is not specifically
stated or described on manufacturer ' s data . Shop
drawings shall specifically address the Work of this
project.
D. Installation instructions shall include all information
required from a manufacturer or fabricator to have
his product installed . This may be included as a
shop drawing if such are required .
E. Warranties and Guarantees required by the Contract
Documents shall begin on the official date of substantial
completion of the project or any portion thereof ,
into which the warranteed or guaranteed item was installed,
constructed, or otherwise made operational . All warranties
and guarantees shall be in effect for a minimum of
one year unless specified for a longer period. Include
all specific items covered, company names and addresses,
and names of persons authorized to warrant or guarantee
item(s ) if not a blanket coverage .
01340-1
F. Certifications and test reports of products, materials,
and performance for compliance with specified requirements
shall specifically address the Work and shall contain
the name or signature and address of persons authorized
to make such certifications.
G. Evidence of compliance to instructions shall be copies
of transmittal letters or letter of verification duly
signed by authorized persons.
H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include all
Literature requried to properly operate and maintain
any equipment installed in the Work and shall include
names and addresses of manufacturers and authorized
service and/or parts representatives , and dealers
and shall be delivered on or before date of beneficial
occupancy . Complete requirements of Operation and
Maintenance Manuals are specified in Section 01700.
I . Samples required shall be as specified and shall include
identifications of the specific item and specification
section to which the sample applies.
1 .02 COPIES OF SUBMITTALS:
A. The minimum number of copies of submittals shall be
submitted as fol lows and does n J include numbers
of copies required by the Contractor for his distribution
or purposes.
1 . Manufacturer ' s data : 4
2 . Shop drawings and schedules : 4
3 . Installation instructions: 4
4 . Warrantees and Guarantees: 4
5 . Certifications and test reports : 4
6 . Evidences : 4
7 . Operation and Maintenance Manuals : 3
8 . Samples : 3
9 . Progress Schedule: 3
10 . Pay Requests : 3
01340-2
B. Any copies submitted in addition to those required
w i l l be processed and returned to the Contractor .
Additional copies may be in the form of a reproducible
copy .
C. Submittals received by the A/E with less than the
specified number of copies included will be immediately
returned to the Contractor not reviewed and without
action.
D. As soon as practicable after the date of execution
of the Owner/Contractor Agreement and within 60 days,
the Contractor will make all required submittals.
1 .03' REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS:
A. All submittals required by the Contract Documents
shall be sent to the A/E.
B. Copies of submittals to be returned for the Contractor' s
use wilI be processed and mailed to the Contractor
within 14 days of receipt of each submittal by the
A/E .
( C. Review of submittal s is only for conformance with
the design concept of the project or Work and does
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any
deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents
nor from responsibilty for errors and omissions in
the submittals.
D. Submittals received without the Contractor ' s signed
" Checked and Approved " stamp on each copy will be
returned without action and noted as such or "RWA".
E. Any submittals or portions thereof not properly identified
as to functions or specific items on the drawings
and appliicable specification section number will be
returned without action and noted as such or "RWA" .
F. Any submittals or portions thereof which are processed
and returned to the Contractor will be marked "Approved",
"Approved as Noted " , "Revise and Resubmit" , . or "Not
Approved" .
G. Subm i tta l s which refer to information or data not
included in the submittal ( excluding the Contract
Documents ) will not be checked .
01340-3
1 .04 WRITTEN DOCUMENTS :
A. All written documents including letters, letters of
transmittal and request, generated by the Contractor
shall be on standard letter or legal size
paper and include Contractor name, the Owner' s project
number, , A/E project number, date and must be signed
by authorized personnel .
B. Letters of transmittal whether written or of standard
form , shall also clearly identify each part of the
submittal with specification section number and indicate
the number of copies of each part. Letter requesting
substitutions shall contain the same information .
C. All submittals for approval shall be individually
numbered by the Contractor in sequence of order of
submission . Resubmittal of revised submittals shall
bear the same numbers and be clearly marked Resubmittal
No.
1 .05 ON-SITE RECORDS :
( A. Contractor shall have at least one set of complete,
approved submittals and shop drawings on the Job site
at all times when such work is in progress.
( END OF SECTION
01340-4
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
eeez_i_=_aEMEeeL:
1 . 1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included : Provide 4 copies of a detailed breakdown
of the agreed Contract Sum showing values allocated
to each of the various parts of the Work , as specified
herein and in other provisions of the Contract Documents.
1 . 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Use required means to assure arithmetical accuracy
of the sums described .
B. When so required by the Architect , provide copies
of the subcontracts or other data acceptable to the
Architect, substantiating the sums described .
( 1 .3 SUBMITTALS :
A. Prior to first application for payment, submit a proposed
schedule of values to the Architect.
1 . Meet with the Architect and determine additional
data , if any , required to be submitted .
2 . Secure the Architect ' s approval of the schedule
of values prior to submitting first application
for payment.
END OF SECTION
01370-1
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
EARI_1___aEIYERAL
1 , 01 The following criteria shall govern the furnishing of and
paying for temporary construction and service items . Such items
shall be instituted at the beginning and maintained for the
Hife of the Work or until removal or termination is approved
by the A/E.
1 .02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES :
A. Temporary Field Office
1 . The Contractor shall furnish , equip, and maintain
on or near the jobsite a temporary field office.
The location of the field office shall be as
approved by the A/E.
2 . The office shall be weathertight, with adequate
ventilation , heating and cooling equipped with
working telephone, adequate lighting for reading
blueprints, a chart table suitable for 24- inch
by 36- inch drawings . All utility services shall
be provided at the Contractor ' s expense . In
addition , there shall be provided satisfactory
drinking water and toilet facilities near the
field office. Said facilities shall be supplied ,
maintained in good working condition, and otherwise
serviced by the Contractor , at no additional
contract cost. The off ice shal I remain the property
of the Contractor, and shall be removed by him
upon completion of the work.
3‘ A complete first aid kit, suitable for a project
of this size, shal I be kept in this facility
and fully maintained for duration of this project.
B. Drinking Water : Provide cool water with dispensing
utilities.
C. Construction Water : The Contractor shall provide
temporary water for construction.
01500-1
D. Toilet Facilities: Contractor shall provide temporary
toilet facilities and be responsible for cleaning
of facilities at the end of each work day . Facilities
shall comply with governing Board of Health Regulations.
Existing Owner ' s facilities or newly constructed Owner' s
facilities shall not be used by the Contractor' s employees
or sub-contracted employees.
E. Electric Power : Contractor shall provide temporary
service from the local power company and shall furnish
temporary wiring and outlets of sufficient size and
capacity as required for power tools and temporary
lighting at all necessary points within the building.
All wiring , . switches , and breakers shall meet the
requirements of the National Electric Code, and shall
be subject to inspection . Electric energy consumed
during the period of construction will be paid for
by the Contractor . It shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor to have the electrical system on
the Project in a state of completion sufficient for
connection to permanent electric service by the time
electricity is required for performing the testing
and operation of mechanical equipment.
F. Lighting : Provide construction lighting as necessary
or required for safety and performance of specific
work tasks.
G. Fire Protection : To include fire extinguishers, fire
hoses and other equipment as necessary for adequate
protection during construction. Specifically , fire
extinguishers are required at the immediate site location
of any welding , brazing or other "hot—work" and at
or near all operating machinery powered by diesel
fuel or gasoline.
H. Pumping and Drainage : Temporary ditches, piping drain
line , sumps , pumps , or other approved method shall
be used to prevent accumulation of surface or subsurfaces
water or other liquids in any excavations or flooring
surfaces to protect all work and to afford satisfactory
working conditions.
I . All volatile, flammable liquids shall be stored only
in approved , rated containers, but not inside any
new building or structure.
01500-2
1 .03I SECURITY:
A. General : Contractor shall provide security, as necessary
or required, to protect work and property at all times.
B. Rodents and Other Pests : Contractor through debris
removal , etc . , shall control the creation of rodent
or pest problem . Should such develop, Contractor
shall secure services of exterminator to control .
C. Debris Control : Keep premises clean and free from
accumulation of debris and rubbish . Provide trash
and debris receptacles and require use. Remove from
site at least weekly.
D. Cleaning : As work is completed by trades, areas of
work shall be broom cleaned and in some instances,
wet or dry mopped if required in preparation for next
trade, inspections or general safety of property and
person . Broom cleaning will not be permitted in areas
being painted. Refer to individual Sections of Specif-
ications Manual for additional cleaning requirements.
E. Project Safety : Contractor shall comply with all
applicable governmental and insuring company requirements
relative to construction and project safety . Either
the superintendent or another company representative
on the site during all working hours, shall be trained
in project safety and designated as Contractor ' s safety
director.
END OF SECTION
01500-3
SECTION 01530
BARRIERS
PART_1_ - GENERAL
1 :01 CONSTRUCTION FENCING :
A. The Contractor shall erect and maintain a fence 67
in height, minimum, around areas of building construction
and around trees indicated to be protected. Enclosed
areas shall be as small as practical while providing
sufficient working space for laborers and equipment.
Fence may be removed when building construction can
be protected by locked doors and windows.
B. The exact location of the fencing shall be finally
determined at the pre-construction conference.
1 .02 OTHER BARRIERS :
A. Barricades: The Contractor shall sufficiently barricade
all open holes, trenches , ditches, etc . , which may,
because of size, depth or location , cause injury to
any person wjthin the areas of construction.
B. Barricades shall have visual warning devices in areas
of vehicular traffic.
C. Barricades, fences or other barriers shall be installed
around all areas of construction not otherwise specified
herein if there is a possibility of personal injury .
D. Barricades shall be constructed around existing items
to protect them during construction.
END OF SECTION
01530-1
SECTION 01570
TRAFFIC REGULATIONS
PARI_1_-_GENERAL
1 :01 DESCRIPTION : The Work to be performed under this section
shall include furnishing of all materials and labor necessary
to regulate vehicular and pedestrian traffic in accordance with
the requirements set forth as shown on the drawings.
1 .02 APPLICABLE CODES , STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Work
under this Contract shall be in strict accordance wjth the following
codes and standards.
A. Local , county and municipal codes.
B. Florida Department of Transportation Specifications
( D. O. T. ) .
PART. 2 - PRO U IL ( Not Applicable)
PARI_L!-_EXEQUI14R
3 .01 TRAFFIC AND VEHICULAR ACCESS :
A. Emergency Vehicles : Public Safety Building shall
not be without access for emergency vehicles for any
period.
B. Major Roads and Streets : No major roads or streets
shall be blocked to traffic without adequate detour
facilities for a period of more than 30 minutes or
as directed by the governing authority ; should blocking
of traffic be required, Owner shall be notified in
writing 48' hours in advance.
C. Properties : Access to site shall not be blocked for
a period of more than 30 minutes ; Owner shall be notified
of said blockage 48 hours in advance .
3402 CONSTRUCTION IN RIGHT- OF-WAY : Construction on or near
traffic lanes or streets shall be made in full compliance with
all requirements of the State of Florida Manual on Traffic Control
01570-1
and Safe Practices for Street and Highway Construction . All
necessary barricades, detours, lights and other protective measures
shall be provided for the protection of both pedestrian and
vehicular traffic.
3c03 ( PARKING :
A. The Contractor will be advised at the pre-construction
conference, by the Owner, . of designated areas in which
Contractor ' s personnel will be allowed to park personal
vehicles during the period of time of the Construction
Contract . The Contractor will also be informed of
designated areas for storing construction equipment
and materials.
END OF SECTION
01 57 0-2
SECTION 01580
PROJECT SIGN
EARI_1___QERERAL
1 .01 SIGN :
A. The Contractor will erect and maintain during the
life of the project , a project identification sign
listing the project name, Owner, A/E, General Contractor
and major subcontractors .
EARI_2___ERQp!lCIa
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Sign shall be constructed of materials suitable for
the purpose and life intended and painted with suitable
exterior paint in the colors as indicated.
B. Paint identifications sign of the colors , size and
layout indicated on attached sheet.
EARI 3 - EXECL.IlQN
3 . 01 ERECTION :
A. Locate sign as directed by Owner.
B. Erect sign , freestanding , in an acceptable manner
on 4 x 4 posts designed to withstand wind loads encountered
at the site.
END OF SECTION
01580-1
4
■ 2"
e
•
6" 6" 5" 12" ' 5" 4" 4"
I I 1
..
r ....Th
cn
x
H x, W
f�-1 aWCa � H
a �+ - aaW W W
QH H V r-a Q H .•.7
U U H > x
¢ z xwwxac' C
H V / 1 z
O � U
Th1.7:: wttN 4-0(f)
Q
a
w
J m Z z
W
Q
U
>- = Z a) c
I— ~ Q W -- c
Wcr J W c 0 co
LL O f- 0 w
z < a
c4 W
W LL o
H z
H
20 .
i
o J o
V C.7
d M
m
v
\4,4140,
EXACT LAYOUT MUST BE APPROVED BY A/E
PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
01580-2
SECTION 01670
HVAC TEST-ADJUST-BALANCE
EARI_1___aE1ERLL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. The extent of test- adjust-balance work is defined
to include , but is not necessarily limited to, air
distribution systems, air exhaust systems, and associated
equipment and apparatus of HVAC work. The work consists
of setting speed and volume ( flow) adjusting facilities
provided for the systems, recording data, conducting
tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending
modifications to the Work as required by the Contract
Documents.
B. The component types requiring testing, adjusting and
balancing includes the following as applied to HVAC
equipment :
1 . Fans
2 . Air Handling Units
3 . Ductwork Systems
4 . Pumps
5 . Coils
6 . Piping Systems
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Tester :
1 . The Contractor shall obtain the services of an
independent test and balance agency that specializes
in and whose business is limited to the testing
and balancing of air conditioning systems. The
agency selected shall be fully certified by the
01670-1
Associated Air Balance Council and shall have
at least one menber of the agency qualified as
a certified test and balance engineer that has
been issued this certification by the National
Examining Board - United States and Canada .
All final reports shall be signed by this certified
test and balance engineer and shall include his
official stamp .
2 . AABC Compliance : Comply with AABC's Pub. No. 12173,
"National Standards for Field Measurements and
Instrumentation, Total System Balance, " as applicable
to HVAC air and hydronic distribution system
and associated equipment and apparatus.
3 . industry Standards : Comply with ASHRAE (American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers , Inc . ) recommendations pertaining to
measurements , instruments and testing, adjusting
and balancing, except as otherwise indicated .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit certified test report signed by the Test and
Balance Supervisor who performed the work . Include
identification and types of instruments used and their
most recent calibration date with submission of final
test report.
1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Do not proceed with testing , adjusting and balancing
work until the work has been completed and is operable.
Verify that there is no latent residual work still
to be completed .
2LRI_Z_=_PRQQ!LQI�
2 .01 PATCHING MATERIALS:
A. Except as otherwise indicated , use same products as
used by original Installer for patching holes in insula-
tion , ductwork and housing which have been cut or
drilled for test purposes , including access for test
Instruments , attaching jigs , and similar purposes .
At Contractor ' s option , plastic plugs with retainers
may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and
housing .
01670-2
B. Test Instruments : Utilize test instruments and equipment
for the work required , of the type , precision and
capacity as recommended in the AABC' s National Standard
for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total
Balance System.
EARI_L___EXEQUIIQN
3 .01 INSPECTION :
A. Examine the installed work and conditions under which
testing is to be done to ensure that work has been
completed , cleaned and is operable. Conditions detrimental
to the proper completion of the test-adjust-balance
work must be documented . Do not proceed with the
work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected .
B. Test , adjust and balance the environmental systems
and components , as indicated , in accordance with the
procedures outlined in the applicable standards .
( C. Test , adjust and balance the system during the summer
for air conditioning systems and during the winter
for heating systems , including at least a period of
operation at outside conditions within 50F wet bulb
temperature of minimum winter design condition. When
seasonal operation does not permit measuring the final
temperatures then take the final temperature readings
when the seasonal operation does permit.
D. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation
calibration reports , in format recommended by the
applicable standards .
E. Patch holes in insulation , ductwork and housings ,
which have been cut or drilled for test purposes.
F. Mark equipment settings , including damper control
positions , valve indicators, fan speed control levers,
and similar controls and devices, to show final settings
at completion of work . Provide markings with paint
or other suitable permanent identification materials.
END OF SECTION
01670-3
SECTION 017Q0
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
EARI_t_=_aERERAE
1 .01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Summary of Work : The Contractor shall remove all
stains, spots, marks and dirt from all finished surfaces
caused by this Work . All items shall be cleaned in
accordance with the manufacturer ' s written instructions.
B. Inspection Certificates, Bonds and Guarantees: Upon
completion of project , and prior to submission of
certificate for f i na l payment, Contractor shall have
had electrical , plumbing and other work, as applicable,
inspected by proper authorities as required by the
specifications and all applicable codes, laws and
ordinances. Before final payment will be made, Contractor
shall submit copies of all bonds and guarantees as
required.
C. Record drawings : Construction Record Drawings shall
be furnished to the A/E prior to final inspection .
This includes the Contractor ' s construction set of
drawings marked with red pencil to indicate construction
changes . Final inspection will not be scheduled ,
nor any final payment made to the Contractor, until
these drawings are complete and checked for accuracy
during the final inspection . Incompletely marked
drawings , or failure to submit marked drawings at
or prior to final inspection , shall be grounds for
non- acceptance of the work by the Owner until such
drawings are accurately completed and confirmed.
D. Operating Manuais Data : Operation and Maintenance
Manuals shallibe submitted to Architect/Engineer prior
to Final Inspection.
1 . The Contractor shall furnish to the A/E required
copies of all maintenance manuals, instruction
books , parts lists, and installation drawings
bound in ringed binders for all items furnished
under this contract. It shall be the Contractor ' s
responsibility to satisfy the Owner' s requirements
regarding such data. Manuals, parts lists, etc. shall
017Q0-1
be presented to Owner at time of final inspection
unless specifically requested earlier. All submittals
sh a l I be in a binder and neatly indexed and tabbed.
2L Binder : The manuals shall be in 9- inch by 12- inch
three- ring binders of a size to facilitate easy
turning of the pages. The binders shall have
a full size transparent built- in plastic pocket
on the front to accomodate a label showing the
name and location of the project, date of completion,
architect name and contractor ' s name, address
and phone number. On the binding edge the binders
shal I have a clip- on metal frame or built- in
plastic pocket to accomodate a label showing
the name and location of the project and the
date of completion.
3 . Index : The Contractor shall furnish a neatly
typed index in alphanumerical order. Each major
division shall list the equipment in alphanumerical
order. Listed under each of these major divisions
shall be all items specified on the drawings
as furnished with major items listed . These
secondary items shall also be listed in alphanumerical
order . To the right of each of these equipment
designations shall be the tab number under which
the information can be found .
4. Tabs : Behind the index, . provide numbered tabs
beginning with one thru the number required for
each type of equipment . Behind the tab, insert
a l t shop drawings , shop-cuts , parts manuals,
installation manuals and operation manuals associated
w i t h each i t e m furnished . O n l y one tab w i l l
be required for each different material provided.
The index designation shall refer to the tab
number behind which the information on the equipment
can be found .
F. Final Inspection :
1 . Final inspection will be held upon completion
of the project . The Contractor shall notify
the Owner, upon completion, to arrange an inspection
tour of the completed project.
2 . The Contractor , and the Owner ' s representative
shall be present for the inspection.
01700-2
G. Release of Lien Statement: The Contractor shall submit
with his request for final payment sworn statements
on the Owner' s form from himself and each subcontractor,
Material or Labor Supplier who has filed a "Notice
to Owner " that all work has been completed and that
all bills for labor , materials and subcontractor ' s
work on the project have been paid for in full .
END OF SECTION
01700-3
SECTION 02010
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
The Owner has , for his own use , made borings at or near
the site of the Work . Any boring data shown in the Contract
Documents Drawings is presented only as information which indicates
certain conditions found and limited to the exact locations
and on the dates indicated . Any interpretations or conclusions
drawn by the Contractor from such data shall be his own and
the Owner makes no representation or guarantee concerning the
accuracy or completeness of such data . The contractor shall
be responsible for making his own determination of water-table
variations prior to bidding and shall not assume that any water
levels shown by the aforesaid boring data will necessarily be
found or maintained at the level indicated .
02010-1
E TELEPHONE 641-2311
AREA CODE 904
Jacksonville Engineering Order No. 86-304
& Testing Co. August 5, 1986
3110 Desalvo Road, Jacksonville, Florida 32216
Gee & Jenson
Engineers, Architects
101 Century 21 Drive - Suite 215
Jacksonville, Florida 32216
Soils Foundation Investigation
City of Atlantic Beach
Public Safety Building
Atlantic Beach, Florida
Gentlemen:
This report contains the results of a subsoil investigation made at the
subject site. The scope of the investigation includes the drilling of soil
test borings and an analysis to evaluate foundation conditions.
SOIL BORINGS
Three 40-foot Soil Test Borings and two 5-foot Auger Borings were made at
locations shown on the attached plan. In the Soil Test Borings, in accordance
with ASTM Specification D1586-67, Standard Penetration Tests were made in each
soil stratum and at intervals of depths of not more than 5.0 feet apart. Samples
of the subsoils were obtained by means of driving a 1 1/2 inch split spoon
sampler into undisturbed soil by means of a 140 pound drop weight hammer freely
falling 30 inches. The penetration resistance was determined by the number of
blows required to drive the sampler one foot into the soil. The penetration
resistance appears on the enclosed boring logs.
Recovered soil samples were visually classified in the field and sealed
in glass jars. Unless otherwise requested, these samples will be retained
in the laboratory for a period of six months.
02010-2
WORKING WITH INDUSTRY TO IMPROVE STANDARDS OF QUALITY
E - TELEPHONE 641-2311
AREA CODE 904
T
Jacksonville Engineering Order No. 86-304
(
■ & Testing Co. Page No. Two
3110 Desalvo Road, Jacksonville, Florida 32216
SOIL CONDITIONS
Fill was encountered from existing grade to depths of 6.0 to 8.5 feet which
consisted of sand, wood, roots, metal, glass, rocks and organic material.
Beneath this, firm to very dense fine sands were then encountered to depths
of 16.5 to 17.5 feet, underlain by loose to firm fine sand containing some silt
to 26.5 feet. Firm to loose silty sand and clayey sands with pockets of soft
sandy clay were then found to the final boring depth of 40 feet. At the time
the borings were made the ground water level was 3.0 to 4.0 feet below existing
grade. This level will fluctuate as to variations in rainfall and runoff.
Detailed logs of the borings are attached. Terms.used on the logs to describe
the density of the sands and the consistency of the clays are defined below:
Sands
Term Approx. % Max. Density
Loose Less than 90
Firm 90 - 94
Dense 94 - 98
Very Dense Over 98
* As determined by ASTM Specification D-1557 or AASHTO T-180.
Figure 1 is a chart relating penetration resistance, overburden pressure
and density. The chart is applicable only to poorly graded sands having
subrounded to subangular grains and little or no fines. Better graded or more
angular sands would have higher blow counts at any given percent of maximum density.
02010-3
WORKING WITH INDUSTRY TO IMPROVE STANDARDS OF QUALITY
E TELEPHONE 641-2311
AREA CODE 904
TJacksonville Engineering Order No. 86-304
r & Testing Co. Page No. Three
3110 Desalvo Road, Jacksonville, Florida 32216
SOIL CONDITIONS (CONTINUED)
Clays
Term Approx. Shearing Strength (T/sf) **
Very Soft Less than 0.15
Soft .15 - .30
Medium .30 - .60
Stiff .60 - 1.20
Very. Stiff 1.20 - 2.25
Hard Over 2.25
** Taken from the penetration resistance.
EARTHWORK •
The existing trash fill, 6.0 to 8.5 feet thick, should be excavated beneath
and to a distance of 1.0 feet outside the exterior wall of the proposed building.
The excavations should then be backfilled in layers with clean sand and compacted
to at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM Specification
D-1557. Some dewatering will be required during stripping and filling of the
site. Backfill of utility trenches and other excavations in the building and
pavement areas should also be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density.
In lieu of stripping all the trash beneath the pavements, consideration
may be given to stripping only 4.0 feet with the knowledge that some leveling
courses may be required in the future.
02010-4
WORKING WITH INDUSTRY TO IMPROVE STANDARDS OF QUALITY
IETI TELEPHONE 641-2311
A REA
T Jacksonville Engineering Order No. 86-304 CODE 904
& Testing Co. :Page No. Four
3110 Desalvo Road. Jacksonville. Florida 32216 •
• FOUNDATION ANALYSIS
The following recommendations were evaluated from the penetration
resistance (blows per foot) of the split spoon sampler which is an indication
of the strength of the subsoils tested in the borings.
For conditions as outlined in the Earthwork Section, an allowable soil
• pressure of 2500 pounds per square foot is recommended for footings placed
at least 1.5 feet below the lowest adjacent finished grade. At that loading
there will be no danger of bearing-capacity failure and settlement should be
well within tolerable limits.
Very truly yours,
JACKSONVILLE ENGINEERING & TESTING CO. , .INC.
,e4,4_4,t, at/24.11.44
Robert J. Atkinson, Jr. Paul H. Shea, P. E.
Soils Engineer Vice-President
•
02010-5
VWOHKINC WI1 H INI)1J:;1 HY 10 IMI'HOVl `;1/0\11)A141)!; O1 011Al 11 1'
.,.:
. i_i_a_. ' I _ i NOM NMI
1 , . .
a. ---;-■T-t-t- - .
. • •---------:-1-t-
-1-' :
o „ .
• . , - i ; 1 • , , ,
-ri-i-ri-i- , !
rd v
( (.) (1) 1 ■ , ! 4 ! . 4
...•_-•_• • ••• •-• .---, ---- • -•- - • --- -, t ' tttt , t ' i
0 0 .4-, . _ . . . . . .
EA .1..) IA t.4) ' • - " - _ -- Min
H 4 c . .
tl >, •H
r 4 (11 al
. . .
. . . . --- I . , I ,
- — .
I • 1- --t--1- 1 I
0 0 01, 01 • • ■ - --•-•••-•-- ;-----; .
c - •
_. ._
• - - •
U . _ • _ .
4 - 4-i--
•r-I t.i) C •
--•-- - - - - - • • -7 • . , ,
• L1
TTT1< W M - • • — I-_, '
. . . - .
.. _, • •---- - ----- ------ , . : : , ' - , : 1 r
, , I
. . . . — . : •
111.
-- ::-. --"----•-• -- — - , . -•---"-
....._---_--____—_ _--__ - • ' ..- — -- ' ' ' ' I I
. - , . . — - -- • - . . —,---• I
---r- • ' - . 1 • 1 1
• , - - •-•.-- ' •--.. : i . ,
.- - . -IA-__-:-...i--, • ' I
. .
L:- -,-• - --
„ 1 , 1 I • 1
' ' ' ' ' !CI ! ' ! 1 • !Afil
0 • ' • , • ill 1 , 1
• • - -.- . ■
. . . - ' r-'-">1-71 ' ..4•••
! I ' 1.411•11••
. -- • _ , . .
_ _____ _ . • • : - • • • ' '
' .41111. "
ium. _
44111311111111111111111M1
- - . 41111•••111M•11
. • lir ' !--1-:- ' - ==I '''l
_
- _ . _ -0
, . -. % _ —_,_-_. • ' ' 11 ' ' • 11 43
( 4--;--------- •
r4
. •-- .
_-:„....,-
, , .„,, • ' ...,... • 1 1 , .
_;_,___ • _ :. _ . . . : -__. 4_ -:_ ' • _ __1__;_' . ■ a.,
1 :_• •__:______;__. - Ell•Iiiiminfilja
- __1•_ .'_:- _.'_.... -40.r) ,' ' ' , . . . _._ __, • _, 4;.• L
_ __ _ - , H e
1111111
_t_u_i -.. _ i . . __:_l_ . __..... ._ , ._ _1 ..,5,_?? . i • ._ . __. , - i .! ! . , , I i amsimumm•P-
, „
---..--:____-6:4_,_- , ,- - — , • - • - , ' — , . -, r ' t -..-- --- 7-* r7--,-.• , INITIWP "-
' i-7`-1:-• 77---'-- ' -, -; ' ' ' ' "--- 7 - 7—7-1--r i r---'--1----'-1-7—'-'--- -Ti-h-• : 1 ! , pp- - ......
L :h. .1-.-:"--__.: , i -~,-__: :__: .----7-: 1-",--; t i-= • FT_i_. ' ' -i--ri ' : ' ii
spligummum
t-s-i_:_c; I • • - -- --, . , , . , . i • : 1 ';-,iairs•••••Immurs
, - •-•-• • :-• . 7 I .----• • -I-- •-• -.--.-. , . , : : _l_.__
_ ' __,___' _4--- • ' 1 1 ___ INEE' .....IMMIEMI
11111 1_I VI I I II t "L_t 1 • I - ---'-il -,-1----:--, 7-t7-- i j I ' I ! ' 1-,_;___,' ' : Ill■r4=amEn•••••••••••
-—7-- --. • 1--'-- • ' ',-- i , ,' ' 41.i).%••••••••••••••••••••111 •
• ' _._I.' 1_.4\1".. • ' • • P_'''' ; l_t i ' ' • I i ' .q. to , •••••111111111••••••••••••
-- 1.-- . ._.,._._ : -,--i---i- 1--:.--1.-7_1-[ I 1 --4--- .---... --,-. ____
E. 1 , i , ! : . 1 . I ! : I ' I :_ ' , . . . ••Mail••••••••••••••••
EMU l'.- ' ' 1 1 ' i ! 7 1 LI I I ___1_1_4_1_1_ ' I • MilltiMML2 3111111111/.111111/11
NM _i__' I ' 41 1 ' I . 1 j_i _ I ., t L _I ' 7_1
us ri-r, A , , 7-- I--_L: 7--• -I-, • -. Li 1 1 ' ' ' • ■ ' • ••••••••••
INN -1 ' ' ' I _r " h-• I-, -71 ' , -71-, ;-,-7--- ---- ---• • . Iniimmissuman
___H___:_.
• -',---'----,-- , : :77-1-1- I . • ' 1 ; t 1 ! 1___1_,...1_;_ ' • _1•1111•••••••••••••
•• 1111.• 1 L : ;-' : r-Tilla : r-"-: . : , i • 1 i 1. j 7,--i- • • . ' ' • • MIN••••••••11111PIErn1111
OE ••• ' -_-_1. , ' , . I I___ 1 : •-_,,i ___,_ -17_ 4__;_1_, • _1____ MIMIMINE111••••••
MN 11111111111 ... liW1 ii . 1 , , t , T - 1 , • , i , uw .. — ••••••••■•
me 4 ,__,_ • _. , -1--1 i -4 t---. '44-4--i-- .4............
law ---i--:-L--1-1 -_,, !I __, 1 LI-1 ttt 14+-1-LLII.77: ' ■+1 f
I
, -+ i+ I-t41- d I__• 1
, • • _t 1 , ••• ••••••••••••
•• ••••••••••••
Ft 1-'" . " ' 411-- mal --1H ' mi'lliiiiiiiiii
• _,
III. - -1---2,_-_-: , ,:_r- _t_l .1.14 ' - - t-t--t-r 1 I--.El -
I ..01 --- 11 ; H- -
.0.••• ,_ _1_, , , „ , 1__ . ,_,__,_.• 1 1 t i-- —1.•_“••••••••••••••
. ,_ .....pi••••••••••
glumly , -t-, , , ch r 1111111111191111111111
moan. f '. 1 i-T--. I 11111 I '-I-1 1 • ! --I. ----f-1,--.11111 . 1-ttimumm limmummommism
inliEHI -11-i--h-f--1-13 . maii 1 _6rir
. Km gi11111111111111111113
•• 01161111.. , •••11,1••=••••••••11113•••••••••111
••••1111—i _:--- -1-■-- N_ErliMPli• EMMEN NMI •••• ' •••••••• 0•••••••••••••••••••
, ••• • . _ ' •11111§1••111••• _•••••§S• a IN11111111111111111111111111111111111111111•••
k, MIR I___ ' ' 111111111111111 , 1 SEMEIrMillettg..til wipomnummummummum
qc
smog i 1 t i • amm , • ' MEM • •••••• ••••••••••••••••••••
•••••• ' 1-OEM ••• • • •31•• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
0111111EMEME a nommg•mom .onus ilim mommgmmommummimmummmummommommom
smommunamos numnommommussm • assummumumnimmunmummossossonnum
02010-6
a\ : ' =
JACKSONVILLE ENGINEERING & TESTING CO.
LOG OF BORING
• JO8 NO. 86-304
PROJECT City of Atlantic Beach Public Safety Building DATE 7-31-86
C Gee & Jenson, Engineers, Architects GROUND ELEV.
L IFNI
B-1 W. A. Royal & Crew WATER LEVEL 3.0'
BORING NO FIELD CREW,
SAMPLE STRATUM
SAMPLE DEPTH • FEET DEPTH - FEET 'BLOWS DEPT•
PER IN VISUAL SOIL CLASSIFICATION
NO FROM TO FRO+' TO FOOT FEET •
0 Ground Surface
1 0.5 1.5 0.0 4.0 8 1
1 2 I Firm Dark Brown Silty Fine Sand With Some
2 2.5 11111111iiiii 4.0 6 I A Organic Material
3 4.5 5.5 . 4.0 8.5 1.
•
6 I
4 6.5 7.5 4.0 iii Loose Dark Brown• Silty Fine Sand With Trash,
� 1 Glass and Wood (WET)
5 9.0 10.0 8.5 12.0
•
--- 10 I. Firm Dark Brown Fine Sand •
( 1 12
imi 13
14
1
6 14.0 15.0 12.0 17.5 9 Firm Brown Fine Sand With Dark Brown Fine
1 :11 i Sand Layer
-_ 18 '
' t9
7 19.0 20.0 17.5 26.5 7 'iii 20 I z° 1
221
1 23 ' Firm to Loose Greenish-Brown Fine Sand
1 24 1
8 24.0 25.0 17.5 26.5 3 1 25
- 26.5 28.0 I Soft Blueish-Gray Sandy Clay
\- 1 29 Firm to Loose Blueish-Gray Fine Sand With
9 29.0 30.0 28.0 40.0 11 1 30 Shell
...u...c. O. PLOWS OF 1•O le • ..[N O•.O^•I] JO •.+ N(Ol.1PIO TO O...vt S.I,TS.00N SAM•LCA ONC TOOT
Page 1 of 2
02010-8
JACKSONVILLE ENGINEERING & TESTING CO.
LOG OF BORING
• 86-304
• JOB NO.
PROJECT City of Atlantic Beach Public Safety Building DATE 7-31-86
Gee & Jenson, Engineers, Architects
�LIEN7 GROUND ELEV
BORING NO. B-1 HUD CREW W. A. Royal & Crew - - WATER LEVEL 3.0'
SAMPLE STRATUM
SAMPLE DEPTH - FEET DEPTH.. FEET 'BLOWS DEPTH
PER IN VISUAL SOIL CLASSIFICATION
NO FROM TO FRO+' TO FOOT FEET
30
31
32 '
3 '
10 34.0 35.0 28.0 40.0 4
3 - Firm to Loose Blueish-Gray Sand With
3 ' Trace of Shell
37
3: I
3•
11 39.0 40.0 28.0 40.0 5
4:
End of Boring
41
42
43
44
•
45
�4.
47 '
4: 1
49
5,
51
52
---53
`54
T
C-5
56 '
57
58
59
60
• •+V..tl[• Of •LOWS Of ■•O L• •••••HI. D.0••(7 30 .. H[O_.'•CD •D D•,v( S•L.TT.00V SA...LC• OFIC FOOT
page 2 of 2
02010-9
JaCKSONVILLE ENGINEERING & TESTING Co.
LOG OF BORING
86-304
• JOB NO.
City f Atlantic Beach Public Safety Building DATE 8-1-86
PROJECT y
L.LIENT Gee & Jenson, Engineers, Architects GROUND ELEV.
B-2 W. A. Royal & Crew WATER LEVEL 3.7'
BORING N0. FIELD-CR{w
SAMPLE STRATUM
SAMPLE DEPTH'• FEET DEPTH • FEET 'BLOWS DEPTH
PER IN VISUAL SOIL CLASSIFICATION
NO FROM TO FPO., TO FOOT FEET
o Pavement Surface
1 0.5 1.5 0.0 0.5 7 I I Paving - Asphalt and Limerock
2 2.5 0.5 6.0 6 ' I Firm to Dense Dark Brown Silty Fine Sand
' a With Roots, Wood and Some Organic Material
3 4.5 0.5 6.0 14
III
4 6.5 7.5 6.0 11.0 1
I81
9 I Very Dense Dark Brown Fine Sand
Will
0 10.0 6.0 11.0 ' 10
- ' 11 '
121 .1 •
13
14 Firm Brown Fine Sand
6 14.0 15.0 11.0 16.5 ' 1s
aill I ' 16 '
1 „ 1
I 18
1191
7 19.0 20.0 16.5 26.5 I 20 •
' 21
1 Loose to Firm Greenish-Brown Fine Sand With
22 Some Silt
I I
1
1241
8 24.0 25.0 16.5 26.5 7 ' ?5
di
El 1 1 -
2Li '
I 29 t Firm Gray Silty Sand With Shells
9 29.0 30.0 26.5 31.5 7 ' 30 •
Y•.u..tl(a O. BLOM'S Of 140 L(1 .F u(.1 OnOPP(O 30 ,H P(OVIP•O TO OP,v( SPL,SPOON SA..•L(11 OM[ FOOT
Page 1 of 2
02010-10
JACKSONVILLE ENGINEERING & TESTING CO.
LOG OF BORING
•
JOB No 86-304 .
- PROJECT City of Atlantic Beach Public Safety Building DATE 8-1-86
CLIENT - Gee & Jenson, Engineers, Architects - GROUND ELEV.
(WRING NO. B-2 FIELD CREW W. A. Royal & Crew WATER LEVEL 3.7'
SAMPLE STRATUM
SAMPLE DEPTH • FEET .DEPTH • FEET 'SLOWS DEPTH
PER IN VISUAL SOIL CLASSIFICATION
NO FROM TO FROM TO FOOT FEET
--_' 31 ' Firm Gray Silty Sand With Shells
I32I
1 3
1 3, 1
10 34.0 35.0 31.5 40.0 3 ' 3 !1
• I 3. ' Loose to Firm Gray Clayey Sand With Trace
I 37 ' of Shells
• 111.111 3; I
•
13 .
11 39.0 40.0 31.5 40.0 10 •-IIIIIII - 41 End of Boring
( 42
_SEm ti•
•
47 ,
. 1141 r. :4I .
lir 49
SO
S1 5 2 S3 S4
I55I
S6
__ --
57 I
I 58 '
(
I I 58 I
I 60
•
•'..U..•(4 OF •LOWS or IAO Li, I-AUM(4 OROPP(D JO ■N R(OU'PtO •O OR'YC SPL'TSPOON •A..PLCR OMt FOOT
page 2 of 2
02010-11
JACKSONVILLE ENGINEERING & TESTING CO.
LOG OF BORING
• . J09 NO. - 86-304
PROJECT City of Atlantic Beach Public Safety Building DATE 8-1-86
_LIENT Gee & Jenson, Engineers, Architects GROUND EL"EV.
BORING NO FIELD CREW y
B-3_ W. A. Royal & Crew WATER LEVEL 4.0'
SAMPLE STRATUM
SAMPLE DEPTH • FEET DEPTH • FEET "SLOWS DEPTH '
PER IN VISUAL SOIL CLASSIFICATION
. NO FROM j TO FROM TO FOOT FEET
. 0 Pavement Surface
1 0.5 1.5 0.0 0.6 22 Paving - Asphalt and T.i merock
`._ 1 Dark Brown Silty Fine Sand
0.6 1.5 2
L 2 2.5 3.5 1.5 6.5 2 w
3 Loose Dark Brown Fine Sand With Some Organic
Material and Wood
3 4.5 5.5 1.5 6.5 7 a
5 •
61
4 6.5 7.5 ..5
6 6
9.0 7 -
" Firm Dark Brown Organic Sand and Wood .
- 8 '
9
5 9.0 10.0 9.0 17.0 8 10 ``�
11 •
I I
12
13 I Firm to Dense Brown Fine Sand With- - -
Cementations
- I I --14
6 14.0 15.0 9.0 17.0. 12
15
- I ---16 .
17
18
19 .
7 19.0 20.0 17.0 25.5 2 20 ?` •
21
Loose Greenish-Brown Silty Fine Sand
1 -- 22
23
24
8 24.0 25.0 17.0 25.5 5 25
26
27 Loose Gray Clayey Sand With Trace of Shells
28
29
9 29.0 30.0 _ 25.5 32.0 4 - 30
�-NwMBCN Or BLOWS OF 1.0 LB «A ..(N D.0.0(C) JO IN N(OL,f1•O TO ONIV( SPL.TSPOON SA•.PLC■ O.0 roof
Page 1 of 2
02010-12
JACKSONVILLE ENGINEERING & TESTING CO,
LOG OF BORING
• JOB NO. 86-304
PROJECT City of Atlantic Beach Public Safety Building DATE 8-1-86
( LIENT__—Gee & Jenson, Engineers,. Architects GROUND ELEV.
BORING NO. B-3 FIELD CREW W. A. Royal & Crew 4,Ot
WATER LEVEL
SAMPLE STRATUM
SAMPLE DEPTH - FEET DEPTH - FEET 'BLOWS DEPTH
PER iv VISUAL SOIL CLASSIFICATION
NO FROM TO F ROB' TO FOOT FEET
30 ' Loose Gray Clayey Sand With Trace of Shells
31
32
33
3
10 34.0 35.0 32.0 38.0 2
35-11 Soft Gray Sandy Clay With Trace of Shells
36
37
---38
Loose Gray Silty Sand With Some Shells
11- 39.0 40.0 38.0 40.0 4 3
40 End of Boring
41 - •
42 � •
1 - 43 -
44
i
45
46
47
48
49
50
---51
52
53
54
55
---56
57
58
S9
60
^.u..BIN or Blows Of 1.0 to ..•....fu D°0°°17 30 .H NIOU'°t0 '0 ON.V( $°l.TSPOO'. SA...l[B ONE root
Page 2 of 2
02010-13
TELEPHONE 641-2311
E1T
AREA CODE 904
Jacksonville Engineering Order No. 86-304
& Testing Co.
3110 Desalvo Road, Jacksonville, Florida 32216
PROJECT: City of Atlantic Beach Public Safety Building
Atlantic Beach, Florida
CLIENT: Gee & Jenson, Engineers, Architects
AUGER BORINGS
Boring Stratum Depth
No. In Feet Visual Soil Classification
A-1 0.0 - 0.7 Dark Brown Fine Sand With Trace of Silt and Roots
0.7 - 2.0 Light Brown Fine Sand
2.0 - 3.0 Dark Brown Fine Sand With Trace of Silt and Trash
(Glass, Metal, Wood, Paper and Plastic)
3.0 - 5.0 Dark Brown Silty Sand and Wood
Water Level: 3.5'
A-2 0.0 - 0.5 Brown Fine Sand With Roots
0.5 - 3.0 Brown Fine Sand With Small Rocks
3.0 - 5.0 Dark Brown Sandy Organic Material (Peat)
Water Level: 3.0'
02010-14
WORKING WITH INDUSTRY TO IMPROVE STANDARDS OF QUALITY
SECTION 02050
DEMOLITION
( BID ALTERNATE NO. 2 )
EARI_t___EERERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of demolition is as required to render
the Work complete, as shown on drawings.
B. Demolition includes the complete wrecking and removal
and disposal of the existing Public Safety BuIding
after beneficial occupancy of new structure is complete;
the work also includes walks, paving, and other materials
as shown on the drawings and specified after beneficial
occupancy.
C. Demolition includes removal and disposal of util ity
services and appurtenances to such, except as otherwise
shown or specified.
D. Trees and plants which are to remain and must be protected
are indicated on the drawings . Preform trimming and
tree repair work for damages incurred or anticipated
to occur by new construction , . to the satisfaction
of the Architect/Engineer.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Schedule ; Demolition : Submit written schedule of
methods and operations of demolition to the Architect/
Engineer for approval prior to the start of work .
Include in the schedule the coordination for shut-off ,
capping, street interruption and `continuation of utility
services as required.
B. Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal
work to ensure the uninterrupted progress of the Owner' s
operations.
02050-1
1 .03( JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Occupancy : Structures and other items to be demolished
will be vacated and discontinued in use prior to the
start of the work.
B. Condition of Items to be Demolished : The Owner assumes
no responsibility for the actual condition of items
to be demol ished . Conditions existing at the time
of inspection for b i d d i n g purposes w i l l be maintained
by the Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations
wirthin the items may occur by Owner ' s removal and
salvage operations prior to the start of the demolition
work. Contractor shall verify in writing to the Architect/
Engineer , safe conditions prior to the commencement
of demolition work.
C. Protections : Ensure the safe passage of persons around
the area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent
injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities,
and persons.
1 . Erect temporary covered passageways to maintain
( fire exits and as otherwise required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
2 . Provide interior and exterior shoring, . bracing,
or support to prevent movement or settlement
or collapse of structures to be demolished and
adjacent facilities to remain.
D. Damages : Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent
structures by demolition operations at no cost to
the Owner.
E. Utility Services : Maintain existing utilities indicated
to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage
during demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing
utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except
when authorized in writing by Owner . Timely notice
shall be given to all parties affected by temporary
interruptions of utilities. Provide temporary services
during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable
to the governing authorities.
F. Provide temporary fencing , . barricades or guards to
protect trees and other plants, which are to remain,
from damage.
02050-2
Not Applicable.
E I_l_=_EXELUI1
3 .O1 : DEMOLITION :
A. Pollution Controls : Use water sprinkling, temporary
enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the
amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the
air to the lowest practical level . Comply with governing
regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust,
dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations to
the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer or governing
authorities.
C. Noise Pollution : Comply with all applicable sections
of Federal , State and local OSHA Regulations for noise
pollution control , suppression and equipment.
D. Building Demolition : Demolish buildings completely
and remove from the site. Use such methods as required
to complete the work within the limitations of governing
regulations. Use of explosives is NOT ALLOWED.
E. Demolish paving (asphaltic or concrete) in small sections.
Where new paving abutts existing, . saw cut existing
paving to provide straight, clean perimeter for new.
F. Below-Grade Construction:
1 . Demol ish and remove below- grade construction
and concrete slabs on grade.
2 . Filling Basements and Voids : Completely fill
below- grade areas and voids resulting within
the Work area and from the demolition of structures.
G. Disposal of Demolished Materials : Remove from the
site debris, rubbish , excess excavations , trimmings
and other materials resulting from demolition operations.
Burning or disposal of removed materials from demolished
structures shall not be permitted on project site.
02050-31
3 .02 PROTECTION OF TREES AND PLANTS :
A. Protect root systems from damage due to materials
in solution caused by run-off or spillage during mixing
and placement of construction materials, or drainage
from stored materials . Protect root systems from
flooding , . erosion or excessive wetting resulting from
dewatering operations.
B. Repair and Replacement of Trees;
1 . Repair trees or plants damaged by construction
operations, in a manner acceptable to the Architect/
Engineer . Make repairs promptly after damage
occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of
damaged trees.
2 . If trees over 6 " in caliper measurement ( taken
12 " above grade ) are required to be replaced ,
provide new trees of 6?" caliper size, and of
the same species; however, . no tree shall be removed
without written approval by Architect.
02050-4
SECTION 02200
SITE CLEARING, STRIPPING AND GRUBBING
EAaI_1___EENERAL
1 .01 : DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The General Requirements are made a part of this section
as fully as if repeated herein.
B. Work includes but is not limited to:
1 . Site clearing.
2 . Stripping and removal or stockpiling topsoil .
3‘ Grubbing and removal of vegetation within site
boundaries or within limits shown on drawings .
4'. Stripping and removal of existing asphalt within
building and paving limits and as indicated .
5.. Protection of existing trees to remain.
6 . Protection of streets, roads, adjacent property ,
and other facilities to remain.
7:. Disposal of all cleared materials.
8 . Disposal of all grubbed materials.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS :
A. Permit for transportation and disposal of debris.
1 . 03( DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL :
A. Remove all cleared and grubbed materials from project
site.
PABI_Z___EXEEUI14N
2 .01 CLEARING :
A. Remove all trees within building and paving areas.
02200-1
B. Remove all rubbish, debris, weeds, vines, and undergrowth
to ground level .
C. Remove all other obstructions resting on or protruding
through surface of existing ground .
2 .02 STRIPPING TOPSOIL :
A. Remove al topsoil from areas of proposed building
and paving construction and stockpile on site as directed
by Architect/Engineer.
2 .03 GRUBBING:
A. Remove all stumps , roots over 2 inches in diameter,
and matted roots to following depths :
1 . Walks : 12 inches. .
2 . Roads and parking areas : 18 inches.
( 3. Areas to be grassed or landscaped : 8 inches.
B. Unless further cut is required, fill depressions made
by grubbing and compact to density of surrounding
soil .
2 .04 PROTECTION OF TREES :
A. Protect trees which might be damaged during clearing, .
stripping, and grubbing.
1 . Trees on site located outside building and paving
areas or marked in field to remain.
2 . All trees beyond limits specified above.
B. Prevent damage to branches, bark, and root system.
C. Provide barricades or other protective measures if
necessary .
D. Restore trees damaged or scarred by demolition operations
to healthy , growing condition or replace as directed
by Architect/Engineer.
02200-2
2 .05 CLEAN-UP:
A. Debris and Rubbish : Remove and transport debris and
rubbish in manner that will prevent spillage on streets
or adjacent areas.
1 . Clean-up spillage from streets and adjacent areas.
2 . Comply with Federal , state, and local hauling
and disposal regulations.
B. Do not burn materials on site.
END OF SECTION
02200-31
SECTION 02210
EARTHWORK
EARI_1___SENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Scope of Work : All labor , material , and equipment
to complete the earthwork. Includes but is not limited
to:
1 . Compaction of on-site material .
2 . Grading and reshaping site.
31. Importing and compacting fill as required.
4'. Compaction of material beneath building and paving.
5. Removal of unsuitabie material .
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: The following items
of related work are specified in other divisions of
these specifications.
1 . Excavation and backfill for plumbing and electrical
work .
C. Supervision and Testing : All work specified herein
shall be under the supervision of a Soils Engineer.
The Soils Engineer shall be selected and paid by the
Owner. Contractor shall pay for all retesting required
for failure to obtain specified results.
D. Field Engineering : The Contractor shall employ and
pay for the services of a competent surveyor who sh a l I
make all required surveys for establishing all points,
lines , , grades and levels, and otherwise fully and
completely l a y out a l l the work required by the Contract.
E. Unusual Conditions : Should any unusual conditions
arise, the Engineer shall be contacted for instructions
prior to continuation of earthwork operations.
EARI_Z___EXEC!!I14N
2 .01 PROCEDURE : BASE BID - REMOVAL OF TRASHFILL
A. General Excavation : Upon completion of site clearing
and grubbing , the paved areas shall be excavated to
�• the bottom of the subgrade elevation where excavation
is required .
02210-1
B. Removal of Existing Trashfill : In the area of a line
10 feet outside the exterior walls of the proposed
building , excavate the trashfill to its full depth
as identified in the subsurface soils report prepared
by Jacksonville Engineering and Testing. The existing
trashf i i l shall i be disposed of off-site by the Contractor.
Shoring of the excavation wall adjacent to the existing
building shall be provided so as to prevent undermining
of this structure. Groundwater shall be controlled
in a manner approved by the Soils Engineer during
t h e e x c a v a t i o n a n d backf i l l process . Backf i l l ing
shall be accomplished using clean granular material
deposited in a successive layers of not more than
6 . inches in thickness. Each layer shall be compacted
to 95%, of maximum density as determined by ASTM Specif-
ication D- 1557; The size of compaction equipment
shal I be Iimited to prevent damage to the adjacent
structure.
C. Consolidation of Existing Soils : Upon completion
of general excavation of the area to be paved and
an area 5 feet beyond the edge of paving, . this area
shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density as specified .
The subgrade shall then be constructed using off-site
ied for paving.
area 5 feet beyond this area shall be excavated to
a point 18' inches below finish grade in paved areas
and 24 inches below the finish floor slab of the building.
B. Consolidation of Existing Soils : Upon completion
of general excavation of the building and paved areas ,
compact the existing material to 95% of maximum density
as specified . The subgrade and building fill shall
then be constructed using off-site borrow and compacted
as specified .
2 .03 TESTING :
A. Soil tests shall be made as follows:
1 . For each type o f f i l l material used , obtain a
moisture density relationship determination test
in accordance with the Modified Proctor Method
ASTM D1557;
02210-2
2 . Obtain in- place density test using the Sandcone
or Shelby Tube Method . Density tests shall be
obtained in each compacted l i f t of f i l l for approx-
imately every 2 ,000 square feet of area. Samples
shall be taken approximately six inches below
the surface. Areas which fail ito meet the compaction
requirements shall be recompacted then retested
until passing results are achieved . Density
tests shall also be taken in the bottom of fifteen
percent of the isolated footings and at one hundred
foot intervals in the continuous wall footings.
B. Location of in-place density tests shall be referenced
to column lines, and to elevation datum . Reports
shall be furnished to the Architect as specified in
the section "Submittals" .
END OF SECTION
02210-3
SECTION 02280
SOIL TREATMENT
EARI_1_=_QEtIERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. Provide soil treatment for control of termites and
other subterranean insects, as specified .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. In addition to the requirements of these specifications,
comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
for the work , including preparation of substrate and
application.
B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed
in accordance with regulations of governing authorities
for application of soil treatment solution.
1 .03 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Restrictions : Do not apply soil treatment solution
until excavating , filling and grading operations are
completed, except as otherwise required in construction
operations and approved by the Architect/Engineer.
B. To insure penetration , do not apply soil treatment
during inclement weather . Comply with other handling
and application instructions of the soil toxicant
manufacturer.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : •
A. Product Data , Soil Treatment : Submit manufacturer' s
technical data and application instructions which
clearly indicate toxic chemicals , solutions , safety
precautions and compliance with federal , state and
local EPA health and safety regulations.
1 .05 GUARANTEE :
A. Furnish a written guarantee certifying that the applied
soil poisoning treatment will prevent the infestation
of subterranean termites and , that if subterranean
02280-1
termite activity is discovered during the guarantee
period , the Contractor will re-treat the soil and
also repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation
to the satisfaction of and without cost to the Owner .
B. Provide guarantee for a period of 5 years from date
of treatment , signed by the Contractor . Owner parti -
cipation guarantees are not acceptable.
EARI_2___PRUA C_Ia:
2 .01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION :
A. Use an emulsible concentrate insecticide for dilution
with water , specially formulated to prevent infestation
by wood destroying organisms . Fuel oil will not be
permitted as a dilutent . Provide a working solution
of one of the following chemical elements :
1 . Chlordane in water emulsion.
2 . Aldrin in water emulsion.
3 . Dieldrin in water emulsion .
4 . Heptachlor in water emulsion.
5 . Chlordane and Heptachlor in water emulsion.
B. Other solutions may be used as recommended if acceptable
to Local , State and Federal authorities.
C. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious
to planting .
PARI 3 - EXEQUI1411:
3 . 01 APPLICATION :
A. Surface Preparation : Remove foreign matter which
could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas
to be treated . Loosen , rake and level soil to be
treated , except previously compacted areas under slabs
and foundations . Toxicants may be applied before
placement of compacted fill under slabs , if recommended
by toxicant manufacturer .
02280-2
B. Application : Apply soil treatment solution as follows :
1 . Under slab-on-grade structures , treat the soil
before concrete slabs are poured using either
power sprayer or tank -type garden sprayer or
as recommended by toxicant manufacturer .
a . Apply approved chemical solution as an overall
treatment under the slab and attached slab
areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel .
2 . Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after
application , before beginning concrete placement
or other construction activities.
3 . Post signs in the areas of application warning
workers that soil poisoning has been applied .
Remove signs when areas are covered by other
construction .
4 . Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed
by subsequent excavation or other construction
activities following application.
5 . Treat all areas under and 101 outside the perimeter
of all buildings designed for human occupancy .
END OF SECTION
02280-3
SECTION 02300
DRAINAGE
EARS_i_z_GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION : Work under this section includes furnishing
and installing storm drainage pipe, mitered end sections,
concrete precast inlets , and appurtenances , excavation,
backfilling , and other incidental work in connection with
this construction .
1 . 02 APPLICABLE CODES , STANDARDS , AND SPECIFICATIONS : Work
under this section shail be in accordance with the following
codes and standards :
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO) .
B. Florida Department of Transportation "Standard Specifi-
cations for Road and Bridge Construction" Latest Edition
(DOT) .
C. Local City and County codes.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit manufacturer ' s data on all pipe, drainage struc-
tures , and related items necessary to complete the
work including but not limited to gaskets, fittings ,
grates , frames, inlets, headwalls, and connectors.
EARZ_2_m_ERQ>NQQIS
2 . 01 PIPE : Install pipe conforming to these specifications
and of the type and size shown on the drawings .
A . Reinforced concrete culvert pipe shall conform to
the requirements of DOT Standard Specifications, Section
941 , Articles 941 -1 through 941 -2 . Pipe joints shall
be sealed with round rubber gaskets and shall meet
the requirements of DOT Standard Specifications, Section
942, Article 942-1 .
2 . 02 CASTING : Inlet frames and grates shall be as specified
on the drawings .
02300- 1
2 . 03 INLETS AND MITERED END SECTIONS : Inlets and mitered end
sections shall be constructed at locations shown on the
drawings and I n conformance with the plans and specifications.
Castings shall be of the type and size shown. Pipe connections
to inlets and mitered end sections shall be watertight
and done in a manner acceptable to the Architect . Work
incidental to this work shall be done in accordance with
these specifications.
EARI z_EKE QULIQN
3 .01 EXCAVATION :
A. All excavation shall conform to Section 02210.
B. Bedding : The bedding surface for all pipe shall provide
a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the
entire length of the pipe . The pipe shall be carefully
bedded in an acceptable soil foundation that has been
accurately shaped and rounded to conform to the lowest
1 / 4 of the outside circular portion of the pipe for
its entire length , and when necessary , shall be tamped
to secure uniform, firm support. Where bell and spigot
pipe is used , the be l l holes shall be deep enough
to ensure that the bell does not bear on the bottom
of the excavation , and shall not be excessively wide
in the longitudinal direction of the culvert of storm
drain .
3 . 02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE :
A . General : Piping and appurtenances for storm sewers
sha l I be of the type and material specified in these
specifications or on the drawings .
B . Handling and Storage : Pipe shall be protected during
shipping , storage, and handling against impact shocks ,
free fall or other damage . Any damaged pipe shall
be removed from the ,Job site immediately .
C. Pipe Laying :
1 . The trench shall be prepared as specified herein
and each pipe section shall be laid in strict
conformance to the line and grade shown on the
drawings .
02300-2
2 . As pipe laying progresses , the interior of the
pipe shall be maintained clean and free of all
dirt and superfluous materials.
3 . Bottom of trench shall be shaped to fit pipe .
Granular backfill shall be placed around the
pipe and compacted in 9- inch layers with hand
held tampers . Backfill shall be compacted to
95% of maximum dry density as determined by Modified
Proctor Compaction Test ASTM A 1557 .
3 . 03 CULVERT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT: Culverts , catch basins ,
and other drainage structures that are removed or damaged
during construction shall be replaced with materials and
structures equal and similar to those removed or damaged .
3 .04 PROTECTION : At the end of each workday the pipes under
construction shall be plugged .
END OF SECTION
02300-3
SECTION 02420
FENCING AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Scope of work : All labor , material and equipment
to furnish and install the chain link fencing. Includes:
1 . Fencing
2 . Gates
3 . Top Extension
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: The following items
of related work are specified in other divisions of
these specifications.
1 . Finish Grading
2 . Paving, Concrete work
3 . Padlocks
4 . Electrical conduit , wiring and locks ( remote
operation ) .
C. General Requirements : Fence shall be standard chain
link fence with top enclosed and bottom tension wire.
Gates shall be swing or slide as Indicated on the
drawings.
PART I1___PRDDl1CIL
2 .01 MATERIAL
A. Fabric : Shall be 9-gauge woven in a 2- inch mesh with
twisted and barbed selvage at top and bottom. Finish
shall be galvanized with 2 . 0 ounces zinc per square
foot complying with ASTM A 392, Class II or aluminium
coated with . 40 ounce aluminium per square foot complying
with ASTM A 49 , Class II . Barbed selvage shall be
used on exterior fencing only.
B. Posts, Rails and Appurtenances : Tubular members shall
comply with the provisions of ASTM A 120 for weight
and coating . Rol I formed shapes shall conform to
the provisions of ASTM A 123 for galvanized coating .
Tubular posts shall have tops that exclude moisture.
02420-1
1 . Intermediate posts: Shall be 2 inch pipe weighing
3 .65 pounds per foot.
2 . End , corner , and pull posts : Shall be 2- 1 /2
inch pipe weighing 5 .79 pounds per foot.
3 . Top rail : 1 - 1 /4 pipe weighing 2 . 27 pounds per
foot or 1 -5/8 x 1 -1 /4 roll formed section weighing
1 .35 pounds per foot.
4 . Braces : Shall be same material as top rail .
5 . Gate posts:
a . Leaves up to 6- feet wide : 3- 1 /2" x 3-1 /2"
roll formed section weighing 5 . 14 pounds
per foot, or 2-1 /2" pipe weighing 5 .79 pounds
per foot.
C. Tension wire : Shall be seven gauge with same finish
as fabric .
D. Gates : Frames shall be fabricated from 1 - 1 /2 inch
pipe weighing 2.72 pounds per foot. Provide additional
horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate
operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware and
accessories, as indicated on drawings .
Assemble gate frames by welding or fittings and rivets
for rigid connections . Use same fabric as for fence,
unless otherwise indicated. Install fabric with stretcher
bars at vertical edges and tie at top and bottom edges.
Attach stretcher bars to gate frame at not more than
15 " on center . Attach hardware with rivets or by
other means which will provide security against removal
or breakage.
Provide diagonal cross bracing consisting of 3/ 8 "
diameter adjustable length truss rods on gates where
necessary to provide frame rigidity without sag or
twist.
E. Gate Hardware : Provide the following hardware and
accessories for each gate :
1 . Hinges : Pressed steel or malleable iron to suit
gate size , non- lift-off type , offset to permit
1800 gate openings . Provide one pair of hinges
for each leaf .
02420-2
2 . Latch : Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit
operation from either side of gate . Provide
padlock eye as integral part of latch .
3v
Gates: Provide gate stops for all gates, consisting
of mushroom type or flush plate with anchors .
Set in concrete to engage the center drop rod
or plunger bar. Provide locking device and padlock
eyes as an integral part of the latch .
F. Cantilevered Sliding Gate : Furnish and install sliding
gate equal to Aluminum Frame Cantilever Sliding Gate
as manufactured by Anchor Fence , Inc . See plans for
size and locations.
G. Integral Vision Screen : Provide polypropylene mesh
to be installed with chain- 1 ink fence and gate in
accordance with manufacturer ' s recommendations, at
all exterior locations, equal to Wind Screen manufactured
by Carron Net Company ( sales representative: Charlie
Coleman ' s Sports Shop, 6139 103 Street, Jacksonville ,
Florida ) .
E I_l_-_EXELUI14N
3 . 01 INSTALLATION:
A. Do not begin installation and erection before final
grading at fencing area is completed, unless otherwise
permitted .
B. Setting posts : Center and align posts in holes 2 "
above bottom of excavation , spaced 10 feet on center
or less unless otherwise shown. Line, pull , and gate
terminal posts shall be set in cylindrical concrete
footings . A hole shall be excavated for the full
depth of the post, not less than 12" in diameter for
line posts , 18" in diameter for terminal posts and
24 " minimum diameter for gate posts . The concrete
shall be as specified . Allow 48 hours for curing
concrete prior to stretching fence fabric.
C. Pour concrete pad to required dimensions around post.
Allow 48 hours for curing concrete.
D. Pull Posts : Pull posts shall be installed at all
points of deflection greater than 300 in the line
of fence and also at all point where there are abrupt
changes in grade.
02420-3
E. Fabric : Rolls of chain link fabric shall be Joined
by weaving a single strand into the ends of the rolls
to form a continuous mesh pattern . The fabric shall
be stretched tight and securely fastened to the posts.
Fabric shall be cut and attached independently at
all terminal posts . The fabric shall be placed on
the outside of the fence.
F. Tension Wire : Install wires by weaving through the
fabric and tying to each post.
G. Tie fabric to frames and posts as recommended by fence •
manufacturer; Tie Vision Screen to Fabric in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations.
H. Clean up: Remove from the Job site all excess excavated
materials and other debris resulting from fence con-
struction.
END OF SECTION
02420-4
SECTION 02490
LANDSCAPE WORK
PARI_1__. GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of the landscape development work is shown
on the drawings and in schedules.
B . The Contractor shall provide space for storage of
sod prior to placement in a manner that will not endanger
or restrict pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
C. Subgrade Elevations : Excavation, filling and grading
required to establish elevations shown on the drawings
are not specified in this section.
1 .021 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Source Quality Control :
1 . Ship landscape materials with certificates of
inspection as required by governmental authorities.
Comply with governing regulations applicable
to landscape materials.
2 . Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape
material is not obtainable, submit proof or non-
avai labi l ity and proposal for use of equivalent
material .
B. Topsoil : Before delivery of topsoil , furnish Architect/
Engineer with written statement giving location of
properties from which topsoil is to be obtained, names
and addresses of owners , depth to be stripped and
crops grown during past two years.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS :
A. Certification, Landscape Work :
1 . Submit copies of certificates of inspection as
required by governmental authorities, and manufac-
turer ' s or vendors certified analysis for soil
amendments and fertIIizer materials. Submit
other data substantiating that materials
comply with specified requirements.
02490-1
2 . Submit seed vendor ' s certified statement for
each grass seed mixture required, stating botanical
and common name, percentage by weight, and percentages
of purity , germination , and weed seed for each
grass seed species.
1 .04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A . Packaged Materials : Deliver packaged materials in
containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufac-
turer . Protect materials from deterioration during
delivery and while stored at the site.
B. Plant Materials :
1 . Sod - Time delivery so that sod will be placed
within 24 hours after stripping . Protect sod
against drying and breaking of rolled strips.
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly
( as portions of the site become available.
B. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities
and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible
damage . Hand excavate , as required . Maintain grade
stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed
upon by all parties concerned.
C. Planting Time : Plant or install materials during
normal planting seasons for each type of landscape
work required.
1 .06 GUARANTEE :
A . Guarantee lawns for a period of one year, against
defects including death , unsatisfactory growth, except
for defects resulting from neglect by Owner , abuse
and/or damage by others.
B. Remove and replace lawns found to be dead or in unhealthy
condition during guarantee period. Make any replacements
during growth season following end of guarantee period
and maintain same until healthy, stable growth pattern
is established . Furnish and plant replacements which
comply with requirements shown and specified.
02490-2
PBBI_2_=_ERDIAILIa
2(.01 TOPSOIL :
A . Topsoil for landscape work may not be available at
the site and therefore shall be furnished as specified .
B . Provide new topsoil which is fertile, friable, natural
loam, surface soil , free of subsoil , clay lumps, brush,
weeds, and other litter, and free of roots, stumps,
stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension, and other
extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth .
C. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having
similar soil characteristics to that found near the
project site . Obtain topsoil only from naturally ,
well - drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth
of not iess than 4. inches ; do not obtain from bogs
or marshes.
D. Soil Amendments:
1 . Lime : Natural limestone containing not less
than 85 %, of total carbonates , ground so that
not less than 90% passes a 10 mesh sieve and
not less than 50% passes a 100 mesh sieve.
2 . Peat Humus : FS Q- P- 166 and with the texture
and pH range suitable for the intended use.
3t. Bonemeal : Commercial , raw , finely ground ; 4%,
nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid .
4'. Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals;
20% available phosphoric acid .
5. Commercial Fertilizer : Complete fertilizer of
neutral character, with some elements derived
from organic sources and containing not less
than 4% , phosphoric acid and not less than 2$
potassium, and the percentage of nitrogen required
to provide not less than 1 pound of actual nitrogen
per 1000 square feet of lawn area. Provide nitrogen
in a form that will be available to the lawn
during the initial period of growth.
02490-3
2 .02 GRASS MATERIALS :
A . Sod : Provide strongly rooted sod , not less than 2
years old and free of weeds and undesirable native
grasses. Provide only sod capable of growth and develop-
ment when planted ( viable, not dormant) and in strips
not more than 18" wjde x 41 long. Provide sod composed
principally of St. Augustine grass ( Stenotaphrum secun-
datum) .
E6 RI_a___EXELUI14N
3 .01 PREPARATION :
A. Preparation for Planting Lawns:
1 . Loosen subgrade of lawn areas to a minimum depth
of 4. inches. Remove stones over 1 inch in any
dimension and sticks , roots, rubbish , and other
extraneous matter . Limit preparation to areas
which will be planted promptly after preparation.
2 . Spread planting soil mixture to minimum depth
required to meet lines, grades and elevations
shown, after light rolling and natural settlement.
3 . Place approximately 1 /2 of total amount of planting
soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade
to create a transition layer and then place remainder
of planting soil .
4: Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded .
B . Grade lawn areas to smooth , even surface with loose,
uniformly fine texture . Roll and rake and remove
ridges and fill depressions as required to meet finish
grades . Limit fine grading to areas which can be
planted immediately after grading.
C. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil
is dry . Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture
to dry before planting l aw ns . Do not create a muddy
soil condition.
D . Restore lawn areas to specified condition if eroded
or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior
to planting .
02490-4
3 .02 PLANTING :
A. Sodding New Lawns:
1 . Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping.
Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen.
2 . Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted
joints . Butt ends and sides of sod strips ; do
not overlap . Stagger strips to offset joints
in adjacent courses. Work from boards to avoid
damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly
to ensure contract with subgrade . Work sifted
soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod ;
remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent
grass.
3 . Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately
after planting.
3403 MAINTENANCE :
A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting and continue
maintenance through to occupancy of building.
B . Maintain lawns by watering , fertilizing, . weeding , .
mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling,
regrading , and replanting as required to establish
a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas.
3404' CLEANUP AND PROTECTION :
A. During landscape work store materials and equipment
where directed . Keep pavements clean and work area
in an orderly condition.
B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due
to landscape operations, by others and trespassers.
Maintain protection during installation and maintenance
periods . Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape
work as directed .
3405 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE :
A . At final inspection and if landscape work does not
comply with the requirements, replace rejected work
and continue specified maintenance until reinspected
by the Architect/Engineer and found to be acceptable.
Remove rejected grassing and materials promptly from
the project site.
END OF SECTION
02490-5
SECTION 02513
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
2911I_1_=_QUIERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A . The extent of asphalt concrete
on the drawings and includes Paving work is shown
Prepared aggregate subbase.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Material Certificates :
1 . Provide copies of materials certificates including
design mixes, signed by the Contractor, certifying
that each specified material complies with , or
exceeds, requirements .
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . All work to be done in accordance with the applicable
sections of the Florida DOT
otherwise specified . Specifications unless
1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS:
A . Weather Limitations : Apply nl
when ambient temperature is abovea50 degrees tF, oand
when temperature has not been below 35 degrees F for
12 hours immediately prior to application .
apply when base contains an excess of moisture. Do not
B . Construct asphalt concrete surface course only when
atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees F, and
when base is dry . Base course may be p
a i r temperature is above 30 degrees F and rilsi ng d w h e n
C. Grade Control : Establish and maintain required elevations
as indicated or specified.
2A11I_2_=_PRODUCIa
2 . 01 MATERIALS :
A. General : Use locally available materials and gradations
which exhibit a satisfactory record of previous instal-
lations .
02513-1
B . Subgrade : Stabilized subgrade , as required , shall
comply with Section 160 of FDOT Specifications.
C . Base Course : Limerock Base - Material shall be as
specified in Section 911 of FDOT Specifications .
D . Asphaltic Concrete Pavement : Asphalt pavement shall
be Type S1 , 1 - 1 / 2 inches . Total coarse aggregate
shall not be greater than 50-65 percent by weight .
Materials shall conform to Sections 331 , 901 , 902 ,
916 , and 917 of FDOT Specifications .
E . Priming : Prime coat shall be emulsified asphalt of
a grade applicable to the base used . Cover material
for prime coat shall be hot asphalt coated sand .
EABI_3._=_EXEQUIlaN
3 .01 BEARING : Bearing values shall be determined by the limerock
bearing ratio method in accordance with FDOT Specification .
Research Bulletin 22-B, dated May 1972 .
3 . 02 INSTALLATION :
A . Subgrade : Stabilized subgrade , as required , shall
be compacted to a depth of 12 inches and a limerock
bearing ratio of 40 .
B . Limerock Base Course : Thickness shall be as shown
on the drawings and shall be constructed as specified
in Section 200 of FDOT Specifications .
C . Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Plant : Asphalt pavement
plant shall be in accordance with Section 320 and
construction shall be in accordance with Section 330
of FDOT Specifications.
D . Priming : Prime coat shall be applied in accordance
with Section 300 of FDOT Specifications . Cover material
for prime coat shall be applied with approved distributor .
3 . 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL :
A. General : Repair or remove and replace unacceptable
paving or traffic markings as directed by the Architect/
Engineer .
02513-2
B . Thickness : In - place compacted thickness will not
be acceptable if exceeding following allowable variation
from required thickness .
1 . Base Course - 1 /2 inch , less than specified .
2 . Surface Course - 1/4 inch , less than specified .
C . Surface Smoothness : Test finished surface of each
asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using 15 foot
straightedge applied parallel with , and at right angles
to direction of paved area. Surface will not be acceptable
if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness .
1 . Wearing Course Surface - 3/ 16 inch in 15 foot
straightedge.
D . Surface Elevation : Actual surface elevations shall
be within ± 0 .05 feet of specified or indicated elevations
at any given point . Surface elevations between any
two given points shall be interpolated from a direct
line between the two points. Pavement exceeding actual
elevation tolerances of more than 0 . 05 feet at any
two points within a distance of 15 feet will not be
acceptable.
END OF SECTION
02513-3
SECTION 02528
CONCRETE WALKS
EARI_1_=_GERERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of concrete curbs , paving and walks is
shown on the drawings .
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere : Section 03100 ,
Concrete Work .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Codes and Standards : Comply with applicable sections
of F. D. O. T. Specifications and local governing regulations.
B. The mixture, placement, curing and finish of all concrete
work shall be in accordance to Florida D. O. T. Specifi-
c cations Sections 345 , 350, 520 and 522 .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS : Furnish manufacturer ' s product data , design
mixes, test reports, and materials certifications .
1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Traffic Control : Maintain access for vehicular and
pedestrian traffic as required for other construction
activities .
B. Utilize flagman, barricades, warning signs and warning
lights as required .
EARI_2_=_ERDQUIE
2 .01 MATERIALS:
A. Forms : Steel or wood for each type of use of size
and strength to resist movement during concrete placement
and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until
removal . Use straight forms , free of distortion and
defects .
1 . Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated
boards to form radius bends as required.
2 . Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent
that will not discolor or deface the surface
of the concrete.
02528-1
B. Welded Wire Mesh : Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire
fabric, AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185 ) . •
C. Concrete shall be Portland Cement type , with a minimum
compressive strength of 2 ,500 psi at 28 days .
D. Work edges of slabs , gutters , back top edge of curb ,
and formed joints with an edging tool , and round 10
1/ 2" radius , unless otherwise indicated . Eliminate
any tool marks on concrete surface .
E. After completion of floating and when excess moisture
or surface sheen has disappeared broom finish sidewalks
by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface,
perpendicular to line of pedestrian traffic.
F. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has
been placed . After form removal , clean ends of joints
and point-up any minor honeycombed areas .
3 .06 CURING : Protect and cure finished concrete paving and
walks , complying with applicable requirements of Section
03100. Use moist-curing methods for initial curing whenever
possible or approved concrete curing compounds .
3 .07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS :
A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete , as
directed by Engineer .
B. Drill test cores where directed by Engineer , when
necessary to deterine magnitude of cracks or defective
areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement
areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement
with epoxy resin grout.
C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work .
When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement
as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials as they occur .
D . Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains and
discolorations , dirt and other foreign material just
prior to final inspection .
END OF SECTION
02528-2
SECTION 02577
PAVEMENT MARKING
FARI_1___GEMERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of pavement marking and striping is as
shown on the drawings .
1 .02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide certificates , signed by producer, certifying
that each material utilized complies with or exceeds
the requirements of this section.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . All work to be done in accordance with specified sections
( of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications .
1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Pavement Marking : Applies to stop bars , handicap
symbols and turn arrows as shown on plans.
B. Striping : Applies to stall 4" parking stripes and
centerline stripe as shown on the plans.
EARI_2___ER42!l4IE
2 .01 MATERIALS:
A . General : Marking and striping shall utilize traffic
paint meeting or exceeding requirements as specified
below .
1 . Striping materials shall comply with Sections
710-2 , 971 - 12 or 971 - 13 and 971 - 14 , of the 1982
Florida Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications.
02577-1
EABI_3._=_EXEQUIICIR
3 .01 PAVEMENT MARKING INSTALLATION :
A. General : Pavement marking consists of placing marking
as shown on plans to the pavement surface . The color
of compound shall be as specified in plans . Performed
materials which can be directly applied to the pavement
will be permitted as an alternate to the extruded
or sprayed application techniques for pavement messages
and transverse markings only.
B. Equipment : The installation equipment shall be of
the type specified in Section 711-3 in the F. D . O. T. Stand-
ard Specifications .
C. Application : The Marking application shall comply
with Section 711 -4 of the F.D.O.T. Standard Specification .
3 .02 STRIPING INSTALLATION :
A. General : Striping consists of painting 4" reflective
stripes as shown on plans to the pavement surface ,
utilizing traffic paint.
B. Equipment : The installation equipment shall be of
the type specified in Section 710-3 in the F.D.O.T. Stand-
ard Specifications .
C. Application : Alignment , tolerance in dimensions and
in alignment , application of paint , protection of
newly painted stripes and of traffic and corrective
measures shall be in accordance with Sections 710-4 ,
710-5 , 710-6 , 710-7 , and 710-8 respectively , of the
F. D. O. T. Standard Specifications.
END OF SECTION
02577-2
SECTION 02601
MANHOLES
EARI_1___DERER&L
1 .01 DESCRIPTION : Work under this section consists of furnishing
all materials , supplies and equipment in accordance with the
requirements set forth and as shown on the drawings .
PART_2_-_PRQpu1I.S
2 . 01 MANHOLES : Manholes shall be constructed of concrete and
shall have cast iron frames and covers . Invert channels shall
be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow
sh a I I be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as the
size of the manhole will permit. Steps or rungs shall not be
constructed in manholes unless indicated on the drawings.
A. Concrete : Concrete for manholes shall be made from
Type II cement , 4000 psi , compressive strength of
28'' days.
B . Frames and Covers : The manhole frames and covers
shall be of gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48 ,
Class 30, US Foundry USF655-U, . or equal , with SANITARY
SEWER cast into all covers so as to be plainly visible.
The frames and covers shall be set so that the top
of the cover will be flush with or higher than finished
grade or as directed .
C. Precast Concrete Manholes: Precast concrete manholes
shall be constructed in accordance with ASTM C478
and as shown on the drawings of concrete attaining
a minimum compression strength of 4000 psi in 28 days
using Type II cement. Details of design and construction
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to construction.
D. Joints are to be sealed with preformed flexible plastic
joint sealer conforming to Federal Specifications
SS-S-00211 , "Ram-Nek", as manufactured by K . T. Snyder
Co. , Houston, Texas.
E . Coatings : Manholes shall be shop coated inside and
out with two coats of Koppers Bitumastic No. 300- M
coal tar epoxy. The first coat shall be red and the
second coat black , each coat to have a minimum dry
film thickness of 8'. mils. The interior of the manhole
shall be coated prior to testing while the grout and
concrete are clean and dry.
02601 -1
EARI_L_=_EZFDU11QR
3 . 01 EXCAVATION FOR APPURTENANCES : Excavation for manholes
and similar structures shall be made to a size that wi l l al l ow
at feast 12 in . in the clear between their outer surfaces and
the embankment or sheeting or shoring which may: be used to hold
and protect the banks .
31.02 BACKFILLING : Backfilling around manholes shall be accomplished
in the same manner as the connected pipe and according to Section
02610 .
C
END OF SECTION
02601 -2
SECTION 02610
PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART. .1 . -. GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION : Work under this section consists of furnishing
all materials, , supplies, equipment and labor in accordance with
the requirements set forth herein and as shown on the drawings .
1 .02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS : The Work
under this Contract shall be in strict accordance with the following
codes and standards.
A. Local , county and municipal codes.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI ) .
D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) .
E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO) .
F. Florida Department of Transportation Specifications
(DOT) .
G. Federal Specifications.
H. United States Department of Commerce Commercial Standards
(CS )
I . All local government rules and regulations.
1 .03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT :
A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings,
materials and equipment shall be the standard product
of a manufacturer and shall comply with the Contract
Documents and applicable standards for such materials
or equipment.
B. Prior to the start of Work, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer a list of the manufacturers of all
equipment and materials to be incorporated in the
Work that conform to a standard, code or as specified .
02610-1
1 .04 WORKMANSHIP: All materials and equipment shall be installed
in accordance with the manufacturer' s instructions and to these
Contract Documents . The Contractor shall notify the Engineer
when the manufacturers instructions conflict wjth these specifi-
cations.
1 . 05 SITE MAINTENANCE : The Contractor shall take the necessary
steps to prevent objectionable blowing or drifting of dust ,
sand or other debris where the construction occurs in residential ,
commercial or other developed areas.
1 . 06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: The Contractor shall
provide space for storage of materials and equipment . Pipe
strung along roads and right-of-ways shall be placed in a manner
that wjli not endanger or restrict pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
1 . 07 OPEN TRENCH : The amount of open trench shall be limited
so that no more than 300 . feet of open trench in advance of the
backfilling operation will remain at the end of the working
day. All open trench shall be protected by the Contractor with
barriers , warning devices and traffic control devices , which
shall be kept in the correct position , . properly directed and
clearly visible at all times. The barrier, warning and traffic
control devices shall be suitably lighted at all times that
vehicular traffic lights are required.
PART_ 2_7_PR4DUeI.
201 PIPE AND FITTINGS :
A. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Gravity Wastewater
Collection System Applications :
1 . Ductile iron pipe for gravity sewers shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM A-746 . The pipe wall
thickness shall be adequate for Laying Condition
Type 2 for the depth of cover shown on the drawings,
in accordance wjth ASTM A-746.
2 . Fittings shal I conform to the requirements of
ANSI /AWWA C110/A21 . 10-82 .
3 . Joints shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C111 /A21 . 11 -85 .
02610-2
4 . Coatings : Interior surfaces shall be coated with
a bituminous lining of a minimum 1 -mil thickness,
in accordance with ANSII 21 . 51 -8 ; outside surfaces
shall have a minimum of 1 -mil thickness of a bituminous
coating.
B . Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe ( PVC) and Fittings for Water
Distribution Applications :
1 . Gasketed Joint Pipe :
a . Pipe 4' in . or larger in diameter shall conform
to the requirements as set forth in AWWA C900-81
with dimension ratio DR 1B' and shall bear
the National Sanitation Foundation seal for
potable water pipe. Provisions must be made
for contraction and expansion at each joint
with a rubber ring and an integral bell as
part of each joint, or by a rubber ring sealed '
coupling. Clean, reworked material generated
from the manufacturer ' s own pipe production
may be used. Fittings shall be cast or ductile
iron. Pipe shall have cast iron pipe equivalent
outside dimensions.
b . Pipe smal ler than 4. in . in diameter shall
conform to Commercial Standard CS 256 and
ASTM D-2241 . All pipe shall bear the National
Sanitation Foundation seal for potable water
pipe. Provisions shall be made for contraction
and expansion at each joint with a rubber
ring , and an integral bell as part of each
Joint , or by a rubber ring sealed coupling .
Pipe shall be made from SDR 21 , 200 psi clean ,
virgin NSF approved Type I , Grade 1 PVC conforming
to ASTM D-17841 Clean reworked material generated
from the manufacturer ' s own pipe production
may : be used . Fittings for pipe smaller than
4 in. in diameter sh a l l be PVC.
2 . Solvent Welded Joint PVC Pipe and Fittings : The
pipe shall conform with the requirements of ASTM
D- 1785: for IPS rigid polyvinyl chloride ( PVC )
p l a s t i c pipe , Type I , Grade 2i, Schedule 80 . No
solvent welded joint PVC pipe larger than 2( in . in
diameter shall be used except as Indicated on
the drawings.
02610-3(
C. PVC Pipe and Fittings for Gravity Wastewater Collection
System Applications : The pipe and fittings shall
comply wjth ASTM Specification D-3034. The pipe shall
have a maximum SDR ratio of 35 . Joints shall be integral
wall bell and spigot. Sealing shall be provided with
a rubber ring to a material that will not deteriorate
when exposed to domestic sewage . The rubber ring
shall be secured in the bell in a manner that will
prevent sliding or rolling . Details of design and
construction shall be approved by the Engineer prior
to instailation.
2 .02 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES :
A. Gate Valves :
1 . General : Gate valves 3 to 12 inches diameter
shall be designed for 200 psi minimum working
pressure . Valves over 12 inches in diameter shall
be designed for 150 psi minimum working pressure .
When fu l I open , gate valves shall have a clear
waterway equal to the nominal diameter of the
pipe . The operating nut or wheel shall have an
arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction
of opening. Each valve shalt have the manufacturer' s
distinctive marking , pressure rating and year
of manufacture cast on the body . Prior to shipment
from the factory , each valve shall be tested by
applying to it a hydraulic pressure equal to twice
the specified working pressure.
2 . Buried Valves : Buried gate valves larger than
2linches in size shall be iron body bronze moutned,
double disc, parallel seat, bronze wedge, nonrising
stem type wjth operating nuts and adjustable valve
boxes and covers . Operating nuts shall be two
inches square . In lieu of the double disc gate
valve a resilient seat or wedge gate valve with
iron body nonrising stem type wjth two- inch operating
nust and adjustable valve boxes and covers may
be used. Both double disc parallel and resilient
seat or wedge type gate valves shall conform to
applicable sections of AWWA Standards C500 double
disc. C509 resilient seat.
02610-4
3 . Above Ground Valves : Gate valves located above
ground and inside structures shall be handwheel
operated , non- rising stem type with flanged ends
and of the same general construction as buried
valves.
4 . Valve Joints: All gate valves should have mechanical
ends , flanged ends , or screw joints to fit the
pipe run in which they are used , except valves
installed on slip joint pipe shall have mechanical
joint unless otherwise specified.
5 . Valves 2 inches and smaller: gate valves 2 inches
and smaller, unless otherwise noted on the plans ,
shall be all bronze valves and shall conform to
the requirements of Federal Specification WW- V-54;
Type I , Class A . All gate valves 2 inches and
smaller shall be handwheel operated and if installed
below ground shall have adjustable valve box with
cover. Minimum weight of valves shall be as follows :
Valve Size Valve Weight
ln_InQI1Q�_ ln_PQlln��___
1 /2 1 .0
3/4 1 .3
1 2 .5 .
1 -1 /4 3 .8
1 -1 /2 5 .2
2 8.4'
6 . Hydrostatic and Leakage Test : Hydrostatic and
Leakage Tests shall be conducted in strict accordance
with AWWA C500 , Section 28, latest.
B. Valve Boxes :
1 . General : The Contractor shall furnish, assemble
and place a valve box for each buried valve.
02610-5
2 . Valve Boxes : Adjustable valve boxes of suitable
length shall be used, having cast iron base, center
section and top section with cover . Cover shall
be marked "Water". The top section shall be adjustable
for elevation and shall be set to allow equal
movement above and below finished grade . The
base shall be centered over the valve and shall
be approximately on line with nut at top of valve
stem and the entire assembly shall be plumb .
The castings shall be manufactured of clean, even
grain, gray cast iron conforming to ASTM Designation
A48 . Class 20B, Gray Iron Castings ; and shall
be smooth , true to pattern, free from blow holes,
sand holes, projections, , or other harmful defects .
The valve boxes shall be coated with a single
thin coat of coal tar pitch varnish before machining,
so that machine seating surfaces will be free
of any coating . The seating surfaces of both
the cover and the jacket shall be machined to
fit so that the cover w ,i I I not rock after it has
been seated in any position in its associated
jacket. Box assemblies shall be Clow No. F-2450 ,
or approved equal .
EABI_3__=_EXEQUIlal
3 . 01 EXCAVATION : The Contractor shall perform all excavation
of every description and of whatever substances encountered
to the depths indicated on the drawings or as necessary . This
shall include all necessary cleaning and grubbing of any foreign
substance encountered within the structure or trench area .
Excavated material suitable for backfill shall be piled in an
orderly manner at a sufficient distance from the trench to prevent
slides or cave- ins .
A. Protection of Existing Facilities and Utilities :
All existing improvements such as pavements, conduit,
poles, pipes and other structures, . sha I l be caref u l l y
supported and fully protected from injury and , in
case of damage, . they shal I be restored by the Contractor
without compensation . Existing utilities and other
underground obstructions are shown on the plans , but
the accuracy of the locations and depths is not guar-
anteed . The Contractor shall contact the utility
prior to construction and arrange for the necessary
assistance in locating and protecting the existing
utilities . The Contractor shall be responsible for
damages to these existing utilities and shall , in
case they are damaged , restore them to their original
condition .
02610-6 .
B. Trench Excavation : The minimum width of the trench
sh a l I be equal to the outside diameter of the pipe
at the Joint plus 8' In. each side of pipe for unsheeted
or sheeted trench , with the maximum width of trench ,
measured at the top of the pipe , not to exceed the
outside pipe diameter, plus 24 in . , unless otherwise
shown on the drawings. Trench walls shall be maintained
vertical from the bottom of the trench to a line measured
at the top of the pipe. From the top of the pipe
to the surface the trench walls shall be as vertical
as possible under soil conditions.
No more than 300 linear feet of trench shall be open
in advance of the completed pipe laying operation
without prior approval of the Engineer. Pipe trenches
across roadways and driveways shall be backf i I led
as soon as pipe is installed . Where, in the opinion
of the Engineer, adequate detour facilities are not
available, no trench sh a l l be left open across a roadway
or commercial property driveway where adequate detour
routes are not available for a period in excess of
30 .minutes, . or as directed by the governing authority .
No trench shall be left open across any roadway or
driveway for more than 24: hours.
C. Shoring , . Sheeting a'nd Bracing : The Contractor shall
do all shoring, sheeting and bracing or provide other
approved facilities required to perform and protect
the excavation and as necessary for the safety of
the public, the employees, and the preservation of
existing roads , structures and other utilities. The
top of such sheeting left in place shall be cut off
at a minimum elevation of 2 .5 ft below finished grade .
D. Pavement Removal : The Contractor shal I remove pavements
as part of the trench excavation . The material from
permanent pavement removal shall be carefully separated
from trench excavation material and disposed of by
the Contractor.
02610-7;
E. Boulder Removal : All rocks, stones, boulders or concrete,
having any dimension larger than permitted to be used
for backfill in the paragraph entitled "Backf i l I i ng "
of these specifications , shall be removed from the
site and disposed of by the Contractor.
F . Disposal of Excess Materials : The Contractor shall
dispose of the excavated materials not required or
suitable for backfill . All surplus excavated material
which is suitable for fill shall become property of
the Contractor, and shall be disposed of by the Contractor
at his expense.
G. Unstable Soil Conditions and Overdepth Excavation :
Where unstable soil conditions are encountered , the
excavation shall be increased as directed by the Engineer.
The bottom of the excavation shall be brought up to
the proper excavation elevation utilizing suitable
and properly compacted backfill material .
3602 INSTALLATION OF FORCE MAINS AND WATER MAINS: Unless otherwise
noted on the drawings or in other sections of this specification,
the pipe shall be handled and installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer ' s instructions and with the applicable
AWWA or ASTM Standards . If a conf l ict exists between the manu-
facturer ' s instructions and the AWWA or ASTM Standards , the
manufacturer' s instructions shall govern.
A. Cast Iron Pipe - AWWA C-600
B. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe - ASCE Manual No. 37;
ASTM D2321 .
The Contractor shall use every precaution during construction
to protect the pipe against the entry of nonpotable water, dirt,
wood , small animals and any other foreign material that would
hinder the operation of the pipeline . Where the groundwater
elevation is above the bottom of the trench , the Contractor
shall provide suitable dewatering equipment. All piping shall
be placed in a dry trench , unless wet trench installation is
approved by the Engineer.
A. Depth of Cover : Unless otherwise shown on the drawings,
or otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the pipe
shall have a minimum depth of 30 in.
B. Concrete Thrust and Support Blocking : Thrust blocks
shall be installed as required to properly restrain
all piping systems. At a minimum, thrust blocks shall
02610-8
be provided on all below-grade piping and fittings
at the point where either a horizontal or vertical
change in direction occurs.
For above-grade piping , all valves and fittings shall
be provided with concrete support blocks . Support
blocks shall be designed according to the requirements
shown on the plans.
C. Connections to Existing Mains : The Contractor shall
make connections to existing mains as shown on the
drawings. Connections shall be made only after arrange-
ments have been completed by the Contractor with the
Owner of the system and shall be under the system
Owner ' s immediate supervision.
D. Leakage Test : Leakage and pressure tests shall be
conducted in the presence of the Engineer. The Engineer
will provide a suitable pressure gage for the test.
The Contractor will provide all other necessary apparatus
including a pump, flow measuring device, .piping connections
and fittings and the necessary labor to conduct the
tests. The test shall be of two hour duration. During
the test, the pipe being tested shall be maintained
at a pressure of not less than 150 psi . During the
second test, the piping being tested shall be maintained
at operating pressure. Leakage is defined as the
quantity of water added to the pipe being tested during
the test period . No pipe installation will be accepted
if the leakage exceeds the quantities specified in
AWWA C-600, Section 4:2 . The Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer the testing pattern he proposes to
follow prior to testing for the Engineer' s approval .
E. Flushing of Completed Pipelines : Following the leakage
test , each section of completed pipeline shalt be
as thoroughly flushed as possible . A minimum flow
shalt be used for flushing that will insure a velocity
in the pipe of 2 . 5: ft per second . Water required
for testing and flushing shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The water shall be from a potable water
source satisfactory to the Owner.
F. Disinfection of Complete Pipeline: Following flushing,
the Contractor shall disinfect all water distribution
mains and service lines as follows . Water shall be
fed slowly into the system applying sufficient chlorine
to produce a dosage in excess of 50 ppm at the farthest
02610-9
point in the system from the point of application .
The chlorine solution then shall be retained in the
Iine for a period of 24 hours. At the end of this
time if a minimum chlorine residual of 5 ppm is not
obtained , the procedure shall be repeated . During
the disinfection process all valves shall be operated .
After disinfection , the water shall be flushed from
the system at its extremities until excessive chlorine
residuals are eliminated. Water samples for bacterio-
logical examination shall be taken as directed by
the Division of Health and submitted to the nearest
approved bacteriological laboratory . Disinfection
shall not be considered satisfactory until laboratory
reports are satisfactory to the Division of Health.
G . Water for Disinfection , Testing and Flushing: Water
required for disinfection, testing and flushing shall
be furnished by the Contractor. The water shall be
from a potable water source satisfactory to the Owner.
The cost of the water shall be included in the unit
cost of the pipe and no separate payment will be made
for this item.
3 .03 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE INSTALLATION :
A. Manufacturer ' s Instructions: Gravity sewer pipe shall
be handled , stored and installed in strict accordance
with the pipe manufacturer ' s instructions . A copy
of the manufacturer ' s instructions shall be kept at
the site of the work at all times by the Contractor.
B. Pipe Laying : The trench shall be excavated as specified
and the bottom of the trench shal I be shaped to give
sufficient uniform circumferential support to the
lower one- fourth of each pipe . Pipe laying shall
proceed upgrade. Each pipe shall be laid true to
line and grade . As the work progresses, the interior
of the pipe shall be cleaned of all dirt and superfluous
materials.
Where cleaning of the pipe after laying is difficult
because of the small diameter, the Contractor sh a l l
keep a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and shall
pull the swab forward past each Joint immediately
after the Jointing operation . At all times when the
Work is not in progress on the sewer lines, the Contractor
shal I securely seal the open ends of all pipes in
order to prevent the entrance of foreign matter .
( Stoppers sha l l be installed in the ends of all services.
02610-10
In the event that it is necessary to clean the pipe
by flushing with water, no water or debris shall be
permitted to enter an existing or previously approved
sewer. Under no conditions shall the water and debris
be removed with Iift station pumps or discharged into
or through force mains.
C. Jointing : The bell and spigot surfaces shall be wiped
free of dust, dirt, gravel or other foreign materials
before the application of the l ubri cant sealer. The
resilient coupling shall be connected by first brushing
upon the mating surfaces, the proper lubricant sealer
as recommended by the pipe manufacturers. The spigot
end shall then be centered on grade into the bell
end of the last downstream pipe length and shoved
home and properly seated with the application of a
moderate force by a pry or lever device . The pipes
shall be jointed not later than five minutes after
the application of the lubricant sealer . Jointing
for connections with existing mains , or other special
joints, shall be approved by the Engineer before use.
The Contractor shall submit his Jointing program ,
including materials and methods proposed, to the Engineer
for approval prior to starting work.
D. Wye and Tee Branches and House Services : The Contractor
shall install wye or tee branches where sewer connections
are indicated on the drawings or are required by the
Engineer . Details of branch instailations are shown
on the drawings.
E. Connections to Existing Manholes : Pipe connections
to existing manholes shall be made so that finished
work will conform as nearly as possible to essential
requirements for new manhole construction.
F . It is the responsibility of the Contractor to install
the sewer pipe as shown on the plans. The Contractor
shall survey the newly installed I i ne before backf I l l i ng
to determine the actual invert elevations of the pipe.
If the calculated slope is below the minimum acceptable
requirements , the Contractor shall remove and relay
the sewer pipe at his own expense before further instal-
lation continues . The Contractor shall submit the
as-built information to the Engineer at the end of
each work day . This information will be included
in the daily inspection report.
02610-11
3 .04 GRAVITY SEWER TESTING :
A. The Contractor shall perform testing of all sanitary
gravity sewers as set forth in the following and shall
conduct such tests in the presence of the Engineer
and other authorized agencies, with five days advance
written notice provided.
B. The installed sewers shall be visually inspected by
" lamping" between manholes, lampholes or other structures
in order to ascertain that they are clear and to correct
alignment. The concentricity of the lamp image received
shall be such that the diameter of said image shall
have no vertical or horizontal reduction from that
of the pipe inside diameter.
C. Sanitary sewers shall be tested within sections as
previously approved by the Engineer . Testing shall
not proceed until all facilities are complete in place
and the concrete is cured. All piping shall be thoroughly
cleaned prior to testing to clear the lines of all
foreign matter.
D. The watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying
below groundwater level shall be tested by measuring
the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having
a crown 1 - in . or more above groundwater level shall
be tested by filling the pipe with water to produce
a hydrostatic head of 2 ft or more above the crown
of the sewer at the upper end of the test section
or the water table outside of the sewer , whichever
is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration . In
no case shal I the i of i I tration or exfiltration exceed
0 . 6 gallons/ inch of diameter/hour/ 1000 . feet of line
when field tested by actual inf i l tration conditions.
If exfiltration testing is required an allowance of
an additional 10 percent of gallonage shall be permitted
for each additional 2-ft head over a basic 2-ft minimum
internal head.
Testing shall proceed for a continuous period of eight
hours with exfiltration or i of i ltration amounts measured
by methods approved by the Engineer. Upon application
of internal hydrostatic pressure for exfiitration
testing , care shall be taken to preclude unseating
the Joint gaskets for a specific type of pipe by exceeding
the pressure capability thereof .
02610-12
The Contractor may use , as an alternate leakage test,
air testing by compressed air from manhole to manhole .
Plugs , caps and branch connections must be secured
against blow-off during the test. The pipe and manholes
shall be free of water during the test.
The air testing shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM C-828 for vitrified clay pipe of sizes 4' in. through
12 in . only . For all other sizes and pipe materials,
the exf i l tration or infiltration test previously described
shall be used.
E. Should the test fail , necessary repairs shall be accomp-
lished by the Contractor and the test repeated until
wjthin the established limits . The Contractor shall
furnish the necessary labor, water and all other items
required to conduct the required testing and shall
perform the necessary system repairs required to comply
with the specified test.
F. Television or photographic camera inspection will
be required of all gravity sewers, except house service
connections , where indicated in the Schedule of Bid
Items . The Contractor shall provide all equipment
and labor for such inspection. If photographic inspection
is required , photographs shall be taken at intervals
of 2I ft. The film shall be developed by the Contractor
and after review by the Engineer it shall be delivered
to the Owner. Television inspection shall be observed
by the Engineer or inspector.
G . PVC Pipe shall be tested by a "go-no-go" plug device
permitting no greater than the maximum five percent
deflection . At least ten percent of the pipe shall
be tested with the selection of time and location
to be made by the Engineer . All pipe not passing
the five percent deflection limitation test shall
be removed and replaced at the Contractor ' s expense .
At the discretion of the Engineer , should deflection
be excessive, 100 percent of the pipe may be tested.
3 .05 BACKFILLING :
A. Material : Shall be excavated material , essentially
free of organic material , asphaltic concrete , clay ,
concrete, boulders and other deleterious material .
1 . Bedding and Pipe Embedment : The material in the
bedding , around the pipe and to a depth of 1 ft
02610-13
over the pipe shal I be sand or a mixture of sand,
shell or crushed rock properly graded and mixed
so that fine grain material from the side walls
of the trench or backfill above the embedment
will not migrate into the backfill material . The
backfill shall meet the following limitations :
a . Cast Iron or Ductile Iron Pipe - All material
shall pass through a 3/ 4 in . square opening
laboratory sieve.
b . Clay Pipe - All material shall pass through
a 3/4 in. square opening laboratory sieve.
c. Plastic Pipe - All materials shall pass through
a 1 / 2 in . square opening laboratory sieve
for water mains and force mains. All material
shall pass through a 3/4 in . square opening
laboratory sieve for gravity sewers.
2 . Above Pipe Embedment : The material shall be sand
or a mixture of sandy material and rock , stone
and shell . Rock, . stone and shell shall pass through
a 37-1 /2 in. ring.
3 . Additional Fill : If sufficient suitable backfill
material is not available from the excavation ,
additional fill meeting the above requirements
shall be provided by the Contractor.
B. Placing and Compaction :
1 . Gravity Sewers :
a . Bedding and Pipe Embedment : The backfill
shall be placed by hand under and around the
pipe to the springline and compacted. Particular
care shall be taken to ensure that the backfill
at the pipe haunch is free from voids and
is properly compacted . The backf i I I shall
be compacted to a density of not less than
100% of maximum as determined by AASHTO T-
99 .
b . Above Pipe Embedment : The backfill shall be
placed in layers having a depth that will
permit proper compaction . The backfill shall
be compacted to a density of not less than
100% of maximum as determined by AASHTO T-99..
02610-14
c . Miscellaneous : Backfilling around manholes,
cleanouts and other structures shall be accom-
plished in the same manner as the connected
pipe. Extreme care shall be used in backfilling
weilpoint holes to prevent voids and settlement.
If necessary , the holes should be plugged
with concrete , such plugging to be at the
expense of the Contractor.
d . Compaction : Shall be by hand or by mechanical
tampers . Care shall be taken that the pipe
is not struck by the tamper. Compaction by
flooding may be allowed by written authorization
of the Engineer although this will not release
the Contractor of the responsibility to meet
the required density.
e . The Contractor is to compact the backfill
in such a manner to prevent settlement. Although
the requirements of 3.03imay be met, . nonsettl ement
is not assured and Contractor is not relieved
of his responsibility by such compliance.
f . PVC Pipe shall be laid and backfil led so that
pipe deflection does not exceed five percent.
g. Density Tests : Contractor shal I perform density
test at the following locations :
1 . At each manhole
2 . At a point halfway between manholes
2 . Water Distribution Mains and Force Mains :
a . Under Pavement : Where the excavation is made
through existing or proposed pavements, including
shoulders , curbs , driveways or sidewalks ,
or where such structures are penetrated by
wellpoints, the entire backfill to the subgrade
of the pavement or structures shall be made
with predominantly sandy material free from
rock , stones or organic matter , except that
rocks passing a 34- 1/2 in. ring will be permitted
in the backfill between the elevation one
foot above the top of the pipe and the bottom
of the pavement subgrade.
The entire backfill material , including the
material placed around and one foot above
the pipe , shal I be compacted to a density
0261 0-1 5
of not less than 100% of the maximum density,
as determined by AASHTO T- 99 . Particular
care shall be taken to insure that the backfill
at the haunch is free from voids and is properly
compacted . Compaction by flooding or puddling
will be permitted only by written authorization
from the Engineer.
Roads, . walks and driveways consisting of broken
stone, gravel , marl , . she II , . shellrock , or
a conglomerate of such materials are not considered
as being permanent pavement.
b . In Areas Not Under Permanent Pavement: Within
✓ ight-of-ways or other areas where permanent
pavement does not exist or is not proposed ,
including roads, walks and driveways consisting
of broken stone, gravel , marl , shell , , sheilrock
or conglomerate, the entire backfill to the
subgrade of the pavement or structures shall
be made with predominantly sandy material
free from rock , . stones or organic matter ,
except that rocks having a maximum dimension
of 6'. in . will be permitted in the backf i I I
between the elevation 1 ft above the top of
the pipe and 1 ft below the surface. Particular
care shall be taken to insure that the backfill
at the haunch is free from voids and is properly
compacted . The bedding and embedment shall
be compacted to a density of not less than
100 percent of maximum as determined by AASHTO
T-99. The backfill material above 1 ft over
the pipe shal I be compacted to a density of
not less than 85. percent of the maximum density,
as determined by AASHTO T- 99 . Compaction
by flooding or puddling will be permitted
only by written authorization from the Engineer.
c. Miscellaneous : Backfilling around meter boxes,
✓ alve boxes and other structures shall be
accomplished in the same manner as the connected
pipe. Extreme care shall be used in backfilling
wellpoint holes to prevent voids and settlement.
If necessary , the holes should be plugged
w ith a concrete slurry , such plugging to be
at the expense of the Contractor.
02610-16 .
d . Compaction Tests : The Engineer may at any
time instruct the Contractor to partially
excavate a previously backfilled trench or
temporarily backfilling of a short section
of the trench for the purpose of obtaining
measurements of the density of the backf i l I .
The testing will be paid for by the Contractor.
The cost of the partial excavation and restoration
of the backf i I I w i l l be paid for by the Con-
tractor . Any test failures will be paid by
Contractor . Density tests shall be taken
along the pipe (maximum distance between tests
shall be 300 . feet) .
3 . 06 CULVERT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT: Culverts, catch basins
and other drainage structures that are removed or damaged during
construction shall be replaced with materials and structures
equal and similar to those removed or damaged . Manhole covers
and gratings shall be set at the original elevations unless
otherwise directed.
The Contractor shal I take precautions against the entry of excavated
and other loose material resulting from his operations from
entering catch basins, culverts and other drainage structures
in the vicinity of his operations. He shall maintain the cleanliness
of these drainage structures in a condition equal to that prior
to the commencement of his operations during the construction .
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to persons,
roads, , buildings , vehicles and other property resulting from
the failure of the Contractor to maintain these drainage structures.
3(. 07 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES, STRUCTURES AND PROPERTY :
Where pavement, trees, shrubbery , fences or other property and
surface structures not designated as pay items, have been damaged,
removed or disturbed by the Contractor whether deliberately
or through failure to carry out the requirements of the contract
documents , state laws, municipal ordinances or the specific
direction of the Engineer, or through fai l ure to employ usual
and reasonable safeguards, such property and surface structures
shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the Contractor
to a condition equal to that before Work began within a time
frame approved by the Engineer.
31. 08 PROTECTION : At the end of each workday the mains under
construction shall be plugged to prevent the entry of small animals
or rodents. Temporary plugs shall be provided for this purpose.
3 .09 CLEANUP : The Contractor shall maintain the site of the
Work in a neat condition. The Contractor shall remove all excess
materials, excess excavated materials and all debris resulting
from his operations within a time frame approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
02610-17:
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE WORK
I'_ARI_L__QENERALI
1 :01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Work included :
The extent of concrete work shown on drawings .
B. Related documents:
1 . Section 02528 - Concrete Walks
2 . Section 07100 - Waterproofing & Damproofing ( Vapor
Barrier )
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Codes and Standards : Comply with provisions of fol lowing
codes , specifications and standards , except where
more stringent requirements are shown or specified :
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings".
A C I 318 " B u i l d i n g Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete ".
ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Framework" .
ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete".
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard
Practice".
B. Concrete Testing Service : The Owner shall employ
a testing laboratory to perform material evaluation
tests ; all retests shail be paid for by Contractor
as well as design concrete mixes.
C. Materials and installed work may require testing and
retesting , as directed by Architect, at anytime during
progress of work. Allow free access to materiai stockpiles
a n d f a c i l i t i e s . Tests, not specifically indicated
to be done at Owner ' s expense , including retesting
of rejected materials and instal led work , shall be
done at Contractor ' s expense.
03100-1
1 . 03ISUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s product data
w ith application and installation instructions for
proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement
and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds,
joint systems, curing compounds, and others as requested
by Architect.
B. Shop Drawings , Reinforcement : Submit shop drawings
for fabrication , bending , and placement of concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures "
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing , diagrams of
bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement .
Include special reinforcement required and openings
through concrete structures.
C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports
for concrete materials and mix design test as specified.
D. Material Certificates : Provide materials certificates
in llieu of materials laboratory test reports when
permitted by Architect . Material certificates shall
be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying
that each material item complies with , or exceeds ,
specified requirements.
EASI_2_=_ERDD11CIS
2 .01 FORM MATERIALS:
A. Forms for exposed finish concrete : Unless otherwise
indicated , construct formwork for exposed concrete
surfaces with plywood , metal , metal - framed plywood
faced or other acceptable panel - type materials , to
provide continuous, straight, , smooth, exposed surfaces.
Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number
of joints and to conform to joint system shown on
drawings . Provide form materials with sufficient
thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete
w ithout bow or deflection.
B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete : Form concrete
surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure
w ith plywood, lumber, metal l or other acceptable material .
Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one
side for tight fit.
03100-2
C. Cylindrical Columns and Supports : Form round-section
members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of
laminated plies using water- resistant adhesive with
wax- impregnated exterior for weather and moisture
protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness
to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without defor-
mation.
D. Form Coatings : Provide commercial formulation form-
coating compounds that wiil not bond wjth , stain nor
adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair
subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2 .02 REINFORCING MATERIALS:
A. Reinforcing Bars ( ReBar ) : ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Welded Wire Fabric ( WWF ) : ANSi /ASTM A185 , welded
steel wire fabric.
C. Supports for Reinforcement : Provide supports for
reinforcement including bolsters , chairs , . spacers
and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place .
Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommen-
dations, unless otherwjse acceptable.
2 .03( CONCRETE MATERIALS :
A. Portland Cement : ANSi/ASTM C150, Type 1 , unless otherwise
acceptable to Architect.
Use one brand of cement throughout project , unless
otherwjse acceptable to Architect.
B. Normal Weight Aggregates : ANSI /ASTM C33 , and as herein
specified . Provide aggregates from a single source
for exposed concrete.
Local aggregates not complying with ANSI /ASTM C33
but which have shown by special test or actual service
to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability
may be used when acceptable to the Architect.
C. Water : Potable.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture : ANSI /ASTM C260 .
E. Water- Reducing Admixture : ANSI /ASTM C494 , Type A, .
and contain not more than 1 % chloride ions.
03100-31
1 . Available Products : Subject to compliance with
requirements , products which may be incorporated
in the work inciude , but are not I imited to ,
the following :
"Eucon WR-75" ; Euclid Chemical Co.
"Pozzolith 322N"; Master Builders
"Plastocrete 160" ; Sike Chemical Corp.
"Chemtard" ; Chem-Masters Corp .
F. Water Reducing , Accelerator Admixture : ASTM C494 ,
Type C or E.
1 . Available Products : Subject to compliance with
requirements, products which may be incorporated
in the work include , but are not limited to ,
the fol lowing :
"Accelguard HE"; Euclid Chemical Co.
"Pozzolith 122-HE"; Master Builders
"Darex" ; W . R. Grace
"Sikacrete" ; Sika Chemical Co.
G. Water- Reducing , Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494 , Type
D, and contain not more than 1 % chloride ions.
1 . Available Products : Subject to compliance with
requirements, . products which may be incorporated
in the work include , but are not I imited to,
the following :
"Pozzolith 300-R"; Master Builders
"Eucon Retarder 75" ; Euclid Chemical Co.
"Daratard" ; W. R. Grace
"Plastiment" ; Sika Chemical Co.
H. Calcium chloride not permitted.
2 .04 RELATED MATERIALS:
A. Non-shrink grout : CRD-C 588, factory pre-mixed grout.
1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the fol lowing :
Type D, . Non-metallic
"Masterflor 713" ; Master Builders
"Sonogrout" ; Sonneborn-Contech
"Euco-NS" ; Euclid Chemical Co.
"Five Star Grout" ; U. S. Grout Co.
"Duragrout" ; L $ M Const. Chemical Co.
03100-4
B. Absorptive Cover : Burlap cloth made from jute or
kenaf , weighing approximately 9 oz per sq. yd. , complying
w j th AASHTO M182 , Class 2 .
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover : One of the following, complying
with ANSI /ASTM C171 .
Waterproof paper.
Polyethylene film.
Polyethylene-coated burlap.
D. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound : Liquid type
membrane forming curing compound with ANSi /ASTM C309,
Type 1 , Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect.
1 . Available Products : Subject to compliance with
requirements , products which may be incorporated
in the work include , but are not limited to ,
to the following :
"Masterseai " ; Master Builders.
"A-H 3t Way Sealer"; Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co.
"Ecocure" ; Euclid Chemical Co.
"Clear Seal " ; W. R. Grade
"Sealkure" ; Toch Div . - Carboline
"Kure-N- Seal "; Sonneborn-Contech
"Polyclear"; Upco Chemical / USM Corp.
"L&M Cure" ; L & M Construction Chemciais
"Klearseai " ; Setcon Industries
"LR-1 51 !" ; Protex industries
"Hardtop" ; Gifford Hiil .
E. Bonding Compound : Poiyvinyi acetate, rewettable type .
1 . Available Products : Subject to compliance with
requirements , products which may be incorporated
in the work include , but are not limited to ,
to the fol lowing :
"Weidcrete" ; Larson Products
"Everbond" ; L&M Construction Chemicals
"EucoWeld" ; Euclid Chemical Co.
"Daraweld C" ; W. R. Grace
"Sonocrete" ; Sonneborn-Contech
F. Epoxy Adhesive : 100% soiids , two component material
suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.
03100-5
1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following :
"Th i opoxy "; W. R. Grace
"Sikadur Hi-Mod"; Sika Chemical Corp.
"Euco Epoxy "; Euclid Chemical Co.
G. Expansion Joint Filler :
1 . Provide preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient
bituminous type, of thickness indicated, complying
with ASTM D1751 .
2 . If sealants specified in Section 07920 are used
in the joint built under this Section, provide
a filler complying with ASTM D1752�
2 .05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES :
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of
concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods as specified in ACI 301 . If trial
batch method used, use an independent testing faci l ity
acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs . The testing facility shall
not be the same as used for field quality control
testing unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed
mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior
to start of work . Do not begin concrete production
until mixes have been reviewed by Architect/Owner.
C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with
the following properties , as indicated on drawings
and schedules :
1 . 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; 480 lbs. cement
per cu . yd . minimum ; W/C ratio, 0 .55: maximum.
03100-6
D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes : Mix design adjustments
may be requested by Contractor when characteristics
of materials, job conditions, weather, test results,
or other circumstances warrant ; at no additional cost
to Owner and as accepted by Architect . Laboratory
test data for revised mix design and strength results
must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before
using in work.
E. Admixtures :
1 . Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs
placed at ambient temperatures below 500F ( 100C) .
2 . Use air- entraining admixture in all concrete .
Add air- entraining admixture at manufacturer ' s
prescribed rate to result in concrete at point
of placement having air content within following
limits :
All concrete structures and slabs.
3%. to 6% .
3 . Use admixture for water- reducing and set-control
in strict compliance with manufacturer' s directions.
F. Slump Limits : Proportion and design mixes to result
in concrete slump at point of piacement as follows :
Concrete: Not less than 3" and not more than 5 " .
2 .06' CONCRETE MIXES :
A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate
drum type batch machine mixer . For mixers of one
cu . yd . , . or smailer capacity, continue mixing at least
1 -1 /2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingre-
dients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released .
For mixers of capacity larger than one cu . yd. , increase
minimum 1 - 1 /21minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional cu. yd . , or fraction thereof .
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and
used in work, indicating project identification name
and number , date , mix type , mix time, quantity , and
amount of water introduced .
B. Ready-Mix Concrete : Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM
C94 , and as herein specified .
03100-7:
Delete references for allowing additional water to
be added to batch for material with insufficient slump .
Addition of water to the batch will not be Permitted .
During hot weather , or under conditions contributing
to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time
than specified in ANSI /ASTM C94 may be required.
When air temperature is between 850F ( 300C) and 900F
( 320C ) , reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 - 1 / 2
hours to 7 . minutes, and when air temperature is above
900F ( 320C ) , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes .
EBBI_�___EXEEUI14N
3 .01 FORMS :
A. Design , erect , support, brace and maintain formwork
to support vertical and lateral loads that might be
applied until such loads can be supported by concrete
structure . Construct formwork so concrete members
and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,
elevation and position.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact,
shock or damage to cast- in- place concrete surfaces
and adjacent materials.
C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions
shown, and to obtain accurate alignment , locations,
grades, level and plumb work in finished structures .
Provide for openings , offsets , sinkages, keyways,
recesses, moldings , rustications , reglets , chamfers ,
blocking , screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts,
and other features required in work . Use selected
materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt
joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage
of cement paste.
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering
or prying against concrete surfaces . Provide crush
plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage
cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete
with bottom forms only . Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets , recesses , and the like , to prevent
swelling and for easy removal .
03100-8
E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection
before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete.
Secureiy brace temporary openings and set tightly
to forms to prevent ioss of concrete mortar. Locate
temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations .
F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, . using
wood, metal , PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated
to produce uniform smooth sines and tight edge joints.
G. Form Ties : Factory- fabricated , adjustabie- iength ,
removable or snapoff metal form ties , designed to
prevent form deflection, and to prevent spailing concrete
surfaces upon removai .
Unless otherwise indicated , provide ties so portion
remaining within concrete after removal is at ieast
1 -1 /2" inside concrete.
Unless otherwise shown , provide form ties which will
not leave holes iarger than 1 " diameter in concrete
surface .
H. Provisions for Other Trades : Provide openings in
concrete formwork to accomodate work of other trades .
Determine size and iocation of openings , recesses
and chases from trades providing such items. Accurateiy
place and secureiy support items buiit into forms.
I . Cleaning and Tightening : Thoroughiy ciean forms and
adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips ,
wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just befor concrete
is placed . Retighten forms and bracing after concrete
placement is required to eliminate mortar teaks and
maintain proper alignment.
3 .02 PLACING REiNFORCEMENT:
A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steei Insitute ' s
recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars",
for deta i i s and methods of reinforcement placement
and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of ioose rust and miil scale ,
earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy
bond w j th concrete.
03100-9
C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement
against displacement by formwork, construction , or
concrete piacement operations . Locate and support
reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers,
and hangers, as required.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages
required for concrete protection . Arrange , space
and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforce-
ment in position during concrete placement operations .
Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete ,
not toward exposed concrete surfaces .
E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as prac-
ticabie. Lap adjoining pieces at least 12■ inches
and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent
widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction .
31.03 JOINTS :
A. Construction Joints : Locate and instail construction
joints, which are not shown on drawings , . so as not
to impair strength and appearance of the structure,
as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide keyways at ieast 1 - 1 /2" deep in construction
joints in wails, slabs and between wal is and footings ;
accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be
used for siabs.
C. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main
reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct isolation
joints in slabs-on-ground at points of contact between
slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestais.
3 .04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED iTEMS :
A. General : Set and build into work anchorage devices
and other embedded items required for other work that
is attached to, or supported by, cast- in-place concrete.
Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions
provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs : Set edge
forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips
for siabs to obtain required elevations and contours
03100- 10
in finished slab surface . Provide and secure units
sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips
by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting
type screeds.
3(.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES :
A. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating
compound before reinforcement is placed .
B. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent
of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-
coating compound manufacturer ' s directions . Do not
allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in
forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces
against which fresh concrete will be placed . Apply
in compliance with manufacturer ' s instructions.
3(.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
A. Prep ' acement Inspection : Before placing concrete ,
inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing
steel , and items to be embedded or cast- in . Notify
other crafts to permit installation of their work ;
cooperate with other trades in setting such work .
Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete
where form coatings are not used .
B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and
moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing
steel .
C. General : Comply with ACI 304 , and as herein specified .
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such
thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete
which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation
of seams or planes of weakness . If a section cannot
be placed continuously , provide construction joints
as herein specified . Deposit concrete as nearly as
practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.
D. Placing Concrete in forms : Deposit concrete in forms
in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 " and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where
placement consists of several layers, place each layer
while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold
joints .
03100-11
E. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplemented by hand-spading , rodding or
tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation
of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices.
F. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside
forms. Insert and wtihdraw vibrators verticaiiy at
uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible
effectiveness of machine . Place vibrators to rapidly
penetrate placed layer and at least 6 " into preceding
layer . Do not insert vibrators into lower layers
of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion
limit duration of vibration to time necessary to con-
solidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement
and other embedded items without causing segregation
of mix.
G. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so
that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement
and other embedded items and into corners.
H. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge
and strikeoff . Use bull floats or darbies to smooth
surface , free of humps or hollows . Do not disturb
slab surfaces prior to beginning of finish operations.
i . Maintain reinforcing in proper positions during concrete
placement operations.
J . Cold Weather Placing : Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength which could be
caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures,
in compliance with ACi 306 and as herein specified .
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected
to fall below 40°F ( 4°C) , uniformly heat water and
aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50°F ( 10°C) , and not
more than 80°F ( 27°C) at point of placement.
K. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing
ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade
or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
L . Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials
containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators ,
unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
M. Hot Weather Placing : When hot weather conditions
exist that would seriously impair quality and strength
of concrete , place concrete in compliance with ACI
305: and as herein specified .
03100-12
N. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete
temperature at time of placement below 900F ( 320C) .
Mixing water may be chilled , or chopped ice may be
used to control temperature provided water equivalent
of ice Is calculated to total amount of mixing.
0. Cover reinforcing steel with water- soaked burlap if
it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will
not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately
before embedment in concrete.
P. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
Q. Use water- reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when
required by high temperatures , low humidity , or other
adverse placing conditions.
3,.07 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES :
A. Rough Form Finish ( Rf Fm- Fn ) : For formed concrete
surfaces not exposed to view in the finished work
or by other construction, unless otherwise i nd i cated .
This is the concrete surface having texture imparted
by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective
areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections
exceeding 1 /4" in height rubbed down or chipped off .
B. Smooth Form Finish ( SmFm-Fn ) : For formed concrete
surfaces exposed to view , or that are to be covered
with a coating materials applied directly to concrete,
or a covering material applied directly to concrete ,
such as waterproofing , dampproof l ng, painting, epoxy
for ceramic tile or other similar system . This is
as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form
facing material , arranged orderly and symmetrically
with a minimum of seams.
Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other
projections completely removed and smoothed . Finish
to match existing concrete on exposed-to-view concrete
surfaces.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces : At tops of walls, horizontal
offsets and similar unformed surfaces occuring adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish surface
treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise Indicated .
03100-131
3 .08 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES :
A. Float Finish ( Flt-Fn ) : apply float finish to monolithic
slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes
as hereinafter specified .
After screeding , consolidating, and leveling concrete
slabs , do not work surface until ready for floating.
Begin floating when surface water has disappeared
or when concrete has stiffened sufficientiy to permit
operation of power-drive floats, or both. Consolidate
surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating
if area Is small or inaccessible to power units .
Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding
1 / 4 " I n 1 0 ! w h e n tested w i t h a 1 0 ! straight edge .
Cut down high spots and fiii low spots. Uniformly
slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling ,
refloat surface to a uniform, smooth , granular texture.
1 . Trowel Finish ( Tr-Fn ) : Apply trowel finish to
monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view ,
and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient
f l oor i ng, . paint or other thin film finish coating
system , and all other surfaces not otherwise
noted .
After floating, begin first trowel finish operation
using a power driven trowel . Begin final troweling
when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel
Is moved over surface . Consolidate concrete
surface by final hand-trowel ing operation, free
of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance,
and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding
1 /8" In 10 ' when tested with a 10 ! straightedge .
Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph
through applied floor covering system
2 . Non- Slip Broom Finish ( NSBrm-Fn ) : Apply non-slip
broom finish to exterior concrete platforms ,
steps, slabs , and elsewhere as indicated . .
Immediately after trowel finishing , slightly
roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with Architect
before application.
3a Chemical Hardener Finish ( ChHd-Fn ) : Apply chemical
hardener finish to interior concrete floors where
indicated . Apply liquid chemical hardener after
complete curing and drying of the concrete surface.
03100-14
liquid hardener with water , and appiy in 3 coats ;
first coat, 1 /3rstrength ; second coat , 1 /2- strength ;
third coat , 2/ 3-strength . Evenly appiy each coat,
and allow 24' hours for drying between coats.
Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance
with manufacturer ' s printed instructions.
After final coat of chemical - hardener solution is
applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing
and mopping with water.
3(.09 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION :
A. General : Protect freshly placed concrete from premature
drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared
from concrete surface after placing and finishing .
Weather permitting , . keep continuously moist for not
less than 7 days.
Begin final curing procedures immediately following
initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue
final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with
ACi 301 procedures . Avoid rapid drying at end of
final curing period .
B. Curing Methods : Perform curing of concrete by moist
curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing , by curing
compound, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
C. Provide moisture curing by following methods :
Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering
wJth water.
Continuous water- fog spray .
Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive
cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and
keeping continuously wet . Place absorptive cover
to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges ,
with 4 " lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
D. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows :
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete , placed in widest practicable
width wJth sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed
03100-15
by waterproof tape or adhesive . Immediately repair
any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape .
E. Provide curing compound to slabs as follows :
Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete
slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete
( within 2 hours ) . Apply uniformly in continuous operation
by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturerts
directions . Recoat areas subjected to heavy rai nfal l
within 31 hours after initial application . Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
period .
Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which
are to be covered with coating material applied directly
to concrete , liquid floor hardener, and other coatings
and finish materials , unless otherwise acceptable
to Architect .
F. Curing Formed Surfaces : Cure formed concrete surfaces,
Including undersides of beams , supported slabs and
other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms
In place for full curing period or until forms are
removed . If forms are removed , continue curing by
methods specified above, as applicable.
G. Curing Unformed Surfaces : Cure unformed surfaces ,
such as slabs, and other flat surfaces by application
of appropriate curing compound .
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor
hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining
cover, unless otherwise directed .
3t.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS :
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete , such as
sides of beams , walls , columns, and similar parts
of the work , may be removed after cumulatively curing
at not less than 500F ( 100C) for 24 hours after placing
concrete , provided concrete is sufficiently hard to
not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided
curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam
soff its, joints, slabs and other structural elements ,
may not be removed in less than 14 days and until
concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength
03100-16 .
at 28-days . Determine potential compressive strength
of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens
representative of concrete location or members.
C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement,
only if shores and other vertical supports have been
arranged to permit removal of form facing material
wjthout loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
3 . 11 RE-USE OF FORMS :
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re- used in
work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged
form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed
surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified
for new formwork .
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement,
thoroughly clean surfaces , remove fins and laitance,
and tighten forms to close joints . Align and secure
joint to avoid offsets . Do not use "patched " forms
for exposed concrete surfaces , except as acceptable
to Architect.
3 . 12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS :
A. Filling- In : Fill- In holes and openings left in concrete
structures for passage of work by other trades, unless
otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades
Is In place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein
specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required
to complete work.
3(. 131 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS :
A. Patching Defective Areas : Repair and patch defective
areas with cement mortar immediately after removal
of forms, when acceptable to Architect.
B. Cut out honeycomb , rock pockets, voids over 1 / 4" in
any dimension , and holes left by tie rods and bolts,
down to solid concrete but , In no case to a depth
of less than 1 " . Make edges of cuts perpendicular
to the concrete surface . Thoroughly clean , dampen
with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with
specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after
bonding compound has dried .
C. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland
cement and standard portland cement so that , when
dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding.
03100-17;
Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify
mixture and color match before proceeding with patching .
Compact mortar in place and strike-off siightly higher
than surrounding surface.
D. Repair of Formed Surfaces : Remove and replace concrete
having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired
to satisfaction of Architect . Surface defects , as
such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spal Is , air bubbles , honeycomb , rock pockets ; fins
and other projections on surface ; and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning .
F l u s h out form t i e h o l e s , f i l l with dry pack mortar ,
or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with
bonding agent.
E. Repa i r concea l ed formed surfaces , where possible ,
that contain defects that affect the durab i I ty of
concrete . if defects cannot be repaired, remove and
replace concrete.
F. Repair of Unformed Surfaces : Test unformed surfaces,
such as monolithic scabs , for smoothness and verify
surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface
and finish . Correct low and high areas as herein
specified . Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain
for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness ,
using a template having required slope.
G. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects
which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects ,
as such , include crazing , cracks in excess of 0 . 01 "
wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely
through non- reinforced sections regardless of width ,
spat I ing, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets , and other
objectionable conditions.
H. Correct high areas in concealed unformed surfaces
by grinding , after concrete has cured at least 14.
days.
I . Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during , or
immediately after completion of surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing
with fresh concrete . Finish repaired areas to blend
into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds
may be used when acceptable to Architect.
J . Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single
holes not exceeding 1 " diameter , by cutting out and
replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas
03100-18
to sound concrete with clean , square cuts and expose
reinforcing steel Nwith at least 3/ 4 " clearance all
around . Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
patching concrete and apply : bonding compound . Mix
patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete
of same type or class as original concrete . Place ,
compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished
concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
K. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not
over 1 " in diameter by dry- pack method . Groove top
of cracks and cut- out holes to sound concrete and
clean of dust, dirt and ioose particles. Dampen cleaned
concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound . Mix
dry- pack , consisting of one part portland cement to
2-1 /2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16iimesh sieve,
using only enough water as required for handling and
placing . Place dry- pack after bonding compound has
dried . Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish
to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously
moist for not less than 72 hours.
Use epoxy-based mortar for structural repairs, where
directed by Architect.
L . Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject
to acceptance of Architect.
3 . 14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION :
A. The Owner shall employ a testing laboratory to perform
m a t e r i a l e v a l u a t i o n tests ; the Contractor w i l l employ
a testing laboratory to perform design concrete mixes,
retests and all other tests.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement
of concrete may include the following , . as directed
by Architect.
1 . Sampling Fresh Concrete : ASTM C172, except modified
for slump to comply with ASTM C94 .
a. Slump : ASTM C143 ; one test for each concrete
load at point of discharge ; and one test
for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
b . Concrete Temperature : Test hourly when air
temperature is 400F ( 40C) and below , and
when 800F ( 270C) and above ; and each time
a set of compression test specimens is made.
03100-19
c. Compression Test Specimen : ASTM C31 ; one
set of 3 standard cylinders for each compressive
strength test, unless otherwise directed .
Mold and store cyl inders for laboratory
cured test specimens except when field-cure
test specimens are required .
d. Compressive Strength Tests : ASTM C39 ; one
set for each 50 cu . yds. or fraction thereof,
of each concrete class placed in any one
day . One specimen tested at 7 days , one
specimen tested at 28 days, and one specimen
retained in reserve for later testing if
required.
When frequency of testing will provide less than
5 . strength tests for a given class of concrete ,
conduct testing from at least 5. randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are
used.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less
than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders ,
evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in- place
concrete.
Strength level of concrete will be considered
satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive
strength test results equal or exceed specified
compressive strength, and no individual strength
test result falls below specified compressive
by more than 500 psi .
2 . Test results will be reported in writing to Architect
and Contractor on same day that tests are made. Reports
of compressive strength tests shall contain the project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement,
name of concrete testing service , concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in structure, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions
and materials; compressive breaking strength and type
of break for both 7=day tests and 28-day tests.
03100-20
3 . Additional Tests: The testing service wilt make additional
test of in-place concrete when test results indicate
specified concrete strengths and other characteristics
have not been attained in the structure . Testing
service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of
concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 ,
or by other methods as directed . Contractor shail
pay for such tests conducted, and any other additionai
testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete
is verified.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
03100-21
SECTION 04220 .
MASONRY WORK
PART - GENERAL:
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Work included : Provide masonry work as shown on the
Drawings , as specified herein , and as needed for a
complete and proper installation , including concrete
masonry units, mortar, grout and masonry accessories.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Use adequate numbers of ski I led workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this section.
B. Provide CMU and Mortar of uniform color & texture
( obtain from one batch/ manufacturer ) for continuous
area.
C. Wherever concrete units are indicated to be painted,
provide fine-textured units.
D. Fire-rated Concrete Unit Masonry : Wherever a fire-
resistance classification or rating is indicated for
concrete masonry unit construction, obtain units complying
with the requirements established by the Southern
Building Code , Factory Mutual or NFPA, whichever is
most strigent.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data :
1 . Materials list of items proposed to be provided
under this Section ; included on this list must
be CMU , mortar , reinforcing & accessories , and
certified copies of laboratory test reports .
2 . Manufacturer ' s specifications and other data
needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements.
04220-1
3 . Submit shop drawings for fabrication , bending ,
and placement of reinforcing bars . Comply with
the ACI 315 " Manual of Standard Practice for
Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures " . Show
bar schedules , diagrams of bent bars, stirrup
spacing , lateral ties , and other arrangements
and assembiies as required for fabrication and
placement of reinforcing for unit masonry work.
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING :
A. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms
which allow air circulation under the stacked units.
Store mortar bags in similar fashion . Those bags
left open overnight shall be discarded.
B. Cover and protect masonry units and reinforcing against
wetting prior to use.
PART. 2 -_PROD!!.CI..
2(.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNiTS :
A. Provide normal weight holiow load-bearing concrete
masonry units complying with ASTM C90 , grade N, type
I , in color "naturaiigray. "
B. Dimensions :
1 . Provide units of the dimensions shown on the
Drawings .
2 . Where dimensions are not shown on the Drawings,
provide units having nominal face dimensions
of 16" long by 8" high by 8" depth and as otherwise
required.
C. Provide accessory shapes as indicated or otherwise
required.
2 . 02 REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORiES :
A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry :
1 . Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight
lengths of not less than 101 , with matching corner
( " L " ) and intersecting ( "T" ) units . Fabricate
from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM
04220,-2
A82 , with deformed or embossed continuous side
rods and piain cross rods, into units with widths
of approximately 2 " less than nominal width of
wails and partitions as required to position
side rods for full embedment in mortar with mortar
coverage of not less than 5/8 " on joint faces
exposed to exterior and not Tess than 1/2" elsewhere.
2� Wire Sizes : Fabricate with 3/ 16 "side rods and
9-gage cross rods.
For exterior wails , hot- dip galvanized joint
reinforcing after fabrication to comply with
ASTM A153 Class B-2 coating ( 1 .5; oz . per sq. ft. ) .
3 . Individual Wire Ties for Masonry :
Fabricate from 3/ 16 " cold-drawn steel wire, ASTM
A82 , unless otherwise indicated , of the length
required for proper embedment in wythes of masonry .
4; For exterior wal is, fabricate from steel wire
with 1 . 5 oz . hot- dip zinc coating , ASTM A153,
Class B- 2 , or fabricate from steel wire with
not less than 7!-ml i copper coating , ASTM B227 ;,
Grade 30 HS.
B. Reinforcing Bars : ASTM A615, grade 60, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings , using deformed bars for number
3 and larger.
C. Anchoring Devices for Masonry : Provide straps, bars,
bolts and rods of the type and size shown, but fabricated
from not less than 16 gage galvanized sheet metal
or 3/ 8" diameter rod stock , unless otherwise shown
or specified. Where masonry is indicated to be anchored
to structural framework and unless otherwise specified,
provide flexible anchors which wiii provide iaterai
restraint, and as foiiows :
1 . For anchorage to concrete framework , provide
2-piece anchors wjth crimped 1 /4" bar for welding
to steel and rectangular or vee- shaped 3/ 16 "
wire tie section sized to extend to within 1 "
of face of masonry .
04220-3(
D. Flashing for Masonry :
1 . Provide concealed flashings , shown to be built
into masonry and fabricate through- wall metal
f l ash i ngs with rough texture each side or defor-
mations in both directions for integral mechanical
mortar bond.
2 . For through- wall and general masonry flashing ,
provide copper-fabric laminate of not less than
5 ounces psf copper bonded to and between two
layers of asphalt impregnated glass fabric with
asphalt.
E. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories :
1 . Bond Breaker Strips : 15 - lb . asphalt roofing
felt or 15- lb . coal tar roofing felt.
2 . Premolded Control Joint Strips : Solid rubber
strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 ,
to 80 , designed to fit masonry conditions shown
and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall .
3'. Mastic Compounds : Provide mastics as recommended
byflashings manufacturer for each type of flashing
and condition for use.
2 .031MORTAR :
A. Ingredients :
1 . Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C105 , Type I .
a. Use Type I I modified Portland cement for
laying masonry in hot weather when average
daily temperature exceeds 82 degrees F.
2 . Lime :
a. Provide hydrated lime complying with ASTM
C207 , or quicklime complying with ASTM C5 .
b . When quicklime is used, slake and then screen
through a 16 mesh sieve . After slaking
and screening , but before using , store and
protect for not less than 10 days.
04220-4
36 Aggregate : Provide clean , sharp, well graded
aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust ,
lumps, shale, alkali , surface coatings, and organic
matter, and complying with ASTM C144.
4. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically
approved in advance by the Architect.
5 . Water : Provide potablewater free from deleterious
amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials .
B. Mixing :
1 . Provide mortar type "M" or type "S", as designated
on the Draw i ngs or otherwise directed by the
Architect, and in accordance with ASTM C270 .
2 . Proportions :
a. For type "M" mortar, provide one part portland
cement to 1 /4 part hydrated lime and 3-3/4
parts sand by volume.
b . For type "S" mortar, provide one part portland
cement to 1 / 2 part hydrated lime and 4-1 /2
parts sand by volume.
36 Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not less
than three minutes, using only sufficient water
to produce a mortar which is spreadable and of
a workable consistency .
4. Retemper mortar with water as required to maintain
high plasticity .
a. On mortar boards , retemper only by adding
water within a basin formed with mortar ,
and by working the mortar into the water.
b . Discard and do not use mortar which is unused
after 1 -1 /2 hours following initial mixing .
2604 GROUT:
A. Ingredients :
1 . Portland Cement : Compy with ASTM C150 , type I .
2 . Aggregate : Provide clean, sharp , well graded
04220-5
aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust,
lumps, shaie, alkali , surface coatings, and organic
matter.
3L Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically
approved in advance by the Architect.
4 . Water : Provide water free from injurious amounts
of acids, alkalis, and organic materials.
B. Mixing :
1 . Provide "fine grout" or "coarse grout" as designated
on the drawings or otherwise directed by the
Architect, and in accordance with ASTM C476 .
2 . When the minimum grout compressive strength is
required to be more than 2000 psi , provide laboratory
design mix prepared as required for design mixes
of concrete under Section 03100 of these Specifi-
cations.
3L Proportions :
a. For " fine grout" provide one part portland
cement to 2 - 1 / 4 parts minimum to 3 parts
maximum of damp loose sand, with sufficient
water to achieve fluid consistency .
b . For "coarse grout" provide one part portiand
cement to 3 parts maximum of damp loose
sand to two parts coarse aggregate , with
sufficient water to achieve fluid consistency.
4; " Fluid consistency " is interpreted as meaning
as fluid as possible for pouring intimately in
place without segregation.
C. Use " fine grout" where called for on the Drawings ,
where the grout space is less than 3" in its feast
dimension, and where otherwise directed by the Architect
or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
PART= 3_=_EXE_CUI14M:
3L01 : SURFACE CONDITIONS :
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work
of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions
04220-6 .
ATLANTIC BEACH PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING
BID OPENING
2:00 P.M. APRIL 7, 1987
• CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL
BID NO. 8687-2
BIDDER ADD. ADD. BID ALT. ALT. ALT. ALT. ALT. ALT.
11 12 BOND BASE BID
11 #2 #g #q #5 #6
//idedi a 01t� T' Ln o x-13 00 0 -j-lo op a� ��rr y �►c, , c l�- _ $ 4-7Z •-\- Z -1-Z8t7"o -f-3,,,
Ailideigird, da te
4Tifiri. aX4tAadinx t
L (144-C, 6)V o . D? bA �> °;) ... 2.144-0 4_,Lvg clo 4-21 -- a 4-viLzi 0 ,-31gco +11,C-Q
.(:Ixil,lx__ 67t,iti4,471.
6 ax ' S ) ut 4-7 1 3-2<Qb
/c - 1 J
(14 id.4t4t, arrnAai4,44,---
,i;t414 dradt 444;steGuL_ . ..
- — .
IlatItet4t, 0)C__ 0L., �o 1 Uy <-.1-o -9 ► Z3 --1 3Z, +rgq b o �' ci D - z Z Z 4
ATLANTIC BEACH PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING
BID OPENING
2:00 P.M. APRIL 7, 1987
CITY OF ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL
BID NO. 8687-2
BIDDER ADD. ADD. BID ALT. ALT. ALT. ALT. ALT. ALT.
11 12 BOND BASE BID #1 #2 #3 14 #5 #6
Y147(11Y71- 1(/'/";1 4-1/4121 ,e/4`.
:j14( (.1ZZI )V17t€/14;041 d12/3'•
fild- altAcetpl d eft . Q1L-' ri 33, LL(Ko f.“1 44-1-3-70 4- 1.--t)
Yee bah / 01(- 1 l - 2ZZ. t- 14-bt p 4-32 V33 pPr + 1 k+s-p
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work . Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
3 .02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDiTiONS :
A. Do not piace masonry units when air temperature is
below 400F.
B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure
to wind and sun when required and as recommended by
Portland Cement Association.
3 .03 INSTALLATION :
A. General :
1 . Do not commence installation of the work of this
Section until horizontai and vertical alignment
of foundation is within 1 " of plumb and the iines
shown on the Drawings .
2 . Lay only dry masonry units.
3� Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units.
4; Set units plumb , true to line , and with level
courses accurateiy spaced.
5 . Clean the top surface of foundation free from
dirt, debris, and laitance, and expose the aggregate
prior to start of installing first course.
6 . Accurately fit the units to plumbing , ducts ,
openings , and other interfaces , neatly patching
all hoies.
7; Where CMU exposed , keep the walls continually
clean , preventing grout and mortar stains . If
grout does run over, clean immediately .
B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide running
bond.
C. Do not u s e c h i p p e d or broken u n i t s . I f such units
are discovered in the finished wall , the Architect
may require their immediate removal and replacement
with new units at no additional cost to the Owner.
04220-7;
D. Laying Up :
1 . Place units in mortar with full shoved bed and
head joints.
2 . Align vertical cells of hoiiow units to maintain
a clear and unobstructed system of flues.
3� Hold racking to an absolute minimum.
E. Reinforcement :
1 . Horizontal Joint Reinforcing :
Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing
as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal
side rods in mortar for their entire length with
a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls
and 1 /2" at other locations . Lap reinforcement
a minimum of 6". Do not bridge control and expansion
joints with reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections
by use of prefabricated "L " and "T" sections. Cut
and bend units as directed by manufacturer for
continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing,
pipe enclosures and other special conditions .
Space continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16 "
o. c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated .
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 11 -0 "
wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed
in 2( horizontal joints approximately 8 " apart, .
both immediately above iinteis and below silis .
Extend reinforcing a minimum of 21 -0 " beyond
jambs of the opening , bridging control joints
where provided .
2 . Provide required metal accessories to ensure
adequate alignment of steel during grout filling
operations.
3� Provide vertical reinforcement as indicated on
Drawings. Secure reinforcement to prevent movement
during cell filling with mortar.
F. Lintels :
1 . Install loose lintels of steel and other materials
where shown .
04220-8
2 . Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever
openings of more than 11 -0 " are shown without
structural steel or other supporting lintels .
Provide precast or formed- in-place masonry lintels.
Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling
and installation. Temporarily support formed- In-place
I i me i s.
3 . For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially
formed "U"- shaped lintel units with reinforcing
bars placed as shown and filled with grout of
consistency required to completely fill space
between reinforcing bars and masonry unit.
4; Provide minimum bearing at each jamb , of 8" for
openings less than 6 !-0" wide.
G. Tooling :
1 . Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface.
2 . Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide
joints of "concave" pattern throughout.
H. Control and Expansion Joints :
1 . Provide vertical expansion, control , and isolation
joints in masonry where shown . Build- in related
masonry accessory items as the masonry work prog-
resses.
2 . Control Joint Spacing : If location of control
joints is not shown, . place vertical joints spaced
not to exceed 30 feet 0 . inch o. c . for concrete
masonry wythes.
I . Flashing of Masonry Work :
1 . Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at,
or above , all shelf angles , lintels , ledges ,
and other obstructions to the downward flow of
water in the wall so as to divert such water
to the exterior . Prepare masonry surfaces smooth
and free from projections which could puncture
flashing . Place through- wall flashing on bed
of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations
in fI ash Ing with mastic before covering with
mortar.
04220-9
2 . Extend flash i ngs the f u l l length of i i ntel s and
shelf angles and a minimum of 4: inches into masonry
each end.
3604 GROUTING :
A. Perform grouting in strict accordance with the provisions
of the governing building code.
1 . Solidly fill vertical cells containing reinforcement.
2 . Consolidate grout at time of pour by puddling
with a mechanical vibrator , fiiiing ail ceils
of the masonry , and then reconsolidating later
by puddling before the plasticity is lost.
3605 CLEANING :
A. Inspection and adjustment:
1 . Upon completion of the work of this Section ,
make a thorough inspection of installed masonry
and verify that units have been installed in
accordance with the provisions of this Section.
2 . Make necessary adjustments.
B. Clean surfaces of masonry as required for proper appli-
cation of the specified finishes.
END OF SECTION
04220-10
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATION
PARI_1_=_GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of miscellaneous metal fabrications work
is shown on the drawings and includes items fabricated
from iron and steel shapes , plates, bars , strips ,
tubes , pipes and casting which are not a part of other
metal systems in other sections of these specifications.
B. The types of miscellaneous metal items include , but
are not necessarily limited to, the following :
1 . Rough hardware
2 . Loose bearing plates
3 . Loose steel lintels
4. Miscellaneous framing and supports
5 . Miscellaneous steel trim
6 . Shelf angles
7 . Ladder
8 . Handrails and railings
9 . Bollards
10 . Expanded metal gratings
1 .02 SUBMITTALS :
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Mill certifications for structural items ( lintels ,
bearing plates ) .
C. Certification that galvanizing complies with the specified
requirements.
EARI_Z _ RD L CIa
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars : ASTM A36 .
B. Steel Plates to be Bent or Cold-Formed : ASTM A283 ,
Grade C.
C. Steel Bars and Bar- Size Shapes : ASTM A306 , Grade
65 or ASTM A 36 .
05500-1
D. Steel Tubing : ( Hot- formed , welded, or seamless ) ,
ASTM A501 .
E. Cold-Finished Steel Bars : ASTM A108, grade as selected
by the fabricator.
F. Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A526 , with ASTM
A525 , G90 zinc coating.
G. Gray Iron Castings : ASTM A48 , Class 30 , grade as
selected.
H. Malleable Iron Castings : ASTM A47 , grade as selected.
I . Steel Pipe : ASTM A53 ; type as selected ; Grade A;
galvanized standard weight (Schedule 40) , unless otherwise
indicated.
J. Steel Wire Rope : ASTM A475 ; zinc-coated steel wire
strand ; size and number of wires as shown . install
"Common" grade with Class B zinc-coating, unless otherwise
indicated.
K. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T5 , mill finish unless
otherwise noted.
2 .02 GALVANIZING :
A. All ferrous metal fabrications which are used in structural
capacity installed in exterior wails, installed in
contact with roofs or used in exterior locations shall
be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
B. Other galvanized fabrications may be electroplate
galvanized after fabrication except as otherwise specified.
2 . 03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS :
A. Rough Hardware : Furnish bent or otherwise custom
fabricated bolts , plates, anchors, hangers, dowels
and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required
for framing and supporting masonry work, and for anchoring
or securing other work to concrete or other structures.
B. Manufacture or fabricate items of materials, sizes,
shapes and dimensions required . Furnish stainless
steel washers, unless otherwise noted or shown.
05500-2
C. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates : Install loose
bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing
on masonry or concrete construction , made flat, free
from warps or twists , and of required thickness and
bearing area . Drill plates to receive anchor bolts
or weld anchor studs on plates of appropriate type.
Size plates to be 2 " larger each side then bearing
item unless otherwise shown except plates shall not
penetrate wall lines.
D. Loose Steel Lintels : Provide loose structural steel
lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls
and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together
to form a single unit where indicated . Provide no
less than 8 " bearing at each side of openings, unless
otherwise indicated .
E. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports :
1 . Install miscellaneous steel framing and supports
which are not a part of the structural steel
framework and are required to complete the work .
2 . Fabricate miscellaneous units to the sizes, shapes
and prof i l es shown, or if not shown, of the required
dimensions to receive adjacent grating, plates,
doors, or other work to be retained by the framing.
Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural
steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of all
welded construction using mitered corners, welded
brackets and splice plates and a minimum number
of joints for field connection . Cut, drill and
tap units to receive hardware and similar items
to be anchored to the work.
3� Equip units with integrally welded anchors for
casting into concrete or building into masonry .
Furnish inserts if units are installed after
concrete is placed . Except as otherwise shown ,
space anchors , 21 - 0 " o . c . , and install units
the equivalent of 1 - 1/4 : x 1 /4" x 8" steel strips .
F. Miscellaneous Steel Trim:
1 . Install materials , shapes and sizes as required
for the profiles shown . Except as otherwise
noted , fabricate units from structural steel
shapes and nd plates and steel bars, with continuously
05500-3(
welded joints if possible . Install cutouts ,
fittings, and anchorage as required for coordination
of assembly and installation with other work.
G. Shelf Angles :
1 . Install structural steel shelf angles of sizes
required for attachment to concrete or masonry
framing . Punch slotted holes to receive 3✓ 4"
bolts , spaced not more than 6 " from ends and
not more than 24" o. c. , unless otherwise indicated.
2 . Furnish galvanized wedge-type concrete inserts
complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf
angles to cast- in-place concrete.
H. Vertical Ladders :
1 . Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with
dimensions , spacings , details and anchorages
as indicated . Comply with the requirements of
ANSI A14;3 except as otherwise indicated. Galvanize
all Vertical ladders and fasteners.
2 . Provide non-slip surface on the top of each rung,
either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide
granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using
a type of manufactured rung which is filled with
aluminum oxide grout.
I . Ladder Safety Cages :
1 . Fabricate ladder safety cages from structural
steel flat bars, assembled by welding or riveting.
Unless otherwise indicated , provide 5/ 16 " x 4"
top and bottom hoops and intermediate hoops spaced
not more than 201 -0 " o . c . ; 5/ 15 " x 2" hoops at
4!-0" o. c. between the 4 " wide hoops ; and 5/ 16"
x 2" vertical bars, secured to each hoop . Space
vertical bars approximately 9" o. c. Fasten assembled
safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction
as indicated . Galvanize all ladder safety cages
and fasteners.
J . Bollards :
1 . Provide bollards where shown of 6 " steel pipe ,
concrete filled full height . Bollards shall
be set a minimum of 31 - 0 " into 21 -0 " minimum
diameter concrete foundation and extend 41 - 0 "
above finished concrete slab or asphalt paving .
05500-4
2 . Grind smooth and provide rounded edges at ali
exposed edges.
36 Provide pipe for boilards which has been hot-dipped
galvanized after fabrication and grinding .
K. Expanded Metal Gratings :
1 . Provide expanded metal gratings in material ,
style, size, thickness, weight, and type indicated,
or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer
for indicated applications and design loadings .
Comply with EMMA "Standards for Expanded Metal . "
2 . Expanded metal grating shaii be steel , hot-dipped
galvanized after fabrication .
3 . Cut , drill and fit grating sections in shop to
maximum extent possible . Fabricate cut- outs
in grating sections for penetrations of sizes
and at locations indicated . Cut openings neatly
and accurately to size ; edge- bond openings with
bars having a thickness not less than overail
grating thickness at contact points. Cut, drill
and fit as required for instaiiation .
4 . Wherever gratings are pierced by pipes, ducts,
and structural members , cut openings neatly and
accurately to size and weld a strap steel collar
not less than 1 /8" thick to the cut ends, . Divide
panels into sections only to extent required
for installation wherever grating platforms ,
runways, etc. , are to be placed around previously
installed pipe, ducts , and structural members .
Fit exposed connections accurately together to
form tight hairline joints .
EARI_a___EXELLtIJ WI
3 .01 INSTALLATION :
A. Set miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in
location , alignment and elevation, plumb, level , true
and free of rack, measured from established lines
and levels . Brace temporarily or anchor temporarily
In formwork where work is to be built into concrete,
masonry or similar construction.
05500-5
B. Anchor securely as shown or as required for the intended
use, using concealed anchors wherever possible.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form
tight hairline Joints . Weld connections which are
not to be left as exposed joints , but cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations . Grind
joints smooth and touch up shop paint coat. Do not
weld , cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units
which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication,
and are intended for bolted or screwed field connection.
D. Touch up all abraded and damaged areas of galvanized
coatings with approved zinc-dust paint.
END OF SECTION
05500-6
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART_I_-_QENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of the "Carpentry " work is shown on the
drawings and in schedules. Materials and installation
requirements for other work , commonly assigned to
the carpentry trade , are specified in other sections
of these specifications.
B. The types of carpentry work specified in this section
include but are not necessarily limited to the following :
Wood framing , nailers , blocking , shims, furring and
underIayment.
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Factory - mark each piece of lumber and plywood with
type, grade, mill and grading agency identification .
B. Comply with applicable sections of AWP ) and APA.
1 .03( SUBMITTALS :
A. Pressure Treatment : For each type specified, include
certification by treating plant stating chemicals
and process used , net amount of salts retained and
conformance with applicable standards . Include manu-
facturer ' s instructions for proper use of each type
of treated material .
B. Certification of plywood, by producing mill , of compliance
with specified requirements.
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING :
A. Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery , storage
and handling . Store lumber in stacks with provisions
for air circulation within stacks . Protect bottom
of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect
materials from weather .
06100-1
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to
avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent
on or affected by the carpentry work , and to comply
with protection and storage requirements.
B. Correlate location of furring , . nailers, blocking and
similar supports so that attached work will comply
wjth design requirements.
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Lumber :
1 . Provide wood for support or attachment of other
work such as framing , sleepers , cant strips ,
bucks , nailers , blocking , furring , stripping
and similar members. Provide lumber of the sizes
shown or specified , worked to shapes shown , and
as fol lows :
a . Moisture Content - 19%, maximum for lumber
items not specified to receive wood preservative
treatment or required to be less for other
trades.
b . Grades - Provide construction grade boards
( RIS or WCLB) or No. 2 boards ( SPIB or WWPA )
for miscellaneous lumber of any species.
B. Framing Lumber ( 2" through 4" thick ) :
1 . For light framing ( less than 6" wide ) , provide
"Stud" grade lumber for stud framing and "Standard"
grade for other light framing, any species.
C. For structural framing ( 6" and wider and from 2 " to
4" thick ) , provide the following grade and species :
1 . Select structural grade , No. 2 grade , Douglas
Fir ( WCLB or WWPA ) , Southern Pine ( SPIB) .
06100-2
D. Anchorage and Fastening Materials : If not otherwise
shown on the drawings, select proper type, size, material
and finish for each application . Comply with the
following :
1 . Nails and Staples : FS FF-N-105
2 . Tacks : FS FF-N-1031
3 . Wood Screws : FS FF-S-111
4 . Bolts and Studs : FS FF-B-575
5 . Washers : FS FF-W-92
6 . Lags Screws or Lag Bolts : FS FF-B-561
7; Masonry Anchoring Devices for expansion shields,
nails and drive screws, comply with : FS FF-S-235
8 . Toggle Bolts : FS FF-B-588
9 . Bar or Strap Anchors : ASTM A 575 carbon steel bars
E. Plywood : Provide plywood, complying with U. S. Product
Standard PS-1 -74:
F. Wood Preservative Treated Wood ( P. T. ) :
1 . General - Treat lumber where indicated as "P. T. "
to comply with the applicable requirements of
the American Wood Preservers Bureau , available
from AWP I .
2 . Pressure treat wood nailers, blocking, stripping
sleepers and similar members in connection with
roofing , flashing, vapor barriers, waterproofing,
concrete or masonry with water-borne preservatives
or salts for above ground use, complying with
AWPB LP-2 .
PARI_L_=_EXELUIION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION :
A. General :
1 . Discard lumber or material which is unsound ,
warped , bowed , twisted , improperly treated , not
06100-3(
adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate
the work with a minimum of joints or the optimum
jointing arrangement.
2 . Coordinate locations and fit carpentry work accurately
to other work . Scribe and cope as regired for
proper fit. Refer to shop drawings of such work,
if any .
3 . Set carpentry accurately to required levels and
lines with members plumb and true.
4: Securely attach carpentry work to substrates
by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required
by recognized standards.
B. Fasteners : Use common galvanized wire nails, except
as otherwise shown or specified herein. Use finishing
nails for exposed work. Do not wax or lubricate fasteners
that depend on friction for holding power . Select
fasteners of size that will not penetrate member where
opposite side wiii be exposed to view or wilt receive
finish materials . Make tight connections between
members . instals fasteners without splitting of wood ;
predri l l as required. Do not drive threaded friction
type fasteners ; turn into place . Tighten boats and
lag screws at installation and retighten as required
for tight connections prior to closing in or at completion
of work . Provide galvanized washers under bolt heads
and nuts in contact with wood.
C. Wood Furring :
1 . Install plumb and level with closure strips at
all edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finished work .
2 . Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall : Unless otherwise
shown, provide 1 " x 2" furring at 16" o. c . , vert-
ically .
3 . Suspended Furring : Provide size and spacing
shown , including hangers and attachment devices .
Level to a tolerance of 1 /8" in 10 ' .
D. Wood Framing, General :
1 . Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings
shown , and frame openings as shown , or if not
shown , comply with the recommendations of the
06100-4
"Manual for House Framing" of the National Forest
Products Association . Do not splice structural
members between supports.
2 . Anchor and nail as shown , and to comply with
the "Recommended Nailing Schedule " - Table I
of the "Manual for House Framing" and other recommen-
dations of the NFPA.
3 . Firestop concealed spaces with wood blocking
not less than 2" thick , if not blocked by other
framing members. Provide blocking at each building
story level and at ends of Joist spans.
E. Stud Framing :
1 . General : Provide stud framing where shown .
Unless otherwise shown , use 2" x 4 " wood studs
spaced 16 " o . c . with 4 " face perpendicular to
direction of wail or partition . Provide single
bottom place and double-top places 2 " thick by
width of studs ; except single top plate may be
used for nonioadbearing partitions . Nail or
anchor plates to supporting construction.
2 . Construct corners and intersections with not
less than 3 studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking
and framing as shown and as required for support
of facing materials, fixtures , speci ai ty items
and trim.
3 . Frame openings with muitipie studs and headers .
Provide nailed header members of thickness equal
to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support
on jamb studs.
a. For nonbearing partitions , provide double
Jamb studs and headers not less than 4 "
deep for openings 3 ' and Tess in width ,
and not less than 6" deep for wider openings .
b . For ioadbearing partitions, provide double-Jamb
studs for openings 6 ' and iess in width ,
and triple- jamb studs for wider openings .
Provide headers of depth shown , or if not
shown , provide as recommended by Table II
of NFPA "Manual for House Framing" .
06100-5
F. Joist Framing :
1 . General : Provide framing of sizes and on spacings
shown . Install with crown edge up and support
ends of each member with not less than 1 -1 /2"
of bearing on wood or metal , or 3" on masonry .
Attach to wood bearing members by toe nailing
or metal connectors ; frame to wood supporting
members with wood ledgers as shown , or if not
shown, wjth metal connectors . Fire-cut members
built Into masonry ( if any ) . Frame openings
with headers and trimmers supported by metal
Joist hangers ; double headers and trimmers where
span of header exceeds 4! . Do not notch in middle
third of joists ; limit notches to 1 /6 depth of
joist, 1 /3' at ends. Do not bore holes larger
than 1 / 3- depth of Joist or locate closer than
2 " from top or bottom. Provide solid blocking
( 2 " thick by depth of joist ) at ends of joists
unless nailed to header or band member.
G. Nailers , blocking and sleepers : Provide wherever
shown and required for attachment of other work .
Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true
line and level of work to be attached. Provide adequate
backing for wall mounted cabinets, fixtures, accessories,
etc.
H. Attach lumber materials to substrates securely with
anchor bolts or other attachment devices as shown
and as required to support applied loading. Countersink
bolts and nuts flush with surfaces , unless otherwise
indicated . Build into masonry as work progresses ,
cutting to fit masonry unit size involved . Anchor
to formwork before concrete placement.
END OF SECTION
06100-6 .
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 — GENERAL
1 :01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of each type of finish carpentry is shown
on the drawings and in schedules and is defined to
include ( in addition to items so designated on the
drawings ) miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly
known as "Architectural Woodwork " or "Miiiwork", except
where specified under another section of these specifi-
cations.
B. The types of finish carpentry i nc I ude , but are not
necessarily limited to, the following :
1 . Miscellaneous exposed trim.
2 . Plastic laminate finished casework .
3c Plastic laminate countertops.
4: Wood shelving, stained.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or specified,
comply with specified provisions of the NOFMA, AWi
"QUal i ty Standards" and NEMA LD3+-1 97 .
B. Quality Marking : Mark each unit of architectural
woodwork with mill ' s or fabricator ' s identification
and grade mark , located on surfaces which w,iii not
be exposed after installation.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data :
1 . Submit manufacturer ' s or supplier ' s specifications
for each item specified . include humidity and
temperature tolerances and installation instructions
for each item of factory— fabricated woodwork.
06200-1
2 . Submit manufacturer ' s data and specifications
for each type and finish of cabinet hardware.
B. Shop-Drawings : Submit shop drawings for all manufactured
fabricated items showing location of each item, dimensioned
plans and elevations, large scale deta i l s , attachment
devices and other components.
C. Samples : Submit the following samples.
1 . Plastic laminate : 3 " squares of each color and
texture specified on drawings.
1 .04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery , storage
and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
B. Do not del iver woodwork , until painting , wet work ,
grinding and similar operations which could damage,
soil or deteriorate woodwork , have been completed
in installation areas. If , due to unforeseen circum-
stances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified
for installation areas.
C. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation
area as required to maintain moisture content of installed
woodwork within a 2(.0 percent tolerance of the optimum
moisture content, from the date of installation through
the remainder of the construction period. The fabricator
of the woodwork shall determine and verify the optimum
moisture content and required temperature and humidity
conditions . Replace architectural woodwork which
has been damaged by excessive humidity or moisture.
Pegs_2_=—PRQDULI
2 .01 BASIC MATERIALS AND FABRICATORS METHODS :
A. General : Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
the following requirements for architectural woodwork
not specifically indicated as prefabricated or prefinished
standard products.
B. Wood Moisture Content : Provide kiln- dried lumber
and maintain optimum moisture content in solid wood
(hardwood and softwood ) through fabrication, installation,
and finishing operations of interior work.
06200-2
C. Wood for Painted or Stained and Sealed Finish : Comply
w ith qual ity standards for selection of species, grade
and cut.
D. Plastic Laminate : Comply with NEMA LD3; type, thickness,
color, pattern and finish as indicated and specified
for each application.
E. Quality Standards - For the following types of architec-
tural woodwork comply with the indicated standards
as applicable:
1 . Trim - AWI Section 300.
2 . Casework and Countertops : AWI Section 400 .
3 . Shelving : AWI Section 600 .
4. Miscellaneous Work : AWI Section 700 .
5 . Plastic laminate work and fabrications : NAPF-
Q$ .1- 1975 .
F. Design and Construction Features : Comply with the
details shown for profile and construction of architectural
woodwork, and where not otherwise shown, comply with
the intent of the details and applicable quality standards.
G. Pre-Cut Openings : Fabricate architectural woodwork
w jth pre-cut openings , wherever possible, to receive
hardware, appl iances, plumbing fixtures, electrical
work and similar items . Locate openings accurately
and use templates or roughing- in diagrams for proper
size and shape . Smooth the edges of cutouts and ,
w here located in countertops and similar exposures,
seal the edges of cutouts wjth a water-resistant coating.
H. Measurements : Before proceeding with fabrication
of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction,
obtain measurements and verify dimensions and shop
drawing details as required for accurate fit.
2 .02 MATERIALS :
A. Standing and Running Trim :
1 . Fabricate wood trim to dimensions , profiles and
details shown . Route or groove reverse side
( backed-out ) of trim members to be applied to
06200-3,
fiat surfaces, except for members with ends exposed
in the finished work.
B. Plastic laminate finished casework or vertical work.
1 . General :
a . Grade - Custom unless otherwise noted on
draw ings.
b . Plastic Laminate Colors, Pattern, and Finishes
as selected by A/E.
1 . Color shaiI be equal to Fawn- Vogue
as manufactured by Nevamar, rooms 101 ,
102, 103, 104, 109, 128, 130 and 131 .
2 . Color sh a i I be equal to Denmark Blue-Vogue
as manufactured by Nevamar, rooms 116 ,
117, 122, 133 , 134. 134A.
2 . Laminates :
a. Plastic Laminate for Horizontal Surfaces :
0 . 050 " minimum thickness, General - Purpose
Type ( High-pressure) .
b . Plastic Laminate for Vertical Surfaces :
0 . 028 " minimum thickness, Generai - Purpose
Type ( High-pressure) .
c. Plastic Laminate for Postforming : 0 - 042 "
minimum thickness , . Postforming Type ( High-
pressure) .
3t. Fabricate exposed edges of casework i nci ud i ng
edges of doors and drawers when open and shelves
and edges with matching plastic laminate, except
as otherwise indicated .
4 . Provide substrates as recommended by plastic
laminate manufacturer or if not recommended ,
3/ 8" thick minimum plywood or 1 /2" thick minimum
casework grade particle board or equivalent
materials. Provide framing and blocking as required.
06200-4
C. Countertops :
1 . General :
a. Except as otherwise indicated, produce separate
countertops ( installed on other casework
or other support system as indicated ) to
comply with the reugirements for casework
for plastic laminate fabrications.
b . Grade : Premium or high performance.
c. Finish : Semi-gloss finish (40-70% reflectance) .
d. Plastic Laminate Colors, Pattern and Finishes
as specified on drawings .
2 . Materials - Plastic Laminate for Horizontal Surfaces
and Adjacent Surfaces : 0 . 050 " thick , General
Purpose Type ( High-pressure) .
3 . Supports - Space supports, braces, legs , etc . ,
as recommended by manufacturer of countertops
finish materials.
4: Provide materials suitable and recommended for
"wet" locations for vanity ( counter ) tops.
D. Wood Storage She ( ving or miscellaneous painted woodwork:
1 . Provide custom grade fir or birch boards and/or
plywood of sizes and thickness shown or indicated.
2 . Provide hardwood edges for plywood.
3 . These requirements do not apply to shelving which
is either integral with or indicated as "casework. "
Comply with casework requirements for those units
of shelving.
2 .03( FINISH FOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK:
A. General : The entire finish of architectural woodwork
except field painting and/or staining of exposed wood
is work of this section, regardless of whether shop
applied or applied after installation.
B. Shop Finishing : To the greatest extent possible finish
architectural woodwork at the shop or factory . Defer
only the final touch- up , cleaning and polishing for
the time after del ivery and installation.
06200-5
C. Preparations for Finishing : Comply with AWI Quality
standards, Section 1500, for sanding, filling, countersunk
fasteners, back priming and similar preparations for
the finishing of architectural woodwork, as appl icabl e
to each unit of work.
2 .04 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS :
A. General : Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials
associated with architectural woodwork.
B. Hardware Standards : Except as otherwise indicated,
comply with ANSI A156 . 9 "American National Standard
for Cabinet Hardware. "
C. Quality Level : Type 2 ( institutional ) , unless otherwise
indicated .
D. Cabinet Door Hardware : Provide hinges, catches and
pulls to properly accomodate each door size and style .
Provide concealed hardware for plastic laminate finished
woodwork.
E. Drawer Hardware : Provide sl ides and pulls of the
types indicated , to properly accomodate each drawer
size and style.
1 . Equip each drawer with side-mounted, full-extension
ball -bearing, nylon roller drawer slides.
F. Locks : Where indicated, provide standard five pin-type
tumbler locks, keyed individually except as otherwise
indicated . Provide master keying for cabinet work
requiring multiple individual locks.
G. Shelf Supports : Where shelving is indicated as "adjust-
able" provide steel slotted- type standards and steel
brackets of the type needed to properly support the
shelves with uniform 40 - lb . per sq . ft . loading .
Provide standard black finish .
H. Exposed Hardware Finish : If exposed cabinet hardware
is required by unique conditions , , provide hardware
with BHMA Code 626 satin chromium plate finish ( US26D ) .
2 .05 ACCESSORIES
A. Cash Tray ( Counters in Room 101 a Rooms 104 and 105)
18 gauge ( . 048 ) 304' Stainless Steel with a # 4 Fine
Brush Finish , equal to Model #T1 8SS , as manufactured
by Nissen & Company, . Inc.
06200-6 °.
PeRI_L___EXE QUI1414
3 .01 GENERAL :
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity
conditions in installation areas prior to installing.
B. Pre- Instal lation Meeting : Meet at the project site
prior to delivery of architectural woodwork and review
the coordination and environmental controls required
for proper installation and ambient conditioning in
the areas to receive the Work. Include in the meeting
the Contractor, .the instal l ers of architectural woodwork,
wet work such as plastering, other finishes, painting,
mechanical work and electrical work , and the firms
or persons responsible for the continued operation
( whether temporary or permanent ) of the HVAC system
as required to maintain temperature and humidity con-
dition. Proceed with the woodwork installation only
when everyone concerned agrees that the required ambient
conditions can be properly maintained.
C. Deliver anchoring devices to be built into substrates,
well in advance of the time substrates are to be built.
D. Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine
shop fabricated work for completion , and complete
work as required , including back priming and removal
of packing.
3602 INSTALLATION :
A. General :
1 . Install the work plumb , level , true and straight
with no distortions . Shim as required using
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1 / 8 "
in 840" for plumb and level ( including countertops) ;
and with 1 / 16" maximum offset in flush adjoining
surfaces, 1 /8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining
surfaces.
2 . Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work , and
refinish cut surfaces or repair exposed damaged
finish at cuts . Replace work which cannot be
repaired to quality of adjacent uncut new work.
B. Exposed Trim : Install with minimum number of joints
possible, using full- length pieces ( from maximum length
of materials available ) to the greatest extent possible.
06200-7;
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope
at returhs , miter at corners , and comply with AW i
Qual ity Standards for wood joinery . Refer to Section
09900 for finishing.
C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking bu i i t- i n or
directly attached to substrates. Secure to stripping
and blocking with countersunk , . concealed fasteners
and blind na i i i ng as required for a complete installation.
Except where prefinished matching fasteners are required,
use fine finishing nails for exposed nailings, countersunk
and filled with wood work , and matching final finish
where paint finish or stain as indicated.
D. Casework : install without distortion so that doors
and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately
aligned . Adjust hardwaer to center doors and drawers
in openings and to provide unencumbered operation .
Complete the installation of hardware and accessory
items as indicated on approved shop drawings.
E. Countertops : Anchor securely to base units and other
support systems by standard concealed methods or as
indicated.
F. Install vanity tops with a slope to provide for positive
water drainage into lavatories.
G. Wood Storage Shelving : Complete the assembly of units
and install in the areas indicated, including hardware
and accessories as indicated.
3‘03I ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FiN iSH iNG AND PROTECTION :
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible
to eliminate defects functionally and visually ; where
not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork .
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean hardware , lubricate and make final adjustments
for proper operation.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces.
Touch - up shop- applied finishes to restore damaged
or soiled areas to the quality of adjacent undamaged
work. Replaces as required.
06200-8
D. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this
section , to whatever extent not completed at the shop
or prior to installation of woodwork. Field finishing
of exposed woodwork shall be as specified in Section
09900 .
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
06200-9
SECTION 06300
WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 . —_ GENERAL
1 :01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of wood trusses is shown on the drawings.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Design standards shall conform with the appiicabie
provisions of the following :
I . National Design Specification for Wood Construction,
published by the National Forest Products Association.
2 . Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected
Wood Trusses, published by the Truss Plate Institute.
3(. Lumber defects such as wane or knots occurring
in the connector plate area must not affect more
than ten percent of required plate area or number
of effective teeth required for each truss member.
1 .03, SUBMITTALS :
A. Engineering drawings conforming with the design load
as set forth by the Southern Standard Building Code, and
deflection criteria ( L/240 ) shall be submitted for
approval before fabrication. Shop drawings in submittal
shall include dimensional truss spacing , bridging/
bracing locations , and appropriate details . They
shall bear the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer.
PARI_2_=_PRODULIa
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Wood trusses shal I be fabricated by an authorized
Alpine Truss manufacturer in accordance with designs
prepared by Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. , or approved
equal .
1 . All wood truss members shall be No. 1 grade southern
Pine, fire retardant lumber.
06300-1
B. Connector Plates - All connector plates shall be a
minimum thicknes of 0 .036'. inches and shall be manufactured
from steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A446'. Grade
A and shall be stainless steel .
EARI_ ___EXELUI1QN
3 .01 INSTALLATION :
A. General : Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions,
except where more stringent requirements are shown
or specified , and except where project conditions
require extra precautions or provisions to insure
satisfactory performance of the work.
B. Connector Plates : Connector plates shall be applied
to both faces of truss at each joint, and should provide
firm even contact between the plate and the wood .
All wood members shall be accurately cut and fabricated
so that all members have good bearing and all completed
truss units are uniform. See Truss Plate Institute
"Quality Control Manual QCM-77 " for tolerances and
other special requirements.
C. Bracing : All trusses must be securely braced both
during erection and after permanent installation in
a building in accordance with "Bracing Wood Trusses :
Commentary and Recommendations ( BWT-76 ) " as published
by the Truss Plate Institute . Erection bracing shall
hold trusses straight and plumb and in safe condition
until decking and permanent truss bracing has been
fastened forming a structurally sound roof framing
system. All erection and permanent bracing shall
be installed and all trusses permanently fastened
before application of any loads. Permanent structural
cross-bracing to ensure overall rigidity of the roof
system shall be in accordance with the architectural /
engineering plans for the building structure . See
truss design drawings for any additional special bracing
requirements . Materials used in bracing are to be
furnished by the erection contractor.
END OF SECTION
06300-2
SECTION 07100
WATERPROOFING & DAMPPROOFiNG
PART_J_-_ GENERAL
1 .01 : DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of each type of dampproofing work is shown
on the drawings. Similar work is excluded by definition
and is specified as roofing, . flooring, special coatings,
painting, flashing and sealants.
B. The following types and applications of work are specified
in this section :
1 . Bituminous Waterproofing
2 . Bituminous Dampproofing
3 . Elastic Sheet Vapor Barrier
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Manufacturer : Provide products of manufacturers with
not less than 5 years of successful experience in
supplying the principal materials for the required
work .
1 .03( SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data , Dampproofing : Submit copies
of specifications, installation instructions and general
recommendations by the manufacturer of dampproofing
materials . include published data or certified test
data for each material showing compliance with the
requirements.
B. Guarantee , Waterproofing : Submit copies of guarantee
for the waterproof ing work listed below , agreeing
to repair or replace membrane which leaks water or
othrwise faits to perform as required within the guarantee
period , as listed below due to failure of materials
or workmanship. Also include in guarantee an agreement
to remove and replace other work which has been super-
imposed on the waterproofing work, to the extent required
to repair or replace the waterproofing work. Guarantee
shall be signed by the Contractor and by the installer.
07100-1
1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Proceed with waterproofing and dampproofing work oniy
after substrate construction and penetrating work
have been completed.
B. Weather Conditions : Proceed with waterproofing and
dampproofing work only when weather conditions compiy
with manufacturer ' s recommendations , and will permit
the materials to be applied in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
PART, II - PRODLLCIa
2601 MATERIALS :
A. Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing Materials :
1 . Asphalt Primer - ASTM D41 , cut-back asphalt.
a. Waterproofing Aspha I t - ASTM D499 , Type
A for vertical wal I surfaces below grade
and Type B for horizontal surfaces which
are concealed.
b . Glass Fiber Fabric - ASTM D1668 ( 1 .4. lbs . per
square, impregnated with bitument) .
c. Plastic Cement - FS SS-C-153 , of the proper
type for application indicated and compatibility
with other materials.
B. Bituminous Dampproofing Materials :
1 . Cold Emulsified Asphalt Compound - Fiber-reinforced
asphalt emulsion belnded with solvent, recommended
by manufacturer for exterior wall damp-proofing ;
compmmounded to penetrate substrate and build
a firm, elastic, moisture-resistent coating.
a. Provide semi - fibrated ( semi-mastic) compound
for successive heavy spray or brush coatings ;
ASTM D-1227-65 , Type 1 .
b . Bond-Coat Type : Where bond coat is required
for the application of other materials onto
the substrate, provide manufacturer ' s speciai
surface compound recommended for the appiication
shown .
07100-2
2 . Miscellaneous Materiais :
a . General - Provide primers, fiilers, seaters,
Joint tapes , adhesives , fiashings , cant
strips and accessories as recommended by
the manufacturer of the primary waterproofing
and damp-proofing materials, for the application
shown.
b. Protection course - Where shown, or recommended
by the manufacturer , provide the required
(or recommended ) type and thickness.
B. Vinyl Elastic Sheet Vapor Barrier ( for under interior
slabs-on-grade ) :
1 . Plasticized poiyvinyl chloride sheet of 10-mil
minimum thickness, vapor rating of 0 . 10 perms
or less , approved for under-slab, on-grade appii-
cations .
2 . Misceiianeous Materiais -
a. Generai - Provide adhesives, tapes, fiashings,
and accessories as recommended by the vapor
barrier manufacturer , to maintain the vapor
rating for the entire barrier.
EARI_1___EXE.QQIIQN
3 .01 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE :
A. Clean the substrate of projections and substances
detrimental to the Work ; comply with recommendati n
of the prime materiais manufacturer.
B. Install accessories as shown, if not shown, as recommended
by the prime materiais manufacturer.
C. Fill voids , seal joints and appiy bond breakers as
recommended by the prime materiais manufacturer.
D. Install separate fiashings as recommended by the prime
materiais manufacturer , wherever indicated to precede
the membrane or coating . Comply with details shown
and if not shown comply with manufacturer' s recommen-
dations .
07100-3i
E. Protection of Other Work : Do not allow liquid and
mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors.
Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces
of work , by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining
work.
3 .02 INSTALLATION :
A. General : Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions ,
except where more stringent requirements are shown
or spec ififed , and except where project conditions
require extra precautions or provision to ensure satis-
factory performance of the work.
B. Reinforced Membrane Composition : install plies of
glass fiber fabric, set in continuous mopings of bitumen.
Do not allow fabric to be In direct contact with masonry
or concrete.
C. Protection Course, if required : Set composition board
protection course in last mopping of bitumen before
it thickens.
D. Waterproofing and Dampproofing installation : Brush
or spray semi - fibrated compound in uniform coatings
in thickness and coverage as recommended by manufacturer
in locations as shown on the drawings.
E . Elastic Sheet Vapor Barrier : Under interior concrete
slabs install directly below slab , as recommended
by manufacturer. Tap and seal joints in vapor barrier
and seal to other surfaces at extremities and penetrations
of barrier . Seal over tears and punctures with tape
or adhesively applied strips of vapor barrier material
for continuous coverage.
31.031 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS :
A. It is required that waterproof membranes be water-tight
and not deteriorate in excess of limitations published
by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
07100-4
SECTION 07200
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 _7 GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Work included : Provide building insulation where
shown on the Drawings , as specified herein , and as
needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. The applications of insulation specified in this section
include the following :
1 . Type A - Board type thermal insulation.
2 . Type B - Blanket type thermal insulation.
3‘ Type C - Blanket type acoustic insulation.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Use adequate numbers of sk i i l ed workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this Section.
B. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete
and post a certificate of insulation compliance in
accordance with pertinent requirements of governmental
agencies having Jurisdiction .
1 .03( PRODUCT HANDL 1NG :
A. Protect from deterioration . Do not allow insulation
materials to become wet, . soiled , in direct exposure
of sun , , or covered with frost ; insulation that has
been damaged shall be discarded. Comply with manufacturers
recommendations for handling, storage, and protection
during installation.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data and Product Certification including
specifications and installation instructions must
be submitted on each type of insulation.
07200-1
B. Certification : Submit certifications that thermal
and acoustical Insulations comply with specified
requirements.
PARI_2_=_PRQDLIQIS
2(.01 MATERIALS :
A. Provide the following building insulation types as
shown on the Draw ) ngs.
1 . Type A : 3/ 4" thick foil faced rigid closed cell
extruded polystyrene insulation board with K
value of 0 .20 at 750 F mean.
2 . Type B : 6 " thick foiifaced glass fiber batts
with an insulation value of R-19,.
31. Type C : 3- 1 / 2" thick unfac d fiber sound l
isolating batts ; STC of
each side of 2x4 stud ) .
2 .02 OTHER MATERIALS :
A. Provide other materials, notspecifically ltallcribed
but required for a complete andproper
as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval
of the Architect.
P913I_�___ExE.�!lI141�
3 .01 SURFACE CONDITIONS :
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work
of this Section will be performed . Correct conditions
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work . Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected .
B. Remove, or protect against, projections in construction
framing which may damage or prevent proper installation .
3 . 02 INSTALLATION :
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance
wjth the original design, requirements of governmental
agencies having jurisdiction , and the manufacturer ' s
recommended installation procedures as approved by
the Architect .
07200-2
B. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions for the particular
conditions of installation in each case . if printed
instructions are not available or do not apply to
the project conditions, ..consult the manufacturer for
specific recommendations before proceeding with the
work.
C. Extend insuiation full thickness as shown over entire
area to be insulated . Cut and fit board or blanket
insulations tightly around obstructions , and fill
voids with insulation.
D. Apply a single layer of insulation of the required
thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make
up the total thickness.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
07200-3
SECTION 07300
ROOFING - ASPHALT SHINGLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 . DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Provide materials and labor and perform all work required
to accomplish the installation of a new shingle roof
and eave drip.
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide UL labeled "Class A" shingles as specified.
deliver materials in manufacturer ' s unopened , labeled
containers. Store materials so as to avoid damage.
B. Repairs of Substrate : Proceed with shingle work only
when weather conditions are in compliance with manufac-
turer's recommendations and when substrate is completely
dry .
C. Warranty : Provide shingles manufacturer ' s warranty
on installed work, agreeing to pay for repair or replace-
ments of defective shingles as necessary to eliminate
leaks . Period of warranty is twenty- five ( 25 ) years
after date of acceptance by the Owner.
1 .03( SUBMITTALS:
A. Samples : Submit 12 " x 12" minimum sample of actual
shingle once color has been selected by Architect
from manufacturers color chart. Review shall be for
color and texture only .
B. Submit copies of manufacturer ' s specifications and
installation instructions for shingles ; include data
substantiating compliance with the specifications .
Submit shop drawings or details showing the manner
of securing roof and waterproof connections to adjoining
work and penetrations.
07300-1
PABI_2___PRQDULTS
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Shingles Materials : Class "A" standard weight shingles
( as well as hip & ridge shingles ) mineral surfaced
asphalt fiberglass Shingles bearing UL Class "A" Label
and UL "Wind-Resistant" Label , weighing not less than
225: lbs . per square , 3*tab cut-out. Color shall be
"Slate Blend" as manufactured by Timberline GAF Corpor-
ation , "Driftwood " , as manufactured by Architect 80
Fiber Glass, Bird & Son or equal .
B. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: 30#/Sq. complying with
ASTM D-226 .
C. Fasteners : Hot- dipped Zinc-coated 11 or 12 gauge
barbed shank, minimum 3/8" diameter head . sharp pointed
conventional roofing nails, of sufficient length to
penetrate 3/4" into solid decking or through plywood
sheathing. must be used .
D. Eave Drip : Aluminum , 20 gauge , with baked on bronze
finish .
E. Sheathing : 1 / 2 " CDX . . 44-ply exterior grade plywood.
PABI_�!__EXE�Uh1QI
3 .01 GENERAL : The shingles shall be installed in strict compliance
with the manufacturer' s written instructions and recommendations.
END OF SECTION
07300-2
SECTION 07310
WOOD SHINGLES
PLRI_L__SENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. Provide materials and labor and perform ail work required
to accomplish the installation of wood shingle siding
on all exterior wall surfaces, as indicated on drawings.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1 . Section 06200 Finish Carpentry
2 . Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal
3 . Section 09900 Painting
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide Fire retardant, Certigrade , number 1 grade
Blue Label shingles bearing the Red Cedar Shingle
and Handsp1it Shake Bureau ' s official grade marked
label . Siding shall meet the code specifications
of SBCC Report No. 82-83 .
1 .03IJOB CONDITIONS :
A. Proceed with work only when weather conditions are
in compliance with manufacturer ' s recommendations
and when substrate is completely dry .
B. Before installing any panels, erector shall verify
the alignment of the structural frame and shall not
proceed with the installation if the structural frame
or other governing dimensions are not within approved
tolerances.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit 24" long sample of full height shingle. Samples
will be approved for color and texture only. Compliance
with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Contractor.
B. Submit shop drawings and erection details/drawings
for approval .
07310-1
EARI_Z_=_ERQDLCIS.
2 .01 . MATERIALS:
A. Shingle panels shall be fire retardant, Ciass "B " ,
15" x 96 " with straight- butt , 7 " weather exposure ,
"B a r n S h a k e S I d I ng " as manufactured by Shakertown
Corp . , P. 0. Box 400 , Wi n I ock , Washington , 98596',
or approved equal .
B. Asphalt-Saturated Felt: 30#/sq. complying with ASTM D-266;
felt to be nailed over furring prior to applying shingles.
C. Fasteners : Per manufacturer ' s specifications to be
submitted to Architect for final approval . Note : do
not use bright or blued steel wire nails in applying
shingles.
EARI_L_=_EXELUI1QN
3 .01 GENERAL : The wood shingles shall be installed in strict
compliance with the Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit Shake Bureau
and In accordance with manufacturers written instructions and
recommendations.
3 .02 APPLICATION :
A. Shingles shall be applied using the single-course
method , two- ply at any one point ; shingles shall be
doubled at the foundation line.
B. Nailing : Each course shal I be secured with 3d ( 1
1 /4" ) small head , corrosion resistant , hot dipped
zinc coated , aluminum or stainless steel type 304-316 '.
nails, driven approximately 1 " ( long enough to penetrate
sheathing at least 1 /2" ) above the butt line of the
next course . Nails shall be driven flush but not
so that the nail head crushes the wood . They shall
be placed approximately 3/ 4 " from the side edges of
the shingles.
C. Corners : Outside corners should be constructed with
an alternate overlap of shingles between successive
courses . Inside corners may be mitered or woven over
a metal flashing , or they may . be made by nailing an
S4:S 1 1 / 2 " or 2 " s q u a r e s t r i p I n the corner , after
which the shingles of each course are jointed to the
strip.
07310-2
D. Shingles shall be spaced apart approximately 1 /4"
or if closed Joints, , not hammered together.
E. Joints of shingles in any one course shall be not
less than 1 1 / 2 " away from the Joints in adjacent
courses.
F. Shingle shall be appi led with a weather exposure of
7".
END OF SECTION
07310-3
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART.. L-_GENERAL
1 .01 : RELATED DOCUMENTS :
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1 . Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry
24 Section 07900. - Joint Sealants
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of each type of flashing and sheet metal
work is shown on the drawings.
B. The following types of work are specified in this
section.
1 . Metal flashing and counter flashing (except thru
wall masonry flashing ) .
2 . Trim.
34 Elastic sheet flashing.
4 . Elastic expansion joints.
1 .03ISUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer ' s Data, Flashing and Sheet Metal : Submit
copies of specifications, installation instructions
and general recommendations by the manufacturer of
flashing and sheet metal materials. include published
data or certified test data for each material showing
compliance with the requirements .
B. Samples : Submit 6 " long samples of elastic expansion
joints; submit a 6 " long sample of formed roof flashing.
Samples will be approved for color and texture only .
Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
07600-1
1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. The substrate and the conditions under which flashing
and sheet metal work is to be performed shall be examined
and verif ied . Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an
acceptable manner.
PBBI_Z___Pg412LWIS.
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Metal Flashing ( and Counter Flashing ) :
1 . Zinc - Coated Steel Sheet - Commercial quality
carbon steel sheets with minimum of 0 . 20% copper
content complying with ASTM A 526; hot dip galvanized
to comply with ASTM A 525 , G 90, miii phosphatized
if shown to receive paint finish , 0 . 0359" thick
( 20 gage ) except as otherwise indicated.
2 . Stainless Steel Sheet - Type 302/304 stainless
sheet or strip , complying with ASTM A 167 ; dead
soft, except as otherwise indicated; No. 2D conven-
tional duii finish, 0 . 105" thick ( 28 gage ) except
as otherwise indicated.
B. Miscellaneous Materials -
1 . For metal work, provide the type solder and fasteners
recommended by the producer of the metal sheets,
for fabrication and installation .
2 . For non-metallic work, provide the types of substrate
primers, adhesives, tapes and fasteners recommended
by the producer of the flashing sheets, for fabrica-
tion and installation.
3 . Bituminous Coating : FS TT-C-494 , or Mii-C-18480 ,
or SSPC-Paint 12, cold-applied bituminous mastic,
compounded for 15-mil dry-film thickness coating.
2 .02 FABRICATED PRODUCTS :
A. Extruded Aluminum Trim and Flashing (Alum) , not otherwise
specified : Extruded aluminum units , 0 . 08 " minimum
thickness , of the profile and dimensions shown, alloy
60631-T52 unless otherwise indicated , complete with
formed aluminum Joint covers and flashing assembly ,
and with prefabricated ( mitered and welded ) corner
units . Finish shali be standard mill finish unless
otherwise shown on drawings.
07600-2
B. Fabricated Metal Flashing and Trim : Shop fabricate
metal flashing, trim, including internal and external
corners, expansion joints ( if any ) , and similar items
to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply
with standard industry detai I s as shown by SMACNA
in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " . Except
as otherwise indicated , provide soldered flat- lock
seams, and fold back metal for form a hem on the concealed
side of exposed edges. Comply with metal producers '
recommendations for tinning , , soldering , and cleaning
flux from metal . Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate
work from the following metal :
1 . Zinc-coated steel sheet.
2 . Stainless steel sheet where specifically indicated
( S. S. ) .
C. Provide strainer units at outlets of conductor heads.
Fabricate units of minimum 0 .062" diameter, non-corrosive,
compatible wire or wire mesh , with 1 /2" maximum spacing
of wires ; removable bee-hive design , unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Elastic Expansion Joints : Manufacturer ' s standard
fabricated units , including prefabricated corner and
intersection units, constructed of an elastic sheet
flashing strip, insulated inside with 1/2" thick closed-
cell flexible foam, fabricated in 10 '-0" minimum lengths
prepared for jointing, and including standard accessories
for installation and jointing .
1 . Nailing Flanges - Provide manufacturer ' s standard
embedded or concealed nailing flanges of corrosion
resistant metal .
2 . Size - 14 " wide sheet with 5 " wide insulation
strip.
3� Flashing Strip - 60-mil neoprene elastic sheet.
PART 3. -_ EXECUTION
3(.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS :
A. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations
for handling and installation of flashing and sheet
metal work .
07(.00-3(
B. Performance : Coordinate the work with other work
for the correct sequencing of items which make up
the entire membrane or system of weatherproofing or
waterproofing and rain drainage. It is required that
the flashing and sheet metal work be permanentiy water-
tight, and not deteriorate in excess of manufcturer ' s
published limitations allowing for normal thermal
and moisture conditions encountered at the site.
3(.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL WORK :
A. Comply with details and profiles as shown, and comply
with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " recom-
mendations for installation of the work .
B. For securing and anchoring components, use mechanical
fasteners . For non- moving seams provide soldered
flat- lock seams for watertight joints . Comply with
metal producers ! recommendations for tinning, soldering
and cleaning the Joints.
C. Shop fabricate metal flashings and sheet metal work
to the greatest extent possible. Provide prefabricated
corner units , mitered and welded or soldered and ready
for installation.
D. Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet
metal work exceeding 151 -0 " running length , except
for flashing and trim ; 10-0 " maximum spacing, and
located 21-0" from corners and intersections.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever
possible. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed
edges to form a dam.
F. Separate metals from dissimilar metals and from treated
wood and cementitious materials . Separate with a
15-mil dry- film-thickness bituminous coating to either
the substrate or metals where underlayment cannot
be used for separation.
G. Extruded Aluminum Work :
1 . Bed base members in roofing cement . Anchor and
seal in accordance with manufacturer ' s instructions.
Clean exposed surfaces to prevent the start of
non-uniform oxidation or eiectroiitic action.
07600-4
2 . Apply 15-mil dry- film-thickness bituminous coating
to concealed aluminum surfaces which will be
In contact with cementitious surfaces, dissimilar
metals, wood or other absorptive substrates.
3603 INSTALLATION OF ELASTIC FLASHING :
A. Bond flashing sheets to vertical substrates and to
other surfaces as indicated or recommended by sheet
manufacturer, and seam the end Joints.
B. Insert flashing into regiets and clamping rings, and
anchor by mechanical means as shown or as recommended
by manufacturer. Seal the Joint with sealant as indi -
cated or recommended by manufacturer.
C. On bituminous membranes provide not less than 4" adhesion
of flashing or membrane , and cover edges with tape
or stripping set In roofing cement.
D. Nall flanges of elastic expansion joints to curbs
and wall as indicated , and in the manner recommended
by the manufacturer but not closer than 2" to expansion
joint.
3604 CLEANING OF EXPOSED FLASHINGS AND SHEET METAL :
A. Clean all flashing and sheet metal intended to be
exposed to view and of materials detrimental to the
integrity of the flashing and sheet metal work.
B. Use cleaning agent recommended by the flashing and/or
sheet metal manufacturer for each particular item
installed.
END OF SECTION
07600-5
SECTION 07 900
SEAL ANTS
EARI_i___GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A . The extent of each type of joint sealer is indicated
on the drawings , sometimes by abbreviations as indicated
herein or on the drawings.
B. The required applications include, but are not necessarily
limited to the following :
1 . Pavement and sidewalk joints adjacent to building
walls or construction .
2 . Exterior building wall joints.
3 . Flashing and coping Joints.
4 . Miscellaneous concrete construction joints .
5 . Floor ( interior ) joints .
6 . Partition and ceiling joints.
7 . Equipment and isolation joints .
8 . Gasketing for assembly of components not otherwise
specified .
9. Masonry joints.
1 . 02 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data , Joint Sealers: Submit manufacturer's
specifications, recommendations and installation instruc-
tions for each type of material required . Include
manufacturer ' s published data, or letter of certification,
or certified test laboratory report indicating that
each material complies with the requirements and is
intended generally for the applications shown.
B. Samples , Joint Sealers : Submit 12" long samples of
each color required ( except black ) for each type of
joint sealer exposed to view . Install sample between
07900-1
2 strips of material similar to or representative
of typical surfaces where sealer will be used , held
apart to represent typical joint widths . Samples
w ill be reviewed for color and texture only. Compliance
w ith all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Contractor .
C. Guarantee , Joint Sealers : Submit copies of written
guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers
w hich fail to perform as air-tight and water-tight
joints ; or fait in Joint adhesion, cohesion , abrasion
resistance , weather resistance , extrusion resistance ,
migration resistance , stain resistance , or general
durability ; or appear to deteriorate in any other
manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's
data as an inherent quality of the material for the
exposure indicated . Provide guarantee signed by the
Installer and Contractor .
1 . 03 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Weather Conditions : Do not proceed with installation
of sealants under adverse conditions, or when temperatures
are below or above manufacturer ' s recommended limitations
for installation . Proceed with the work only when
forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper
cure and development of high early bond strength .
Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature
✓ ariations , install elastomeric sealants only when
temperatures are not in the lower third of manufacturer's
recommended instaliation temperature range.
E RZ-Z-=_ERQoLWIE
2 . 01 MATERIALS, GENERAL :
A. Colors : For exposed materials provide color as indicated
if not indicated , selected by A/E from manufacturer ' s
standard colors . For concealed materials , provide
the natural color which has the best overall performance
characteristics .
B. Hardness : As recommended by manufacturer for application
shown , unless otherwise indicated .
07 900-2
C. Modulus of Elasticity : Provide the lowest available
modulus of elasticity which is consistent with exposure
to weathering, indentation, vandalism, abrasion, support
of loading, and other requirements.
D. Compatibi l ity : Before purchase of each required material ,
confirm Its compatibility with other materials it
will be exposed to in the joint.
E . Size and Shape : As shown or, If not shown, as recommended
by the manufacturer for the type and condition of
Joints , and for the indicated joint performance or
movement.
F . Grade of Sealant : For each application, provide the
grade sealant ( non-sag, self- leveling, no-track, knife
grade, preformed, etc. ) as recommended by the manufacturer
for the particular condition of installation ( location,
joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar conditions) ,
to achieve the best possible overall performance .
Grades specified herein are for normal conditions
of i nsta I I ati on.
2 . 02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS :
A. Two-Component Urethane Paving Joint Sealant ( for horizontal
exterior concrete surfaces at building perimeter walls) :
Provide polyurethane-based, 2-part elastomeric sealant,
complying w i th FS-TT- S-00227E, Class A, Type I ( self-
leveling ) unless Type II recommended by manufacturer
for the application shown.
B. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant ( for general exterior
vertical applications ) : Provide polyurethane-based,
one-part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS
TT- S-00230C, Class A, Type I ( self- leveling ) unless
Type II recommended by manufacturer for application
shown.
2 . 03 CAULKING COMPOUNDS :
A . Caulk : Provide general purpose , mildew resistant ,
gun grade , interior/ exterior , acrylic latex caulk ;
pal ntable , colorfast , non- staining , non- bleeding ;
in compliance with ASTM C-834-7 .
07900-3
2 .04 JOINT FILLERS ( Expansion Joint Material ) :
A . Bituminous and Fiber Joint Filler ( for exterior concrete
pavement joints ) : Provide resilient and non-extruding
type premoided bituminous impregnated fiberboard units
complying with ASTM D1751 , FS HH-F-341 , Type I and
AASHTO M213 .
B . Closed -Ceti PVC Joint Fiiler ( for interior building
joints , material separations , acoustical seaiant ,
etc . ) : Provide flexible expanded poiyvinyi chloride
complying with ASTM D1752 , Type I , Grade soft; except
provide higher compression in defiection grades as
may be necessary to withstand installation forces
and provide proper support for seaiants .
2 . 05 GASKETS (Other than Glazing Gaskets ) :
A. Concealed Closed-Cell Neoprene Gaskets: Provide extruded
or molded expanded neoprene gaskets complying with
ASTM D1056 , Class SC, of the compression deflection
required to perform properly ; self-skinned and of
the profile required to maintain a watertight and
airtight seal .
2 . 06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL :
A. Joint Primer/ Sealer : Provide the type of joint primer/
sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer for
the Joint surfaces to be primed or seaied .
B . Bond Breaker Tape : Polyethylene tape or other plastic
tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer to
be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond
to the substrate of Joint filier must be avoided for
proper performance of sealant . Provide self-adhesive
tape wherever applicable .
C . Sealant Backer Rod : Compressible rod stock of closed
cell polyethyiene foam, poiyethyiene-jacketed polyurethane
foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible,
permanent, durable non-absorptive materiai as recommended
for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer.
D . Aluminum Window Sealant : Silicone sealant equal to
General Electric Silicone Sealant 1600 or one part
polyurethane sealant equal to Sikafiex by Sika Chemical
Co . ; neutral color or color as selected by the A/E
from manufacturer ' s standard color chart.
07900-4
EARI_L_=-EXEQUIlat
3 . 01 MANUFACTURER ' S INSTRUCTIONS :
A . Comply with manufacturer 's printed instructions except
where more stringent requirements are shown or specified,
and except where manufacturer ' s technical representative
directs otherwise .
3 . 02 JOINT PREPARATION :
A . Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation
of sealant or caulking compound . Remove dirt, insecure
coatings , oil , grease , moisture and other substances
which would interfere with bond of sealant or caulking
compound . Prepare each concrete and masonry joint
surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer .
Roughen vitreous or glazed joint surfaces as recommended
by sealant manufacturer .
B . Prime or seal the Joint surfaces wherever shown or
recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow
primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
3 . 03 INSTALLATION :
A . Set joint filler units at proper depth or position
in the joint to coordinate with other work, including
the installation of bond breakers , backer rods and
sealants . Do not leave voids or gaps between the
ends of joint filler units . Install sealant backer
rod for liquid elastomeric sealants , except where
shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by
sealant manufacturer for the application shown.
B . Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever
required by manufacturer ' s recommendations to ensure
that elastomeric sealants will perform properly .
C . Employ only proven installation techniques , which
will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform,
continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with
complete "wetting " of the joint bond surfaces equally
on opposite sides . Except as otherwise indicated ,
fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface ,
slightly below adjoining surfaces . Where horizontal
joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical
surface , fill to form a slight cove, so that joint
will not trap moisture and dirt.
07900-5
D . Install sealant to depths as shown or , if not shown,
as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within
the following general iimltations , measured at the
center ( thin ) section of the bead ; tool all joints
as recommended by manufacturer.
1 . For sidewalks , pavements and similar joints at
buildings fill joints a depth equal to 75% of
joint width , but neither more than 5/ 8" deep
nor less than 3/ 8" deep .
2 . For normal Joint sealed with elastomeric sealants
f I I I Joints to a depth equal to 50% of Joint
width , but neither more than 1 / 2" deep nor less
than 1 / 4" deep .
3 . For joints sealed with caulking compounds, fill
Joints to a depth in the range of 75% to 125%
of Joint width .
F. Spillage : Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow
or spill onto adjoining surfaces , or to migrate Into
the voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean the adjoining
surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate
evidence of spillage .
G . Recess exposed edges of gaskets and joint fillers
slightly behind adjoining surfaces , unless otherwise
shown , so that compressed units will not protrude
from the Joint. Recess fillers to be sealed as recommended
by sealant manufacturer .
H . Bend ends of gaskets together with adhesive or by
other means as recommended by the manufacturer to
ensure continuous watertight and airtight performance .
Miter-cut and bond ends at corners unless molded corner
units are provided .
I . Tool sealant and caulking beads smooth and concave,
unless otherwise Indicated .
3 .04 CURE AND PROTECTION :
A . Protect and cure sealants and caulking compounds in
compliance with manufacturer ' s instructions and recom-
mendations, to obtain high early bond strength, Internal
cohesive strength and surface durability .
END OF SECTION
07900-6
SECTION 08100
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 _- GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Provide standard steel doors/steel frames . access
doors , acoustical doors/ frames and Security Steel
doors/frames manufactured by a single firm specializing
in the production of this type of work . unless otherwise
acceptable.
B . Provide doors and frames complying with the Steel
Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames " ( S . D. I . 100 ) , and as herein
specified.
C. Fire-Rated Assemblies :
1 . Wherever a fire- resistance classification is
shown or scheduled for steel doors and frames,
provide fire-rated doors, investigated and tested
as a fire door assembly , complete with type of
hardware to be used . Identify each fire door
with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating
applicable fire rating of steel doors.
2 . Construct and install assemblies to comply with
NFPA Standard No. 80 . and as herein specified .
1 .02 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data : Standard Steel Doors and Frames
and interior steel window frames - Submit manufacturer' s
data for fabrication and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings - Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames :
1 . Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and
installation of steel doors and steel frames .
Include deta i l s of each door or window frame
type , elevations of door design types, conditions
at openings, details of construction , location
08100-1
and installation requirements of finish hardware
and reinforcements, and detai l s of Joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
2 . Provide a schedule of doors and frames and interior
window frames using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on the contract
drawings .
C . Certify that standard steel doors and steel frames
comply with the specified requirements.
1 .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide
protection during transit and Job storage.
B . Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage.
Minor damages may be repaired provided the finish
items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable
to the Owner, otherwise , remove and replace damaged
items as directed.
C . Store doors and frames at the building site under
cover . Do not allow doors to become wet. Place the
units on wood sills or in a manner that will prevent
rust and damage . Avoid the use of non-vented plastic
or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber.
Provide a space between stacked doors to promote air
circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2(.01 MATERIALS :
A. Hot- Rol led Steel Sheets and Strip : Commercial quality
carbon steel , pickled and oiled , complying with ASTM
A569 and ASTM A568 .
B . Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets : Commercial quality carbon
steel , complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568 .
C . Galvanized Steel Sheets : Zinc-coated carbon steel
sheets of commercial quality , complying with ASTM
A 526 . with ASTM A 525 , G60 coating, mill phosphatized
D . Supports and Anchors : Fabricate of not less than
18 gage galvanized sheet steel .
08100-2
E . inserts . Bolts and Fasteners : Manufacturer ' s standard
units , except hot- dip galvanized items to be built
into exterior walls , complying with ASTM A 153 , Class
C or D as applicable.
F . Shop-Applied Paint: For all steel surfaces, use rust-
inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking.
suitable as a base for specified finish paints.
2 .02 FABRICATION - GENERAL :
A . Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid .
neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or
buckle . Accurately form metal to required sizes and
profiles . Wherever practicable, fit and assemble
units in the manufacturer ' s plant . Clearly identify
work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled
before shipment . to assure proper assembly at the
project site.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, from
only cold-rolled steel .
C. Fabricate door and window frames, concealed stiffeners,
reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings
from either cold-rolled or hot-rol led steel ( at fabri-
cator ' s option ) unless otherwise specified.
D . Fabricate all exterior doors, panels and frames from
galvanized sheet steel .
E. Exposed Fasteners : Unless otherwise indicated. provide
countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
F. Finish Hardware Preparation :
1 . Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised
and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts,
reinforcing . drilling and tapping in accordance
with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates
provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable
requirements of ANSI A 115 " Specifications for
Door and Frame Preparation".
2 . Reinforce hollow metal units to receive subsurface
applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied finish hardware may be done at project
site.
08100-3 .
3 . Locate f i n i sh hardware as approved on final shop
drawings and in accordance with "Recommended
Locations for Builder ' s Hardware" . publ ished
by the National Builders Hardware Association .
G. Shop Paintings :
1 . Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of fabricated
hollow metal units, including galvanized surfaces.
2 . Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil ,
grease , dirt, and other foreign materials before
the application of the shop coat of paint.
3 . Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency
to prov I de a un i forml y finished surface ready
to receive field-applied paint.
2 .03 STANDARD STEEL DOORS :
A. Provide metal doors of 16 gage galvanized sheet steel
of the types and styles indicated on the drawings
or schedules and complying with S . D. I . 100 for minimum
materials and construction requirements.
B. Door Louvers : Provide s I ghtproof adjustable louvers
for doors where Indicated , constructed of inverted
V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24 gage cold-rolled
steel set Into 20 gage steel frame . Louvers shall
include a self-contained fusible- link mechanism and
shall bear UL rating.
2 .04 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES :
A. Provide metal frames of 14 gage galvanized sheet steel
of the types and styles indicated on the drawings
or schedules and complying with S. D. I . 100 for minimum
materials and construction requirements.
B . Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights,
windows, borrowed lights, and other openings, as shown
on the drawings. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise
shown.
C. Fabricate frames with mitered and shop welded corners.
D. Form exterior frames of hot dip galvanized steel .
08100-4
E . Door Silencers : Drill stops to receive 2 silencers
on strike Jambs of single-swing frames and 2 silencers
on heads of double door frames. Do not install silencers
until finish painting is thoroughly dry .
F . Plaster Guards : Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards
or mortar boxes, welded to the frame, at back of al I
finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials
might obstruct hardware operation.
G. Acoustical Doors shall be equal to Model F-48, Ultra-Sonic
Series as manufactured by Pioneer Industries , Division
of Core Industries Inc. , ( 201 ) 933-1900 .
2 .05 SECURITY DOORS AND FRAMES :
A. Provide 14 gauge, medium security door equal to Model
FP 12 as manufactured by TRUSSBILT, 2575: Como Avenue ,
St. Paul , Minnesota, 55108.
B. Door shall be provided with security hardware reinforcement
including pocket for security locks ( Vision panel
provided with Model FP 1 2) .
PARI_L =_EXECUTAN
3 .01 INSTALLATION :
A. General : Install hollow metal units and accessories
in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer' s
data, and as herein specified.
B. Placing Frames :
1 . Comply with the provisions of S . D. I . 100 unless
otherwise indicated.
2 . Place frames prior to construction of enclosing
walls and ceilings . Set frames accurately in
position , plumbed , aligned, and braced securely
until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is completed, remove temporary braces
and spreaders l eav I ng surfaces smooth and undamaged.
3 . In masonry construction , locate 31 wall anchors
per Jamb at hinge and strike levels. Building- In
of anchors and grouting of frames is specified
in Section 04220 .
08100-5
4 . Install fire- rated frames In accordance with
NFPA Standard No. 80 - In metal stud partitions,
install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge
and strike levels . Attach studs to wall anchors
with tapping screws.
C. Door Installation :
1 . Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective
frames, within clearances specified In S. D. I . 100 .
2 . Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified
in NFPA Standard No. 80 -
D. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08710 .
3(.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Final Adjustments : Check and readjust operating finish
hardware items in hol low metal work just prior to
final inspection . Leave work in complete and proper
operating condition . Remove and replace defective
work , including doors or frame which are warped. bowed
or otherwise damaged.
B . Prime Coat Touch - Up : Immediately after erection ,
sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat
and appiy touch-up of suitable and compatible air-drying
primer.
C. Performance Criteria:
1 . Doors shall readily unlatch and open easily and
remain in any placed position without movement.
2 . Doors shall , with gentle to moderate ( normal )
force, close easily and latch readily.
3� Doors shall not require a slamming to close or
l a t c h , nor produce b i nd i ng. . scuf f i ng or scraping
between door frame and/or floor and door and/or
hardware.
END OF SECTION
08100-6 .
SECTION 08200
PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS
PARI_1_-_LENEBAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent and location of each type of door is shown
on the drawings and in schedules, sometimes by industry
standard abbreviation.
B . The type of doors required include solid core flush
wood doors with piastic laminate faces.
C. Factory-prepared for hardware and premachining of
glazing for doors is included in this section ; shop
finishing of plastic faced doors is included in this
section .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. General : Comply with the requirements of the following
standards unless otherwise indicated .
1 . Non-Fire Rated Wood Doors - NWMA Industry Standara
I . S. 1 "Wood Flush Doors" of the National Woodwork
Manufacturer ' s Association and factory mark each
door with the NWMA "Qual ity Certi f led " Seal of
Approval for conformance.
2 . Plastic Laminate - NEMA L03-1975 .
3 . Fire- Rated Wood Doors : Where fire- resistance
classifications are shown or scheduled for wood
assemblies, or shown in fire-rated walls , provide
doors which comply with the requirements of NFNA
No . 80 " Standard for Fire Doors and Windows "
and which have been tested and rated with single
point hardware by UL .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS :
A . Manufacturer ' s Data, Wood Doors : Submit door manufac-
turer ' s product data specifications ana installation
instructions for each type of wood door requ i red ,
including other data as may be required to show compliance
with specified requirements.
08200-1
B . Include details of core and edge construction trim
for openings , glazed openings , louvers and similar
components.
C. Include finishing specifications for doors to receive
factory-applied finish including plastic laminate.
D . Include certifications as may be required to show
compliance with the specifications.
E . Warranty , Wood Doors :
1 . Submit written agreement in door manufacturer ' s
standard form signed by the Manufacturer, Installer
and Contractor , agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped ( bow , cup or
twist ) or which show photographing of construction
below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance
limitations of NWMA.
2 . The warranty shall also include refinishing and
reinstallation which may be required due to repair
or replacement of defective plastic faced solid
core wood doors.
3 . Warranty shall be in effect for five ( 5 ) years
after the date of substantial completion for
solid core flush interior doors.
F. Samples : Submit plastic laminate for selection of
color and texture by A/E .
1 . 04 PRODUCT DEL IVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING : Protect wood
doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage ,
soiling and deterioration. Comply with the "On-Site Care" recommenda-
tions of NWMA pamphlet "Care and Finishing of Wood Doors " and
with manufacturer ' s written instructions.
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A . Space Enclosure : Do not install wood and plastic
faced doors until space has been enclosed and is weather-
tight, and until the space is nominally dry , and until
ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will
be continuously maintained at values near those indicated
for final occupancy .
08200-2
EARI_2_=_ERDDLLCI.S
2 . 01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS :
A. General : Provide wood doors complying with the applicable
requirements of NWMA I . S. 1 for the kinds and types
of doors indicated and as further specified .
1 . Exposed Surfaces - Provide plastic laminate as
shown or scheduled and as further specified .
Provide same surface material on both faces and
all edges of each door, unless otherwise indicated .
2 . F i re- Rated Doors - Provide exposed faces and
edges to match non- fire rated doors in the same
area of the building, unless otherwise indicateu .
Provide trim for openings ( if any ) which has
been tested and listed for the kind of door and
rating indicated.
2 .02 GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS :
A . Premach i ne a l l wood doors at the factory for hardware
and glazing.
B . Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWMA for
premachining . Machine doors for hardware requiring
cutting of doors . Comply with final door hardware
schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware
templates and other essential information required
to ensure proper fit of doors , hardware and glazing.
Take accurate measurements of hardware mortises in
metal frames to verify dimension and alignment before
proceeding with matching in the factory.
C . Openings : Cut and trim openings through doors as
shown . Comply with the applicable requirements of
the referenced standards.
D . Prefinish all plastic faced wood doors at the factory
or finishing shop.
2 .03 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS ( including doors with vision lites) :
A. Plastic Laminate Faced Solid Core Wood :
1 . Door Construction - Glued block solid core or
mat- formed particle board with wood veneer cross-band
or manufacturer ' s standard face panels . Provide
integral solid lumber blocking for mortise hardware.
08200-3
2. Exposed Surfaces - Apply plastic laminate to
both faces and all edges of doors.
EARI_a_=_EZEC1JI14N
3 . 01 INSTALLATION :
A. Condition doors to the anticipated average temperature
and humidity in installation area prior to hanging .
B. Hardware : For installation see Section 08710 of these
specifications.
C . Manufacturer ' s Instructions : Instal wood doors in
accordance with manufacturer ' s instructions and as
shown.
D . Install fire- rated doors in corresponding fire-rated
frames in accordance with the requirements of NFPA
No. 80 .
E . Fitting Doors : Align doors to frame for proper fit
and uniform clearance at each edge . Seal any cut
surfaces that must be altered or remachined for proper
fit.
F . Clearances : For non- fire doors provide clearances
of 1 / 8 " at jambs and heads ; 1 / 8" at meeting stiles
for pairs of doors ; and 1 / 2 " from bottom of door to
top of decorative floor finish or covering . Where
threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1 / 4 " clearance
from bottom of door to top of threshold . Provide
1 " clearance at bottom of door for non- fire rated
door schedule for "undercut" .
G. Shop-Finished Doors : Restore finish on edges of shop-
finished doors before installation , if fitting or
remachining is required at the job site.
H . Glazing : Refer to Section 08800 for glazing required
for doors.
3 . 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Operation : Rehang or replace doors which do not swing
or operate freely .
08200-4
B. Finished Doors : Refinish or replace doors damaged
during installation.
C. Performance Criteria :
1 . Doors shall readily unlatch and open easily and
remain in any placed position withour movement.
2 . Doors shall , with gentle to moderate ( normal )
force , close easily and latch readily.
3 . Door shall not require slamming to close or latch ,
nor produce binding, scuffing or scraping between
door frame and/or floor and door and/or hardware.
END OF SECTION
08200-5
SECTION 08330
OVERHEAD SERVICE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A . The extent of sectional . upward-acting service doors
is shown on the drawings .
B . Provide complete operating door assemblies including
door curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism, operators
and installation accessories, as shown on the drawings
and herein specified , and as otherwise required for
a complete assembly .
C . The fol lowing types of overhead service doors are
specified in this section.
1 . Motorized ( Electric Operator) vertical lift overhead
sectional aluminum service door.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Furnish the overhead service door as a complete unit
produced by one manufacturer . including hardware .
accessories, mounting and installation components.
B. Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements
for sectional doors shall be the Overhead Door Corporation,
or approved equal .
C. Inserts and Anchorages:
1 . Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must
be set in concrete or built into masonry for
the installation of the units. Provide setting
drawings , templates . instructions and directions
for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay .
2 . See Division 3 and 4 of these specifications
for installation of inserts and anchorage devices.
08330-1
3 . Wind Loading - Design and reinforce rolling doors
and their anchorage to structure , to withstand
a wind loading pressure and a maximum deflection
in accordance with the latest edition of the
Standard Building Code as amended by the local
building code.
1 .03( SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data , Overhead Service Doors : Submit
manufacturer ' s product data , roughing- in diagrams ,
and installation instructions . include operating
instructions and maintenance information data.
B. Shop D r a w i n g s, Overhead Service Doors : S u b m i t s h o p
drawings for special components and installations
which are not fully dimensioned or detailed on manufac-
turer' s data sheets.
1 .04 GUARANTEE :
A . Entire door installation shall be guaranteed for a
period of one year from date of occupancy . Adjustments
in door operation replacement or correction of defective
workmanship or faulty material shall be made at sole
expense of this Subcontractor during guarantee period.
PART 2 -_PRODUCTS
2 .01 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION :
A. Sectional Steel Overhead Doors:
1 . Sectional steel overhead doors shall be electric
operated as per plans , high - l i ft type . Door
shall be nominal 1 -3 / 4 " inches thick , stiles
and rails shall be fabricated from 6063T6 aluminum
alloy extruded shapes, bronze anodized finish .
Sectional steel overhead doors shall be equal
to Model 520 Series Commercial Heavy-Duty, Aluminum
Door with reinforcing fins and energy saving
package as manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation .
All panels except bottom row shall be bronze
tinted DS glass . Tint to match bronze tint of
glazing of all other exterior windows in facility .
Bottom row of panels sha l l be bronze tinted ,
laminated glass.
08330-2
3 . Tracks - Fabricate tracks or curtain Jamb guides
in accordance with approved overhead door manu-
facturer and as follows :
a. Fabricate curtain Jamb guides of steel angies,
or channeis and angles with sufficient depth
and strength to retain the curtain loading.
b. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing
by 3/8" minimum bolts at not more than 30"
o. c. , unless otherwise recommended by door
manufacturer. Place anchor bolts on exterior
wali guides so that they are concealed when
door is in ciosed position. Provide removabie
stops on guides to prevent over-travei of
curtain , and continuous bar for hoiding
windiocks.
4 . Weather Seals - Provide Energy Savings Package
wjth seals of naturai rubber or neoprene rubber
weatherstripping for doors. Secure weather seals
wjth continuous metal pressure bars . At door
Jambs and head , use a continuous weather strip
secured to the exterior side of the Jamb guide .
Perimeter seal shalt limit air leakage to a maximum
of 2 . 4 CFM per foot of Jamb and 4'. 2 per foot
of head at wind veiocity of 25 mph when door
is closed . Seat between sections and at siil
shall limit air leakage to a maximum of . 6 CFM
per foot of joint. Jamb gasket shall be replaceabie
without removing track or track angle.
B. Counterbalancing Mechanisms:
1 . Counterbalance doors by means of an adjustable
steel helical torsion spring . mounted around
a steel shaft and mounted in a spring barrel
and connected to the door curtain with the required
barrel rings . Use grease- sealed bearings of
self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating
members.
C. Brackets : Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer' s
standard design, either cast iron or cold-roiled steel
plate with belt mouth guide groove for curtain.
D. Provide cam action hardware; hinges shall be galvanized
steel . Lock shall be galvanized, lock cylinder provided
under section 08710 . Door shall be equipped with
safety bottom fixture.
08330-31
E . Manual Door Operators : Provide chain hoist operator
for overhead door , consisting of an endless steel
hand-chain, chainpocket wheel and guard. Design chain
hoist with a self- locking mechanism allowing the curtain
to be stopped at any point in its travel and to remain
in position until movement is reactivated.
F. Electric Door Operators :
1 . General : Furnish electric door operator assembly
of the size and capacity recommended and provided
by the door manufacturer ; complete with electric
motor and factory- prew i red motor controls , gear
reduction unit, solenoid operated brake, clutch ,
remote control stations. control devices . conduit
and wiring from controls to motor and central
stations and accessories required for proper
operation.
2 . Provide hand-operated disconnect or a mechanism
for automatically engaging a sprocket and chain
operator and releasing brake for emergency manual
operation . Mount disconnect and operator so
that they are accessible from floor level . Include
an Interlock device to automatically prevent
the motor from operating when emergency operator
Is engaged.
3 . Design operator so that motor may be removed
without distrubing the limit- switch adjustment
and without affecting the emergency auxiliary
operator.
4.. Door Operator Type : Provide wall or bracket-mounted
door operator units consisting of an electric
motor . a worm-gear drive from motor to reduction
box to a gear wheel mounted on the counterbalance
shaft, and quick-clutch , and drive assembly of
horsepower and design as determined by the door
manufacturer for the size of door required and
as herein specified.
5 . Electric Motors :
a. Provide high- starting torque , reversible,
constant duty , Class A Insulated electric
motors with overload protection , sized to
move door in either direction , from any
position , . at not less than 2 / 3 foot nor
more than 1 foot per second .
08330-4
b . Coordinate wiring requirements and current
characteristics of motors with the building
electrical system ; see Section 16000 of
these specifications.
c. Furnish open drip- proof type motors ( NEMA
Type I ) . unless otherwise indicated .
d. Provide 1 / 4 H . P . motors for doors 8 ' -0 "
In width or less and 1 / 2 H . P . for doors
over 8 ' -0" In width .
6 . Remote Control Station :
a . Unless otherwise shown , provide monetary
contact, 3 button control station with push
button controls labeled "open " . " close "
and "stop".
b . Provide interior units , full -guarded type,
surface-mounted , heavy-duty , with general
purpose NEMA Type I enclosure, unless otherwise
Indicated.
7� Automatic Reversing Control : Furnish each door
wjth an automatic safety switch , extending full
width of door bottom, and located within a U-shaped
neoprene or rubber astragal mounted to the bottom
door rail . Contact with switch before fully
closing will immediately stop the downward travel
and reverse direction to the fully opened position.
Connect to the control circuit through a retracting
safety cord and reel .
8 . Remote Radio Control Operation : Furnish each
door with two ( 2 ) portable remote controllers ,
capable of raising. lowering. stopping and starting
door operation from inside vehicles.
PARI_3_-_ EXECUTION
3401 INSPECTION :
A. Prior to the commencement of installation of overhead
sectional doors , areas and conditions of the work
shall be examined and any conditions detrimental to
its proper and timely completion shall be documented .
Commence work only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected In an acceptable manner.
08330-5
3 .02 INSTALLATION :
A . Install door and operating equipment complete with
necessary hardware, Jamb and head mold strips. anchors,
inserts . hangers, and equipment supports in accordance
with final shop drawings, manufacturer ' s instructions,
and as specified herein.
B. Upon completion of Installation Including work by
other trades , lubricate , test and adjust doors to
operate easily , free from warps , twist or distortion
and fitting weathertight for the entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION
08330-6 .
SECTION 08400
ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART_ 1 _-_GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. Scope of Work : Work covered by this specifications
shall include :
1 . Aluminum entrance doors.
2 . Aluminum frames.
3 . Fastening devices.
4. Door hardware.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1 . Glass and glazing.
2 . Carpentry .
3 . Structural steel and miscellaneous iron.
C . Work Installed By This Subcontractor But Furnished
by Others :
1 . Cylinder lock and thumbturn.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Design Criteria : Framing members of the system shall
meet the wind load requirements of the Southern Standard
Building Code.
1 .031 SUBMITTALS :
A . Shop Drawings : Prior to fabrication and delivery ,
submit shop drawings to Architect for approval . Shop
drawings shall be at minimum one- half full size scale
and shall show dimensions, types of material , finishes,
size and location of Joints and anchors, relationship
of framing members to structure and surrounding materials.
B . Submit 8 inch sample of framing system, indicating
anodized finish :
08400-1
1 .04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING :
A. Immediately upon delivery to Job site, place materials
in area protected from weather. Store materials so
as not to scratch finish or damage in any way and
cover with adequate protective covering material .
Damaged material will not be acceptable and must be
replaced accordingly .
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Existing Conditions : Field measure all openings prior
to fabrication.
1 .06' GUARANTEE :
A. This Subcontract shall guarantee all work under this
section to be sound, weatherproof , and free from defects
in materials and workmanship for a period of one year
from date of final acceptance of the building.
EA2I_2.___ERDDULIS
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. General : All aluminum framing members, mullions,
and door sections shall be formed from 6063-T5: extruded
aluminum alloy . Finish on all metal shall be equal
to "Kawneer", #40 Dark Bronze anodized finish free
from blemishes and surface defects .
B. Glass Framing : Members shall be nominal 1 -3/4 inches x
4 1 /2 inches, f l ush glazed, equal to Kawneer, Tri-Fab
Series.
C. Doors : Extruded aluminum hollow tube construction,
concealed joint fastenings, snap- in glazing members,
narrow stiles, single acting, of the size and type
indicated on drawings .
D. Fastenings : Stainless steel or carbon plated against
electrolytic action.
E. Door Hardware :
1 . Push bar/pull handle: Equal to Kawneer "Style
J ", finish to match door.
08400-2
2 . Closer : Concealed overhead with hold open device.
3 . Pivots : Bottom offset pivot.
4 . Dead Lock : Maximum security lock less cylinder .
5 . Cylinder lock and thumb turn shall be furnished
by Hardware Supplier and installed by door manufac-
turer.
6 . Weatherstripping : Black pile cloth for doorstiles
and transom bars.
7; Threshold : Heavy duty extruded aluminum, equal
to 200-5AV by Pemko, 5: inch by opening width ,
finish to match door.
F. Sealants : Clear silicone.
2 .02 FABRICATION :
A. Aluminum Doors : Members shall have tight, hairline
joints where rails are fitted against stiles and shall
be fastened into steel reinforced plates located inside
the stile.
B. Framing Members : Joints between vertical and horizontal
mullions shall be compression joints, with a gasket
of nonhardening butyl compound. A standard snap- in
water stop shall be placed between vertical and horizontal
members and sealed wjth liquid butyl compound. No
exposed fasteners will be permitted. Horizontal members
shall be weeped on exterior for drainage. All glass
shall be set both sides in vinyl . Voids between perimeter
framing members and adjoining members and adjoining
structure shall be made watertight by means of a mechanical
water stop and sealing compound.
PARI_L___EXELUIlDN
3 .01 INSPECTION :
A. Prior to erection of the aluminum framing members,
this Subcontractor shall check the position and alignment
of all supporting members. Erection shall not commence
until discrepancies have been corrected.
08400-3
3 .02 INSTALLATION :
A. All framing members shall be securely anchored to
the structure and set plumb and level . Members shall
be so Installed as to permit sufficient lateral and
vertical movement under expansion and contraction
without deflecting or buckling. At joints between
framing members and exterior surfaces provide continuous
clear sealant or secure a watertight job. All surfaces
in contact with metal or concrete or masonry shall
be coated wJth bituminous paint.
B. Aluminum doors shall be installed plumb and level .
Hardware shall be adjusted to provide easy operation
of door.
31.03( ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Upon completion of glazing, remove all dirt, sealant
stains, and protective coatings, and clean and polish
all exposed aluminum surfaces.
END OF SECTION
08400-4
SECTION 08500
METAL WINDOWS
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent and types of aluminum window units are
shown on the drawings and include operable units -
singularly and in multiple installations.
B. Furnish and install all aluminum windows , including
all necessary hardware, trim, anchors, glazing , and
miscellaneous items In place, where shown on the drawings
and as specified.
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Standards : Except as otherwise indicated, the aluminum
windows furnished under this contract shall meet or
exceed the following requirements.
1 . PA3-HP, CA3 -HP, THA3,-HP or VPA3-HP AAMA performance
specification as outlined in ANSI /AAMA 302 . 9- 1977;
for general air infiltration , water resistance
and structural requirements.
2 . AAMA "Quality Certified" label .
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer : Products used in
the work shall be produced by manufacturers regularly
engaged in manufacture of the type of windows specified
and with a history of successful production acceptable
to the A/E .
C. Qualification of Installers :
1 . Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are
thoroughly trained and experienced In the necessary
crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed
for proper performance of the work of this section.
2 . Window manufacturer shall provide the necessary
supervision for the assembly and installation
of windows furnished under this contract.
08500-1
1 .03. SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer' s Data :
1 . Submit manufacturer' s specifications, recommendations
and standard details for aluminum window units ,
including fabrication , finishing , , hardware and
other components of the work. Include manufacturer' s
recommended installation procedures.
2 . The manufacturer ' s recommended installation pro-
cedures , when approved by the A/ E, will become
the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the work .
B. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings with full size
details showing all materials . details of fabrication
and installation . Show anchors, hardware. operators,
and other components not included in manufacturer ' s
standard data. Include glazing details.
C. Samples : Submit 12" square sample showing materials,
glazing and trim color, hardware . glazing , trim, etc .
The Owner reserves the right to select one or more
windows at random, at time of delivery , and to submit
these units for testing to verify compliance of the
production run products to the specifications. Windows
that do not comply shat I be rejected and costs of
all tests on such windows shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor.
D. Warranty :
1 . Window Unit : The Contractor shall furnish in
writing from the manufacturer a guarantee by
the manufacturer , guaranteeing the window units
and installation under normal use for a period
within ten ( 10 ) years of substantial completion
against any defective material or workmanship .
a. Contractor must furnish a guarantee from
the window manufacturer stating that all
parts, sections, etc. used for manufacturing,
or a suitable replacement, will be available
for the same peiod of ten ( 10) years.
b . The guarantee shall state that the manufacturer
will provide all labor and materials required
at the job site to repair and/or replace
defective materials as outlined above.
08500-2
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING :
A. Protection : Use all means necessary to protect the
materials of this section before, during , and after
installation and to protect the existing construction.
B. Replacements : In the event of damage , immediately
make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the A/E and at no additional cost.
PARI_1I___ERQDLiCI.
2 .01 GENERAL :
A. For the purpose of establishing quality of required
materials , the specifications and model numbers of
aluminum window units as provided by Series 2000 ,
Ware Aluminum Windows . P. O. Box 59-2775 AMF, Miami ,
Florida 33159 , Phone : 305-634-8511 . have been cited
herein . in no way shall this be construed as limiting
competition . Products of other manufacturers may
be proposed in accordance with the provision of the
contract.
2 .02 MATERIALS :
A. Aluminum shat I be 6063- T5 . al loy extrusions with a
minimum wall thickness of 1 /8 " for the window frame
member. Frame depth shall be no less than 2" . Glazing
Bead shall be extruded snap- in type with a . 050 wall
thickness.
2 .03 OPERATION :
A. Refer to drawings for size, location and specific
operation for each window . Operation types are as
follows :
1 . Out-swing casement, roto operated
2 . Projected
3 . Horizontal slider
2 .04 CONSTRUCTION :
A. Frame corners and all intermediate rails shall have
double fasteners with tightly fitted hairline joints
and sh a l I be factory sealed. All ventilator members,
08500-3
muntins and intermediate frame rails shall be tubular
in design. The ventilators shall have a tubular section
1 " high , angle- reinforced mitered corners , heliarc
welded wjth two ( 2) 1/2" plus welds and front to back
web welds at each corner.
B. Al I projected ventilators shall be provided with nylon
sliding shoes, wjth adjustable stainless steel springs
concealed in a tubular aluminum guide and balancedon
3/ 16" solid extruded aluminum arms. Ventilators shall
be balanced for ease of operation , requiring no prop
arms.
C. Casement ventilators shall be hung on heavy duty ,
nylon bushed hinges. Manually operated casement vents
shall be equipped with a slide shoe friction adjustment
attached to each vent as a hold open device.
2 .05 HARDWARE :
A. Cam type locking handles shall be provided on projected
and hopper vents . Cam locks on drop head in- swing
vents shall be of the concealed type, with a removable
key . Provide ring cam and spring catch locks for
pole operation at windows that are not easily accessible
( Dorm loft) .
B. Standard locking hardware for manual and roto operated
casement vents shall be aluminum finished die cast
zinc cam locks . Roto operated casement vents shall
be furnished wjth an aluminum finished die cast zinc
roto operator with cadmium plated case hardened steel
arm and worm gear.
2 .06 . SCREENS :
A. Screens shall have solid extruded aluminum frames .
Project-out and manually operated out- swing casement
vents shall have wicket type screens mounted on the
inside face of the window frame. Roto casement screens
shall be mounted on the inside of the window frame
and furnished in rolled aluminum frames.
2 .07 GLAZING :
A. Project-out, casement vents are inside glazed. Extruded
glazing bead shall be provided for glass and panels .
Glazing leg is 3/4" high .
08500-4
B. Manufacturer ' s Labels shall remain on the glass until
inspected in place by Owner . If glass has been cut
from a larger sheet making this requirement Impractical ,
an affidavit from the Contractor stating the thickness ,
type , . quality , and manufacturer meets the requirements
of the drawings and specifications will be accepted.
2 .08 FINISH :
A. The exposed surfaces of all aluminum members shall
be clean and free from surfaces blemishes . . scratches
or tool marks . Approved finish shall be color anodized
aluminum NAAMM AA—M2122A42 ( minimum thickness of 0 . 7
mils ) , integral color anodized finish — dark bronze. Apply
protective coating of clear acrylic lacquer„ not less
than 0 .5 mil dry film thickness.
2 .09 MISCELLANEOUS :
A. Poles : Shall be supplied in proper lengths to operate
specific wjndows . Owner shall be furnished two sets
of poles for each specific use.
2 . 10 WEATHERSTRIPPING :
A. External and internal weatherstripping shall be provided
around the perimeter of the ventilators.
PARI_111_-_EXELULION
3 .01 PREPARATION OF OPENINGS :
A. All surface areas shall be properly prepared and cleaned
before Installation of window units or trim . All
blocking , shimming, continuous liners or furring shall
be completed as required .
B. All assembled window unit materials shall be properly
back sealed, butted where it is required, and properly
fastened before erection.
3L02 INSTALLATION :
A. All units are to be installed in prepared openings
in accordance with manufacturer ' s recommendations
and Installation drawings . Frames shall be securely
fastened and set plumb and level without twisting
or bowing - Frame shall be adjusted , if necessary ,
after installation to insure smooth and weathertight
operation of sash .
08500-5
B. Anchor units securely in place . Aluminum and other
corrodible metal surfaces shall be properly separated
from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at
points of contact wjth other materials.
C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound,
or with Joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight
construction.
D. All head , si I I and jamb members shall be properly
furred or l i ned and the panning shall make contact
with such furring, etc. The furring . . when required, .
shall be continuous, and shall further act as a back-up
for the new sealant. Suspended panning without proper
back-up or furring will not be permitted.
E. All windows must be installed square and properly
aligned . Proper tolerances must be allowed for such
purpose , and any or all windows not installed in the
proper manner will be rejected as such, and the work
must be properly reinstalled.
F. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight
fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for
smooth operation and weathertight closure.
3,031 GLAZING :
A. Use wet glazing channel glazed system with only high
grade silicone . . polysulfide sealants or closed cell
PVC and fully cured butyl tapes.
B. Fo I I ow g I az i ng recommendations of the gl az i ng material
manufacturer.
C. After installation, protect surfaces with polyethylene
sheet covering taped to framing member where damage
from paint or scratches from other work is likely
to occur.
3 .04 SEALANT:
A. All exterior surfaces shall have proper contact for
caulking back-up. Caulking shall contact the panning
materials , the exterior masonry and the exterior face
of head , Jamb, and sills. A superficial or skin bead
is not acceptable.
08500-6 .
B. Instal I sealant In accordance with manufacturers
recommendations and instructions.
3 .05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION :
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after Installation
of windows , exorcizing care to avoid damage of the
finish . Remove excess sealant compounds , dirt and
other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving
parts.
B. Cl can i ng of Glazed Surface : The Contractor shall
be responsible for cleaning glass. All smears, . stains,
paint, and other blemishes shall be cleaned from glazed
surfaces „ both interior and exterior, to the A/ E ' s
satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
08500-7 :
SECTION 08710.
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of hardware is shown on the door schedule,
located on the drawings . Hardware is hereby defined
to include all items known commercially as builders
hardware, as required for all doors.
B . The required types of builders hardware include ( but
are not necessarily limited to) the following :
1 . Butts and hinges
2 . Lock cylinders and key systems
3 . Lock and latch sets
4 . Flush bolts
5 . Automatic Door Bottom
6. Push/pull units
7 . Closers
8 . Door trim units
9 . Stripping and seals
10. Thresholds
11 . Door stops
12 . Silencers
136 Key Cabinet
14 . Padlocks ( Combination )
08710-1
C. Work shall include aii hardware with the exception
of storefront systems hardware . folding partition ,
overhead doors and detention doors; storefront locking
cylinders and overhead door cylinders specified here,
all other hardware specified in Section 08400 , 08330 ,
10620 . and 11001 .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Listed herein are the acceptable-
manufacturers for the primary items of builders hardware.
1 . Locksets, latchsets, cylinders -
a. Russwin
b . Sargent
c. Schlage
d . Corbin
e. Yale
2 . Closers -
a. Russwin
b . Sargent
c. Yale
d . LCN
31. Butts and Hinges -
a. Stanley
b . Hager
c. H. Soss
d . McKinney
4; Weatherstripping, Seals, and Thresholds -
a. Pemko
b . Reese
c. NGP
08710-2
B . Manufacturer : Obtain each kind of hardware ( latch
and lock sets , hinges , closers, etc. ) from only one
manufacturer , even though several may: be indicated
as acceptable manufacturers.
C . Supplier : A recognized builders hardware supplier
who has been furnishing hardware in the same area
of the project for a period of not less than two years,
and who is, or has in employment, an experienced hardware
consultant who Is available at reasonable times during
the course of the work for project hardware consultation
to the Owner, and Contractor.
D. Fire- Rated Openings : Provide hardware for fire-rated
openings In compliance with NFPA Standard No . 80 -
Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed
by UL for types and sizes of doors required, and compl les
with the requirements of the door and door frame labels.
F. Quality of hardware shall be equal to the following :
Locksets, Cylinders Yale 8600 Series US26D
Citation
Butt Hinges Hager 1279 USP
Door Stops Baldwin 4000 Series US26D
Threshold Pemko 205AV ---
Closer Yale 3000 Series US26D
( Siimilne )
1 .03 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data, Builders Hardware: Submit manu-
facturer ' s product data for each Item of hardware .
Include whatever Information may : be necessary to show
compllance with requirements, and include Instructions
for installation and for maintenance of operating
parts and exposed finishes. Wherever needed, furnish
templates to fabricators of other work which is to
receive finish hardware.
B. Hardware Schedule, Builders Hardware:
1 . Submit hardware schedule in the manner and format
specified, complying with the actual construction
progress schedule requirements. Hardware schedules
are Intended for coordination of the work . Review
and acceptance by the Owner does not rel ieve
the Contractor of his exclusive responsibility
to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified.
08710-31
2 . Include a separate key schedule, showing clearly
how the Owner ' s final Instructions on keying
of locks have been fulf it led .
3 . Hardware Schedule: Based on the hardware
scheduled , Included herein and on the drawings,
complete the hardware schedule indicating complete
designation of every Item required for each door
or opening . Furnish initial draft of schedule
at the earliest possible date, in order to facil Itate
the fabrication of other work ( such as hollow
metal frames ) which may be crucial in the project
construction schedule . Furnish final draft of
schedule after samples, manufacturer ' s product
data sheets , coordination with shop drawings
for other work , delivery schedules, and similar
information has been completed and accepted.
C. Samples, Builders Hardware:
1 . Prior to submittal of the f i na l hardware schedule
and pr l or to del I very of hardware, submit one
sample of each exposed hardware unit, finished
as required , and tagged with full description
for coordination with the schedule . Sample wi l I
be approved for design , color, and texture only .
Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
2 . Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units
which are acceptable and remain undamaged through
submittal , review, and field comparison procedures
may , after f I nal check of operation . be used
in the work, within limitations of keying coordination
requirements.
D. Product Handling :
1 . Packag I ng of hardware , on a set by set bas i s,
is the responsibility of the supplier.
2 . ProvIde secure lock-up for hardware delivered
to the project, but not yet installed. Control
the handling and installation of hardware items
which are not Immediately replaceable, so that
the completion of the work will not be delayed
by hardware loses, both before and after installation.
08710-4
E. Job Conditions:
1 . Coordination : Coordinate hardware with other
work . Tag each item or package separately, with
identification related to the final hardware
schedule, and include base installation instructions
in the package. Furnish hardware Items of proper
design for use on doors and frames of the thickness,
profile. , swjng, security, and similar requirements
indicated, as necessary for proper installation
and function . Deliver individually packaged
hardware items at the proper times to the proper
locations ( shop or project site ) for installation.
2 . Templates : Furnish hardware templates to each
fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to
be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware.
Upon request . check the shop drawings of such
other work . to confirm that adequate provisions
are made for the proper installation of hardware.
1 .04 GUARANTEE :
A. The hardware supplier shall guarantee that all materials
specified in this section shall be free from defects
and blemishes and shall perform satisfactorily for
a period of one year from date of occupancy . Defective
or faulty materials shall be removed and replaced
with new materials at hardware supplier ' s expense .
Adjustments in hardware operation or faulty installation
shall be made at installer ' s expense during the guarantee
period.
PARI_Z_=_PR.4pULIS
2(. 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE :
A . The general requirements for type and function of
builders hardware items are indicated by schedule.
B. Hardware Sets: The following hardware sets are referenced
on the door schedule, the ( ) noted after locks and/or
latches indicate A. N. S. I . door function.
08710-5
GLQiR_fl
All hardware by storefront manufacturer ( See Section 08400 )
except cylinder and thumbturn which shall be supplied under
this subcontract.
Gr ip._f2
1 - 1/2 pair butts
1 lockset (electrified; similar to Yale 8691 )
1 closer
Silencers
Doorstop (Door mounted )
Group #3
1 =1 /2 pair butts
1 lockset ( F04)
1 closer
Silencers
Doorstop (Door mounted on door 114B)
Group #4
1 -1 /2 pair butts
1 . lockset ( F04)
Doorstop
Silencers
Closer
Weatherstrip
Group #5
All hardware by folding partition manufacturer.
Group #6.
1 =1 /2 pair butts
1 . lockset (F12)
1 closer
Silencers
Weatherstrip
Doorstop
Door Top (on door 136A only )
Threshold
08710-6'.
Gt4.1.41_,g2
1 = 1/2 pair butts
1 lockset (F19)
1 closer
Silencers
1 kickpiate
Door stop
Group #8
1 =1 /2 pair butts
1 : I atch set ( FO 1 )
Silencers
Door stop
Group #9
3 pair butts
1 lockset (F07 )
Silencers
Doorstop
Closer (door 121A only )
Group #10
3I pair butts
1 : lockset (F05 )
Astragal
Silencers
Group #11
1 - 1/2 pair butts
1 iockset (F05 )
1 closer
Silencers
Automatic Door Bottom ( not required for door 1278 )
Acoustical Stripping ( not required for door 127A)
Doorstop
Threshold
Qroup #12
1 - 1 /2 pair butts
1 lockset (electrified; similar to Yale 8691 )
1 closer
Silencers
Weatherstrip
Doorstop
08710-7:
GLQIig_fl
All hardware by detention door manufacturer.
Group #14
1 -1 /2 pair butts
1 : latchset (F01 )
1 closer
Silencers
Weatherstrip
Group #15
All hardware by overhead door manufacturer, with the exception
of locking cylinder.
Group #16
1 - 1/2 pair butts
1 lockset (F05 )
Silencers
Group #17,;
1 - 1/2 pair butts
Push Plate
Pull Bar
Doorstop
Silencers
Cl oser
2 .02 MATERIALS AND FABRiCATiON :
A. General :
1 . Hand of door : The drawings show the direction
of swing or hand of each door leaf . Furnish
each item of hardware for proper installation
and operation of the door movement as shown.
For pairs of doors with only one active leaf ,
door mark denotes such leaf ; if not shown, as
approved by A/E.
2 . Manufacturer ' s Nameplate: Do not use manufacturer ' s
products which have manufacturer ' s name or trade
name displayed in a readily visible location
(omit removable nameplates ) . except in conjunction
with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable
to the Owner.
08710-8
B. Base Metals : Produce hardware units of the basic
metal and forming method indicated, using the manufac-
turer ' s standard metal alloy . composition, temper
and hardness, but in no case, of less than commercially
recognized quality. Do not furnish "optional " materials
or forming methods for those indicated, except as
otherwise specified. All exposed metal shall be 300 ,
series satin stainless steel .
C. Fasteners :
1 . Manufacturer hardware to conform to published
templates, generally prepared for machine screw
installation. Do not provide hardware which
has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically Indicated .
2 . Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware
item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except
as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed
under any condition ) screws to match the hardware
finish or, If exposed in surfaces of other work,
to match the finish of such other work as closely
as possible, including "prepared for paint" in
surfaces to receive painted finish.
3 . Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units
which are exposed when the door is closed. except
to the extent no standard units of the type specified
are available with concealed fasteners. Do not
use through bolts for installation where the
bolt head or the nut on the opposite face is
exposed In other work, except where it is not
feasible to adequately reinforce the work.
D. Tools for Maintenance : Furnish a complete set of
specialized tools as needed for Owner ' s continued
adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement
of builders hardware.
2 .03 HINGES, BUTTS , AND PIVOTS :
A. Templates and Screws : Except for hinges and pivots
to be installed entirely ( both leaves ) into wooden
doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
08710-9
B. Hinge Pins : Except as otherwise indicated,pins as follows : provide
1 . Steel Hinges : Steel pins
2 . Nonferrous Hinges :9 Stainless steel pins
3 . Exterior Doors :
Non-removable pins
4. Out-swing Office Doors : Non-removable pins
C. Provide satin stainless steel 5-knuckle
ball bearing hinges for standard fulls mortised
standard frequency use, exce t weight doors and
be heavy duty on drawings. P where indicated to
2 .04 LOCK CYLINDER AND KEYING :
A. General : Supplier keying requ ( rementswand obtainifh Owner to finalize
in writing. final instructions
B.
Building geSystem: Except as otherwise
w se - y system for indicated,iplocks with
manufacturer ' s standard 6-pin tumbler Equip ldeks with
P1n tumbler cylinders.
C. Metals : Construct concealed lock clin
brass/bronze, stainless steel , or nickele parts from
silver.
D. Comply with the Owner ' s
and, except as otherwise indicated, provide de individual
change key for each lock which Provide fndivfduaf
be keyed alike with a hich is not designated to
be
on master-keys group of related
for indexing. and number individual ochange Skems
Y
E. Key Material :
Provide keys of nickel sliver only .
F. Key Quantity :
1 . Furnish three change keys for each
lock and five
master keys for each master system
2 . Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
3‘ Deliver keys to Owner ' s representative.
08710- 10
4 . Key control manufacturer to set up complete cross
Index system and place keys on markers and hooks
In the cabinet as determined by the final key
schedule. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet,
for wall mounting, install per Owner ' s instruction.
2 .05 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS :
A. Strikes : Provide manufacturer ' s standard wrought
box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved
lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware
set.
B. Lock Throw : Provide 5/8 inch minimum throw of latch
and deadbolt used on pairs of doors. Comply with
UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts
on rated fire openings .
C. Flush Bolt Heads : Minimum of 1 /2 inch diameter rods
of brass, bronze, or stainless steel , with minimum
12iinch long rods.
D. Handles : Provide satin stainless handle for fully
mortised locksets and latchsets.
E. Provide fully mortised lock/ latch set units with rose
trim units.
F. Provide padlock equal to highest quality, Master,
Combination locks.
2 .06'. PUSH/PULL UNITS :
A. Provide round satin stainless steel bars or tubes
projecting 2-1 /2 inches from door face for pul Is.
B. Exposed Fasteners : Provide manufacturer' s standard
exposed fasteners for installation; through-bolted
for matched pairs, but not for single units.
2 .07: CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES :
A. Size of Units : Except as otherwise specifically indicated,
comply with the manufacturer' s recommendations for
size of door control unit, depending upon size of
door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency
of use.
B. Provide overhead parallel arms equal to Armgard Series
by Russwin or 3000 Series ( Siimline ) by Yale.
08710-11
C. Combination Door Closures and Holders : Provide units
designed to hold door in open position when desired
but close under normal usage.
D. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
208 DOOR TRIM UNITS ( kick plates, edge trim, astragals, and
similar units ) :
A. Fasteners : Provide manufacturer' s standard exposed
fasteners for door trim units; either machine screws
or self-tapping screws.
B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel , not more than
1 /2 Inch nor less than 1 /6 inch smaller in length
than door dimension.
C. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick, or mop ) not
more than 2 inches on top side smaller than the door
wjdth, x 8' inches in height. Metal plates shall be
stainless steel , 18 gage.
2 .09 STRIPPING AND SEALS :
A. Continuity of Stripping : Except as otherwise indicated,
stripping at each opening shall be continuous and
without unnecessary interruptions at door corners
and hardware.
B. Replaceable Seal Strips : Resilient or flexible seal
strip of every unit shall be easily replaceable and
readily available from stocks maintained by the manu-
facturer.
C. Extruded aluminum astragal w/neoprene stile shall
be equal to #DB433 as manufactured by Reese Enterprises,
Inc.
D. Weatherstripping :
1 . Provide types of weatherstripping indicated,
properly prepared for attachment to supporting
units.
2 . Provide bumper type weatherstripping at Jambs
and head, including a resilient insert and metal
retainer strip, surface-applied unless shown
08710-12
as mortised or semi-mortised, of extruded aluminum
with natural anodized finish ; 0 .062 inch minimum
thickness of main walls and flanges. Provide
closed-cell sponge neoprene insert, 1/4' inch
x 3/4 Inch .
3 . Provide threshold-contact type weatherstripping
at door bottom, including resilient insert and
metal housing of the design and size shown ; of
extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish ;
0 . 062 Inch minimum thickness of main walls and
flanges. Provide solid neoprene loop seal strip.
4: Brush Pile Seals : Pile insert of wood, polypropylene
or nylon woven pile with aluminum strip backing .
complying with AAMA 701 . 1 .
E. Provide extruded, anodized aluminum, acoustical automatic
door bottom, 40 . STC, with closed cell EPDM sponge
neoprene equal to Model 430 AM as manufactured by
Pemko.
F. Provide extruded aluminum door top equal to Pemko,
346A, for all exterior doors not protected by canopy .
2 . 10 THRESHOLDS :
A. Extruded aluminum, smooth commercial finish .
B. Surface Pattern : Fluted tread, manufacturer ' s standard.
C. Width : As indicated, but not less than 4! inches if
not otherwise indicated.
D. Thickness of Extrusions : 0 .25 inch for direct tread
surfaces, 0 . 1875 inch for secondary tread surfaces,
and 0 . 125: Inch for unexposed flanges and legs.
E. Construction : Single-piece or multiple-piece construction
at Contractor ' s option, complying with manufacturer ' s
recommendations.
F. Profiles : Provide manufacturer ' s standard unit which
conforms with the minimum size and profile requirements
as shown or otherwise indicated herein. For exterior
doors, not required to accommodate the handicapped,
provide prof i l e designed to form a weather sea l , of
the appropriate type for the swing of door. Provide
approved units with maximum of 1/4 Inch height for
doors required to accommodate the handicapped.
08710-131
1 . For swing-out doors, provide units with interior
stop or hook to act as weather bar.
2 . For swing- in doors, provide exterior hook-bar
and drain channel to minimize infiltration of
moisture and air. .
36 For double swing doors, provide standard fluted
top.
4 . Seal : Provide units with integral , replaceable,
resilient weatherstripping of extruded neoprene.
5 . For doors equipped with panic hardware, provide
prof i le with stop bar of proper size and shape
to function as the strike plate for the floor
bolts.
G. Weatherstripping inserts : Fabricate units to include
manufacturer' s standard replaceable resilient hollow
neoprene weatherstrip seal type, located to form contact
with door when closed.
2 . 1 1 : HARDWARE FINISHES :
A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each
door or opening, to the greatest extent possible,
and except as otherwjse indicated. Reduce differences
in color and textures as much as commercially possible
where the base metal or metal forming process is different
for individual units of hardware exposed at the same
door or opening. In general , match items to the manu-
facturer ' s standard finish for the latch and lock
set for color and texture.
B. Provide satin stainless steel ( 300 series ) with BHMA
finish No. 630 ( US 32D ) for all exposed hardware not
previously specified to be another material or finish.
Provide quality of finish, hardness, and other qualities
complying wjth recognized industry standards ( BHMA
and U . S. Bureau of Standards ) .
?ARI- -=-FXE�IlI14N
3601 INSTALLATION :
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated In "Recommended
Locations for Builders' Hardware" by the Door and
Hardware Institute ( DHI ) , except as otherwise specifically
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations,
and except as may be otherwjse directed by the Owner.
08710-14
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the
manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations.
Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install
hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to
be painted or finished in another way, coordinate
removal , storage, and reinstallation or application
of surface protection with finishing work specified
in Section 09900 . Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on the substrate
and verified acceptable for hardware.
C. Set units level , plumb and true to line and location.
Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
for proper installation and operation .
D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared
for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors
in accordance with industry standards.
E. Thresholds :
1 . Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile
of door frames, with mitered corners and hairline
joints . Joint units with concealed welds or
concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings
for spindles, bolts, and similar items, if any.
2 . Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or
larger screws, of the proper type for permanent
anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel which
will not corrode in contact with the threshold
metal .
3� At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated,
set each edge of threshold in a seal strip of
butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant.
3 .02 ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and
each door, to ensure proper operation or function
of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted
to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the
application made.
08710-15
B. Final Adjustment : Wherever hardware installation
is made more than one month prior to acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during
the week prior to acceptance or occupancy , and make
final check and adjustment of all hardware items in
such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary
to restore proper function and finish of hardware
and doors. Adjust door controi devices to compensate
for finai operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
C. Instruct Owner ' s personnei in proper adjustment and
maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during
the final adjustment of hardware.
D. Continued Maintenance Service : Approximately six
months after the acceptance of hardware in each area,
the Contractor accompanied by the representative of
the latch and lock manufacturer, shall return to the
project and readjust item of hardware not in proper
working order to restore proper function of doors
and hardware. Consult wjth the instruct Owner' s personnei
in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.
Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or
failed due to fauity design, materials or installation
of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current
and predictabie probiems (of substantiai nature) in
the performance of the hardware.
END OF SECTION
08710- 16'.
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 =_GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of glass and glazing work is shown on the
drawings , sometimes by abbreviations as indicated
herein.
B . The required applications of glass and glazing include
( but are not necessarily limited to) the following.
1 . Glazing exterior store fronts and entrances.
2 . Glazing Interior windows and glazing interior
doors.
3‘ Glazing exterior doors.
4'. Glazing overhead doors.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Safety Glazing : Comply with Consumer Product Safety
C o m m i s s i o n 16 CFR 1201 Category I I and ANSI Z97:. 1 .
with label on each piece.
B . General glass quality and installation procedures :
Flat Glass Marketing Association, and Fed. Spec. DD-G-451 .
type as required .
C. Fire- Resistant Glass : Tested and listed by U. L. for
"fire-resistance".
D . All labels shall be left on glass until final clean-up
unless specifically directed to remove them.
E . Manufacturers : All glass shall be manufactured by
Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company , Libby-Owen Ford Glass
Company , American Saint Gobain Corporation or the
Mississippi Glass Company or approved equal .
1 .031 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data , Glazing : Submit manufacturer' s
specifications and installation instructions for each
type of glazing required. Include test data substantiating
that glazing complies with specified requirements
and Is of sufficient design and size for the intended
usage.
08800-1
B . Manufacturer ' s Data, Glazing Materials : Submit copies
of manufacturer ' s specifications and installation
instructions for each type of glazing , sealants and
compounds, gaskets, and associated miscellaneous material
required . Include manufacturer ' s published data ,
or letter or certification, or certified test laboratory
report indicating that each material complies with
the requirements and is intended generally for the
applications shown.
C. Samples, Glass : Submit 12 inch squares of each type
of glass required . Review of samples will be for
color, texture, and pattern only , comp I i ance with
other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Contractor. Insulating glass samples need
not be hermetically sealed, but edge construction
must be included .
D . Samples , Glazing Materials : Submit three 12- inch
long samples of each type of glazing sealant or gasket
exposed to view . Samples will be reviewed for color
and texture only . Compliance with other requirements
is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
E. Maintenance Instructions : Submit manufacturer' s cleaning
and maintenance instructions and recommendations for
each type of glass or glazing installed.
F . Guarantee : Provide one year warranty from glazing
manufacturer agreeing to replace defective glass.
1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Weather Conditions : Do not proceed with installation
of liquid sealants under adverse weather conditions,
or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer ' s
recommended limitations for installation.
PARI_2._=_PRQDU.CIa
2601 BASIC GLASSES :
A . Plate Glass ( Clear or Heat- Absorbing Bronze Tint ) :
Polished plate or float glass : FS DD-G-451 . Type
I . Class I , Quality q3; 1 /4: inch thick .
B. Transparent Mirror Glass : Transparent mirror glass
shall consist of 1 / 8" + .03" plastic interlayer + 1 /8"
08800-2
laminated glass gray with transparent chrome alloy
coating applied by vacuum deposition . Glass shall
not require a light ratio of greater than 4 to 1 and
shall have a minimum STC rating of 35.
C. Tempered Glass : 1 /4" tempered plate glass (FS DD-G-451 ,
Type I ) , or sheet glass ( FD DD-G-451 , Type II ) ; which
has been heat-strengthened by manufacturer ' s standard
process ( after cutting to final size ) , to achieve
a minimum flexural strength of four times normal glass
strength, bronze tinted, to equal tint of plate glass.
D. Clear Wired Glass : FS DD-G-451 , Type III , Class 1 ,
Kind A ( Flat ) , Form 1 ( wired and polished both faces) ,
Mesh m1 ( welded diamond ) ; 1 /4 " thick nominal except
as otherwise indicated, for installation in fire rated
doors and wjndows.
E. Detention GIazIng : ARMORTEX-D or approved equal ,
detention glazing consisting of 1 / 4 " laminated safety
glass each side of a 1 /4" polycarbonate core. The
glass shall be separated from the polycarbonate by
a 3/ 16" airspace on each side.
2 .02 GLASS TYPES ( Units composed of or fabricated from basic
glasses ) :
A. Type I : 1 " insulated unit with outboard cite of 1 /4"
tinted float glass and inboard lite of 1 / 4 " clear
float glass . Unit shall have a summer "U " value of
0 . 57 + 0 .02 .
B. Type II : 1 " insulated unit with outboard I ite of
1 / 4" tempered tinted glass and inboard lite of 1 /4"
float glass.
C. Type III : 1 /4" wired glass.
D. Type IV : detention/mirror glass.
E. Type V : bullet resistant-detention glazing
F. Type V I : 1 /4" float glass
2 .03 GLAZING SEALANTS/COMPOUNDS :
A. General : Provide black exposed glazing material unless
otherwise indicated . Provide hardness of materials
as recommended by the manufacturer for the required
08800-3
application and condition of installation In each
case. Provide only compounds which are known ( proven )
to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted.
B. Comply with instructions and recommendations for trans-
porting , handling, storage , installation , bite and .
clearances as required by paragraph 1 .02 Quality Assurance.
C . Acrylic - Latex Interior Glazing Sealant : Modified
latex rubber and acrylic emulsion-polymer, compounded
specifically as a glazing sealant with permanent flexi-
bility nonhardening , nonstaining , and nonbleeding .
Provide sealant compatible with glazing materials
and approved by glazing manufacturer.
2(.04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS :
A. Setting Blocks : Neoprene, 70-90 durometer hardness,
with proven compatibility with sealants used.
B . Spacers : Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with
proven compatibility with sealants used.
C. Compressible Filler Rod : Closed cell or waterproof
jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic
foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used ,
flexible and resilient, with 5-0 psi compression strength
for 25% deflection.
D. Cleaners, Primers, Tapes, and Sealers : Type recommended
by glazing manufacturer.
PARI_l___EXELLLI1ON
3(.01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE :
A . Watertight and airtight Installation of each piece
of glass is required , except as otherwise shown .
Each installation must withstand normal temperature
changes, without failure of work . Glass and glazing
remain watertight and airtight, and without deterioration
of glazing materials and other defects in the work .
B . Protect glass from edge damage at all times during
handling, installation, and operation of the building .
C. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer
and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used
in glazing, except where more stringent requirements
are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer ' s
technical representative otherwise direct in writing .
08800-4
D . Comply with "Glazing Manual " by Flat Glass Marketing
Association except as shown and specified otherwise,
and except as otherwise specifically recommended in
writing by the manufacturer' s of the glass and glazing
materials.
E . Inspect each piece of glass immediately before instal -
lations, and eliminate any which have observable edge
damage of face imperfections.
F . Unify appearance of each series of sights by setting
each piece to match others as nearly as possible.
Inspect each piece and set with pattern , draw and
bow oriented in the same direction as other piece.
G . Install sealants as recommended in writing by the
seal ant manufacturer.
H . Glazing of entrance storefront shall be as recommended
by the storefront manufacturer.
3 .02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING :
A . Clean the glazing channel , or other framing members
to receive glass , immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate .
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric
sealants are used.
B . Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3 .03( GLAZING :
A. Install setting blocks of proper size at points recommended
by glazing manufacturer . If not recommended install
blocks, 4 inches minimum length , at quarter points
o f s i l l rabbet . Set blocks in thin course of the
heel -bead compound.
B . Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size
and spacing , for all glass sizes larger than 50 . united
inches. Provide 1 /8' inch minimum bite of spacers
on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width ,
except wjth sealant tape use thickness slightly less
than final compressed thickness of tape.
C. Voids and Filler Rods : Prevent exudation of sealant
or compound by forming voids or installing filler
rods in the channel at the heel of ,Jambs and head
( do not leave voids in the sill channels ) except as
08800-5
otherwise indicated, depending on light size, thickness,
and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer ' s
recommendations.
D . Do not attempt to cut, seam , nip , or abrade glass
which is coated.
E . Force sealants into channel to el iminate voids and
to ensure complete "wetting " or bond of sealant to
glass and channel surfaces.
F . Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds
to provide a substantial "wash " away from the glass.
Install pressurized tapes to protrude slightly out
of the channel , so as to eliminate dirt and moisture
pockets.
G . Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass
and stops or frames promptly after installation, and
eliminate stains and discolorations .
304 CURE, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING :
A . Cure glazing seal ants and compounds in compliance
with manufacturer ' s instructions and recommendations,
to obtain high early bond strength , internal cohesive
strength, and surface durability .
B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon
instal lation , by attachment of crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass . Do not apply markers
of any type to surfaces of glass.
C . Remove and replace glass which is broken , chipped ,
abraded, or damaged in other ways during the construction
period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.
D. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during
construction. so that it will not be damaged by corrosive
action and w ,ili not contribute ( by wash-off ) to the
deterioration of glazing materials and other work.
E . Wash and pol ish glass on both faces not more than
four days prior to Owner ' s acceptance of the work
in each area. Comply with glass manufacturer ' s recom-
mendations.
END OF SECTION
08800-6 .
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
EARI_1___HtERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A . The extent of the gypsum drywall work (also referred
to as gypsum wallboard and gyp . board ) is shown on
the drawings and in schedules , and drywall is hereby
defined to include gypsum board work with a tape-and-
compound joint treatment system known as " drywall
finishing" work and its metal framing system .
B. The types of work required include the following :
1 . Gypsum drywall including screw-type metal support
system .
2 . Gypsum backing boards for application of other
finishes.
3 . Drywall finishing ( joint tape-and-compound treatment) .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . Fire-Resistance Rating : Where work is indicated for
fire- resistance ratings , including those required
to comply with governing regulations, provide materials
and installations identical with applicable assemblies
which have been tested and listed by recognized author-
ities, including FM, U. L . and NFPA.
B. Industry Standard : Comply with applicable requirements
of GA-216 "Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board "
by the Gypsum Association , except where more detailed
or more stringent requirements are indicated , including
the recommendations of the manufacturer .
C . Allowable Tolerances : 1 / 16 " offsets between planes
of board faces , and 1 / 8" in 81 -0" for plumb , warp
and bow . Where substrates have been installed by
other trades tolerances may vary to those specified
for that trade .
09250-1
B. Submit the following product data :
1 . Materials list of items proposed to be provided
under this Section ;
2 . Manufacturer ' s specifications and other data
needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements;
3 . Manuaacturer ' s recommended installation procedures
which , when approved by the Architect , will become
the basis for accepting or rejecting actual instal -
lation procedures used on the Work .
1 . 04 PRODUCT HANDLING : Deliver gypsum drywall materials in
sealed containers and bundles , fully identified with manufacturer ' s
name , brand , type and grade ; store in a dry , well ventilated
space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the ground .
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. The substrates and the spaces to receive gypsum drywall
and the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to
be installed shall be examined and any conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the work shall be documented . Do not proceed with
the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in an acceptable manner .
B. Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55
degrees F , for the period of 24 hours before drywall
finishing , during installation and until compounds
are dry .
2 . 01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD :
A. General :
1 . Provide gypsum wall board complying with Fed . Spec
SS-L-30D , in 48 " widths and in such lengths as will
result in a minimum of joints .
2 . Regular wall board : Provide Type ill , Grade R, Class
1 , 1 / 2" thick except as may be shown otherwise on
the drawings .
09250-2
3 . Fire- retardant wall board : Provide Type Ill ,
Grade X, Class 1 , 5/8" thick .
4 . Water- resistant wallboard : Provide type VII ,
grade W or X as required , class 2 , 1 / 2 " thick
except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings .
5 . Foil -backed wallboard : Provide as shown on the
Drawings .
B. Shaft walls : Where so indicated on the Drawings ,
provide gypsum wallboard system specifically designed
for encasing shafts of the required fire-resistivity ,
and complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D , type IV , grade
R or X , class 1 , In the dimensions shown or otherwise
required .
C. Sheathing : Where gypsum wallboard sheathing is indicated
on the Drawings , provide gypsum wallboad complying
with Fed Spec SS-L-30D , type II , grade W, class 2 .
2 .02 METAL TRIM:
A. Provide , as shown on drawings metal trim as manufactured
by Fry Reglet, or approved equal .
B. Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 26 gage ,
complying with Fed Spec QQ- S-775 , type I , class d
or e.
C. Casing beads :
1 . Provide channel - shapes with an exposed wing ,
and with a concealed wing not less than 7/ 8 "
wide .
2 . The exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented
to the metal , but shall be suitable for joint
treatment .
D . Corner beads : Provide angle shapes with wings not
less than 7/ 8" wide and perforated for nailing and
joint treatment , or with combination metal and paper
wings bonded together , not less than 1 - 1 / 4 " wide and
suitable for joint treatment.
09250-3
E. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings :
1 . Provide angle shapes with wings not less than
3/ 4" wide .
2 . Provide concealed wing perforated for nailing ,
and exposed wing edge foided flat.
3 . Exposed wing may be factory finished in white
color .
2 .03 JOINTING SYSTEM:
A. Provide a jointing system , including reinforcing tape
and compound , designed as a system to be used together
and as recommended for this use by the manufacturer
of the gypsum wallboard approved for use on this Work .
B. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so
recommended by its manufacturer .
2 .04 FASTENING DEVICES :
A . For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on wood , use
1 - 1/4" type W bugle-head screws , or use annular ring
type nails comp i y i ng with ASTM C514 and of the length
required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction .
2 .05 OTHER MATERIALS :
A. Provide other materials , not specifically described
but required for a complete and proper installation ,
as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval
of the Architect.
EABI_ ___EXEEUIlQN
3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS :
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work
of this Section will be performed . Correct conditions
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work . Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected .
09250-4
3 .02 INSTALLATION :
A. General :
1 . Install the gypsum wallboard in accordance with
the Drawings and with the separate boards in
moderate contact but not forced into place .
2 . At internal and external corners , conceal the
cut edges of the boards by the overlapping covered
edges of the abutting boards .
3 . Stagger the boards so that corners of any four
boards wilI not meet at a common point except
in vertical corners .
B. Ceilings :
1 . Install the gypsum wallboard to ceilings with
the long dimension of the wallboard at right
angles to the supporting members .
2 . Wallboard may be Installed with the long dimension
parallel to supporting members that are spaced
16 " on centers when attachment are provided at
end joints .
C. Walls :
1 . Install the gypsum wallboard to studs at right
angles to the furring or framing members .
2 . Make end joints , where required , over framing
or furring members .
D . Attaching :
1 . Attach double layers in accordance with the pertinent
codes and the manufacturer ' s recommendations
as approved by the Architect.
2 . Attach to wood as required by governmental agencies
having jurisdiction .
3 .03 JOINT TREATMENT:
A . General :
1 . Inspect areas to be joint treated , verifying
that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly against
supporting framework .
09250-5
2 . In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing
will be performed , maintain a temperature of
not less than 55 degrees for 24 hours prior to
commencing the treatment , and until joint and
finishing compounds have dried .
3 . Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound
by machine or hand tool .
4 . Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between
coats , with additional drying time in poorly
ventilated areas .
B. Embedding compounds :
1 . Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener
heads in a thin uniform layer .
2 . Spread the compound not iess than 3" wide at
joints , center the reinforcing tape in the joint,
and embed the tape in the compound . Then spread
a thin layer of compound over the tape .
3 . After this treatment has dried , apply a second
coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener
heads , spreading in a thin uniform coat to not
less than 6" wide at joints, and feather edged .
4 . Sandpaper between coats as required .
5 . When thoroughly dry , sandpaper to eliminate ridges
and high points .
C. Finishing compounds :
1 . After embedding compound is thoroughiy dry and
has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing
compound to joints and fastener heads .
2 . Feather the finishing compound to not less than
12" wide .
3 . When thoroughly dry , sandpaper to obtain a uniformly
smooth surface , taking care to not scuff the
paper surface of the wallboard .
3 . 04 CORNER TREATMENT:
A . Internal corners : Treat as specified for joints ,
except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise through
the middle and fit neatly into the corner.
09250-6
B. External corners :
1 . Install the specified corner bead , fitting neatly
over the corner and securing with the same type
fasteners used for installing the wallboard .
2 . Space the fasteners approximately 6" on centers ,
and drive through the wallboard into the framing
or furring member .
3 . After the corner bead has been secured into position,
treat the corner with joint compound and reinforcing
tape as specified for joints , feathering the
joint compound out from 8 " to 10" on each side
of the corner .
3 .05 OTHER METAL TRIM :
A . General :
1 . The Drawings do not purport to show all locations
and requirements for metal trim.
2 . Carefully study the Drawings and the installation,
and provide all metal trim normally recommended
by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved
for use in the Work .
3 . 06 CLEANING UP:
A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning , use
necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum wallboard
scraps and dust , and to prevent tracking gypsum and
joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces .
B . At completion of each segment of i nsta l i at i on in a
room or space , promptly pick up and remove from the
working area all scrap , debris , and surplus material
of this Section .
END OF SECTION
09250-7
SECTION 09300
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of tile work is shown on drawings and in
schedules.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . Manufacturing Standards : Furnish tile conforming
w ith Standard Grade requirements of TCA 137; 1 .
B . When using setting and grouting materials manufactured
under TCA license, including identification together
w jth formula on each container.
C. Provide materials obtained from only one source for
each type and color of tile.
D . Proprietary Materials : Handle, store, mix and apply
proprietary setting and grouting materials in compliance
wjth manufacturer' s instructions.
1 .03( SUBMITTALS :
A . Manufacturer ' s Data, Tile Work : Submit manufacturer ' s
technical information and installation instructions
for all materials required , except bulk materials .
Include certifications and other data as may be required
to show compliance wjth these specifications . Include
instructions for cleaning and general care.
B . Samples , Tile Work : Submit samples of each type and
color of tile required, not less than 12 inches square
on plywood or hardboard backing, and grouted . Also,
submit one full - size sample of each tile accessory
and two 6 . inch long samp I es of mar l e threshold .
Submit samples of trim and other units if requested
by A/E. Review will be for color, pattern, and texture
only . Compliance with all other requirements is the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
1 . 04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE :
A. Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers
w ith seals unbroken and labels intact until time of
use, in accordance wjth manufacturer' s instructions.
09300-1
EARI_z_=_ERDIaler .
2601 MATERIALS :
A. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials
are not intended to imply that products of the named
manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent
products of other manufacturers.
B. Glazed Wall Tile : Size, color , pattern as specified
below , cushion edge units, except where square edge
units are indicated.
1 . Nominal 2 inch x 2 inch , American Olean #74 .
Antique, rooms 102 and 103 .
2 . Nominal 2( inch x 2 inch , American Olean #71 ,
Quicksilver, all other areas.
C. Ceramic Mosaic Tile and Base : Size, color, and pattern
as specified ; all - purpose edge units . Factory mount
tile onto sheets with mesh , dot, net, or other backing
method.
1 . Nominal 2 inch x 2 inch , American Olean #B20 .
Beachtan, . Abrasive, rooms 102 and 1036
2 . Nominal 2 inch x 2 inch , American Olean , #B65
Horizon, Abrasive, all other rooms .
D . Trim Shapes : As required for complete installation,
of same material , size, color , and finish of field
tile.
E . Marble Thresholds : Provide sound Group "A " marble
with an abrasive hardness of not less than 10 .0 when
tested in accordance with ASTM C241 . Furnish white
marble for thresholds ; thresholds shall be installed
at all locations where tile meets carpet or vinyl
tile.
F . Latex-Portland Cement Mortar : Latex-modified portland
cement thin-set mortar complying with ANSI 118.4.
G . Latex- Portland Cement Grout : Proprietary compound
composed of portland cement with latex additive for
a more flexible and less permeable grout.
1 . Products offered by manufacturer ' s to comply
w I th the requirements for latex grout include
flexible grout additive ; L&M-Surco Mfg. , Inc.
09300-2
EABI_L___EXELUI14N
301 INSTALLATION :
A. General : Comply with ANSI Standard installation speci -
fications A108 . 1 through A108 . 7: except as otherwise
indicated . Maintain minimum temperature limits and
installation practices as recommended by proprietary
mortar and grout materials manufacturer.
B . Inspect individual tiles for flaws, chips, cracks ,
and warp , and discard such unsuitable materials prior
to commencement of Installation.
C . Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment
and fixtures , to form a complete covering without
interruptions, except as otherwise shown . Terminate
work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without
disruption of pattern or Joint alignments.
D . Comply with the manufacturer ' s instructions for mixing
and installation of proprietary materials.
E . Neutral ize and seal substrates In accordance with
mortar or adhesive manufacturer ' s instructions.
F . Setting Beds : Provide setting beds as shown . If
not shown , use portland cement mortar setting beds
for wall and floors on substrates where thickness
permits.
G . Jointing Pattern : Unless otherwise shown, lay tile
in grid pattern . Align joints when adjoining tiles
on floor, base walls , and trim are the same size .
Layout tile work and center tile fields both directions
in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize
tile cutting . Provide uniform joint widths, unless
otherwise shown .
H . Placements : Comply with applicable requirements of
the specified standards for installation.
1 . Porti and cement mortar set glazed wall ti l e,
ANSI A108. 1 .
2 . Portland cement mortar set ceramic mosaic tile,
ANSI A108 .2,.
I . Grout : Use commercial latex-portland cement grout
for grouting tile joints, unless otherwise shown.
09300-3i
3 .02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION :
A. Cleaning : Upon completion of placement and grouting,
clean all ceramic the surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with
acid solutions only when permitted by the tile and
grout manufacturers printed instructions, but not
sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces , cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures
from effects of acid cleaning . Flush the surface
with clean water before and after cleaning.
B . Finished Tile Work : Leave finished installation clean
and free of cracked , chipped , broken , unbonded , or
otherwise defective tile work.
C. Protection :
1 . When recommended by the tile manufacturer, apply
a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner
to completed tile walls and floors . Protect
installed tile work with Kraft paper or other
heavy covering during the construction period
to prevent damage and wear.
2 . Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using
t i I ed floors for at least three days, preferably
seven days.
3 . Before final inspection, remove protective coverings
and rinse neutral cleaner from all tile surfaces,
wjpe and polish.
END OF SECTION
09300-4
SECTION 09660
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PARI_1 =_GENERAL
1 : 1 : DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included : Provide resilient tile flooring and
base where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein,
and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work :
1 . Documents affecting work of this Section include,
but are not necessarily limited to, General Condi-
tions , Supplementary Conditions , and Sections
in Division 1 of these Specifications.
1 .2 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this Section.
1 .3( SUBMITTALS:
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor
has received the Owner' s Notice to Proceed, submit:
1 . Materials list of items proposed to be provided
under this Section ;
2 . Manufacturer ' s specifications and other data
needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements;
3 . Samples of each item, color, and pattern available
in the specified grades from the proposed manu-
facturers.
09660-1
4 . Manufacturer ' s recommended installation procedures
which, when approved by the Architect, will become
the basis for accepting or rejecting actual instai-
iation procedures used on the work .
1 :4 EXTRA STOCK:
A. Deliver to the Owner for his use in future modifications
an extra stock of approximately 10% of each color
and pattern in each material instailed under this
Section , packaging each type of material separately,
distinctly marked , and adequately protected against
deterioration, to the satisfaction of A/E.
PART 2_- PRODUCTS
201 . MATERIALS. GENERAL :
A. Provide coiors and patterns as seiected by the Architect
from standard coiors and patterns of the approved
manufacturer in the specified type.
1 . Tile equai to Excelon No. 51901 : Taupe, as manufactured
by Armstrong.
2 . Base equal to KC-29 Argent Gray , as manufactured
by Kentile.
B. Adhesives :
1 . Provide waterproof and stabl izied type adhesive
as recommended by the manufacturer of the material
being instalied.
2 . Asphait emulsions and other non-waterproof adhesives
wilt not be acceptable.
C. Concrete slab primer : Provide non- staining type as
required and as recommended by the manufacturer of
the materiai being instaiied.
2 .2 RESILIENT MATERIALS :
A. Reinforced v i ny i tile:
1 . Dimension : Provide 12" x 12" x 1 /8" .
09660-2
2 . Acceptable products :
a. Armstrong Premium Excelon
b. Equal products of other manufacturers when
approved in advanced by the Architect.
B. Rubber Base :
1 . Where shown on the Drawings, provide topset base,
group H , type "KC-29y Argent Gray " as manufactured
by Kentiie, or approved equal .
2 .3( OTHER MATERIALS :
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described
but required for a complete and proper installation ,
as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval
of the Architect.
EARI_ ___EXEDUI1QN
3 . 1 SURFACE CONDITIONS :
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work
of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION :
A. Subfloors :
1 . Verify that substrate is smooth , level , at required
finish elevation , and without more than 1 / 8"
in 10 "-0 " variation from level or slopes shown
on the Drawings .
2� Prior to laying materials, broom clean or vacuum
the surfaces to be covered, and inspect the subfloors.
30.3( INSTALLATION :
A. General :
1 . Install materials only after finishing operations,
including painting, have been completed and after
permanent heating system is operating.
09660-3(
2 . Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs,
building air temperature, and relative humidity
are within the limits recommended by the manufacturers
of the materials used.
3 . Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings
that are in place or plainly marked for future
cutting by repeating on the finish surface as
marked in the sub - floor . Use chalk or other
non-permanent marking device.
B. Installing resilient tiles :
1 . Place units with adhesive cement in strict compliance
with the manufacturers recommendations as approved
by the Architect.
a. Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces ,
nosings, edgings, and thresholds.
b. Scribe as necessary around obstruction and
to produce neat joints.
c. Place tiles tightly laid, even, and in straight
parailei lines.
d. Extend units into toe spaces, door reveals,
and in closets and similar spaces.
2 . Lay units from center marks established with
principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
that units at opposite edges of the room are
of equal width .
a. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut
widths less than 3" wide at room perimeters.
b . Lay units square to axes of the room or
space .
3 . Match units for color and pattern by using materials
from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured
and packaged.
4 : Lay in ashlar pattern with grain in all units
running the same direction , unless otherwise
directed by the Architect.
09660-4
5 . Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to
units and secured with adhesive, providing at
all unprotected edges unless otherwise shown.
C. Installing base :
1 . Install base where shown on the Drawings .
26 Use factory-preformed exterior corners, and factory-
preformed or ,job-mitered interior corners.
364' CLEANING AND PROTECTING :
A. Remove excess adheisve and other blemishes from exposed
surfaces, . using neutral cleaner recommended by the
manufacturer of the resilient materials.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
09660-5
SECTION 09680
CARPETING
PARI 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of carpeting is indicated on the drawings,
and includes carpet and accessories . Only one type
of carpet w,i I I be required ; however, more than one
color maybe required.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . Manufacturer : Firm with not less than five years
of production experience with carpet simiiar to types
specified in this section ; and whose published product
literature clearly indicates compliance of product
with requirements of this section.
B . General Standard : Compiy with recommendations of
"Carpet Specifier ' s Handbook " by the Carpet and Rug
Institute .
C . Overrun : Where carpet is suppiied from custom run
at mils , provide 5 % overrun on calculated yardage
( carpet needed for proper installation inciuding waste
and excess usable scraps ) . Overrun to be turned over
to Owner.
D . Maintenance Materiais : Deliver specified overrun
If any ) and usable scraps of carpet to Owner' s designated
storage space, properly packed and identified . Usable
scraps are designed to include roil ends of less than
9, feet 0 . inch iength, and pieces of more than 3 square
feet area and more than 8 inches wide . Dispose of
smaller pieces.
1 .031 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data , Carpeting: Submit data to show
compliance with requirements. Include test laboratory
reports and manufacturer' s certifications.
B . General Samples , Carpeting : Submit 12 inches x
12 inches samples of carpet required . Review wiii
be for color only.
C . Selected Samples , Carpeting : Submit 18 inches x
27 inches sampies of actual carpet selected by Architect/
Engineer for installation.
09680-1
D . Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings showing all seam
locations and calcuiations for yardage.
E . Maintenance Manual : Submit manufacturer ' s printed
maintenance manual or instructions and recommendations.
1 .04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A . Deliver carpeting materials in protective wrapping
and store inside , protected from weather , moisture,
and soiling.
1 .05 WARRANTY:
A . Provide spec i a i five year warranty , signed by the
Manufacturer (Carpet Mill ) , agreeing to replace defective
carpeting is defined as carpeting which does not retain
at least 90% of pile fiber for a period of five years
or does not remain stain resistant for a period of
five years.
PABI_2_=_PBQIALCI.
2 . 01 GENERAL :
A. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials
are not intended to impiy that products of the named
manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent
products of other manufacturers.
2602 CARPET:
A. Fiber : 100% Herculon Nouvelle Olefin, solution dyed.
B. Carpet Face Yarn : Except as otherwise indicated fabricate
carpet from yarns specified to achieve the colors,
patterns , and textures selected ; face yarn weight
sh a l I be a minimum of 22 ounces per square yard, face
yarn size shalt be 1245/24.
C. Carpet Construction:
1 . Tufts Per Inch : 8
2 . Pile Height: .218" average
3� Total Finished Weight: 65 .0 . ounces/square yard.
4 : Tuf l oc backing
09680-2
D. Carpet Color, Pattern, Texture (Office Wing ) :
1 . Collins and Aikman, "Pacesetter", Type 300, 1500/1085;
Color 01800 Plum Grey .
E. Carpet Flammability :
1 . F I ame Test : Instal carpet which passes the
appropriate flammabiiity tests within the guideiines
established by State Regulations, MC-11 .
2(. All carpet shall also fulfill the specific optical
density ( DM) of 200 or less ( flaming ) as determined
by NFPA 258 , 1976.
2 .02 CARPET ACCESSORIES :
A . Carpet Edge Guard : Extruded or molded vinyl or rubber
carpet edge guard . Size, color and profiles shal i
be as selected by Architect/Engineer from among standards.
B. Installation Adhesive : Water-resistant general purpose
latex adhesive type as recommended by carpet manufacturer,
and which complies with flammabiiity requirements
for installed carpet.
C. Seaming Cement : Hot-melt seaming adhesive or similar
product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping
seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure
seams and prevent pile loss at seams.
D. Miscellaneous Materials : As recommended by manufacturers
of carpet and carpeting products and selected by Installer
to meet project circumstance and requirements.
PA BI_�___EXE�U.IJ N
3(. 01 PRE- INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS :
A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits
from surfaces to receive carpeting ; vacuum clean immedi-
ately before installation . Check concrete surfaces
to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet; apply
sealer where required to prevent dusting .
B . Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize
the possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during
the remainder of the construction . Do not install
carpet prior to completion of painting and other "wet"
work .
09680-3
3 .02 INSTALLATION :
A. General :
1 . Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and recom-
mendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet ; maintain uniformity of direction and
lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors '
do not seam in traffic direction at doorways.
2 . Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions
and under removable flanges and furnishing, and
into alcoves and closets of each space . unless
otherwise indicated.
3�. Provide cut- outs where required, and seal cut
edges properly where not concealed by protective
edge guards or overlapping flanges.
4 . Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet
is exposed; anchor guards to substrate.
B. Direct Glue Down Carpet Installation :
1 . Fit sections of carpet into each space prior
to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter
cuts wjth seaming cement.
2 . Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance
with manufacturer ' s instructions . Butt carpet
edges tightly together to form seams without
gaps . Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets
and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly
from face of carpet.
C. Miscellaneous Installations :
1 . Wall Carpeting : Install by direct glue method .
Conceal edges and avoid making seams in areas
of high wear. Match adjoining carpet installation
in every way possible.
3 .031 CLEANING AND PROTECTION :
A. Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps
to be disposed.
B. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater
element or as recommended by carpet manufacturer .
Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot
be removed.
09680-4
C. Lay heavy kraft paper or plastic over traffic paths
on new carpet and maintain protective covering until
acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
09680-5
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
EARI_1___aENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTIONS OF WORK :
A . The extent of painting work is shown on the drawings
and schedules, and as specified .
B . The work includes painting and finishing of interior
and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout
the project , except as otherwise indicated . The term
"painting " includes furnishing all material , tools,
and labor required to provide a completed project .
Surface preparation, priming, and coats of paint specified
are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment
specified under other sections of the work . Unless
otherwise indicated paint all exposed galvanized surfaces
and items .
C . The term " paint " as used in these documents shall
pertain to all coating systems materials , including
primers , emulsions, enamels, stains, seaters and fiiiers,
and other applied materials whether used as prime ,
intermediate, or finish coats .
D . Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are
designated in "schedules " , except where the natural
finish of the material is specifically noted as a
surface not to be painted . Where items or surfaces
are not specifically mentioned , paint these the same
as adjacent similar materials or areas . if color
or finish is not designated , the Architect/Engineer
will select these from standard colors available for
the materials systems specified .
1 .02 PAINTING NOT INCLUDED :
A . The following categories of work are not included
as part of the field-applied finish work, or are included
in other sections of the specifications .
1 . Shop Priming : Unless otherwise specified , shop
priming of ferrous metal items is included under
the various sections for structural steel , miscel -
laneous metal , hollow metal work , and similar
09900-1
items . Also , for fabricated components such
as architectural woodwork , wood casework , and
shop- fabricated or factory-built mechanical and
electrical equipment or accessories .
2 . Pre-Finished Items : Unless otherwise indicated,
do not include painting when factory- finishing
is specified for such items as ( but not limited
to ) acoustic and ceiling materials , architectural
woodwork and millwork , finished mechanical and
electrical equipment including light fixtures ,
switchgear and distribution cabinets .
3 . Concealed Surfaces : Unless otherwise indicated ,
finish painting is not required on surfaces such
as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally
inaccessible areas , foundation spaces , furred
areas , pipe spaces, and duct shafts.
4 . Finished Metal Surfaces : Metal surfaces of anodized
aluminum, stainless steel , chromium plate, copper,
bronze , and similar finished materials will not
require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.
5 . Operating Parts and Labels :
a . Moving parts of operating units , mechanical
and electrical parts , such as valve and
damper operators, linkages, sensing devices,
motor and fan shafts will not require finish
painting, unless otherwise indicated .
b . Do not paint over any code-required labels,
such as Underwriters Laboratories and Factory
Manual , or any equipment identification ,
performance rating , name or nomenclature
plates .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS :
A . Manufacturer ' s Data ; Painting : Submit manufacturer ' s
technical information including paint label analysis
and application instructions for each material proposed
for use .
09900-2
B. Samples ; Painting : Submit samples to Architect/Engineer
for review of color and texture only . Compliance
with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Contractor . Provide a listing of the material
and application for each coat of each finish sample.
C. Job Mock-up Wall : On actual wall surfaces of concrete
masonry and gypsum wailboard, duplicate painted finishes
of the approved samples . On at least 100 square feet
of surface as directed, provide full -coat finish until
required sheen , color and texture is obtained ; simulate
finished lighting conditions for review of in-place
work . Mock-up wall may be retained for the finished
work if acceptable .
1 .04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE :
A . Deliver all materials to the job site in original ,
new , and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer ' s name and label and the following
information :
1 . Name or title or material .
2 . Manufacturer ' s stock number and date of manufacture.
3 . Manufacturer ' s name.
4 . Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle.
constituents.
5 . Thinning instructions .
6 . Application instructions.
7 . Color name and number.
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A . Apply waterbase paints only when the temperature of
surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures
are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F unless otherwise
permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
B . Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature
of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees
F unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer' s
printed instructions.
09900-3
C . Do not apply paint in rain , fog , or mist ; or when
the relative humidity exceeds 85% ; or to damp or wet
surfaces ; unless otherwise permitted by the paint
manufacturer ' s printed instructions.
D . Painting may be continued during inclement weather
only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed
and maintained within the temperature and humidity
limits specified by the paint manufacturer during
application and drying periods .
2 .01 COLORS AND FINISHES :
A. Paint colors , surface treatments , and finishes shall
be selected from Manufacturer ' s sample chips .
B . Final acceptance of finishes wilt be from samples
applied on the job .
C . Color Pigments : Pure , nonfading , applicable types
to suite the substrates and service indicated .
D . Paint Coordination : Provide finish coats which are
compatible with prime paints used regdlesss of
prime coats are field or shop applied .
sections of these specifications in which prime paints
are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total
coating system for various substrates. Upon request
from other trades , furnish information on character-
istics of finish materials proposed for use , to ensure
compatible prime coats used . Provide barrier coats
over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as
required . Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing
of any anticipated problems using specified coating
systems with substrate primed by others .
2 .02 MATERIAL QUALITY :
A . Provide the best quality grade of the various types
of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable
paint materials manufacturers . Materials not displaying
the manufacturer' s identification as a standard, best-grade
product will not be acceptable . Acceptable manufacturers
include :
09900-4
1 . Benjamin Moore
2 . Glidden
3 . Sherwin Williams
4 . Pittsburgh
B . Proprietary names used to designate materials are
not intended to imply that products of the named manu-
facturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent
products of other manufacturers .
C. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer
as the finish coats . Use only thinners approved by
the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended
limits .
2 . 03 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS :
A . Provide the following paint systems for the various
substrates , as indicated . Specific quality of paint
type indicated ( ) is as manufactured by Glidden .
1 . Concrete Masonry Units shall be sealed with exterior
concrete masonry unit sealant as manufactured
by Thompson Water Seal or "Umbrella " by Clean
Strip Corp . , or approved equal . Sealants shall
be applied to concrete masonry units per manufac-
turer ' s specifications for application . These
specifications shall be submitted to Architect
for approval and then become the basis for appii -
cation .
2 . Ferrous Metal : 1st Coat - exterior rust inhibitive
metal primer ( 5210 ) . 2nd Coat - industrial high
gloss alkyd enamel ( 4550X ) . 3rd Coat - industrial
high gloss alkyd enamel ( 4550X ) . First coat
not required on items del i v eyed shop primed .
Not less than 5 . 0 mils total dry film thickness .
3 . Zinc Coated Metal : 1st Coat - exterior galvanized
metal primer ( 5229 ) . 2nd Coat - industrial high
gloss alkyd enamel ( 4550X ) . 3rd Coat - industrial
high gloss alkyd enamel ( 4550X ) . Not less than
5 . 0 mills total dry film thickness .
4 . Aluminum : 1st Coat - exterior all purpose Metal
Primer ( 5229 ) . 2nd Coat - exterior alkyd enamel
( 4550X ) . 3rd Coat - exterior alkyd enamel ( 4550X) .
Not less than 5 .0 mils total dry film thickness .
09900-5
2 .04 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS :
A . Provide the following paint systems for the various
substrates, as Indicated.
1 . Concrete Masonry Units :
1st Coat - latex filler ( 5317) .
2nd Coat - latex masonry paint ( 5200X ) .
3rd Coat - latex masonry paint ( 5200X ) .
A p p l y f i t I er coat by roller and brush and at
a rate to ensure complete coverage with all pores
filled.
Not less than 4 .0 mils dry film thickness.
2 . Ferrous Metal :
1st Coat - rust inhibitive primer ( 5210) .
2nd Coat - alkyd semi-gloss enamel ( 4550X ) .
3rd Coat - alkyd semi-gloss enamel ( 4550X ) .
First coat not required on items that are shop
primed.
Not less than 5 .0 mils dry film thickness.
3‘ Zinc Coated Metal :
1st Coat - galvanized metal primer ( 5229) .
2nd Coat - alkyd gloss enamel ( 4550X ) .
3rd Coat - alkyd gloss enamel ( 4550X ) .
Not less than 5 .0 mlls dry film thickness.
4.. Painted Woodwork : shall have 3 coats :
1st coat - alkyd semi-gloss underbody ( 555 ) ,
2nd coat - alkyd semi-gloss enamel ( 4600x) ,
3rd coat - alkyd semi-gloss enamel ( 4600x ) .
5 . Interior and Exterior Stained and Sealed Woodwork :
shall have Spred Latex 420 Series Acrylic Wood
Stain as manufactured by Glidden or approved
equal . Wood stain shall be applied full strength
to achieve a solid opaque color. Coverage shall
be minimum 1 .21 mils dry . Color shall be "Yearling"
solid or as selected by Architect . All exterior
wood trim , fascla board and plywood shall receive
solid opaque wood stain . All plywood surfaces
to be stained shall be primed with Spred Prlmecoat
No. 3651 followed by the solid color stain.
09900-6 .
6 . Cedar Shingle Siding - Wood finish equal to "Moorwood
Weathered Wood Finish 083 " as manufactured by
Benjamin Moore Paints. Environmental considerations,
surface preparation and application shall be
in accordance with manufacturer ' s recommendations.
PARI_ _=_EXEEUIIQN
3 . 01 INSPECTION : Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease,
moisture, , scuffed surfaces, . or conditions otherwise detrimental
to the formation of a durable paint film.
3(.02 SURFACE PREPARATION :
A. General : Perform preparation and cleaning procedures
in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer ' s
instructions and as specified , for each particular
substrate condition.
1 . Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined
surfaces , plates, lighting fixtures, and similar
items in place and not to be finish- painted ,
or provide surface- applied protection prior to
surface preparation and painting operations .
Remove, if necessary , for the complete painting
of the items and adjacent surfaces . Following
completion of painting of each space or area ,
reinstall the removed items.
2 . Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint
or surface treatments . Remove oil and grease
prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning
and painting so that contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall onto wet, newly- painted
surfaces.
B. Cementitious Materials :
1 . Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete
block , cement plaster and cement- asbestos board
to be painted by removing all efflorescence ,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease. oils, and by roughening
as required to remove glaze. Masonry shall be
painted and concrete patched as required prior
to start of painting.
09900-7:
2 . Determine the alkalinity and moisture content
of the surfaces to be painted by performing appro-
priate tests . If the surfaces are found to be -
sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and
burning of the finish paint, the condition shall
be corrected before application of paint . Do
not paint over surfaces where the moisture content
exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer ' s
painted directions . Concrete shall properiy
cure for 60 days minimum and concrete masonry
and cement piaster shall cure for 30 days minimum
prior to start of painting.
C. Ferrous Metais, Nongalvanized Surfaces : Clean ferrous
surfaces wh i ch are not galvanized or shop—coated ,
of surface contaminants such as oil , grease , dirt,
weld splatters , burrs , loose mill scaie and other
foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cieaning.
D . Ferrous Metals Gaivanized Surfaces : Clean free of
oil and other surface contaminants with an acceptable
nonpetroleum based solvent . Touch up surfaces with
galvanized touch—up paint as required.
E . Ferrous Metals , Shop Primed : Clean up oil , grease
and remove rust , scaling paint. Reprime damaged and
abraded areas.
3 .03 MATERIALS PREPARATION :
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with
manufacturer' s directions.
B . Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered
containers . Maintain containers used in storage ,
mixing and appiication of paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Stir or mix materials before appiication to produce
a mixture of uniform density , and stir as required
during the application of the materials. Do not stir
surface film into the material . Remove the film and
if necessary , strain the material before using.
3x04 . APPLICATION :
A. General :
1 . Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer ' s
directions . Use applicators and techniques best
suited for the substrate and type of material
being applied.
09900-8
2 . Apply additional coats when undercoats or other
conditions show through the final coat of paint,
until the paint film is of uniform finish , color,
and appearance. Give special attention to insure
that all surfaces , including edges, corners ,
crevices , wets , and exposed fasteners receive
a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
3t. Paint surfaces behind moveable equipment and furniture
the same as similar exposed surfaces . Paint
surfaces behind permanently- fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only before final instai-
lation of equipment.
4. Paint the back sides of access panels, and removable
or hinged louvers to match the exposed surfaces.
5 . Finish exterior doors on tops , bottoms, and side
edges the same as the exterior faces, unless
otherwise indicated.
6 . Sand sightly between each succeeding enamel coat.
7;. Omit the first coat ( primer ) on metal surfaces
which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Scheduling Painting :
1 . Apply the first-coat material to surfaces that
have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared
for painting as soon as practicable after preparation
and before subsequent surface deterioration.
2 . Allow sufficient times between successive coatings
to permit proper drying . Do not recoat untii
paint has dried to where it feeis firm . does
not deform or fees sticky under moderate thumb
pressure , and the application of another coat
of paint does not cause i ifti ng or loss of adhesion
of the undercoat.
C . Minimum Coating Thickness : Apply each material at
not less than the manufacturer ' s recommended spreading
rate , to get a totai dry film thickness as indicated
or , if not indicated , as recommended by coating manu-
facturer.
09900-9
D. Stipple Enamel Finish : Roll and redistribute paint
to an even and fine texture . Leave no evidence of
rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture , skid
marks , or other surface imperfections.
E . Pigmented ( Opaque ) Finishes : Completely cover to
provide an opaque , smooth surface of uniform finish ,
color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays , laps, brush marks , runs , sags , ropiness ,
or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
F . Completed Work : Match approved samples for color ,
texture, and coverage. Remove paint refinish or repair
work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3 .05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION :
A . Clean- up : During the process of the work , remove
from the site all discarded paint materials, rubbish ,
cans, and rags at the end of each work day .
1 . Upon completion of painting work, clean paint-spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods
of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch
or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
B . Protection : Protect work of other trades, whether
to be painted or not, against damage by painting and
finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing,
or replacing, and repainting , as acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
C. Provide "Wet-Paint" signs as required to protect newly-
painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others for protection of their work, after
completion of painting operations.
D. Touch- Up : At the completion of other trades, touch-up
and restore all damage or deface painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION
09900-10
SECTION 10160
PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of plastic laminate to i l et partition work
is shown on the drawings .
B. The types of plastic laminate toilet partitions include
floor supported partitions.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Field Measurements: When possible, take field measurements
prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication
to ensure proper fitting of the work . Otherwise ,
indicate field measurements on final shop drawings.
B. Inserts and Anchorages : Furnish inserts and anchoring
devices which must be built into other work for the
installation of toilet partitions and related work .
Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay .
C. Manufacturers offering products to comply with the
requirements for plastic laminate toilet partitions
include the following :
1 . Global Steel Products Corp.
2 . Metpar Steel Products Corp.
3 . Mid-South Mfg. Co.
4; Mi l is Metal Compartment Co.
5 . Sanymetal Products Co.
1 .03 . SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer' s Data, Plastic Laminate Toilet Partitions:
Submit copies of the manufacturer' s detailed technical
data for materials , fabrication , and installation .
Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors, fastenings,
and accessories . Transmit copy of each instruction
to the Installer.
10160-1
B. Shop Drawings , Plastic Laminate Toilet Partitions :
Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection
of toilet partition assemblies which are not fuily
described by manufacturer' s data . Show all anchorage
and accessory items and finishes.
C. Setting Drawings : Submit setting drawings, templates,
and instruction for the installation of anchorage
devices built into other work.
D. Samples , Plastic Laminate : Submit samples of each
laminate finish and color . Samples w ,lil be reviewed
for color , texture and surface reflectivity only .
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
PBRI_Z___BaDD LIa
2 .01 MATERIALS:
A. Plastic Laminate : NEMA Standard Ld-3y minimum 0 .062"
thick. Color and pattern as selected by th A/E from
manufacturer' s standard.
1 . Color shall be equal to Fawn- Vogue as manufactured
by Nevamar, rooms 102 and 103k
2 . Color shall be equal to Denmark Blue, Vogue as
manufactured by Nevamar, all other rooms.
B. Door, Panel and Pilaster Core : Manufacturer' s standard
particleboard or plywood suitable for wet locations.
C. Pilaster top trim AiSi type 302-304 stainless steel ,
as follows :
1 . Height: 3", unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness : Not less than 0 .034 " ( 20 gauge ) .
31. Finish : Polished to match hardware.
D. Stirrup Brackets : Manufacturer' s standard chromium-plated
non- ferrous cast alloy , to match hardware chrome finish,
heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.
E. Hardware and Accessories : Manufacturer ' s standard
non-ferrous cast alloy , with polished chrome finish ,
heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.
10160-2
F . Anchorages and Fasteners :
1 . Manufacturer ' s standard exposed fasteners of
stainless steel or chromium-plated steel finished
to match hardware. Use theft-resistant (one-way )
type heads and nuts for exposed screws .
2 . For concealed anchors, use hot- dip galvanized ,
cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective
coated steel .
2 .02 FABRICATION :
A. General :
1 . Furnish standard doors, panels, and pilasters
fabricated for the partition system, unless otherwise
indicated . Pressure laminate one-piece face
sheets to the core material with no splices or
joints, and with all edges straight and sealed.
2 . Furnish units with cut-outs, drilled holes and
internal reinforcement to receive partition mounted
hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
Seal exposed core material at cut-outs to protect
against moisture.
B. Panel and Door Dimensions :
1 . Not less than 1 " thick units, with 24" wide doors,
except as otherwise indicated .
2 . Furnish 32 " wide ( clear opening) , swing- in doors
at stalls for use by the handicapped, unless
otherwise specified.
C. Floor- Supported Pilasters : Not less than 1 -1 /4" thick
units , with galvanized steel anchorage devices for
securing to structural support below . Furnish anchorage
devices complete with threaded rods, lock washers ,
and leveling adjustment nuts.
D. Hardware and Accessories : Furnish hardware for each
compartment in the partition system as follows :
1 . Hinges : Either surface-mounted or cutout insert
type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle
up to 90 degrees ; gravity type, or spring-action
cam type, . or concealed torsion rod type, to suit
manufacturer ' s standards.
10160-3,
2 . Latch and Keeper : Manufacturer ' s standard sliding
latch unit, with combination rubber- faced door
strike and keeper.
3(. Coat Hook : Manufacturer ' s standard combination
hook-bumper .
4 ; Door Pulls : Manufacturer' s standard unit secured
to latch.
PARI_ _=_EXEE!lI14t1
3 .01 INSTALLATION :
A. General : Install partitions rigid , straight, plumb
and level , wjth the panels laid out as shown. Provide
clearance of not more than 1 / 2" between pilasters
and panels , and not more than 1 " between panels and
walls . Secure panels to walls with not less than
2 stirrup brackets, attached near top and bottom of
the panel . Locate wall brackets so that holes for
wall anchorages occur in tile joints . Secure panels
to supporting walls with manufacturer ' s recommended
anchoring devices, as indicated on final shop drawings
or in manufacturer' s instructions.
B. Floor- Supported Partitions : Secure pilasters to the
supporting structural framing below with standard
anchorage devices . Level , plumb , and tighten the
installation wjth the leveling device. Adjust bottoms
of doors , so that all doors are level when in the
closed position .
C. Hardware Adjustments : Adjust and lubricate hardware
for proper operation after installation .
1 . Set hinges on in- swing doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from the closed position
when unlatched .
D. Protection , Cleaning and Final Adjustments : Protect
units so that there will be no indication of use or
damage at the time of acceptance.
10160-4
1 . Perform final adjustments to pilaster leveling
devices, door hardare, and other operating parts
of the partition assembly Just prior to final
inspection . Clean exposed surfaces of partitions,
hardware, fittings and accessories, using materials
and methods recommended by the partition manufacturer.
2 . Replace damaged units which cannot be satisfactorily
repaired as directed by A/E.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
1 01 60-5
SECTION 10200
ARCHITECTURAL LOUVERS
PART_I - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of louvers is shown on the drawings .
B. The types of louvers required include :
1 . Fixed Louver ( L-1 ) , ( L-2) .
2 . Door louver ( L-30 .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide each type of louver as complete unit produced
by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting
accessories, fittings, and fastenings.
B . Color : Provide color and sealant as specified by
the Architect/Engineer from manufacturer ' s standards.
1 .031 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data : Submit manufacturer ' s technical
data and installation instruction for architectural
louvers.
B. Color samples of all exposed finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing all information required for
a complete installation not fully described or shown
on manufacturer' s data.
PARI_a___PR.0DiLCIS
2 .01 FIXED AND DUAL COMBINATION LOUVER ( L- 1 ) , ( L-2) :
A. Provide manufacturer ' s standard dual combination louver,
equal to Model 6967: as manufactured by Construction
Specialties, Inc. for Louver ( L-1 ) .
B. Provide manufacturer' s standard fixed, extruded aluminum
Louver Model 4.157: as manufactured by Construction
Specialties, . Inc. , or approved equal for Louver ( L-2 ) ;
size as shown on the drawings .
10200-1
B. Finish : L-1 and L-2 louvers shall have a fluoropolymer
color coating containing Kynar 500 resin. Color shall
be selected from manufacturer ' s standard color samples .
C. Screen : Louvers L- 1 and L-2 shall be furnished with
18 x 14 mesh aluminum insect screen secured by an
extruded aluminum frame.
2 .02 DOOR LOUVER ( L-30 :
A. Provide extruded aluminum door louver equal to Model
FL138 as manufactured by the Construction Specialists,
Inc.
B. Frames and Blades : Manufactured from 6063-T52 alloy ,
minimum 16 B & S gauge . Head, siil and Jambs to be
one piece structural members and to have integral
caulking slot and retaining bead . All fasteners to
be stainless steel or aluminum.
C. Screens : Louver shall be furnished with 18 x 14 mesh
aluminum Insect screen secured by an extruded aluminum
frame on all exterior doors . All screens shall be
secured to the interior of louvers.
D. Finish : L-3I louver shall have a fluoropolymer color
coating containing Kynar 500 resin . Color s election
shall be from manufacturer ' s standard.
PARI_L_=_EXE.CUIIQN
3 .01 INSTALLATION :
A. Install and secure architectural louvers at the locations
shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manu-
facturers instructions for a plumb , level , rigid ,
and flush installation.
B. Space fastenings as required and apply through back-up
reinforcing plates where necessary to prevent metal
distortion. Conceal all fasteners wherever possible.
C. Provide proper operation for exhaust dampered ventilation.
D . Install clips , angles, and brackets as required to
provide a f l ush , ha i r l i ne Joint against adjacent surfaces.
Install with fasteners concealed from the exterior.
1 0200-2
E . Touch- up marred f i n i s h e s, or replace I f not acceptable
to the Architect/Engineer . Use only materials and
finishes as recommended or furnished by the louver
manufacturer.
F. Install sealants where shown or recommended in accordance
with manufacturer ' s instructions for water/weathertight
installations .
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
10200-3(
SECTION 10500
METAL LOCKERS AND PISTOL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of metal lockers is shown on the drawings .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide metal lockers and accessories as a complete
unit produced by a single manufacturer , including
necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings.
B . Proprietary name used to designate colors or materials
are not intended to imply that products of the named
manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent
products of other manufacturers.
1 .03, SUBMITTALS :
A . Manufacturer ' s Data ; Metal Lockers : Submit copies
of manufacturer ' s technical data and installation
instructions for units.
B . Samples : Submit samples of all finishes on exposed
surfaces. Review will be for color and texture only .
PARI_Z___PRQDL LIa
2(.01 MATERIALS :
A. General : Mi l d Annealed , col d roi i ed steel free from
surface imperfections . Bolts to be cadmium p ated
or subjected to other approved rust inhibitive treatment.
1 . Room No . 1 1 8 : Provide 12 inch wide, 15 inch
deep , 60 . inch high metal lockers where shown
on drawings as "full height" , and 15 inch wide,
15. inch deep , 30 inch high metal lockers where
shown on drawings as "double-tier", as manufactured
by Penco, . or an approved equal .
2 . Room No . 134 : Provide 24 inch wide, 18 inch
deep, 60 inch h i g h "D e c i b l e I I Quiet" metal lockers
1 0500-1
where shown on drawings, as manufactured by Penco,
or an approved equal .
a . Coat rod shall be provided.
b . Closed base and end panel .
36 Pistol lockers shall be 1 module ( 4 compartments
grouped vertically 14- 1 / 4 "W x 14 "D x 14- 1 / 2 " H )
with secur I ty type lock cy I i n der and 2 keys,
as manufactured by American Locker Security Systems,
Inc. , or approved equal .
B. Body : 24 gauge steel , flanged to five double thickness
of metal at back vertical corners.
C. Door Frame: 16 . gauge formed steel channels. Vertical
members shall have an additional flange to form contiguous
door strike. Corners shall be lapped and
welded Into a rigid assembly . To prevent twisting
out of alignment, bottom cross members shall have
tang at each end which fits through slot in rear flange
of upright frame member.
D . Door : One piece 16 gauge steel with both vertical
edges formed Into channel shaped formation ; top and
bottom shall be flanged at 90 degree angle. Provide
six 6- inch louvers top and bottom each locker; provide
aluminum number plates.
E. Door Jambs : Lockers to have two Jambs welded to side
of door frame to engage locking device . Design and
gauge of Jamb shall prevent freeing of locking device
by prying . Each Jamb shall have a replaceable soft
rubber silencer secured through hole in Jamb and upright
member.
F . Hinges : Provide two hinges each door of not less
than 2t Inches high , . 050 inch steel , five knuckle,
full loop forming double thickness on each leaf .
Hinge pin to be spun over at ends to resist removal .
G . Locking Device : Locking device shall engage frame
at two points . Channel shaped locking device shall
be enclosed on three sides by operator within channel
formation of door ; device shall be prelocking. Doors
to also be provided with lock hole filler to permit
use of built- in key lock.
1 0500-2
H . Handles : All parts to be chrome- plated , die cast
zinc a l l oy with strength of not less than 40 ,000 psi
Handle shall have built in padlock strike.
I . Coat Hooks : Provide one double- prong ceiling hook
and three single prong hooks ; hooks to be zinc plated
or subjected to a comparable rust- retardant treatment
and attached with two bolts.
2 .02 FINISH :
A. Exposed steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, given
a bonding and rust inhibitive phosphate treatment,
and then electrostatically sprayed wjth a heavy coat
of high quality enamel ; enamel shall be baked at 300
degrees and shall wjthstand a rigid hammer test without
chipping or flaking.
B. Color as selected by the Architect/Engineer from manu-
facturer ' s standards.
EARI_L___EXEQUILQM
3 .01 INSTALLATION :
A. Install in locations indicated on drawings and securely
anchor to wall , square and plumb, in accordance with
manufacturer' s instructions.
B . Space fastenings as recommended and apply through
back-up reinforcing plates where necessary . Conceal
all fasteners.
C. Touch- up marred finishes, or replace if not acceptable
to the 0/R. Use only materials and finishes as recommended
or furnished by the locker manufacturer.
D. Benches shall be installed with a minimum of two anchors
to each pedestal .
END OF SECTION
10500-31
SECTION 10620
FOLDING PARTITIONS
FART 1 _- GENERAL
1 .O1 : DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. Work Included : Provide folding partition system where
indicated on the Drawings , as specified herein , and
as needed for a complete and proper installation .
B. Related work specified elsewhere : The following items
of related work include, but are not limited to:
1 . Steel support and punching for hanger rods.
2 . Painting and finishing.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Use adequate numbers of ski l led workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the
work of this Section .
1 . 03( SUBMITTALS :
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340 .
B. Product Data: Within 45 . caiendar days after the Contractor
has received the Notice to Proceed, submit :
1 . Materials list of items to be provided under
this Section;
2 . Manufacturer ' s specifications and other data
needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements;
3 . Shop drawings showing complete details of instal -
lation , anchorage , and interface with the work
of other trades.
4 . Samples of the manufacturer ' s standard colors
avaiiabie in the specified materials;
10620-1
5 . Manufacturer ' s recommended installation procedures
which , when approved by the Architect, will become
the basis for accepting or rejecting actual instal -
lation procedures used on the work.
PARI_Z_ ERQQiLI
2 .01 FOLDING PARTITIONS :
A. Provide a folding partitions system of the dimensions
and arrangement shown on the Drawings, utilizing the
standard products of EMCO, Inc . , 14405 W . 106th St . ,
Lenexa , KS 66215 , ( 913 ) 492-7414 . or approved equal ,
wjth the followjng attributes :
1 . Panel grouping : Type 3 . ( individual panels with
top support)
2 . Operation and stack : Manual operation in a perpen-
dicular stack, panels shall be multi-directional
and negotiate right-angle turns.
3t. Track system : Track shall be extruded, heat-treated
aluminum wjth integral soffit, finished off-white
with trolleys.
4. Bottom seal : Fixed, flexible.
5. Panel construction : Type 2 . minimum 44 S . T. C.
( 16-gauge steel frame, rigid high density face ,
acoustical insulation ) .
6 . Panel finish : finish shall be same as adjacent
wall finish ( see finish schedule on Drawings ) .
2 .02 OTHER MATERIALS :
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described
but required for a complete and proper installation,
as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval
of the Architect.
PARI_�!__EXE�UIiW
3 .01 SURFACE CONDITIONS :
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work
of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions
10620-2
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work . Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
3002 INSTALLATION :
A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure
proper and adequate provision in the work of those
trades for interface with the work of this section.
B. Install the work of this section in strict accordance
with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies
having Jurisdiction, with the approved Shop Drawings ,
and with the manufacturer ' s recommendations as approved
by the A r c h i t e c t, a n c h o r i n g a l l components f i rm l y
into position.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
1062073
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
EARI_1_=_GENERAL
1 :01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. The extent of each type of toilet accessory is shown
on the drawings and schedules and as specified herein.
B. The type of toilet accessories required include the
following :
1 . Recessed Multi -Purpose Unit
2 . Toilet Tissue Dispensers
3 . Feminine Napkin Disposal
4 . Shower Rods
5 . Grab Bars
6 . Soap Dispensers
7 . Soap Dish
8 . Shelf
9 . Towel Bar
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Inserts and Anchorages : Furnish inserts and anchoring
devices which must be set in concrete or built into
masonry for the installation of toilet accessories .
Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay .
B. Products:
1 . Provide products of the same manufacturer for
each type of accessory unit and for units exposed
in the same areas , unless otherwise approved
by the A/E.
2 . Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units
will not be permitted , except where approved
by Architect.
10800-1
3(. Provide locks where indicated , with the same
keying for each type of accessory units in the
project wherever possible . Furnish two keys
for each lock. Masterkey as many keyed accessories
as possible and furnish 3t master keys in lieu
of separate keys for locks included in masterkey
system.
C. Manufacturers offering products to comply with the
requirements for toilet accessories include the following:
1 . Accessory Specialties, Inc.
2. American Dispenser Company , Inc.
3� Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
1 ;03( SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s Data, Toilet Accessories : Submit manu-
facturer ' s technical data and installation instruction
for each toilet accessory .
B. Samples, Toilet Accessories : When requested, submit
f u l l - size samples of units to the A/E for review of
design and operation . Acceptable samples wi I I be '
returned and may be used in the work . Compliance
with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Contractor.
C. Setting Drawings, Toilet Accessories : Provide setting
drawings , templates instructions and directions for
i nstal l ation of anchorage devices in other work .
Include specifically such for concrete masonry, gypsum
wallboard and tile work .
PARI_ ERQpLCz.
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Stainless Steel : AISI , Type 302/304, with satin finish,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass : Cast or forged quality alloy, FS WW-P-541 .
C. Sheet Steel : Cold rolled , commercial quality , ASTM
A366 . Surface preparation and metal pretreatment
as required for applied finish.
10800-2
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet : ASTM A527 , G60 .
E. Chromium Plating : Nickel and chromium electro-deposited
on metal , ASTM B456 , Type SC 2 .
F . Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices : ASTM A386 , hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
2 .02 FABRICATED ITEMS :
A. General : To establish specific items, quality standard,
style and finishes , products and model numbers of
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. are fisted :
1 . Recessed Multi -Purpose Unit, Paper Towel Dispenser,
and Waste Receptacle, B-3944 .
2 . Toilet Tissue Dispenser , two roll capacity -
B -274 .
3 . Feminine Napkin Disposal - B-270 .
4'. Shower Rods, B-204
5 . Grab Bar with concealed Mounting , B-56371
6 . Liquid soap dispenser, surface mounted, B-11 .
7 . Soap Dish - ceramic.
8 . Stainless steel shelf, 18" long - B-683 .
9 . Towel Bar, 18" long - B-674 .
EARI_.___EXEGUI1W
3 .01 INSTALLATION :
A. Use concealed fastenings as specified by manufacturer.
B. Provide anchors , bolts and other necessary anchorage
and attach accessories securely to walls and partitions
In locations as shown on drawjngs or directed by A/E.
C. Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated
of the same material as the accessories, or of galvanized
steel , as recommended by manufacturer.
D. If required , instal exposed mounting devices and
fasteners finsihed to match the accessories.
10800-3
E . Provide theft- resistant fasteners for all accessory
mountings .
F . Secure toilet room accessories in accordance with
the manufacturer ' s instructions for each item and
each type of substrate construction.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
10800-4
SECTION 11001
EQUIPMENT
( Includes Alternate No. 4 )
EABI_l_m_GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK :
A. Provide and install the following equipment as indicated
herein and as located on the drawings.
1 . Kitchen Equipment (Alternate No. 4) .
a. The equipment shalt be del ivered to the
job-site, unscratched and installed in corre-
lation with the installation of Section
12300 . work .
b . A l l equipment prov i ded sha i i be of one
manufacturer.
2 . Detention/Cell Door Equipment
a. Cell Doors & Equipment shall meet aii require-
ments of the Florida Department of Corrections.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. General : The equipment specified by trade name is
to establish a line of quality and function.
B. The approved manufacturers for Kitchen Equipment include
( but are not necessarily limited to) the following :
1 . General Electric
2 . Hotpoint
3 . Westinghouse
C. The approved manufacturers for Detention/Ceil Doors
include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following :
1 . Chief Industries, Inc.
2 . Southern Steel Company
36 Wiilo Products Company , Inc.
11001 -1
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS :
A. Manufacturer ' s data, product specifications, U. L. ratings,
range of finishes and colors and installation recommen-
dations.
B. Provide shop drawings showing Detention/Cell Door
fabrication ; include location, fabrication, and details
of hardware.
C. Warranties.
EARI_2_=_ERQDLLIS
2 .01 MATERIALS :
A. Kitchen Equipment ( Color as selected by A/E from Color
Chart) .
1 . Electric range : equal to General Electric Model
JSP27D, 30 . inch, . slide- in range .
2 . Electric refrigerator : equal to General Electric
Model TBF15DB, two door , freezer - refrigerator
combination.
3 . Exhaust hood : equal to General Electric Model
JV330 , vented , 30 inch exhaust hood with cook-top
light, two speed fan.
B. Detention/Cell Door Equipment:
1 . Grating door of 7 / 8 inch and 1 inch diameter
ribbed bar construction equal to Grating door
as manufactured by Willo Products Company, Inc.
2 . Equal to No. 41 / 2 Detention Hollow Metal Hinge
( 3 per door ) , Door Pull No . DP-2A Aluminum and
W-80 Series manual lock, as manufactured by Willo
Products Company, Inc.
EARI _ _EXEL!UI1QN
31.01 INSTALLATION :
A. Installation of products will be the responsibility
of the General Contractor in coordination with associated
sections of these Specifications and Contract Drawings .
1 1 001 -2
B. Install Equipment in strict accordance with the manu-
facturer ' s instructions .
1 . Cell Doors & Equipments shall meet all requirements
of the Florida Department of Corrections.
C. Remove all protective coverings of Kitchen Equipment
and clean exposed surfaces, both interior and exterior,
following manufacturer ' s instructions and leave equipment
ready for operation by the user.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
11001 -3
SECTION 15000
MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 INDEX OF SUB-SECTIONS:
15000 General Conditions for Mechanical Work
15080 Piping Materials and Accessories
15280 Insulation
15400 Plumbing Work
15650 Ventilation and Air Conditioning Equipment
15800 Ductwork and Duct Specialties
15900 Temperatures Controls
1 .02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A. The drawings and specifications are to be considered as a whole.
All labor, material , equipment and service necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the proper completion of all work for the Plumbing, Heating,
Air Conditioning and Ventilation and other systems as shown on the drawings
and specified herein shall be provided complete in operative condition to
the approval of the Architect.
1.03 CODES AND REGULATIONS:
A. All work performed under this section shall conform with all
local governing regulations, and in case of conflicting requirements, the
most stringent shall apply. Minimum requirements shall be the Standard
Plumbing Code as published by the Southern Building Code Congress
International , Inc. All electrically operated equipment specified
in this section shall comply with the National Electrical Code, NFPA
Std. No. 70.
B. Should it be found that any part of the work shown or specified
is not in accordance with local regulations, the Architect shall be so
advised at the time of bidding and all work installed as required to meet
the local codes.
1.04 FEES AND PERMITS:
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, fees for
inspection, and charges of every kind, that may be necessary for fully
completing the work. He shall make all necessary tests required by City,
County, or State Authorities, legal regulations, and/or the Architect, and
return to the Architect any certificates of approval issued in this
district for plumbing work, etc. , signed by the Inspector in charge of
each particular part of the work.
15000-1
1 .05 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. Refer to General Requirements.
1 .06 COOPERATION:
A. This Contractor shall layout and proceed with his work so that
this work will be executed in harmony with all other contractors and trades
on the job.
1.07 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR:
A. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and good
condition of all work and materials connected with his contract until same
is accepted or operated by Owner. He shall use proper precaution to
protect his own work and that of others from damage and shall make good
without expense to the Owner any damage caused by himself or his employees
to person or property. He shall cooperate with other contractors and
coordinate his work with others.
B. Contractor shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully
acquaint himself with conditions relating to the construction and labor so
that he may fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions
attending the execution of the work under this contract. The failure or
omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument, addendum
of other document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation
with respect to his bid or the contract. The submission of a bid shall be
taken as prima facia evidence of compliance with this paragraph and that he
has included in his proposal every item of cost necessary for a complete
installation of plumbing, air conditioning, heating, and ventilating
operations strictly as planned and specified.
1.08 SUBDIVISIONS OF WORK:
A. Each sub-division of work includes furnishing and installing all
materials to make that part of work complete, and shall comprise all
auxiliaries, setting of equipment, sleeves through building construction
where required, all in complete coordination with General Contractor and in
cooperation with other trades. It is contemplated that all subdivisions of
work when completed will form a complete plumbing, heating, air
conditioning, and ventilation system for entire work.
1.09 SAFETY PROVISIONS:
A. Belt guards shall be provided on all belt driven equipment. Any
projecting or rotating parts shall be totally enclosed or properly guarded.
15000-2
1. 10 VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS:
A. The drawings and specifications are intended to cooperate. Any
materials, equipment, or systems related to this section and exhibited on
the Architectural , Plumbing, and HVAC Drawings but not mentioned in the
Specifications are to be executed to the intent and meaning thereof, as if
it were both mentioned in the Specifications and set forth on the Drawings.
Where the Contractor finds the specifications and/or the drawings to be in
conflict or where they are not clear, same shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect prior to submitting a bid.
B. The plans indicate the general arrangement of the utilities. The
locations of piping and ductwork are approximate for clarity. Exact loca-
tions shall be determined in the field by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall verify exact size and location of existing utilities where new con-
nections must be made. In the event it should become necessary to change
the locations of any work, due to building construction, etc. , the
Contractor shall secure approval of the Architect before making the
changes. Under no circumstances shall the sizes indicated on the drawings
be changed without securing written approval of the Architect.
C. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily show or
indicate all fittings, offsets, and accessories which may be required. The
Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions
affecting all his work as well as the operational requirements of each
system, and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings,
etc. , as may be required for the proper and efficient functioning of each
system. No unnecessary or unauthorized offsets will be permitted.
1.11 WORKMANSHIP:
A. All workmanship performed under this section shall be executed
in a first class manner in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
The Architect reserves the right to accept or reject workmanship and
determine when the Contractor has complied with the requirements herein
specified. Only competent mechanics skilled in their respective trades
shall be employed by the Contractor.
1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION:
A. This contractor shall be held responsible for elimination of
all noises or vibration transmitted to occupied areas from equipment which
he may install . This applies particularly to vibration and noises in
piping, water hammer, and vibration from mechanical equipment transmitted
through bases to building structure. He shall furnish and install anti-
vibration bases, flexible connectors for piping, and etc. , as may be
necessary.
15000-3
1.13 SUBMITTAL DATA:
A. Materials and equipment schedules shall be submitted as soon as
practicable but not later than thirty (30) days after the date of award of
contract, and before commencement of installation of any material or
equipment. A complete schedule of the material and equipment proposed
for installation shall be submitted for approval of the Architect. The
schedule shall include catalogs, cuts, diagrams, drawings, specifications,
and such other descriptive data as may be required by the Architect. The
schedule and supplementary data shall be submitted per the requirements
set forth in the general conditions of the Contract. All materials
required to be submitted for approval under this section shall be submitted
at one time. Partial submittals will not be considered. Each item sub-
mitted shall be identified by its applicable specification paragraph and
subparagraph number, and if detailed, the drawing number.
B. Where equipment named as equivalent, or approved equal , are
proposed for use by the Contractor, he shall be responsible to coordinate
any changes with all trades affected.
C. See individual specifications for equipment to be submitted.
D. Where the equipment furnished differs from that indicated in the
contract documents, or where the contractor considers additional detail or
shop drawings essential to the proper fabrication or installation of
equipment, he shall prepare such drawings and submit for review.
E. Approval granted on shop drawings is rendered as a service only
and shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurement of building
conditions, nor shall it be construed as relieving the contractor of the
responsibility of total compliance with the contract documents. Approval
on shop drawings that differ from the requirements of the contract docu-
ments shall become effective only after a change order has been issued
revising the contract document requirements.
F. Shop drawings shall be submitted and receive the Architect' s
approval before materials and equipment listed are installed.
1.14 STRUCTURE OPENINGS AND INSERTS:
A. All openings, sleeves and inserts in concrete and masonry
structures that are required for the mechanical work shall be sized and
located under these sections of the specifications, and maintained until
the concrete has set. All sleeves and openings not used during
constructon shall be sealed with grout.
B. Opening between pipes and sleeves through fire walls or floors
shall be packed solidly with mineral wool or other approved noncombustible
material .
15000-4
C. All cutting and patching of existing and/or new building
materials required for the installation of the mechanical work shall be
done under this section of the specifications. No structural members shall
be cut without the approval of the Architect, and shall be done in a manner
as approved. All patching shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner
to match adjoining surfaces by the mechanics of the particular trades
involved.
1. 15 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:
A. All excavating and backfilling required for the installation of
underground plumbing piping shall be included under these sections of the
specifications. All work shall conform to the section of the
specifications entitled Site Work. Where sewer pipes pass under footings
for walls or columns, or are lower than adjacent footings, the trenches
shall be backfilled with concrete up to the level of the footings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINTING:
A. All painting, unless specifically called for with an individual
piece of equipment, will be done under other sections of the
specifications.
2.02 SUPPORTS:
A. All concrete bases shown on the mechanical plans for equipment
shall be provided under the section of the specifications entitled
"Concrete".
B. Steel bases, brackets, hangers, etc. , as required for equipment
and piping support shall be furnished under these sections of the
specifications.
2.03 ELECTRICAL DEVICES:
A. All starters for mechanical equipment will be furnished under
this section.
B. All motors and starters will be installed and power wired under
the section entitled Electrical . Interlock wiring for sequencing and
control shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and shall
conform to the requirements of the section entitled Electrical .
C. All disconnects not specified integral with the motor starter
will be furnished, installed, and wired under the section entitled
Electrical .
15000-5
D. Individual motor starters for motors furnished under this
section of the specifications are to be furnished by the mechanical
contractor and installed by the electrical contractor. All control
wiring and interlocking to be by mechanical contractor. Power wiring
only to be by electrical contractor.
1 . Starters are to be fully voltage non-reversing for motors
less than 15 HP.
2. All motor starters, whether across-the-line or reduced
voltage, shall be steel mounted, front wired with all terminals accessible
for wiring directly from the front. All starters must be double-break,
solid silver cadmium oxide alloy contacts which will not require any
filling, dressing or cleaning throughout the life of the control equipment.
Bare copper or silver flashed copper contacts which require periodic
filing or cleaning maintenance is not permitted. Operating coils shall be
pressure molded and so designed that if accidentally connected to excessive
voltage they will not expand, bubble or melt. If a coil fails under
excessive under or over-voltage condition, the starter shall definitely
drop out and not freeze the starter in the "ON" position.
3. Overload relays shall be hand reset tripfree variety so
that blocking the reset mechanism in the reset position will not prevent
the starter from dropping out if the motor is overloaded. This specifi-
cally excludes those overload relays which change to automatic reset from
hand reset when the reset mechanism is blocked. Accidentally depressing
the reset button or mechanism will not shut off the motor. All overload
relays shall be equipped with a white trip indicator, visible from the
front which will indicate which motor starter has tripped due to overload.
When overload relays are specified with standard N.C. alarm circuit con-
tacts, they shall mount in the same location and manner as the standard
N.C. only overload relay and shall utilize the same heater elements as the
standard overload relay.
4. Overload relays shall not be field convertible from hand
to automatic operation. Automatic overload relays when specified shall
mount in the same position and use the same heater elements. The conver-
tible hand to auto reset overload relay is not permitted due to possibility
of introducing a dangerous unsafer condition for operators or damage to
machinery or work in progress.
5. It shall be possible to field add one or more extra N.O.
or N.C. interlocks to all motor starters Sizes 0 - 9 without removing
existing wiring or removing the starter from the enclosure. Furnish START-
STOP pushbuttons or HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch as shown. All starters
to have red "RUN" pilot light.
6. Enclosures are to be Nema 1, general purpose. All enclosure
sheet steel should be cleaned and degreased to remove all surface
impurities followed by a base conversion coat of calcium zinc phosphate
15000-6
to improve the resistance of bare steel to corrosion. Next, a primer
containing zinc chrome shall be applied, and while still wet, a finish
coat of hard alkyd baking enamel shall be sprayed on and both dried
together in carefully controlled gas ovens.
7. Allen-Bradley Bulletin 709, 713, 746, 476M, G.E. , or
approved equal .
E. All temperature control and sequence interlock wiring, and all
factory furnished prewiring of equipment shall be provided as a part of
these specifications and shall conform to the section of the specifications
entitled Electrical .
F. Starters shall be furnished with H-O-A switch or pushbutton
station in cover, as specified.
G. Unless otherwise specified with the equipment, motors shall be
open drip-proof type. Generally motors smaller than 1/2 hp are to be for
single phase, 60 cycle current, and 1/2 hp and larger are to be for three
phase, 60 cycle current. Verify electrical characteristics from
Electrical drawing panel schedules.
H. Engraved black and white Micarta nameplates shall be attached
to the front of each starter, identifying starter use.
2.04 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS:
A. All miscellaneous equipment to be furnished under other sections
of the specifications that require piping, shall be received and set, with
rough-in and final connections made under these sections of the
specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION:
A. The Contractor must at all times during the working hours,
assist the Architect, or his agents, in the inspection of his work and
will provide such facilities as are necessary for the safety of those
making inspection.
B. This Contractor will keep on the job at all times until com-
pletion a competent foreman vested with authority to act in the capacity
of the contractor in his absence. Transactions with said foreman are as
binding as those with the contractor.
15000-7
3.02 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Materials specifically mentioned in these plans and specifica-
tions shall be considered a standard of quality and shall not be considered
restrictive. It is not the intent of these specifications to limit
material and/or equipment selections to one manufacturer; however, the
Engineer reserves the right to be the final and sole judge with regard
to equals.
B. Approval of equipment is based on capacities, quality of work-
manship and components, or general and special construction features.
Approval of equipment does not relieve the contractor of coordination
responsibility with other trades. Equipment shall fit within the physical
space of equipment shown and have the same general connections as that
shown on drawings. Proper clearances shall be maintained for servicing and
maintaining equipment.
C. Where equipment submitted varies from the general arrangement of
that specified, contractor shall submit detailed sheetmetal and piping shop
drawings along with equipment brochures. Shop drawings shall indicate any
and all piping, sheetmetal , electrical , and structural changes required to
facilitate change and any or all additional costs incurred by changes will
be borne by this contractor.
3.03 START-UP AND SERVICE:
A. The Contractor shall put all items installed under this section
into operation and shall instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in all
points requiring service and maintenance. Further, the Contractor shall
make all adjustments and/or service requirements to said equipment during
the first 60 days of actual occupancy.
3.04 GUARANTEE:
A. All materials and equipment provided and/or installed under this
section of the specifications shall be guaranteed for a period of one year
from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. Should any trouble
develop during this period due to defective materials or faulty
workmanship, the Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor and
materials to correct the trouble without any cost to the Owner. Any
defective materials or inferior workmanship noticed at time of instal-
lation and/or during the guarantee period shall be corrected immediately
to the entire satisfaction of the Owner.
3.05 MAINTENANCE DATA:
A. Operation, maintenance, spare parts booklets shall be provided
for all items of equipment requiring maintenance. Provide a minimum of
three copies and turn over to Owner' s operating personnel . Bind in vinyl-
covered three-ring binder.
15000- 8
3.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A. Upon completion of installation, a set of prints of drawings
marked to scale indicating the size and location of piping, ducts,
conduits, and noting all major changes made during construction shall be
furnished to the Architect. Drawings shall give accurate dimensions
measured from columns, walls, beams and other fixed parts of the building
to the concealed materials.
END OF SECTION
15000— 9
SECTION 15080
PIPING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SHOP DRAWINGS:
The following shop drawings are required for this section of
the specifications:
Piping where revised from drawings.
Hangers and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS:
A. Materials for piping systems shall be in accordance with
the following, unless noted otherwise on the drawing. Intended service
is listed below description of material .
1. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) : Schedule 40, ASTM D-1785.
Equipment and cooling coil drain.
2. Type L hard copper tubing with wrought copper silver solder
full socket fittings ASTM A 40.3.
Refrigerant piping.
2.02 UNIONS:
A. Unions shall be placed near each soldered type valve and all
connections to equipment. Unions shall be so located that when the piece
of equipment is valved off, it may be removed without removal of piping or
hangers.
2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Provide all inserts and hangers required to properly support all
piping and accessories.
2.04 SLEEVES:
A. All pipes that pass through floors shall pass through sleeves of
schedule 40 PVC pipe. Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of sufficient
size to permit insulation to pass through.
15080-1
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING:
A. Refrigerant piping shall be run in schedule 40 PVC pipe of
sufficient size for pipes and insulation.
3.02 CONDENSATE DRAINS:
A. Condensate drains shall be installed with P-traps.
END OF SECTION
15080-2.
SECTION 15280
INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Insulation shall be as manufactured by Pittsburgh-Corning,
Certainteed, Johns-Manville, or approved equal . Density, thickness and
properties of insulation specified are to establish minimum characteristics
of intended insulation.
B. The adhesive and mastic used in connection with all insulation
work shall contain an approved vermin and rodent proof ingredient. The
adhesive shall be non-combustible and comply with NFPA 90A and ASTM E-84.
C. Any insulation damaged on adjoining work shall be replaced or
repaired in a neat and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit descriptive literature for all insulation
materials, adhesives, and mastics to be used. Identify as to use. Verify
that all materials comply with the applicable standards of NFPA 90A and
ASTM 84.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING:
A. Refrigerant liquid and insulated suction piping shall be covered
with slip-on type 3/4" thick foamed plastic molded insulation. Butt joints
shall be made with quick dry adhesive. Outdoor or exposed insulation
shall receive 2 coats of outdoor weather protection as recommended by
insulation manufacturer to be compatible with insulation and protect
against ultra violet damage.
2.02 SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTWORK:
A. All exposed supply, return and outside air intake ductwork in
Jan. 130 and Mech. Room 136 shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick 3.0 lb.
density rigid glass fiber insulation with flame resistant reinforced foil-
faced kraft paper. Insulation shall be secured to the duct with mechanical
fasteners and washers on 12 inch centers, with a minimum of two rows per
side. Butt all joints tightly and seal all joints, punctures and breaks
with 4" wide FSK tape.
15280-1
B. All concealed supply and return ductwork shall be insulated
with 3/4 pound density flexible glass fiber insulation with flame resistant
reinforced foil faced kraft paper. Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick.
Insulation shall be secured to the duct with a full coat of adhesive.
Overlap insulation 2" and secure with flare type staples 4" on center.
Seal all joints, punctures and breaks with 4" wide strips of glass fabric
embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic. Mechanical fasteners
and washers shall also be used on any duct over 24" in width or height, on
not more than 18" centers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSULATION:
A. No pipe insulation shall be installed until all lines have been
tested and approved. Piping surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and
dry before insulation is applied.
B. At pipe hangers, a 12 gauge galvanized metal saddle protecting
the bottom half of covering and a minimum length of 10 inches shall be
provided under the insulation.
C. Fittings for Insulation Having Vapor Barrier Jacket: Fittings
for insulation having vapor barrier jacket shall be covered with a heavy
coat of vapor barrier mastic with glass fabric cloth before jacket is
installed.
D. Ends of Pipe Insulation: Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed
off on all insulation with vapor barrier jacket with vapor barrier mastic
at valves, fittings, flanges, and every 15 feet on straight runs.
E. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating.
F. Seams, Joints and Penetrations of Vapor Barrier Jacket: All
seams, joints, and penetrations of vapor barrier jacket in ductwork and
piping shall be given a coat of vapor barrier mastic covered with jacketed
material to match adjoining jacket.
END OF SECTION
15280-2
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING WORK, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 INDEX OF SUB-SECTIONS:
15401 Plumbing Specialties
15402 Plumbing Valves
15403 Plumbing Hangers and Supports
15404 Testing of Plumbing Piping
15405 Plumbing Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping
15406 Plumbing Sanitary, Storm (When Applicable) , Vent,
and Waste Piping
15407 Plumbing Insulation
15408 Plumbing Fixtures, Equipment, Trim and Drains
15409 Plumbing Domestic Water Heating
1 .02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The Mechanical General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, All Sections in Division 1 General Requirements and
the Drawings apply to this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
A. All plumbing work and specified associated work specified in
other sections in Division 15 and shown on the drawings is governed by this
section. Provide labor, service and materials necessary to provide the
work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Plumbing system shall
be provided complete.
B. Contractor is responsible for complying with all local , state and
federal codes even if it means supplying, or installing different or addi-
tional equipment and materials, other than those specified in specifica-
tions or drawings. He is also responsible for obtaining and paying for all
permits and fees related to this section.
C. Any negotiations between Owner' s representative and city, state,
and federal or private utilities over permits or fees is also the respon-
sibility of the Contractor.
D. Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic and locations of piping and/or
equipment must be located in the field. Drawings are not to be scaled , see
Architectural Plans for fixture locations or building sizes.
15400-1
1 .03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturers product data for each plumbing item and
material specified in Section 15400.
B. If products other than those specified are approved, it is the
Contractor' s responsibility to see that the approved products will fit in
the designated location and are compatible with related equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS:
A. Where multiple items of equipment or materials are required, they
shall be the product of a single manufacturer, and shall be of the material
specified for that particular system.
B. No material other than the material specified in this section or
shown on drawings shall be bid or installed without previous permission
from the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Where drain and water connections that are necessary to the opera-
tion of fixture or equipment are not specifically indicated, extend
necessary branches to the closest indicated branch or main.
B. Each fixture, equipment drain or floor drain shall be separately
trapped unless otherwise indicated or specified.
C. All fixtures, pipe and accessories shall be protected from
damage. Cleanouts and floor drain openings shall be temporarily plugged
with oakum or test plugs until final connections are made.
D. Before installing pipe in any part of the system, the pipe shall
be cleaned inside and made free of oil , dirt, and foreign matter.
E. Properly align and install systems in a neat arrangement true to
the lines of the building. Pitch line at a constant slope for proper
drainage. When necessary to achieve this alignment, provide additional
hangers or bracing.
F. Except as noted otherwise on drawings, piping shall be held as
high as possible, tight under beams, with due regard to conflicts with
other systems and their requirements for space.
15400-2
G. Apply lubricant to screw joint male threads.
H. Metal to be soldered shall be cleaned and fluxed as suitable for
solder use.
I . Notching of copper tubing or plastic piping for connections will
not be permitted, except when "T-drill " system is used.
J. Do not allow dissimilar metals to come in contact with each
other.
K. Inserts, pipe sleeves, hangers, supports, fixtures, trim, drains
and anchorage of plumbing shall be provided as specified herein. Where
items are to be set or embedded in concrete, masonry or similar work, the
items shall be furnished and layout made at the proper time so as to cause
no delay in the work .
L. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the
location of all plumbing fixtures, piping and equipment with the locations
of floor openings, walls and equipment, (lights, fire sprinklers, A/C
ducts, trash chutes, etc. ) and install piping so as not to conflict. It is
also the Contractor ' s responsibility to notify the Architect/Engineer of
any conflicts that require changes to the Documents before any piping or
equipment is installed.
M. After all plumbing piping is installed, openings that have been
drilled or formed in wall or floors to allow piping to be installed shall
be sealed with fire retardant firm material .
END OF SECTION
15400-3
SECTION 15401
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Not Used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE SLEEVES:
A. Pipe sleeves shall be schedule 40 black steel , PVC or preformed
polyethylene; provide for all pipes thru walls and floors.
B. The annular space between pipes adn sleeves or openings shall be
filled with fire resistant material .
2.02 ESCUTCHEONS:
A. Escutcheons shall be provided for all piping thru walls, floors,
and ceiling where piping is exposed to view in finished areas and inside
cabinet work. Escutcheons shall be chromium plated, two piece, hinged with
set screw.
2.03 UNIONS:
A. Unions shall be ground joint brass unions or flanges; provide on
each piping connection to equipment.
B. Dielectric unions between copper and steel piping, copper and
steel or cast iron equipment or other dissimilar metals. Unions shall be
EPCO.
2.04 CLEANOUTS:
A. Cleanouts on PVC pipe shall be standard PVC fittings with
flush brass plugs.
1. Cleanouts in all concrete floors: Wade W-7010-X or approved
equal .
2. Cleanouts in Stack bases in concealed locations: Wade
8460-SS, or approved equal .
2.05 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS:
A. Arresters shall be Wade Shok Stops for washers and flush valves,
or approved equal .
B. Trap Primers: Install exposed below lavatory.
END OF SECTION
15401-1
SECTION 15402
PLUMBING VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION:
A. All shut-off valves 2" and smaller above grade shall be full port
ball valves with bronze body. Valves shall be in accordance with Fed.
Spec. WW-V-1967.
B. All valves 2 1/2" and larger or below grade shall be a non-rising
stem bronze 125/200 non-shock WWY54 Type 1 Class A gate valve.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVES:
A. 2-inch and smaller:
1. Screwed: Watts valve B-6800, or approved equal .
2. Solder Joint: Watts valve B-6801, or approved equal .
B. 2 1/2-inch and larger or below grade:
1. Screwed: Hammond 1B645, or approved equal .
2. Solder Joint: Hammond 1B647, or approved equal .
2.02 HOSE BIBBS:
A. Hose bibb exterior shall be Wade W-8607-L5 or approved
equal .
B. Hose bibb interior shall be Wade W-8630-89 or approved
equal .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install valves where shown on drawings.
B. Install in accessible locations.
C. Valves shall not be installed with the stems below the
horizontal position.
END OF SECTION
15402-1
SECTION 15403
PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL:
A. Provide hangers for all piping. Use hangers capable of
adjustment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Hangers for copper tubing shall be Michigan Hanger Company Model
No. 102-A, or approved equal (where applicable) .
B. Hangers for PVC piping shall be as recommended by the manufac-
turer (where applicable) .
C. Trapeze hangers of a type approved by the Architect-Engineer may
be used where pipes are designed to run parallel and at same elevation. '
D. Provide insulation hanger with protective shield, Michigan Hanger
Company, Model No. 103, or approved equal , for all insulated piping.
E. Strap Hangers: Not permitted.
F. Inserts : In concrete, Michigan Hanger Company, Model No. 355 or
approved equal , having adjustment from 3/4 inch thru 1-1/4 inch. In metal
decks, Redhead SD1 or approved equal , Powder Propelled permitted in new
construction where type and location are approved prior to installation.
In existing construction, Start Slugin No. 6800 series, or approved equal .
G. Other Supports: Obtain Architect-Engineer' s approval for other
methods of support.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SPACING OF HANGERS:
A. Provide hanger and each change of direction.
END OF SECTION
15403-1
SECTION 15404
TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Conduct all tests after piping is installed and before piping is
concealed or covered.
B. Provide all necessary temporary piping closures.
C. Provide all testing equipment, materials and supplies.
D. Systems shall remain under test of sufficient length of time to
provide tightness thereof and for adequate observation by the
Architect-Engineer.
E. Materials other than those specified for jointing will not be
permitted in the piping systems for the purpose of stopping leaks .
F. All leaks disclosed by the testing procedures shall be stopped
and testing repeated until the system is proven tight.
G. Testing requirements are minimum and are not intended to be
limiting where additional testing methods are required by the authority
having jurisdiction.
1.02 STERILIZATION:
A. After tests are completed, the complete hot and cold water supply
system shall be filled with a solution containing 100 ppm of available
chlorine and allowed to stand for a period of two hours before being
flushed with clean water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXECUTION:
A. Domestic hot water and cold water piping shall be tested to a
hydrostatic pressure of 150 psig. Maintain test pressure for a minimum of
one hour.
15404-1
B. Sanitary and storm (when applicable) and waste piping previous to
connection of fixtures and before insulation is installed, shall be filled
with water to the top of the system and proven tight. When testing the
system by sections, the minimum height of the water column shall be 10
feet. Examine all joints for leaks.
END OF SECTION
15404-2
SECTION 15405
PLUMBING DOMESIC HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL :
A. No product other than the product specified in this section for
Domestic Hot and Cold Water shall be installed or bid for this system
without previous permission from the Architect (except, if material has to
be changed to meet code) .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING:
A. Hot and cold water piping inside building or below floor: Shall
be copper water tube type "L" with wrought solder fittings.
B. Cold water outside building below grade: Shall be Schedule 40
PVC.
2.02 JOINT:
A. Copper: Solder joints 95/5 antinomy solder.
B. PVC: Solvent weld.
2.03 INSULATION:
A. See Sub-Section 15407 Plumbing Insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Notching of pipe for connection not permitted, except when T-
drill system is used.
B. Not more than one fixture shall be supplied by a 1/2 inch branch.
C. No 1/2" supply run shall be over 10 feet.
D. Make connection to equipment and fixtures indicated on the
drawings or specified herein.
E. Hot water branch connections to distribution mains shall be top
take-off, swing joint type.
15405-1
F. Cold and hot water located below floor slab shall be cold
tar.
G. All cold and hot water piping penetrating concrete floor slab
shall be fitted with PVC sleeve.
END OF SECTION
15405-2
SECTION 15406
PLUMBING SANITARY, STORM (WHEN APPLICABLE) , VENT, AND WASTE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL:
A. No product other than the product specified in this section
for sanitary drainage shall be installed or bid for this sytem without
previous permission from the Architect, (except if material has to be
changed to meet code) .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING:
A. Sanitary, storm (when applicable) , vent, and waste piping,
4-inch and smaller, unless otherwise noted on drawings, shall be PVC
Schedule 40 DWV.
B. Sewer piping 6-inch and larger, see Civil Specifications.
2.02 JOINTS:
A. PVC: Solvent weld.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Drainage piping shall be sloped at a minimum grade of 1/8
inch per foot unless noted otherwise on the drawings or specified herein.
B. Vent piping shall be so graded and connected as to drip back to
the drainage system.
C. Provide traps for each fixture, floor drain, or equipment
indicated, unless detailed or specified otherwise.
D. Make connections to equipment and fixtures indicated on the
drawings or specified herein.
E. Protect each fixture against siphonage.
END OF SECTION
15406-1
SECTION 15407
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. No product other than the product specified in this section for
insulation shall be installed or bid for this project without previous
permission from the Architect.
B. Insulation and all components shall meet all requirements of
UL 25/50 ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION:
A. Shall be 1/2" thick molded fiberglass insulation.
2.02 JACKETS:
A. Shall be an all purpose high density, white kraft bonded to
aluminum foil , reinforced with fiberglass yarn.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
A. Piping shall be cleaned and dryed.
B. Testing: All testing should be accomplished before installing
insulation.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Insulation shall be continuous through walls, floors or pipe
sleeves.
B. Metal shields shall be provided at each pipe hanger.
C. All joints shall be sealed.
D. All work shall be neat and present a clean finished
appearance.
15407-1
E. All hot water piping, except hot water piping below floor
(slab on grade) shall be insulated.
F. All cold water piping as indicated on contract documents.
G. When applicable all horizontal storm piping and roof or
deck drain sumps.
H. All sanitary or waste piping receiving condensate waste or
wastewater from water coolers, except when installed below floor
(slab on grade) .
I . All work shall be neat and present a clean finished appearance.
END OF SECTION
15407-2
SUB-SECTION 15408
PLUMBING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, TRIM AND DRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Supports : Provide all brackets, plates, anchors and fastening
devices required for anchoring the fixture rigidly in place. Risers to
shower heads shall be anchored to the wall construction to prevent
movement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING:
A. Piping to serve fixtures and equipment and exposed to view in
finished areas shall be brass, chromium plated.
2.02 FIXTURES:
A. Provide and install the plumbing fixtures as follows:
P-1 Water Closet (Elongated) : Shall be a white, elongated,
floor mounted, flush tank, siphon-jet closet, supplied
with chromed supply with stop way seal , bolt caps and open
front white, solid plastic toilet seat with self-sustaining
check hinge, less cover.
Water Closet Toilet Seat
American Standard 2109.405 Bemis 1655-ss/c
Crane 3-144 Beneke 527-ss
Eljer 091-1605 Olsonite #95 cc/ss
Sperzel-150-Ess-CH
P-1A Water Closet (Handicapped) : Shall be a white, elongated,
floor mounted, flush tank, siphon jet, 18" high closet,
supplied with chromed supply with stop, wax seal , bolt caps
and a open front white, solid plastic toilet seat with
self-sustaining check hinge, less cover.
Water Closet Toilet Seat
American Standard 2108.416 Bemis 1655-ss/c
(with locking tank lid) Beneke 527-ss
Crane 3-154 Olsonite #95cc/ss
Eljer 09-1675 Sperzel-150-Ess-CH
Kohler K-3528-EB
15408-1
P-1B Water Closet/Lavatory: Shall be a 304 stainless steel
combination manufactured with 14 gauge bowl (with integral
seat) with 15 gauge seat. Unit shall be left hand, off
floor flush valve type. Unit shall be furnished with penal
lavatory valve, drain and flush valve.
Bowl Lavatory Faucet Flush Valve
Acorn 1512-L Acorn 1760-2G Acorn 2822
Metcraft Metcraft Hot & Cold Metcraft Flush
100-90-18-0SL Valve
P-2 Urinal : Shall be a white, wall hung, siphon-jet urinal ,
with 3/4" top spud, supplied with wall hanger, large
diaphragm flush valve and stop.
Urinal Flush Valve
American Standard 6561.017 Delany Flush Boy 571-VB
Crane 7-150 Sloan Royal 186
Elker 161-1090
Kohler K-4985-T
P-3 Lavatory Vanity: Shall be a white, oval , vitreous china,
wall-mounted, 4" centers, 20" x 18" lavatory, supplied with
4" center set chrome single control ceramic disc, washer-
less faucet with 1/2" coupling nuts, pop-up drain, aerator
chrome "P" trap and chromed suppies with stops.
Lavatory Faucet
American Standard 0355.012 American Standard 2385.011
Crane 1-195-V Bradley 1414E
Eljer 051-1644 Eljer 557-1010-04
Kohler K-2032 Kohler K-6882-P
Union 415
P-4 Kitchen Sink: Shall be a two-compartment stainless-steel ,
self-rimming sink, with each compartment 6" deep. Four
faucet holes at 4" center-set chrome single lever washer-
less faucet with 1/2" coupling nuts and ceramic discs in
brass cartridge, chrome "P" trap, and chromed supplies
with stops.
Sink Faucet Drain/Strainer
Dayton DJ-23322 Delta 100CM Dayton D-1125
Just VDL-2233-B-GR Amer.Std. 4205.029 Just JB99
Meon K3322-4 Union 411 Meon 2H-40
15408-2
P-5 Laundry Sink : Shall be a acid-resisting enameled cast iron
inside, supplied with wall hanger and s/s rim guard. Also,
provide 3" trap standard with floor flange and heavy duty
faucet with vacuum breaker.
Sink Faucet Trap
Amer.Std.7695. 18 Amer.Std. 8340.242 Amer.Std. 7798. 176
Eljer 242-0125 Speakman SC-5821-VB Eljer 804-1060
Kohler K-6716 Kohler K-8905 Kohler K-6673
(24 X 20)
P-6 Electric Water Cooler (Handicapped) : Shall be a wall
mounted, non-pressurized, 8.0 G.P.M. , electric water
cooler, equipped with vandal proof front push bar with
raised letters, supplied with chromed "P" trap, chrome
supplies with stops. (Water cooler to be mounted with
spout opening 26" above finished floor) .
Water Cooler
Elkay EHF-8
Oasis OEP8WM-E
Sunroc HCWC-8-5
Halsey Taylor WC7A-1
Haws HWC7
P-7 Washer Connection: Shall be a recessed PVC plumbing outlet
box with (2) two factory installed valves using a through
the box adapter, and 2" drain to an in-wall "P" trap.
Plumbing Outlet Box
Water-Tite Model 1102
P-8 Shower: Shall be a ceramic tiled enclosure, by others (see
architectural plans) . Contractor shall supply and install
a pressure balancing, single control mixing valve, arm,
flange and 4.0 shower head. Shower drain shall be the
same as specified for floor drain.
Mixing Valve and Shower Head
Speakman S-1410
P-9 Sink: Shall be a single-compartment stainless-steel , self-
rimming sink, with 6 1/2" compartment depth, three faucet
holes at 4" center-set chrome single lever washerless
faucet with 1/2" coupling nuts and ceramic discs in brass
cartridge, chrome "P" trap, and chromed supplies with
stops.
Sink Faucet Drain/Strainer
Dayton DJ12522 Delta 100CM Dayton D-1125
Just SL-2225-B-GR Amer.Std. 4205.029 Just JB99
Moen K2522-3 Union 411 Moen 2H-40
15408-3
P-10 Lavatory Wall -Hung: Shall be a white, vitreous china 4"
centers, wall hung 20" x 18" lavatory, supplied with wall
bracket 4" center chrome dual control washerless faucet
with 1/2" coupling nuts and ceramic disc in brass
cartridge, 4" wrist handles, grid type, off-set drain.
Lavatory Faucet
American Standard 0355.012 American Standard 2103.620
Crane 1-195-V Speakman SC-3064
Eljer 051-1644
Kohler K-2032
2.03 DRAINS:
A. Floor drains shall be Wade W-1100 series cast iron floor drain
with flange, integral reversible clamping collar and 6" diameter nickel
brass strainer with secured, square hold grate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Chrome plated piping requiring the use of a wrench shall be pro-
tected from damage.
B. Caulk betwen fixture and wall or fixture and floor with white
silicone caulking.
END OF SECTION
15408-4
SUB-SECTION 15409
PLUMBING DOMESTIC WATER HEATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Provide domestic water heating equipment where shown on drawings
and specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER HEATER:
A. WH-1 shall be 82 gallon glass lined tank, foamite insulated (2)
elements, 4.5 KW, State PV-82-2RT2. Temperature to be set at 140°F,
or approved equal
B. Heater shall have A.S.M.E. 3/4" T & P relief valve.
C. Heater shall meet all requirements of ASHRAE 90-80.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Water heater shall be installed where shown on the drawings.
B. Terminate relief valve as shown on the drawings.
C. All heaters on upper floors shall be equipped with heater pans,
when required by code.
D. Heater shall be furnished with shut-off valve.
END OF SECTION
15409-1
SECTION 15650
VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Shop drawings shall be required for all equipment and materials
contained within this section of the specification.
1.02 SAFETY GUARDS:
A. All exposed rotating or moving parts shall be provided with
safety screens, belt guards, coupling guards, etc. , as required. All
electrical connections and controls shall be properly housed in approved
boxes or panels that have positive means of closure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:
A. Condensing Unit:
1. General : Unit frame shall be one piece welded assembly of
18 gauge, zinc-coated steel formed channel members. Extractor surfaces
phosphatized, epoxy primered, and finished with baked-on enamel .
2. Compressors: Provide welded steel shell , hermetic
compressors designed for heat pump duty. Crankcase heaters are standard.
Internal temperature and current sensitive motor overload protect
compressor under loss of charge conditions and abnormal operating
conditions.
3. Evaporator Coil : All units shall have aluminum fins mecha-
nically bonded to 3/8 inch OD seamless copper tubing. All coils are fac-
tory pressure and leak tested to 425 psig. Coil guards are optional .
4. Outdoor Fans: Upflow, direct-drive statically and dynami -
cally balanced propeller fans are used. Permanently lubricated motors
have built-in thermal and current overload protection.
5. Demand Defrost: The system monitors air pressure drop
across the outdoor coil surface to sense airflow restriction due to ice
build-up on the coil . Control circuitry shall have an integral time
override to limit defrost cycles to a maximum of five minutes.
15650-1
6. Controls: The control panel shall have starters to
compressor, evaporator and condenser fan motors with built-in overload
protection, high and low pressure safety switch, control circuit transfor-
mers and fuses, manual/automatic changeover and all necessary terminal
blocks.
B. Air Handling Unit:
1. General : Central station of the type, size and capacity
indicated on the drawings . Units shall be factory built and factory
tested products to fit space available.
2. Casings: Provide casings of galvanized steel properly rein-
forced and braced for maximum rigidity with steel angle framework as
required. Casings of sectionalized construction with removable panels in
fan and coil sections to provide access to all internal parts. One piece
arc welded drain pan under the complete fan and coil section on horizontal
units and under the complete coil section on vertical units. Drain pan
with connections on both sides. Drain pan shall have a galvanized metal
liner.
3. Gages: Metal gages not lighter than 12 ga. for drain pan,
14 ga. for the fan section discharge face and 14 ga. for fan section end.
Not lighter than 16 ga. for coil section end panels, 12 ga. for coil sec-
tion end frames and 10 ga. for coil support channels. Inspection doors
shall be 14 or 16 ga. thickness.
4. Fans: Fans double width, double inlet, multiblade type.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested after
being installed in factory assembled fan sections. Fans shall be
installed on properly sized one piece hollow or solid shafts as designed
and required by the unit manufacturer. Fan shafts shall not pass through
their first critical speed as unit comes up to rated rpm. External grease
fittings shall be provided.
5. Fan Motor: Fan drive V-belt complete with motor, belt guard
adjustable drive to provide plus or minus 15% speed variation for capaci-
ties shown. Motors shall be selected for non-overloading with speed
variation. Drive sized for 1.5 times motor h.p. with minimum of two belts
for motors over 1 h.p.
6. Filters: Filters shall be 1 inch thick minimum, low velo-
city disposable glass fiber type, maximum velocity 500 ft/min.
15650-2
7. Cooling Coil : The coils shall be the continuous aluminum
slat fan and copper tube type. Fans shall have collars drawn and belled
and shall be firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion
of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding pro-
cess. Coils shall have a galvanized steel casing no lighter than 14 ga.
Coils shall be removable from the unit without dismantling the entire
unit. Coils tested 250 psig air under water. Cooling coil fin spacing
shall not exceed 12 fins/inch. Tubes shall be 5/8" copper.
8. Insulation: All sections after and including coil shall be
factory insulated not less than 1" thick. 1/5 lb. per cubic foot neoprene
coated insulation.
9. Electric heater shall be (factory) installed on
cooling/heating units . Heater models over 10 kw shall have heating ele-
ments sequenced on and off in 5 kw increments and shall be wired for 2
stage operation. All heaters shall be equipped with thermal overload
device, current overload for heater above 10 kw and the required heating
and cooling system controls including control circuit transformer. Low-
voltage connections shall be point-to-point on terminal board.
10. Vibration Isolation: The units shall be mounted on height-
saving spring isolators.
11. Controls: Units shall be furnished and installed complete
with all system operating and safety controls specified herein and as
otherwise required for a complete and operable system. Controls shall be
of the electric and electronic type. All removable controls shall be low
voltage (less than 50V AC) .
(a) Furnish and install a remote system control subbase
containing the following items:
System heat-auto-cool selector switch.
Fan on-auto switch.
The heat-auto-cool selector switch shall energize the
control circuit and energize the unit.
12. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide air-to-air heat pump split-system units of one of the following:
Weatherking
or equal
2.02 FANS:
A. Centrifugal ceiling exhaust fan shall be Nutone or approved
equal fan units of capacity as shown on the drawings. Fan shall have
disconnect (plug and receptacle) in housing and shall be provided with
ceiling inlet grille.
15650-3
B. Wall Mounted Propeller Exhaust Fans: The propeller fans shall
be direct drive or belt driven of capacity and characteristics as shown
on the drawings. Fan shall be supplied with inlet guard and starters as
required. Motor shall be furnished constant speed totally enclosed fan
cooled. Unit shall be Acme, Cook , or equal .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install equipment specified herein as called for on the contract
plans and in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
B. Placement and Mounting: Unit locations shall be essentially as
shown on drawings; however, actual placement shall be verified using field
measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual
installation on this project.
C. At the time the systems are turned over to the Owner, all.
installed filters shall be clean and unused. Provide three complete
extra sets of replacement filters for all types of filters.
D. Cleaning and Protection of Equipment: Contractor shall
protect the units from damage from the time of its receipt until final
acceptance and shall thoroughly clean the equipment of all dirt and
construction debris prior to requesting final inspection. Casing panel ,
access doors, gaskets, coils and like items which become damaged during
the course of construction shall be repaired to "as new" condition or
shall be replaced with new material or equipment components.
3.02 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM TEST:
A. An independent testing and balancing agency that is a member
of the Associated Air Balance Council and approved by the Architect,
shall balance, adjust and test the complete air conditioning and
ventilation system when it has been completed and in full working
order. The test and balance agency shall include a 90 day warranty
during which time recheck or resetting of any reported item will be
made at the Architect' s request. Such systems or equipment that cannot
be tested completely because of climatic conditions shall require a
retest at time of season change, or favorable climatic conditions exist.
B. Balancing, adjusting and testing of all systems shall be
performed in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measure-
ment and Instrumentation for air and hydronics systems balance. All
air supply and return systems and equipment shall be adjusted to provide
design quantities as shown on the drawings. The complete temperature
control and interlock system shall be tested to demonstrate sequence
and settings as specified. Adjustments for all dampers, balancing
devices, controls and motor drives shall be made as required. A complete
15650-4
record shall be made of all nameplate data and mechanical specifications
for motors, equipment and air devices tested, with three copies of this
record submitted with the test report.
C. Test report on forms approved by AABC of final measurements in
three copies shall be submitted to the Architect and shall include the
following:
Air quantities at all registers and diffusers .
Total air cfm for each air handling unit.
Total outside and return air cfm for each supply system.
Total air cfm for each exhaust system.
Suction and discharge static pressure at each supply and
exhaust fan.
Wet bulb and dry bulb air temperature on and off each
cooling and heating coil .
Room temperature of each room and WB in each zone.
Ammeter and voltmeter reading for each motor.
Outside air temperature.
END OF SECTION
15650-5
SECTION 15800
MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK AND DUCT SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Shop Drawings: Refer to "General Requirements" . The following
shop drawings are required for this section of the specifications:
Ductwork where revised from drawings.
Fire dampers.
Flexible duct connection.
Diffusers .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCTWORK:
A. Galvanized Ductwork: Galvanized ductwork shall be fabricated of
galvanized sheet iron and reinforced with angles at spacing all in accor-
dance with recommendations of SMACNA. The total static pressure for the
fan as scheduled on the drawing shall determine construction classifica-
tion: Below 3" S.P. low pressure. Seams shall be smoothly finished
inside. Sufficient slip joints shall be installed in the ductwork to take
care of expansion and contraction.
2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Hangers and Supports shall be constructed of materials and
installed with spacing and fasteners as recommended by the Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
B. Insulated Horizontal Ductwork : Insulated horizontal ductwork
shall be supported with trapeze type hangers, SMACNA Plate No. 19 or 20.
Vapor barrier is not to be pierced by any of the support members.
2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT:
A. Fan and air unit connections to ducts shall have flexible
connections, minimum of 4" long with 1" slack, with galvanized fastening
strip, "Ventglass" as manufactured by Vent Fabrics, Inc. , or approved
equal .
15800-1
B. Flexible runout ducts shall be galvanized steel helix
wire spring covered with neoprene coated fiberglass, U.L. approved, with
1" thick, 3/4" lb. density fiberglass laminated aluminum foil vapor
barrier. Glas-Flex 181 , Flexible Tubing Corporation, Therma-flex-KN
or approved equal .
2.04 DUCT ACOUSTICAL LINING:
A. All supply and return ducts indicated on the drawings as
acoustically lined shall have 1" thick Gustin-Bacon Monolithic ultra
liner fiberglass duct liner. All lined duct shall have inside clear
dimensions as shown on the drawings. The insulation shall be secured
to the metal with a solid coat of Foster 81-60 fire retardant adhesive.
Top and bottom sections shall overlap the sides. All joints shall be
firmly butted and ends thoroughly coated with adhesive as ducts over
24" in width or height or not more than 18" centers.
2.05 TURNING VANES:
A. All square elbows in fan discharge ductwork shall have 4
inch long air foil type turning vanes as manufactured by Titus or
approved equal . Field construction vanes will not be accepted.
2.06 ACCESS DOORS:
A. Access doors shall be installed where required for access
to volume dampers, fire dampers, etc. Duct access doors are to be
18" long by depth of duct with maximum size of 18" x 18" . Plenum access
doors shall be as required. Access doors are to be insulated when
installed in insulated ductwork or plenums and are to be provided with
extended surface to match adjoining insulation.
2.07 VOLUME DAMPERS:
A. Duct splitter dampers shall be constructed in accordance
with SMACNA recommendations of 22 gauge galvanized sheet iron with leading
edge hemmed. Damper blade length shall be 1.5 times the largest split
duct dimension. Blade shall be connected to duct fitting with 2 by 2
galvanized fixed pin hinges on 6 inch centers. Blade shall be adjusted
with 1/4 inch round push rods with duct mounted set screw, 1 rod for
blades through 18 inch depth, 2 rods for blades over 18 inch depth.
B. Manual dampers shall be of the opposed blade type. Blades
shall not exceed 10 inches in width, of 16 gauge steel with 2 coats of
black japan paint. All dampers shall be horizontal axis type with brass
pin running steel bearings. All dampers shall be built with solid stops,
continuous on all four sides. Damper frames shall be all welded steel
channels, with two coats of black japan paint. Manual dampers shall
have extended rod and locking quadrant for positioning.
15800-2
C. Duct extractor dampers shall be provided at all take-offs
from supply duct, and shall be Titus AG-45 with operator, or approved
equal . When damper is accessible through grille a No. 1 operator shall
be furnished. When damper is not accessible, a No. 2 operator shall be
furnished. A locking quadrant shall be used where duct is exposed or
accessible.
2.08 INSTRUMENT PORTS:
A. Instrument ports shall be installed in an approved location on
the return and supply side of each air conditioning unit or air handling
unit duct connection, and the suction side of each exhaust fan connected
to more than one exhaust opening. Ports shall be Young Regulator No. 110
or approved equal , for all ducts without external insulation and ports
equal to No. 1101 for ducts with external insulation.
2.09 DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS:
A. All diffusers and registers shall be aluminum construction.
B. All ceiling mounted supply and return diffusers shall have
factory baked on enamel white finish.
C. Plaster frames shall be furnished for all diffusers installed
in plaster ceilings.
D. Metalaire model numbers are used as a standard. Equivalent
equipment may be submitted for approval . Unless otherwise noted, noise
rating for device, with damper full open, shall not exceed NC30 when
tested in accordance with ADC test code 1062R1. Ratings shall be
approved by Air Diffusion Council .
E. Devices:
CD Ceiling Supply Diffuser Series 5500-M-15 (perforated)
Frame with opposed blade
dampers.
SR Sidewall Supply Register Model H4004D, flat border with
opposed blade damper.
RR Return Register Series RHD with opposed blade
dampers.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.01 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION:
A. Hangers and supports shall support and brace the ducts in
such a manner that the ducts will be absolutely rigid. Ductwork shall
15800-3
be free from vibration when in operation, and all ductwork designated
by the Architect as having excessive vibration shall be provided with
additional braces or support.
B. All required offsets and transformations for the installations
of this work shall be provided, although not specifically indicated on
the plans.
C. All ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned manually and entire
system blown with a built-up velocity to clean the interior of all
foreign matter. The cleaning shall be done before and building interior
painting is done or acoustic ceiling is installed.
D. Make all pulley adjustments, damper settings, etc. , required
to obtain air supply and exhaust capacities as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
15800-4
SECTION 15900
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Shop drawings shall be required for all equipment and materials
contained with this section of the specifications.
B. Shop drawings shall show all electrical connections and inter-
locks for electrical equipment as well as temperature control system
specified herein.
C. Furnish and install an electric system of automatic temperature
controls as herein specified and indicated on the drawings.
D. The control system herein specified shall be free from defects
in workmanship and material for a period of twelve months under normal use
and service. If within twelve months from the date of final inspection and
acceptance by the Owner any of the equipment described, specified or
furnished by the temperature control manufacturer is proved to be defective
in workmanship or material , it shall be replaced or repaired, free of
charge to the Owner.
E. Controls not included in this section:
1. Domestic hot water heaters.
2. Power wiring, etc. , as specified under other sections of
the specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A. The control system shall be electric. The equipment shall be
as manufactured and installed by Honeywell , Inc. , or approved equal .
B. Control Equipment:
1. Furnish and install a remote system control subbase
containing the following items :
System heat-auto-cool-off selector switch.
Fan on-auto switch.
Nite Set Back
15900-1
2. Single temperature electric thermotats shall have break
contacts .
3. Provide all necessary electric/solid state relays,
transformers, transducers, etc. , as required to make a complete and
working system as herein specified under sequence of operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. All temperature control and interlock wiring shall be
included in this portion of the work.
B. All wire shall be run in conduit.
C. Responsibility for the temperature control , operation and
sequencing for all systems furnished shall be a part of this section of
the specifications. Operating personnel of the Owner shall be instructed
in the proper operation of the control system.
END OF SECTION
15900-2
SECTION 16010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
EARI_i___GERERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to Architectural , Structural , Heating and Ven-
tilating and Plumbing to coordinate material and equipment
location .
B. Articles , materials , operations or methods , specified
herein or indicated on the drawings , require that
Division 16 provide each item mentioned or indicated ,
quality subject to qualifications noted , perform according
to conditions stated , each operation prescribed , and
provide therefore all necessary labor , equipment and
incidentals .
C. All articles either shown on the drawings or mentioned
in the specifications , together with all items necessary
for or inci dent Ial to the completion of the Work ,
shall be furnished and installed by Division 16 , unless
otherwise stated . All adjustments shall be made and
the system turned over to the Owner in perfect working
order .
D. All materials shall be new and in mint condition .
E . All products used in this installation shall bear
the Underwriters UL label , when under their jurisdiction .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Drawings : Architectural and Structural drawings take
precedence over Electrical drawings with reference
to building construction . Electrical drawings are
diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement
and extent of work . Architectural drawings indicate
more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers,
registers , lighting fixtures , electric panels and
devices , plumbing fixtures , and other items which
remain exposed in complete building . Exact locations
and arrangements of materials and equipment shall
1 601 0-1
be determined , with the concurrence of the Architect ,
as work progresses to conform in the best possible
manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining
work of other trades . Where locations of equipment ,
devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural
features , establish such locations by referring to
dimensions on Architectural drawings and not be scaling
drawings .
B. Materials and Equipment: New and labeled by Underwriters '
Laboratories , Inc . , unless specifically permitted
otherwise . Materials and products shall conform in
all respects to the quality and features indicated
by specifications and drawings and shall be the best
materials and finishes available. All current carrying
materials shall be copper . Where material or product
is indicated or necessary, but not specifically described
in specifications or drawings , such material or product
shall conform to quality and features of similar items
so described or otherwise indicated . All materials
and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products .
C. Installation : In general , the "Standard of Installation"
published by the National Electrical Contractors Asso-
ciation ( NECA ) shall set the standard for installation
of equipment and for workmanship . Where specific
methods of installation are indicated by specifications
or drawings , the methods so established shall be used
unless otherwise permitted by the Architect. Install
materials and equipment in a neat and orderly manner .
Secure cabinets , boxes , wiring , conduits and other
equipment rigidly to structure . Cover conduits, boxes ,
cabinets and other enclosures with plastic covers
or caps to prevent entrance of plaster , concrete ,
or other debris when work is not being done therein .
Materials and equipment shall be installed using tools
and equipment designed for the particular application .
D . Corrosion Protection : Special precautions shall be
taken to protect materials and equipment from corrosion
during construction . Materials or equipment damaged
from corrosion or other causes will be rejected and
shall be removed from the project site immediately .
1 . 03 REFERENCES
A. Applicable portions of the "Conditions of the Contract"
including the "General Conditions" and "Supplementary
Conditions , " and Division 1 "General Requirements , "
are a part of this Division .
16010-2.
B. See Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instruction
to Bidders for substitution of materials and equipment.
1 . 04 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The following scope of work is a brief generalization
of the type and extent of the work to be performed .
Detailed requirements are shown on the drawings and
specified in the related sections of Division 16 .
B. The work of Division 16 includes all labor, materials ,
tools , plant , transportation , equipment , insurance ,
temporary protection , permits , taxes , and all other
necessary and related items required to provide the
various systems shown and described , complete and
in perfect operating condition .
C. Any systems indicated or specified shall mean all
necessary work to provide complete functioning systems .
D. Rough in and make final connections , provision for
connections to future installation by others, or complete
installation to equipment furnished by others , as
shown or specified .
E. Work under Division 16 includes, but is not necessarily
limited to the following :
1 . Excavation
Do all excavation required for the installation
work in this Contract . Excavation to provide
sufficient clearance for instaliation of work
and to be kept free of water .
2 . Backfilling
Backfill immediately after inspections have received
approval of local authorities and Architect.
3 . Lighting and Power Systems including :
a . Lighting, Light Fixtures, Lamps and Ballasts
b . Utility Company , Service Entrance
c. Norman Power, Distribution
d. Emergency Power, Generation and Distribution
16010-3
4 . Special Building Systems Including :
a . Lightning Protection
5 . Communication and Signaling Systems Including :
a . Fire Alarm and Detection
b . Commerical Telephone
c . Intercom
d . Security and Access Control
e. Miscellaneous Conduit Systems
1 .05 DEFINITIONS
A. The words "supply " , "supply and install ", " install " ,
"furnish " , " furnish and install " or " complete " as
used in this Division , mean a complete and properly
working electrical installation .
1 .06 RELATIONSHIP TO OWNER ' S FACILITY
A. Do not unnecessarily disturb or interfere with the
Owner 's use of facilities associated with or adjacent
to this contract . When interference is necessary ,
permission shall be obtained from the Owner before
any operation or service line is disturbed or disconnected.
B. All required power interruptions shall be scheduled
with the Owner and Utility Company .
1 .07 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Access Panels
1 . Generally , all concealed Junction boxes , control
devices , duct mounted heat and smoke detectors ,
etc . are located above in-accessible type ceilings .
Furnish access doors Milcor style "K " with flush
screw - driver operated lock , of size to permit
complete access . Door shall be typed suitable
to the construction in which they are to be installed .
1 .08 CODES AND FEES
A. Comply with all the latest Federal , State , City and
Utility Company , rules , regulations , and ordinances
having Jurisdiction over this work . These codes shall
supercede the specifications and drawings .
16010-4
B. All work shall be in accordance with the latest editions
of the National Electric Code and the Electric Codes
in the locale in which the work is being performed .
C. The completed electrical installation shall be inspected
and certified by the agency designated in the locale .
The agency shall be requested to certify that the
installation is in accordance with the latest editions
of the National Electrical Code or such other standards
as may be applicable. Bear all costs of such inspections
and certifications .
D. Apply for , obtain and pay any and all fees or service
charges related to required permits and/or inspections .
E . Contact utility and commercial telephone companies
to ascertain all fees and charges associated iwth
Division 16 .
1 .09 TESTS
A. The Owner will assume no liability or responsibility
for any portions of the installation under Division
16 until they are finally accepted in writing . Final
inspection and tests will be made only after the Architect
is satisfied that the work shown on the drawings and
in the specifications has been completed in accordance
with the intent of the drawings and specifications .
After the system is complete , and when directed by
the Architect , run a test , in the presence of the
Architect , during which the total system operation
shall be demonstrated and final adjustments made to
the system. If any system or piece of equipment within
a system fails to function properly , rectify such
defects or inadequacies and make a final test run
as directed by the Architect .
B. All tests shall be scheduled at the convenience of
the Owner and the Architect and in no case shall be
scheduled without at least 48 hours written notice .
C. Conduct tests to verify all electrical equipment is
energized and operating properly . Wiring devices
and equipment not operating properly shall be promptly
replaced without cost to the Owner .
D. Pay all charges or fees including the cost of any
special test equipment, factory engineers , fuel , etc . ,
necessary for the proper performance of the tests .
16010-5
E . Load Balance Test
1 . Make tests by energizing all lighting , motors ,
and other electrical equipment simultaneously .
2 . Alter fuses , circuit breakers, circuit connections,
etc. , as required for satisfactory performance .
Take voltage and amperage readings at all panels .
Change lamps found to be of improper voltage
rating . Check the amperage draw and voltage
of each motor . Make all necessary changes to
obtain proper motor terminal voltage , motor pro-
tection , etc . Revise heater elements as necessary
for proper motor protection . Similarly check
all other electrically connected equipment .
F . Equipment Operation Test
1 . Show by demonstration In service that all circuits
are In good operating condition . Cycle all control
equipment under load .
G. Equipment and Apparatus Factory Tests
1 . Manufacturer ' s normal quality control tests are
acceptable , unless specific factory witnessed
tests are specified in other Sections .
1 . 10 IDENTIFICATION
A. Clearly and permanently label in a neat and orderly
manner all major items of equipment . Locate labels
for easiest reading .
B. Stencils : Machine cut , 1 " min . high block letters ,
with identifying mark used on riser diagrams . Paint
yellow enamel compatible with surface finish . Locate
on i nsi de face of doors for equipment in finished
areas , on outside face of equipment in unfinished
areas, mechanical or electrical rooms , or closets .
C. Directories : Use card provided by equipment manufacturer.
Typewrite identification of function and location
for each circuit using final room names and/or numbers
as selected by Owner . Permanently fasten in place
and protect behind glass or heavy gauge non-yellowing
plastic cover . Permanently label equipment to match .
16010-6
1 . 11 SUBMITTALS
A. All equipment and materials furnished and installed
by this Contractor shall be submitted for approval .
The Contractor shall furnish copies of all shop drawings ,
schedules and compiete descriptive and technical data
on all items .
B. The work described in any shop drawing submission
shall be carefully checked by this Contract for all
clearances , field conditions, maintenance of Architectural
conditions and proper coordination with all trades
of the Job . Each submitted shop drawing shall include
a certification by the Contractor that all related
conditions on the job have been checked and that no
conflict exists .
C . The approval of any submitted data or shop drawings
for materials, equipment, apparatus, devices, arrangements
and/or layouts shall not relieve the Contractor from
the responsibility of furnishing same of proper dimensions ,
capacities , sizes, quantity , quality and installations
details to efficiently perform the requirements and
intent of the Contract . Such approval shall not relieve
the Contractor from responsibiiity for errors of any
sort on the submittal data or shop drawings .
1 . 12 LOOSE EQUIPMENT
A. Upon completion of the work and before request for
final payment, deliver to the Owner ' s representative
the following :
1 . Keys for every different piece of electrical
equipment furnished under this Contract which
is equipped with a lock, except for key interlocks.
2 . All loose equipment specified /supplied for use
with the sound and communication systems .
1 . 13 OBSTACLES , INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION
A. Provide fittings , elbows, puliboxes , etc . , as required
to effect necessary changes in direction , offsets ,
transitions, etc .
B. Coordinate the work with the other trades, determining
exact routes and locations of raceways , equipment ,
etc . , prior to fabrication and installation . Install
16010-7
the work to permit removal of the parts of other trades
requiring periodic maintenance or replacement without
damage . Allow for proper operation of swinging or
overhead doors , access panels , control components ,
etc.
C. Maintain 70 -0" head room in mechanical and/or electrical
rooms . Should change in equipment , shop drawings ,
details , field conditions or architectural details
reuqire a significant rearrangement, notify the Architect
immediately and obtain approval prior to proceeding .
D. Prior to the start of construction , obtain from the
A r c h i t e c t the exact l o c a t i o n in f i n i s h e d areas of
outlets, devices, fixtures, exposed raceways, equipment,
etc . Review all drawings and , if necessary , obtain
copies of the shop drawings of the other Divisions
to coordinate the work .
E. Prior to roughing- in for equipment furnished by others,
obtain approved roughing- in drawings indicating exact
location of services for each item of equipment .
Relocation of any service incorrectly roughed- in shall
be without extra compensation.
1 . 14 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Furnish marked drawings showing the exact location
of all buried conduits , plus all changes from the
final contract drawings.
1 . 15 CLEANING
A. Prior to final acceptance, clean all fixtures, lenses,
panelboards, device plates, and special and communication
equipment . Remove all debris , surplus equipment ,
raceway , wire and cable , insulation , cartons , etc . ,
resulting from the work of this trade .
1 . 16 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish a written guarantee commencing on the date
of final acceptance, that any and all defects in material ,
operation and workmanship appearing within one ( 1 )
year shall be repaired or replaced without cost to
the Owner. Include all other work which may be damaged
during correction of defect. Guarantee shall be signed
by a properly authorized officer of the firm and notarized.-
Extend the period for equipment and systems where
longer guarantees are specified in other sections.
16010-8
1 . 17 INSTRUCTIONS AND SERVICE
A. Include in the bid , the cost of services of an authorized
representative of the manufacturer , to instruct the
Owner ' s representative in the proper operation of
each partial or complete system installed under Division
16 .
B. Upon completion of the work and before request for
final payment, deliver to the Architect for transmittal
to the Owner , the following clean , unused legible
material :
1 . One copy of each approved shop drawing , wiring
diagram, operating manual , maintenance manual ,
spare parts list, and fixture brochure.
2 . Detailed index of all material , indicating usage
in project , manufacturer ' s name and material ' s
identification.
1 . 1 8 PROJECT COMPLETION
A. At the time of request for final inspection , submit
the following material :
1 . Written statement from all special and communications
systems manufacturers, that all tests and inspections
required have been completed and approved .
2 . Guarantee in Triplicate.
3 . Certificate of Approval from the State Board
of Fire Underwriters , and / or local authority
having jurisdiction.
4 . Project Record Documents.
1 . 19 APPROVAL FOR OCCUPANCY
A. Prior to occupancy of the building , the area must
have a final inspection in regard to general construction,
mechanical construction , and electrical construction,
and the area approved for occupancy by the Architect .
Prior to approval , all work must be completed including
16010-9
all items of the general requirements . Division 16
shall be deemed to be delaying the Owner when the
Owner requests occupancy and the work is not in sufficient
compliance with the Contract requirements to warrant
approval for occupancy by the Architect .
END OF SECTION
16010-10
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
EABI_1___GEIIEBAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically and may be
modified to meet field conditions , but the general
arrangement shall be as shown .
B. Deviations from the arrangement shown must have the
approval of the Architect ' s field representative.
C. Become familiar with the general construction of the
building and place all sleeves , inserts , etc . , as
required . Support all conduits with suitable fixtures
and hangers .
D. All conduit shall be arranged in a neat manner for
access and allow for access to other work installed
by other trades .
E. All exposed conduit shall be installed parallel or
perpendicular to floors , walls and ceilings .
F. Concealed wiring methods shall be used wherever possible,
except in mechanical room, or as specifically indicated
on the drawings .
G. Clean all equipment before leaving the job .
H. Repair , refinish or touch up all damaged surfaces .
I . No materials except those specified shall be kept
on the project site .
END OF SECTION
16050-1
SECTION 16110
WIREWAY AND PLUG- IN STRIP
EARI_1_m_OERERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install plug - in strips , as shown on the
drawings .
B. Provide all fittings , receptacles , plates , adapters
and other accessories to make the system complete .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Square D, Wiremold
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . UL listing of all parts and accessories
C. Design Criteria
1 . Plug- in strip
a . A continuous outlet system , complete with
fittings .
b . Securely fastened in place with approved
anchors and attaching devices .
EARI_2___ERSIDUCIa
2 .01 PLUG- IN STRIP:
A . Two piece surface raceway , equipped with knockouts
for 1 /2 "conduit at approximately 8" centers and screw
knockouts / pi ercings on 2 " centers . Snap-on cover
with openings on 12" centers for single receptacle
with ivory face to match color of cover . Receptacles
arranged for two circuit ( alternate receptacles on
same circuit ) three-wire operation with base as ground
and prewired with #12 AWG TW insulated copper conductors .
16110-1
B. Provide a separately run # 12 AWG TW insulated copper
conductor bonded to each base section as ground bus .
C. Provide end caps for each section and the manufacturer 's
recommended feed-section for the arrangement required .
Provide additional fittings and blank cover as required
to accomplish the arrangement indicated on Plans .
E RI_L___FXEQUI1QM
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Support plug mold at 18 " centers maximum , at each
end , branch , and box . Make transition to other wiring
method with proper fittings .
END OF SECTION
16110-2
SECTION 16111
CONDUIT, RACEWAY AND TUBING
E RI_i=_SENERAL
1 .01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . All materials for and manufacturers of conduit,
raceways, and tubing shall be as specified and
listed herein or approved equal .
2 . Steel conduits shall be manufactured by Robroy
Republic, Wheatland , Triangle, or Allied .
3 . Electrical metallic tubing shall be manufactured
by Republic, Robroy, Wheatland , Allied or Trlangie.
4 . Non- metallic conduit shall be as manufactured
by Carton Products Corp. or National .
B. Design Criteria :
1 . All conduits, raceways, and tubing shall be :
a . Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting
or manufacture, and be bushed where necessary
or specified .
2 . Conduit shall be :
a. Minimum 1 /2"
b . Run with couplings approved for the conduit
being used. Running threads and close nipples
will not be accepted in runs of threaded
conduit.
3 . Exposed Conduit when shown or specified shall
be :
a . Securely attached with hangers , straps ,
clamps or screws as required by NED. Conduit
shall not be attached or supported by other
mechanical work wuch as ducts, piping, etc.
16111 -1
4 . Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be made
of steel or malleable iron , shall be "concrete
tight" or "raintight " , and shall be of type and
usage as follows :
a . For branch circuit wiring only , utilizing
a green ground conductor - set screw type ,
with connectors being nylon insulated .
b . For branch circuit wiring up to 1 " conduit
only, not utilizing a green ground conductor
- multi - point locking type , with connectors
being nylon insulated .
c . For branch circuit wiring over 1 " conduit
size only , and for all power distribution
conduits - threaded compression type , with
connectors being nylon insulated .
5 . Leave 1 / 16 " diameter nylon pullstring in all
empty conduits and raceways. The following conduit
material , for system raceways as herein indicated,
are acceptable :
a . Rigid Steel
b. Electric Metallic Tubing ( EMT)
c. Heavy Wall Non-metallic ( PVC)
6 . Rigid Conduit:
a . When used , shall be acceptable for exterior
and interior use.
b. When used , can be installed , embedded in
concrete, above ground, or, in direct contact
with the earth .
c. When installed embedded in concrete , or ,
in direct contact with the earth , these
conduits shall be hot dipped galvanized
after fabrication to include uniform zinc
coating , both inside and out , threaded ,
with gasketed fitting and "0" rings. Conduits
shall be below rough grade when installed
in concrete slabs on grade. Threads installed
below grade shall be painted for corrosion
16111 -2
res i stance , with two uniform coatings of
asphaltum ( including couplings ) water proofing
prior to installation . The steel conduit
and watertight wiring methods in this application
shall be continued to a point up the wall
above 31 or to equipment termination, whichever
is closer . After installation , touch up
coating around joints at coupling and cover
any areas where coating is damaged during
installation.
d . May be used for al I power , telephone and
fire alarm service entrances , from point
of service pick-up , to point of termination
inside the building .
e. May be used for al I power , signal and com-
munication raceway systems in the interior
of building.
f . Compliance : ANSI C80 . 1 , UL6 .
7;. Electric Metallic Tubing ( EMT)
a. When used , shall be acceptable only in the
interior of the building .
b. When used , can be installed aboveground ,
above ceilings, and in studded partitions .
c. May be used for all power , signal and com-
munication raceway systems .
d . Compliance : C80 .3 , UL797 ;.
8 . Heavy-Wall Non-metallic Conduit (PVC)
a. When used, can be installed in direct contact
with the earth .
b . When used in direct contact with the earth,
the elbows for vertical rise through the
ground shall be metallic.
c. May be used for all telephone and fire alarm
service entrances, from the point of service
pick-up , to the point of termination inside
the building.
16111-31
d . When used , shall be approved for the application
by the local authority having jurisdiction.
e . Schedule 40 Polyvinylchloride; NEMA designaiton
EPC-40_PVC; Compliance : NEMA TC-2 .
9 . Other Installation Requirements
a. All connections to movable or vibrating
equipment, kitchen equipment, and to equipment
outdoors or in damp locations , shall be
in flexible "sealtite" conduit. Final motor
connections in dry areas shall be made in
flexible metallic conduit.
b . For al I recessed fixtures not prewired ,
use junction box 12 " from openings with
4:' of 3/ 8" "Greenfield " with #12 Type THWN
wire from junction box to fixture.
c. Where flexible galvanized "Greenfield " is
used, .provide separate green ground conductors.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . Fittings for flexible metal conduit shall be
in accordance with Federal Specification WF406B.
2 . UL listing of all parts and accessories.
EARI_2_=_ERDDULIa
2 .01 . MATERIALS
A. Steel Conduits
1 . Hot Dipped Galvanized for Rigid.
2. Electro-Galvanized for EMT.
B. Flexible Conduits
1 . One continuous length of UL approved electro-
galvanized , spirally wound steel strip with inter-
locking convolutions, and interior surfaces free
from burrs and sharp edges.
16111 -4
C. Fittings
1 . Fittings for flexible metal conduit shall be
made of either steel or malleable iron only ,
shall have insulated throats , and shall be of
one of the following types :
a . Wedge and screw type having an angular wedge
fitting between the convolutions of the
conduit.
b . Squeeze-on clamp type having a bearing surface
contoured to wrap around the conduit , and
clamped by one or more screws.
c. Steel , multiple- point type , for threading
into internal wall of the conduit convolutions.
2 . Die Cast, zinc alloy fittings made of inferior
metals , such as "pot metal " , shall not be used
on any type of rigid or flexible conduit or EMT.
Compliance : ANSI-C80 .4 , UL 514 .
PBRI- -=-RXR�lhIW
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing ;
1 . Installed to provide adequate grounding between
all outlets and the established electrical system
ground .
2 . Installed to prevent water pockets.
3 . Minimum Spacing : 3 inches between raceways and
water or waste piping, and 6 inches between raceways
and steam or condensate Iines.
4 . Installed with not more than two 90 degree bends
or more than 1001 of straight conduit between
pull boxes . Factory made 90 degree elbows shall
be used in conduit 1 " or larger.
5 . Size as required by the National Electrical Code
with oversize conduits as indicated .
16111 -5
6 . Conceal in finished areas unless indicated otherwise.
When installed above lay- in type ceilings , do
not interfere with the " I i ft- out" feature of
the ceiling system. Route exposed in mechanical
and electrical equipment rooms and electrical
closets . Install exposed conduit and raceways
parallel or perpendicular to walls , ceilings ,
or structural members.
7 . Connections between rigid conduit and sheet steel
boxes and enclosures shall be made with bushings
and double lock-nuts . Bushings shall be screwed
up tightly against ends before locknuts are set
up .
8 . Conduits encased or buried shall be made watertight
with red lead or other approved compound applied
to conduit joints before assembled .
9 . Installed with condulets , unilets , or similar
approved fittings where direction changes and/ or
bends are not suitable.
B. Concealed Raceways
1 . Concrete slabs on grade
a . Excavate and install conduits a minimum
of 2" below the slab on grade.
2 . Brick or masonry walls
a . Make no horizontal runs . Install in voids
as wall is laid . Chases are not permitted .
C. Conduit Seals : Install water-tight seals at all conduits
passing through horizontal barriers. Sleeves extending
at least two inches above the finished floor with
1 /2 inch space around the conduit and this space sealed
permanently water- tight with a removable material
( concrete not acceptable) , or other methods , if given
prior approval .
D. Use rigid steel conduit as defined herein , unless
shown otherwise . Use rigid steel conduit in exposed
exterior locations, and all conduits stubbed-up through
the floor slab.
16111 -6
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing ( EMT ) may be used in lieu
of rigid steel conduit within the building or where
specifically indicated except its use is not permitted
by code or where rigid steel conduit is specifically
indicated .
F. Raceway Preparation : All conduits 1 " or larger, par-
ticularly underground conduits shall be cleaned and
dried out before installing wire or cables .
END OF SECTION
16111 -7
SECTION 16120
LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE
EARl_1__QEUEBAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Branch Wire and Cable ( 0-600 volt )
a . Shall be manufactured by Pirelli Cable Corp . ,
Simplex, Anaconda, Rome, Cerro, General Electric,
Okonite, Triangle , or approved equal .
2 . "AC" Cable
a . Shall be manufactured by Triangle , Cerro ,
General Electric, or approved equal .
B. Design Criteria
1 . Branch Wire and Cable ( 0-600 volt )
a . Shall be label led with UL approval , and
be marked with the size , type , and year
of manufacture . Wire and cable more than
1 year old at the time of installation will
not be accepted .
b . Shall have each reel or carton clearly labelled
with the month and year of manufacture .
Reels and cartons dated more than 1 yr . prior
to Contract award date are prohibited .
c . Shall be copper , heat and moisture resistant,
thermal plastic insulated , solid conductor
for all sizes # 10AWG or smaller and stranded
for all larger sizes . Smaller sizes than
# 12 AWG shall not be used for light and
power wiring .
d . Branded and labelled per NE Code requirements.
2 . "AC" Cable
a . Shall conform to Underwriters Laboratories
standard UL 83 for thermoplastic insulated
wire , with a temperature rating of 60C,
and a voltage rating of 600 .
16120-1
b . Shall be produced in accordance with Underwriters
standard UL -4 for armored cable and shall
bear UL labels .
c . Shall meet the NEC Standards for Type "AC"
metal clad cable , refer to Article 333 of
the National Electrical Code .
EARI_2_=_EROL1 I.
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Branch Wire and Cable
1 . Insulation Types shall be applied as follows :
a . Type TW or THWN - for general use - # 10
and smaller .
b . Type THW - for general use and panel feeders
- #8 and larger .
c . Type THHN - where required .
d . Special types - as shown or specified herein .
2 . Conductor Color Coding shall be as follows :
a . White - all neutral conductors and these only .
b . Green - all ground conductors and these only .
c . All other colors - all other wiring .
B. "AC" Cable
1 . Shall consist of 2 or 3 ( as required ) #12 insulated
solid copper conductors protected by a positive
Interlocked armor of galvanized steel .
2 . 2-conductor cable shall be color coded 1 conductor
"black" , and 1 conductor "white" .
3 . Three-Conductor cable shall be color coded 1 conductor
"black", 1 conductor "red " and 1 conductor "white" .
4 . Shall have conductors with a overall moisture and
fire resistant fibrous covering . The conductors
shall be twisted together . The cable shall have
an internal bonding strip of copper or aluminum in
Intimate contact with the armor for its entire length .
16120-2
5 . Shall have ready identification of the maker
by distinctive external markers in the cable
sheath throughout its entire length .
6 . Can be used only when approved by the local authority
having jurisdiction , only for concealed branch
ci rcuit wiring in spaces above ceilings and in
studded interior partitions.
7 . In general , can be used only for lighting and
convenience outlet wiring , and only for those
branches and areas which are not identified herein
as "exceptions. "
8 . The "exception" branches and areas where AC cable
is not acceptable for lighting and convenience
outlet wiring are as follows :
a . Where a separate green ground conductor is
indicated to be included as part of the wiring .
b. Mechanical room
EARI_a_z_EXECUI14LV
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. "AC" Cable
1 . May be used for branch circuits in ceiling spaces
and partitions, and shall be secured at intervals
not exceeding 4- 1 / 2 ' and within 12 " of every
outlet box or fitting, except where it is finished .
2 . At all terminations , a fitting shall be provided
to protect the conductors from abrasion. Approved
insulating bushing or equivalent protection shall
be provided between the conductors and the armor .
The connector or clamp by which the cable is
fastened to boxes or cabinets shall be of such
design that the insulating bushing or its equivalent
will be visible for inspection.
END OF SECTION
16120-3
SECTION 16125
WIRING METHODS
EARl_1___EaIERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Systems shall be properly grounded and continuously
polarized throughout following the color coding specified .
B. All feeder connections shall be made to bus or other
equipment using solderless connections of the compression
type . Other connections shall be soldered or made
with compression connectors .
C. In general , conductors shall be the same size from
the last protective device to the load .
D . Permanent wiring shall not be installed In conduits
buried In plaster or in poured concrete until the
encasing medium is set and dry and then only after
conduits have been swabbed out .
E. The use of lubricating materials to help install non-lead
conductors Is to be avoided . Where absolutely necessary,
Ideal -Aqua-Gel , Polywater , or Yellow 77 shall be used .
Any other lubricants shall be approved by the Architect
prior to use .
F. Non-metallic sheathed cable shall not be used unless
specifically shown or specified .
G. "AC" cable shall not be used unless specifically shown
or specified .
END OF SECTiON
16125-1
SECTION 16134
BOXES AND CABINETS
EARI_1_=_QEtERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements
1 . Furnish and install boxes to permit installation
of wiring and raceway systems , and to house wiring
devices .
Boxes shall include :
a . Outlet, switch and junction
b . Floor
c . Pull
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Outlet boxes and fixtures : Steel City, Appleton,
Raco , or approved equal .
2 . Floor boxes : O- Z , Hubbell , Thomas and Betts ,
Russell and Stoll , or approved equal .
EARI_Z_=_PRQQLWIE
2 .01 BOXES
A. General
1 . Fabricated from galvanized sheet steel or cadmium
plated pressed sheet steel , with device covers , ,
extension , etc. as required by the installation .
2 . Where exposed to moisture or weather , cadmium
cast alloy iron or malleable iron complete with
gasketed screw- fastened covers . Hinged covers
will not be accepted unless otherwise specified .
16134-1
B. Outlet and Junction Boxes shall be :
1 . 4 " square by 1 - 1 /2" depth minimum , without clamps
for either conduit or tubing .
2 . 4- 11 / 16 " square by 1 - 1 / 2" depth minimum , without
clamps for either conduit or tubing .
C . Switch Boxes shall be :
1 . Single gang - 2" wide by 4" long by 1 -1 /2" depth
minimum.
2 . Two gang - 4" square by 2-1 /8" deep .
3 . Multi -gang - 4- 1 / 2" high by 2-1 / 8" deep by width
as required by number of gangs . Complete with
partitions where required .
D . Floor Boxes shall be :
1 . For flush floor outlet , cast iron , 4" round ,
moisture and concrete tight, with exterior leveling
screws , fully adjustable top , bronze edge ring
and floor plate . Assembly carpet or tile plate
as required by outlet and floor construction .
2 . For floor junction , galvanized sheet steel , concrete
tight , bronze edge ring and floor plate , fuli
adjustable top . Assembly with carpet or tile
plate , as required by plate plug and floor con-
struction .
E . Pullboxes shall be :
1 . NEMA 1 , 3 , or 4 as required by area . Provide
partitions to separate multiple boxes at same
location . Minimum # 14 gauge . Construct from
galvanized sheet steel . Solder or braze ail
seams , roll edges at openings . Provide matching
cover . Finish box in primer for field painting .
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes
1 . Provide boxes where required for outlet facility .
Wherever possible and except where specifically
16134-2
noted "surface mounted" , make installation recessed.
Support securely from building construction ,
not from raceway . Where installed in exposed
block or structural glazed tile walls , locate
at center of block . Locate raceway as required
to meet block conditions , coordinate with the
work of other trades.
2 . Coordinate location of all ceiling boxes with
the work of other trades using same space . Close
off all un- used openings with proper fittings .
Maintain the accessibility of all boxes.
3 . Installed with no part visible when they are
specified concealed .
4 . Securely fastened in place using same types and
methods as for conduit. Wooden supports in other
than wood construction will not be permitted .
5 . Installed with plaster rings where required .
B. Floor Boxes shall be :
1 . Provided with floor extensions to suit requirements.
2 . Locate approximateiy at location indicated on
drawings , as approved by Architect . Carefully
level face of box to construction. Provide floor
extensions to suit requirements.
C. Pull Boxes :
1 . Installation in finished rooms is prohibited ,
except where specifically shown and noted on
drawings . All boxes are to be concealed and
accessible after completion of building. Support
independent of raceway. Use same types and methods
as for conduit. Support directly from building
construction . Close off all unused openings
with proper fittings .
2 . Install all outlet boxes snugly , rigidly , plumb ,
and level . Do not cut insulation in outside
walls to install outlet boxes. Do not use through-
the-wall boxes. Protect boxes during construction
to prevent entrance of foreign materials such
as concrete, mortar, plaster, paint, etc.
16134-3
3 . Install outlet boxes in glazed tile , brick , or
other masonry wall not covered by wood wainscot
or paneling with square cornered tile (or masonry )
extension rings of proper depth .
4 . Install outlet boxes in sheetrock walls with
square cornered tile ( or masonry ) rings of proper
depth . Standard drywall rings will not be
acceptable.
5 . Use above- floor service fittings with all floor
outlets unless floor outlets are specifically
noted flush . When floor outlets are noted "flush",
install device in floor box with flush floor
plate with screw-out removable discs .
6 . Size all boxes so they are completely covered
by the wall plate or fixture.
7 . Use galvanized steel boxes and fittings unless
indicated otherwise . Provide galvanized steel
outlet boxes and covers for surface mounted galvanized
steel boxes in unfinished areas .
8 . Use cast iron floor boxes in slab on grade , in
damp or wet locations , or as indicated on the
plans.
9 . Pull Boxes :
a . Installation in finished rooms is prohibited,
except where specifically shown and noted
on drawings . All boxes are to be concealed
and accessible after completion of building .
Support independent of raceway . Use same
types and methods as for conduit . Support
directly from building construction. Close
off all unused openings with proper fittings.
END OF SECTION
16134-4
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
EARI_1___EERERAL
1 . 01 REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish and install all labor , material and equipment
required to provide Wiring Devices governed by these
specifications , to be wired , connected and left in
first class operating condition .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Wiring device manufacturers and Catalog Nols. are
included herein.
2 . Those wiring devices not indicated herein, shall
be as specified on the drawings .
3 . Unless otherwise noted , or not manufactured ,
all wiring devices shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer .
B. Design Criteria
1 . Lighting Switches
a . Shall be heavy duty , premium specification
grade.
b . Shall be side and back wired, quiet action,
with captive mounting screws .
c. Shall be toggle styie.
d. Shall be ivory .
2 . Motor Starting Switches
a . Sha l i be single or double pole , with or
without pilots , with or without integral
thermai overload protection , surface or
flush, as shown in plan .
16140-1
b . Shall be furnished with melting alloy type,
integral , thermal overload protection for
single phase motors of 1 HP or less which
are not supplied with their own Integral
thermal overload protection.
c. Sha l l be togg I e type , with "quick make ,
quick break " mechanisms .
3 . Receptacles
a . Shall be specification grade as noted .
b . Shall be side and back wired , grounding
type , standard NEMA configured fabricated
of molded urea .
c. Shall be ivory .
4 . Cover Plates
a . Shall be smooth thermoplastic of matching
color to wiring device.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . Switches
a . Underwriter ' s Laboratories ( UL)
b . NEMA WD1 -3 Standards
c. Federal Specification W-S-896E
2 . Receptacles
a . Underwriter ' s Laboratories ( UL)
b . NEMA WD1 -4 Standards
c. Federal Specification W-C-596E
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 16010 - General Provisions
B. Samples
1 . WiII be required , of manufacturers not listed
herein who intend to supply wiring devices , as
part of submittal for evaluation . Furnish one
of each type to be installed .
16140-2
1?LBI_z_m_E QQucI�
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Lighting Switches - Toggle Handle Type
1 . 20 amp . 120-277 volt. Specification Grade
a . Single Pole
Bryant - 4901 Series
Hubbell - 1221 Series
Leviton - 1221 Series
Pass and Seymour - 20AC1 Series
b. Three-Way
Bryant - 4903 series
Hubbell - 1223 series
Leviton - 1223 series
Pass and Seymour - 20AC3 series
c. Four-Way
Bryant - 4904 series
Hubbell - 1224 series
Leviton - 1224 series
Pass and Seymour - 20AC4 series
B. Motor Starting Switches
1 . Single pole , toggle type , with thermal overload
protection
a . With pilot in surface NEMA1 enclosure
Allen-Bradley 600-TAX216
Square D - FG-1P
b . With pilot for installation in recessed
box with flush cover
Allen-Bradley - 600-TKX216
Square D - FF-1P
C. Duplex Receptacles - Specification Grade
1 . 15 amp. , 125 volt, heavy duty, premium specification
grade, grounding type, straight blade, NEMA 5-15R-
Standard face .
16140-3
Bryant - 5262 Series
Hubbell - 5262 series
Leviton - 5262 series
Pass and Seymour - 5262 series
D. Miscellaneous Receptacles
1 . Electric range receptacle - 50 amp , 250 volt ,
3 pole, 3 wire, heavy duty , straight blade, NEMA
10-50R
Bryant - 3826
Hubbell - 7940
Leviton - 5050
Pass and Seymour - 3856
For Flush Installation with Stainless Steel Cover
Bryant - 9306 and 9301 /2
Hubbell - 7962 and 9350 series
Leviton - 5206 and 84026
Pass and Seymour - 3855 and 3852
2 . Electric Dryer Receptacles - 30 amp, 125/ 250
volt, heavy duty specification grade, grounding
straight blade type , NEMA 14-30 complete with
matching plug. For flush installation with stainless
steel cover .
Bryant - 9430- FR with 9432-ANP plug or 5715-D
cordset
Hubbell - 9430 with 9432 plug
Leviton - 278 with 275 plug or 5434-6ft. cordset
Pass and Seymour - 5744 with 5746-AN plug
3 . Clock Hanger Type Receptacle - 15 amp, 125 volt,
specification grade, grounding straight blade
type, NEMA 5-15R
Bryant - 2828-GS
Hubbell - 5235
Leviton - 5261 -CH
Pass and Seymour - 2122 series
16140-4
4 . Isolated ground duplex receptacle - 15 amp, 125
volt, heavy duty , premium specification grade ,
isolated ground type , straight blade , NEMA 5- 15R
standard face .
Bryant - 5262- IG
Hubbell - 5262- IG
Leviton - 5262- IG
Pass and Seymour - 5262- IG
E. Time Switches
1 . Time switches shall be enclosed indoor/ outdoor
type, NEMA 3 case , with 7 - day calendar dial ,
four on/ off operations per day ( 28 trippers ) ,
spring wound carryover for power outages, 4 PST-4N0,
40 ampere , 120 volt swtich contacts , Paragon
7000 Series or approved equal .
2 . Time switches required are TS1 and TS2 .
EARI_ _-_EXECUI14N
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1 . Refer to Symbol Legend for mounting heights of
devices. Unless otherwise noted , mounting heights
indicated are to the center of device . Mounting
heights not listed herein or on the drawings ,
shall be obtained from the Architect .
2 . Unless specifically noted, all wall mounted wiring
devices shall be mounted vertically.
3. Lighting switches shall be installed so the upper
position of switch handles shall be the " ON "
position .
4 . Unless otherwise noted or shown , switches and
dimmers shall be located on the strike , knob ,
handle or push side of all doors , and shall be
48" above finished floor ( AFF ) and not less than
4 " or more than 18" horizontally from the door
jamb.
16140-5
5 . Unless otherwise noted or shown , duplex convenience
receptacles shall be installed 18" AFF.
6 . Unless otherwise noted, duplex receptacles mounted
18" AFF shall be installed vertically with grounding
pole up . Duplex receptacles mounted 31 -6 " AFF
or above shall be installed vertically with grounding
pole down.
7 . Un l ess otherwise noted or shown , receptacles
designated as over counter sh a l l be located with
1 " clearance above the backsplash . This location
shall be approved by the Architect prior to instal -
lation .
8 . Devices designated as weatherproof ( by suffix
WP) shall be corrosion resistant type and where
shown outdoors shall be installed in heavy duty
die cast aluminum boxes with lockable weatherproof
covers . Where shown Indoors may be installed
in standard outlet boxes with weatherproof covers .
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
16140-6
SECTION 16160
PANELBOARDS
EARI_1__aERERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A . Related Work Specified Elsewhere :
1 . Section 16182 - Circuit Breakers
B. Requirements
1 . The secondary distribution as described herein
Includes low voltage ( 600 volts or less ) power
and lighting panelboards .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Westinghouse, General Electric,
Square-D .
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . NEMA AB- 1 - Panelboards
2 . UL listing where applicable
1 . 03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Space" means complete provision for future installation
of branch or feeder device , including mounting provision
and bus ties .
B . "Spare" means completely installed branch or feeder
device for future use .
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A . Shop drawings required for all items listed in Part 2 ,
and shall Include single line diagram and complete
Bill of Material .
B. Provide maintenance and operating instructions .
16160-1
eaaz_Z___eaQQQQZ�
2 . 01 GENERAL
A. All panelboards shall be of the same manufacture .
B. All circuit protective devices shall be of the same
manufacture .
2 .02 PANELBOARDS
A. Panels shall be shown on the single line diagrams
and panel schedules .
B. Each panel shall be furnished with the proper voltage
rating , bus ampere rating , current withstand rating
and circuit breaker or fuse interrupter rating as
indicated or implied . Minimum interrupting rating
shall be 10 ,000 amps RMS symmetrical . Bus bars shall
be copper or tin plated aluminum . Provide copper
ground bars within the enclosure where so indicated ,
with lugs for ground wires .
C. Lighting panelboards may have plug - in type breakers
wherever the use of such breakers is feasible . All
other panels shall have bolt- in type breakers .
D . For panels specified with main breaker shunt trip
device , the main breaker shall be equipped with a
120 volt shunt trip coil and a 120 volt power supply
connection from the main bus . Provide fuse protected
control power transformer as required . Provide terminals
for the shunt trip connection to remote pushbutton
station (s ) .
E. The panel board assembly shall be factory assembled
and be enclosed in a code gauge galvanized steel cabinet
with flush or surface ( as indicated in the schedule )
trim and ample wiring gutters on top , sides and bottom.
F . Each panel shall be identified with is nomenclature
by means of an engraved white background , black lettered
adhesive backed nameplate over the panel door .
G. Special requirements are indicated on the panel schedule.
H . Front trims , for flush and surface mounted panels ,
shall have concealed trim fasteners , door with concealed
hinges and flush lock . All panels shall be keyed
alike .
16160-2
I . Each Panel Shall :
1 . Be provided with mill ring catch and lock and
two keys . Keys shall be identical for all new
panels .
2 . Be provided with a complete glass or plastic
protected directory of all circuits .
EA@I_�_=_EXEQl�IJ QC1
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate panelboards such that the highest toggle handle
is no more than 56" above finished floor at location
shown , unless otherwise indicated . Align top and
bottom edges parallel to finished floor .
B. For each flush mounted lighting panel ( designated )
stub one 1 " conduit for each 3 ( or part thereof left )
spare breaker poles or spaces to the nearest accessible
ceiling space, unless otherwise specified .
3 .02 WIRE CONNECTIONS
A. Circuit numbers on drawings do not necessarily correspond
to the numbers of the lighting panels . Circuits sharing
a common neutral shall not be connected to the same
main . Panel circuit breakers which are used directly
for the switching of lighting fixtures shall be grouped
in consecutive numbers commencing at breaker # 1 .
Provide separate neutrals for each ground fault type
breaker .
B. Lighting panels shall have all circuits and feeders
properly balanced when the installation is complete .
3 .03 LOOSE EQUIPMENT
A. For lighting panels , provide one handle lock for each
six breakers .
END OF SECTION
16160-3
SECTION 16180
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
LARI_1=_QLRLRAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere :
1 . Section 16181 - Fuses
B. Requirements
1 . Individually mounted disconnect switches for
protection of feeders and branch circuits
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers - Westinghouse, General Electric,
Square D, and Federal Pacific.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . Compliance with the following nationally recognized
standards :
a . NEMA KS- 1 - Enclosed Switches
b. Federal Specification WS-865C.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1 . Include evidence of UL I isti ng for each assembly
with shop drawings .
EARI_2_=_LRQf!lLI..
2 .01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. General
1 . Switches shall be three- pole , three- pole double
throw or six- pole heavy duty industrial type
rated for the voltage at which they are applied .
Provide a solid neutral bar for switches in 4-wire
circuits.
16180-1
2 . All switches shall have switch blades which are
fully visible in the "off " position , when the
door is open .
3 . Switches shall have a quick make and quick break
operating feature and mechanism, and shall produce
a true interlock to prevent opening the switch
cabinet while the switch handle is in the " on "
position . The switch handle shall have provision
for three padlocks.
4 . Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and/or aluminum
cables and front removable . Set screw type lugs
are not acceptable for use with aluminum cables.
5 . Switches shall be fusible or non-fusible as indicated
on the Drawings.
6 . For fused switches , the fuses shall be cartridge
type , as specified elsewhere . The fuse sizes
shall be as indicated on the Drawings .
7 . Each disconnect switch enclosure shall be equipped
with a ground wire lug of suitable size brazed
to the enclosure . Unless otherwise specified ,
the neutral bar ( if required ) shall be ungrounded .
S . Enclosures shall be suitable for the wiring methods
of the area involved . Outside switches shall
have NEMA 3 enclosures.
EARI_.___EXE��lIJ N
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install individually mounted and enclosed, and fused/-
unfused safety switches at approximate location indicated
on Drawings and in a readily accessible location with
proper work space per N . E . C. Locate top of box at
approximately 60" above finished floor unless otherwise
noted . Arrangements resulting in top of handle at
or above 61 -5 " AF are prohibited . Provide enclosures
as appropriate for the location . Provide structural
supports independent of stud partitions . Provide
structural channel supports on masonry construction
maintaining air space from wall /structure where exposed
to moisture.
END OF SECTION
16180-2
SECTION 16181
FUSES
EAaI_1___GEi1ERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1 . Section 16180 - Disconnect Switches
B. Requirements
1 . Low voltage fuses : 600 volts and less , for use
with switches .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Low voltage fuses : Bussmann , Gould Shawmut ,
Economy .
2 .01 GENERAL
A. Fuses shall be rated for the voltage at which they
are applied .
B. Fuses shall be dual element where required to allow
for initial surges (motor starting , etc . ) yet provide
long-time protection at the level for which they are
rated .
C. Fuses shall have minimum interrupting ratings required
for the location where they are applied .
2 . 02 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
A. Cartridge type , non-renewable , 250 or 600 volt class
as required by circuit voltage , Class H, 10 , 000 amp
i . c. Bussmann Type NON or NOS .
END OF SECTION
16181 -1
SECTION 16182
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
EARI_1_m_EERERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere :
1 . Section 16160 - Panelboards
B. Requirements
1 . Circuit breakers for protection of feeders and
branch circuits both individually mounted and
assembled in equipment assemblies.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers - Westinghouse, General Electric
and Square-D .
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . Compliance with the following nationally recognized
standards :
a . NEMA AB- 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers .
b . Federal Specification - WC-375A.
2 . Federal Specifications - WC-375B - Molded Case
Circuit Breakers .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1 . Include evidence of UL listing for each assembly
with shop drawings .
1 .04 USE
A. The application of products specified in this section
is covered in Section 16160 . These requirements are
in addition to the requirements of this section .
16182-1
EARI-Z _ERQDUQI.
2 . 01 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS :
A. General
1 . All breakers shall :
a . Have an inverse time delay thermal magnetic
e lement and an instantaneous magnetic trip
e lement , In each phase , set to operate at
7 to 10 times the long time trip setting .
b . Be trip - free and meet UL requirements for
noninterchangeabiiity of ratings .
c . Be provided with common trip feature for
multipoie breakers . No single pole breaker
w ith handle ties will be accepted . All
poles shall be mechanically interlocked
to cause operation of all poles by any single
pole unit. Tripped units to be self indicating
by distinctive handle position .
d . Have terminal lugs suitable and UL listed
for the type of cable they feed . Set screw
type terminals ( where the screw touches
the conductor ) are not acceptable for use
w ith aluminum cables .
e . Have quick -make , quick-break over center
switching mechanism . Automatically tripped
units shall be self- indicating by a distinctive
handle position .
f . Have current rating label visible when breaker
is installed .
g . Frame size , continuous current rating of
trip unit symmetricaly short circuit current
rating , poles , voltage rating , cable size,
and accessories are scheduled on Drawings .
B . Breakers for Lighting Panels shall :
1 . Thermal magnetic bolt- in type or plug- in type
similar to Westinghouse Quicklag .
2 . Have the proper voltage rating for the application.
3 . Have trip settings as shown .
16182-2
4 . Have interrupting ratings as indicated . Minimum
shall be :
a . 120-208-240 volts : 10 ,000 amps RMS symm .
5 . Have ground fault trips where indicated ( CFI ) .
C. Breakers for power panels shall be one of the following
categories as indicated :
1 . Standard Frame Industrial
2 .02 SEPARATELY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Breakers shall be in an enclosure type to suit the
wiring methods used in the areas involved . Outside
moutned enclosed circuit breakers shall have NEMA
4 enclosures .
B. Breakers shall be of the amperage rating shown on
the drawings with number of poles to suit the load
being fed or controlled .
C. Breaker interrupting rating shall conform to the require-
ments for molded cage circuit breakers in panelboards .
Voltage ratings shall suit the requirements of the
circuit involved .
D. Each breaker enclosure shall be equipped with a ground
wire lug of suitable size brazed to the enclosure .
Unless otherwise specified , the neutral bar ( if required)
shall be ungrounded .
E. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be equipped with auxiliary
controls , low voltqage releases , shunt trips , pilot
lights , etc . , as required to suit details and diagrams
on the plans .
EARI_I___EXEQIIIlat
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual circuit breakers in assemblies
as indicated , or individuaily mounted and enclosed
at approximate location indicated on drawings in a
readily accessible location with proper work space
per NE Code . Locate top of box at approximately 60"
above finished floor unless otherwise noted . Arrangements
16182-3
resulting in top of handle at or above 61 - 5 " AF are
prohibited . Provide enclosures as appropriate for
the location . Provide structural supports independent
of stud partitions . Provide structural channel supports
on masonry construction maintaining air space from
wall /structure where exposed to moisture .
END OF SECTION
16182-4
SECTION 16402
OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE
FARZ_l_=_aEMERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. General
1 . All work in connection with Electrical Service
for this project shat I be accomplished in accordance
with these Specifications and the requirements
of the Electrical Utility Company .
2 . The building electrical service shall be secondary,
120/240 volts , single phase , 3r-wire , 60Hz from
transformers as provided by the Electric Utility
Company .
3 . The Electric Utility Company will provide the
new secondary terminal pole and aerial lines
and the Electrical Contractor shall provide the
underground secondary cables. Leave 20 / of slack
cable at the pole ends.
4 . The Electric Utility Company will terminate the
secondary cables at the pole end. The electrical
contractor sha l l terminate the secondary cables
at the power panel end.
B. Secondary Service Conduits
1 . All service conduits below grade between the
secondary terminal pole and distribution shaii
be Schedule 40 , heavy wall PVC as shown on the
Plans. Conduits shall be installed 30 " minimum
below grade . At both ends of all conduits, furnish
rigid galvanized steel manufactured conduit sweep
elbows and straight lengths. The active conduits
shall be terminated in bushings at both ends.
C. Metering
1 . Metering shall be secondary with current and
potential transformer located in an outdoor pedestal
mounted meter cabinet.
16402-1
2 . The Contractor shall furnish and install the
pedestal and necessary meter cabinet as required
by the Electric Utility Company . The location
shall be as shown on the plans .
3 . All metering wiring shall be done by the Electric
Utility Company.
D. Grounding
1 . Service grounding shall be through the use of
bare stranded copper conductors , in sizes as
shown on the Drawings , installed in non-metallic
conduit. Ground connections shall be made to
the incoming water service on the street side
of the water meter ( If applicable ) or to the
water service at the point of entry through the
building wall . If there is no municipal water
service or the well service is installed using
non-metallic pipe , the Contractor shall install
sufficient ground rods according to the NEC for
service grounding.
2 . Connect ground to water service or ground rods
with approved grounding clamps .
3 . The Contractor shall ground conduits and cabinet
as specified by the Electric Utility Company
and as shown on the drawings .
END OF SECTION
16402-2
SECTION 16451
BUILDING GROUNDING
PARI_1-_GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1 . Section 16601 - Lightning Protection
B. Requirements
1 . Provide Neutral and Equipment Grounding
2 . Provide Building Grounding
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Ground-Rods - Copperweld
2 . Molded Fusion Welding Process - Cadweld
3 . Pipe Clamps - Thomas and Betts, Burndy
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . Lightning Protection Code - NFPA 78
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1 . Required for all materials
PARI_Z__MAIEB.ALS.
2 .01 GROUNDING MATERIALS
A. Ground-Rods - 3/ 4" diameter, 10 ' long
B. Ground Conductor - Size as per NEC requirements, bare
stranded , soft drawn or soft annealed, copper wire.
16451 -1
C. Joints and Connections - Molded fusion welding process
using proper mold and the number, size and type cartridge
for the joint or connection . Waterpipe connection,
silicon bronze approved mechanical connector designed
for the pipe and cable to be bonded .
EARI_L___EXEQUI14N
3 .01 GENERAL
A. All equipment , whether furnished by this Division
or by others, shall be grounded .
B. Provide building grounding as indicated .
C. Provide ground connection for electric service .
D. Provide ground connection for telephone service .
E. All secondary neutrals shall be grounded to an approved
cold water pipe.
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A. If rock prevents installation of ground rods, notify
Architect in writing.
B . Make fusion welds in strict accordance with supplier ' s
instructions. Clamp calbes securely in place, independent
of mold . Clean and inspect all welds. Provide corrosion
protection in acid soils.
C. All connections below grade shall be made with non-
mechanical means.
D. At least one connection shall be made between the
building ground , the electrical service ground for
the building, and a cold water pipe ground .
E. Drive the ground rods to a minimum depth of ten feet,
or more if necessary to reach permanent moisture .
Ground rods shall be driven at least two feet away
from building structure.
END OF SECTION
16451 -2
SECTION 16501
LAMPS
EARI_i_=_GE ERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1 . All sections in this Division applicable to ballasts
and accessories , and light fixtures .
B. Requirements
1 . Furnish required lamps for all light fixtures
specified to provide for artificial illumination
of the project .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Incandescent , Tungsten Halogen , Fluorescent ,
and High Intensity Discharge - General Electric ,
Sylvania .
1 . 03 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All Lamps shall be :
1 . New with a maximum of 10% of rated hrs . of usage
prior to acceptance of the installation .
2 . Free from product imperfections and handling .
3 . Any lamp whose color, in the opinion of the Architect,
is determined to be unsatisfactory , shall be
replaced at no additional expense to the Owner .
B. Incandescent Lamps Shall :
1 . Be rated for 130 volts and of wattage as indicated.
2 . Have medium base, for rough and extended service ,
inside frosted , unless specifically indicated
otherwise .
3 . For 300 watts and larger, use mogul base .
16501 -1
C. Fluorescent Lamps shall :
1 . Be of wattage and voltage as indicated .
D . High Intensity Discharge ( HID ) and Tungsten Halogen
Lamps Shall :
1 . Have shape and base configuration as required
by light fixture .
2 . Have burning position as required by light fixture.
3 . Be of wattage and voltage as indicated .
EARI_2_=_EROD_LQI.
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Incandescent
1 . Provide A, R, PS , PAR , and other special lamps
as indicated, or , as required by the light fixture .
B. Fluorescent
1 . Lamps 24" nominal length shall be :
a . Preheat type ( for use with starters ) .
b . 20 nominal watts .
c . T-12 medium bipin .
d . Warm white .
e . Average rated life of 9,000 hrs .
f . Approximate initial lumens of 1 , 250 .
2 . Lamps 48" nominal length shall be :
a . Rapid start type.
b . 34 nominal watts, energy efficient type .
c . T-12 medium bipin .
d . Lite-white .
16501 -2
e . Average rated life of 20 ,000 hrs .
f . Approximate initial lumens of 3 ,050 .
C. High Intensity Discharge and Quartzline
1 . Metal halide shall be :
a . Clear or inside phosphor coated , as required
by light fixture.
b . Standard type, when used in a lensed enclosed
or safety shielded light fixture .
c . Self - extinguishing type , ( if available )
when used in any open light fixture .
EA RI_ ___EXEQUItat
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install quantity , type , wattage and color lamp ( s ) ,
as Indicated for each light fixture .
B. Replace all lamps which are found to have failed during
an inspection of all installed light fixtures . Make
Inspection six ( 6 ) months after acceptance of the
installation .
END OF SECTION
16501 -3
SECTION 16502
BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES
eeaz_i___�ENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1 . All sections in this Division applicable to lamps
and light fixtures .
B. Requirements
1 . Furnish required ballasts and accessories for
all light fixtures specified to provide for artificial
illumination of the project .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Advance , General Electric, Universal , Jefferson
B. Design Criteria
1 . All ballasts shall be :
a . New , with a maximum of 360 hrs . of usage
prior to acceptance of the installation .
b . Be of voltage specified and as indicated .
c. Be high power factor type .
d . When considered by the Architect to have
objectionable hum or noise , be replaced
by this Contractor , at his expense , prior
to acceptance.
2 . Fluorescent Ballasts Shall :
a . Be Class "P" with automatic resetting integral
thermal protection , or , in- line type fuse
holder . Fuse shall be in fixture raceway ,
of size and type recommended by manufacturer.
b. Be series sequence type .
16502-1
c . Be for use with single or two lamps , or
multiples of two lamps. Three lamp ballasts
shall not be used, unless specifically indicated.
d . When used with light fixtures in the interior
of the building , be used for all ambient
temperatures of 60 degrees F. , or above.
3 . High Intensity Discharge ( HID) Ballasts Shall :
a . Be constant wattage auto-transformer , or
constant wattage , encapsulated core and
coil , encapsulated capacitor , cast aluminum
finned housing type , with integral over
voltage protection.
b. Be individually fused to isolate any single
ballast failure, and permit continued operation
of the circuit.
c. Be for interior and exterior use , for all
ambient temperatures above or below 60 degrees
F.
d . Where scheduled, be equipped with an emergency
( instant on ) auxiliary circuit , containing
Integral relays , and control circuitry for
auxiliary quartz lamp socket , which will
energize the instant the main lamp drops
out. The auxiliary quartz lamp shall remain
energized until the main lamp has reached
40 percent of light output.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . CBM certified by independent testing laboratory .
2 . Component parts shall be designed , fabricated
and assembled in accordance with the latest require-
ments of NEMA-3 .
1 .03 Guarantee
A. One year after final acceptance of project for lamps
and ballasts, include labor and materials.
16502-2
EARI_Z___ERDQUCI5
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Fluorescent Ballasts Shall :
1 . For lamps less than 14 watts , be preheat type ,
Class "A" sound rated.
2 . For lamps 14 to 20 watts , be trigger start type,
Class "A" sound rated .
3 . For lamps 30 to 250 watts, be rapid start, super
premium, low loss energy saving type, with the
following sound ratings :
a . 430MA, Class "A" .
PARI_�___EXEduI14N
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install ballasts for all specified light
fixtures .
B. Fluorescent Ballasts Shall :
1 . Be secured with minimum of 1 bolt per end . Bolt
shall be the captive type.
2 . Be mounted on rubber- in-shear vibration isolators,
rigidly supported from light fixture mounting
frame .
END OF SECTION
16502-3
SECTION 16504
DIFFUSERS
EABI_1___GENEBAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1 . All sections in this Division applicable to Iight
fixtures.
B. Requirements
1 . Furnish required diffusers for all light fixtures
specified to provide for artificial illumination
of the project .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers :
1 . Lenses - KSH, Carolite.
1 .03 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All lenses shall be :
1 . Extruded 100 percent virgin acrylic material .
EABI_2___PBQLUCIa
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Lenses
1 . Type 12 - Clear material with 0 . 187" O . A. thickness
with 0 .080" penetration comprised of 3/ 16 " square
based female cones aligned 45 degrees to the
length and width of the panel , KSH K-12 or Carol ite
C-12 .
16504-1
EARI_3._m_EHGUI1Qt1
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install quantity and type as indicated for each light
fixture .
B . Replace all diffusers which are found to be damaged
or discolored during an inspection of all installed
diffusers . Make inspection six (6) months after acceptance
of the installation .
END OF SECTION
16504-2
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
EARI_1_=_LENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere :
1 . Section 16501 - Lamps
2 . Section 16502 - Ballasts and Accessories
3 . Section 16504 - Diffusers
4 . Section 16511 - Fluorescent Fixtures
5 . Section 16512 - Incandescent Fixtures
6 . Section 16513 - High Intensity Discharge Fixtures
B. Requirements :
1 . Furnish all interior lighting fixtures, supports,
hardware, wiring, lamps and accessories to provide
artificial illumination of interior of project .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Refer to applicable sections in this division
of the specification.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1 . UL listing on all fixtures and components.
2 . Wiring and Installation Methods - National Electric
Code and NFPA 70 .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Samples
16510-1
1 . For fixture types indicated on the drawings ,
samples are not required unless specifically
requested by the Architect . Samples will be
returned to the contractor after evaluation ,
and if approved may be installed as permanent
fixtures in specified locations.
2 . Furnish for each substituted Iight fixture, one
( 1 ) sample of the substituted light fixture type
together with one ( 1 ) sample of the specified
light fixture type, to the Architect for review ,
evaluation and approval prior to submission of
the shop drawing.
3 . Submit color or finish chip samples ( 6 square
inch per chip minimum) for each fixture color
or finish as directed by the Architect .
B. Shop Drawings
1 . Light fixture shop drawings shall consist of
complete detailed construction drawings of each
light fixture to be furnished , in addition to
standard "cut" sheets. This data shall be accompanied
by photometric data for the specified fixture ,
lamp and ballast, in accordance with the latest
IES Standards . The submittal shall be made as
one complete brochure . Bind the submittal in
a soft cover binder with each fixture separated
by an identification index tab . Provide an index
in the front of the brochure indicating fixture
type, manufacturer and catalog number. The minimum
information required is as follows :
a . Manufacturer
b . Catalog number
c. Photometrics
d. Lens/ louver type
e. Ballast type
f . Lamp socket type
2 . Shop drawings are required for all fixture types
and variations.
16510-2
1 . 04 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Storage
1 . Store only in a secure , dry , heated location
protected from dust , dirt and moisture , in the
original cartons.
B. Handling
1 . Handle only with proper equipment. Do not drop,
crush or deform . Immediately reject and remove
from project any cartons or fixtures damaged
by handling or carelessness.
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Ver i f y with the ce i I i ng supplier and installer as
to the type and design of ceilings to be installed
in each area . Supply light fixtures with proper fixture
trims to coordinate with the ceiling materials in
each area .
1 . 06 GUARANTEE
A. One year after final acceptance of project, for fixtures,
lamps , bal lasts and diffusers, including labor and
materials.
ELRI_Z_=_EELQU IL
2 .01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION :
A. Refer to light fixture schedule and applicable sections
in this Division of the specification.
ELRI_a_=_EXEQUI1DE
3 . 01 PREPARATION :
A. Field Measurements
1 . Verify applicable dimensions and clearances from
approved shop drawings . Notify the Architect
promptly of conflicts or interferences.
16510-3
2 . Verify the ceiling to be installed in each area
and provide fixtures of suitable construction
for installation of same .
B. Finishes
1 . Finishes not indicated as part of the light fixture
schedule or in applicable divisions of this speci -
fication shall be furnished on application to
the Architect and prior to ordering the light
fixtures.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION :
A. General
1 . Make installation such that the fixture is free
of finger marks, flaws, scratchs , dents or other
imperfections. Provide special means for supporting
fixtures where specified in fixture schedule ,
as indicated on drawings , or as required or recom-
mended by fixture manufacturer . All fixtures
in one room are one fixture type, unless otherwise
labeled .
B. Arrangement
1 . Generally align edges of fixtures with walls
or other building elements . Where indicated
by dimensions or noted on plans, maintain indicated
arrangement.
2 . Make installation in accordance with approved
reflected ceiling drawing or the approved Architect' s
reflected ceiling plan. Otherwise, evenly proportion
in room except where adjustment is necessary
to conform to ceiling pattern.
C. Mounting Heights
1 . Heights of fixtures not scheduled or noted shall
be furnished on application to the Architect .
D. Ceiling Mounting
1 . Mount surface fixtures tight to surface without
distorting it . Space fixtures in continuous
rows to correspond to ceiling joint intersections,
continuous row fixtures may be fed by a single
16510-4
outlet where fixtures contain approved wireways
and suitable wiring is used . Provide hangers
for each fixture , each rated to support four
times the fixture weight . Provide offset or
trapeze hangers where required as for stem fixtures.
Supports shall be provided on a maximum of 41 -0 "
centers with a minimum of two ( 2 ) hangers per
individual four ( 4) foot light fixture and three
( 3 ) hangers per individual eight ( 8 ) foot light
fixture . Hangers shall be supported from the
building structure and independently from ceiling
system or other building services .
E . Recessed Mounting
1 . Verify ceiling construction and material prior
to ordering light fixtures . Provide plaster
frames for plaster ceilings . Coordinate fixture
locations with ceiling supplier and installer .
Cooperate with the ceiling installer . Provide
necessary mounting hardware and accessories to
adapt fixture to ceiling construction. Provide
gaskets , trims , flanges , etc . as required to
prevent Iight leaks around trim. Where installing
" lay- in" type fixtures , provide supports at all
four ( 4) corners of the fixture where said supports
are not provided by the ceiling installer.
F. Wall Mounting
1 . Mounting shall be similar to ceiling fixtures
except fixture supports shall be braced to sustain
a vertical or horizontal load of 250 pounds minimum.
G. Exterior Mounting
1 . Building mounted fixtures shall have their bases
aligned with doors , windows , or other building
elements.
2 . Install bases and brackets tight to the mounting
surface with gaskets to exclude moisture . The
mounting must sustain a vertical or horizontal
load of 200 lbs . minimum.
16510-5
3 .03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace with new all broken , scratched ,
or mared glassware, or plastic before final acceptance
at no additional expense to Owner .
B. Remove and replace all damaged fixtures before f i na l
acceptance at no additional expense to Owner.
C. No allowance will be made for breakage or theft before
final acceptance .
D. Immediately prior to occupancy , clean all diffusers,
glassware, fixture trims , reflectors, lamps and replace
burned out lamps.
END OF SECTION
16510-6
SECTION 16511
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
EARI_1_=_LEfEEAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Related work specified elsewhere.
1 . Section 16501 - Lamps
2 . Section 16502 - Ballasts and Accessories
3 . Section 16504 - Diffusers
4 . Section 16510 - Interior and Exterior Building
Lighting.
PLRI_2___PHIALCIL
2 .01 GENERAL :
A. Refer to Iight fixture schedule and applicable secTions
in this division of the specification.
2 .02 EQUIPMENT:
A. The following schedule tabulates the light fixtures
by type , description, and manufacturer :
Iype Da5crIPt14B
Fl Surface rectilinear shaped luminaire for individual
or in continuous row mounting 12- inch by 48- inch ,
2 lamp, 120 volt. Housing shall be rigid, re- inforced
20-gauge steel , phosphatized , finished in white
acrylic baked enamel . Lens shall be acrylic ,
injection molded, prismatic, minimum . 187 thickness,
with prismed side and end panels. Lens enclosure
shall be hinged with concealed torison springs
and latches.
Manufacturer : Keene Celebrity/ SU
Guth Aristolite
Lithonia Acme/AW
Approved Equal
16511 -1
l eg Dg_acEipfl4_n
F2 Surface corner mounted maximum security fixture,
nominally 49- inch , 2- lamp , 120 volt . Housing
shall be unitized 14-gauge seam- welded steel ,
piano hinged, baked white enamel . Diffuser shall
be 1 / 4 - inch clear polycarbonate with 1 / 8- inch
prismatic acrylic overlay . Mounting hardware
shall include oval -head tamperproof screws .
Manufacturer : Alkco SM4010 Series
Morelite CHX-89 Series
Approved Equal
F3 Wall up/down luminaire for individual or continuous
row mounting 3-foot, 2- lamp , 120 volt. Housing
shall be die- formed code gauge steel , phosphatized,
finished in matte-black baked enamel . Up light
lens shall be flat . 187 clear acrylic prismatic.
Down light lens shall be one piece injection
molded with bottom , end and side walls , . 187
clear acrylic prismatic .
Manufacturer : Keene Celebrity/ WA
Approved Equal
F4 Miniature under - counter solid front luminaire
for individual or in continuous row mounting ,
36 - inch , single lamp , 120 volt with built- in
rocker switch. Housing shall be 20-gauge steel ,
finished in white baked enamel . Lens shall be
clear acrylic prismatic lay- in .
Manufacturer : Alkco SF115/ SF215 Series
Approved Equal
F5 Surface open strip luminaire for individual or
in continuous row mounting , 48- inch , 2- lamp ,
120 volt . Housing sha l l be heavy gauge cold
rolled steel , embossed , pnosphatized , finished
in white acrylic baked enamel .
Manufacturer : Alkco Powerstrip/SU Series
Lithonia C140/240 Series
Daybrite Day- line Series
Approved Equal
16511 -2
IYPD. Dg3cr.ipt14n
F6 Wall direct down luminaire for individual or
continuous row mounting , 6- inch square by 48- inch,
2- lamp , 120 volt . Housing shall be extrudea
aluminum with die-cast end plates , no visible
hardware . Finished in baked white enamel . Wall
brackets shall be extruded aluminum with die-cast
plate , no visible hardware , finished to match
housing . Down- light with baked white enamel
symmetrical reflector and clear acrylic prismatic
lens. Matching types F7 and F8 .
Manufacturer : Prudential Mod-Quad 6- inch
Quadrille Series
Peerless LBR-102201 Series
Approved Equal
F7 Suspended direct/ indirect luminaire for individual
or continuous row mounting , 6- inch square by
48- inch , 2 - lamp , 120 volt . Housing shall be
extruded aluminum with die-cast end plates , no
visible hardware, finished in baked white enamel .
Up- light with open top , down- light with clear
acrylic prismatic reflector , baked white enamel
reflector. Suspension shall be with two 1 / 2- inch ,
single piece conduits ( no couplings or connectors) ,
spray painted white to match fixture housing .
Matching types F6 and F8.
Manufacturer : Prudential Mod-Quad 6- inch
Quadrille Series
Peerless LBR-211650 Series
Approved Equal
F8 Suspended direct down luminaire for individual
or continuous row mounting , 6- inch square by
48- inch , 2- lamp , 120 volt fixture and suspension
shall match types F6 and F7 .
Manufacturer : Prudential Mod-Quad 6- inch
Quadrille Series
Peerless LBR-102201 Series
Approved Equal
16511 -3
IY42a Da5cLiptign
F9 Wall direct/ indirect luminaire, 6 - inch square
by 36- inch , 30- lamp , 120 volt . Housing shall
be extruded aluminum with die-cast end plates ,
finished oyster white with textured brown end
caps . Up- light ( 2- lamps ) shall be barriered
from down- light ( 1 - lamp ) . Up and down lights
shall have clear acrylic prismatic lenses. Pull
switch for up light, down light and off control .
Manufacturer : Prescolite 3083 Series
Lithonia WB Series
Approved Equal
F10 Surface strip luminaire for individual or in
continuous row mounting , 48- inch , 2- lamp , 120
volt, with symmetrical reflector. Housing shall
be heavy gauge cold rolled steel , embossed , phos-
phatized. Reflector and housing shall be finished
in white acrylic baked enamel .
Manufacturer : Daybrite CHAN-LITE Series
Alkco, Lithonia
Approved Equal
H Surface Ceiling drum, 9- inch square, fluorescent,
120 volt, with inner reflector, molded opal diffuser
and black canopy .
Manufacturer : Prescolite 9428
X-1 Ceiling mounted fluorescent exit light, 120 , volt,
single faced with down light having clear acrylic
diffuser , with or without directional arrows
as indicated . Stencil face plate with red acrylic
background. Face shall be satin aluminum, housing
and canopy shall be satin black .
Manufacturer : McPhilben 30 Line Series
Lithonia ES Series
Approved Equal
1 651 1 -4
X-2 Ceiling mounted fluorescent exit light, 120 volt,
double faced with down light having clear acrylic
diffuser , with or without directional arrows
as indicated . Stencil face plate with red acrylic
background . Face shall be satin aluminum, housing
and canopy shall be satin black .
Manufacturer : McPhiiben 30 Line Series
Lithonia ES Series
Approved Equal
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
16511 -5
SECTION 16512
INCANDESCENT FIXTURES
EARI_L_=_SENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 16501 . - Lamps
2 . Section 16504 - Diffusers
3 . Section 16510 - Interior and Exterior Building
Lighting
EARI_2_=_ER4fULIa
2 .01 GENERAL :
A. Refer to light fixture schedule and applicable sections
in this division of the specification.
2 .02 EQUIPMENT:
A. The following schedule tabulates the light fixtures
by type, description and manufacturer.
I�cR� DaaLciptism
J Porcelain lamp holder with screw terminals, 250
watts maximum.
Manufacturer : P 8 S 33
16512-1
IYPg pa.acr142t14r
A Recessed downlight, 100-150 watt, 10- inch aperture,
pre-wired housing with polished aluminum reflector.
Regressed prismatic clear glass lens, gray mini-groove
baffle and baked white enamel mini-trim.
Manufacturer : Prescolite 90RM-S
Lithonia LGH9 Series
Marco R3047 Series
Approved Equal
B Recessed vaportight, 150 watt , 12- inch round ,
pre-wired housing with semi -specular reflector .
Flat clear prismatic lens , gasketed , with cast
aluminum face.
Manufacturer : Devine E551 -W65- Inc
Marco R4027 Series
Approved Equal
C Semi - recessed weathertight , 150 watt, 8- inch
square cylinder , steel housing with trimless
cast aluminum baffle . Regressed clear prismatic
lens, gasketed . Finish shall be black satin
grip. Matching types D and E .
Manufacturer : McPhilben 6R-2807 Series
Approved Equal
K Surface wall light form, 100 watt, 10- inch square,
with satin opal glass diffuser and black diecast
aluminum base with black trim plate.
Manufacturer : Prescolite 4140
END OF SECTION
16512-2
SECTION 1 651 3
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES
EARI_1_=_SENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION :
A. Related work specified elsewhere :
1 . Section 16501 - Lamps
2 . Section 16502 - Ballasts and Accessories
3. Section 16504 - Diffusers
EARI_2_=_ERQDULIS
2 .01 GENERAL :
A. The following schedule tabulates the light fixtures
by type, description and manufacturer :
Iypa DaaLLII2t14n
D
Semi - recessed w e a t h e r t i g h t , 100 watt H . I . D . ,
120 volt, with pre-wired ballast assembly. Fixture
shall match types C and E .
Manufacturer : McPhilben 6R-2845 Series
Approved Equal
16513-1
Iypa DQ5crIRf1Qn
E Semi - recessed weathertight, 175 watt, H . I . D . ,
120 volt, with pre-wired ballast assembly, fixture
shall match types C and D.
Manufacturer : McPhilben 6R-2847 Series
Approved Equal
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
16513-2
SECTION 16530
SITE LIGHTING
FA I_I_m_GENE @AL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install a complete parking , roadway and
w alkway lighting system , as shown on the plans and
as herein specified .
B. All wiring shall be installed in PVC conduit as indicated
on the plans. All wiring shall be installed a minimum
of 24" below finished grade .
1 . 02 FOUNDATIONS FOR LIGHTING STANDARDS
A. Foundations for lighting standards shall be as detailed
on the drawings .
B. Anchor bolts shall be of minimum diameter and length
as shown , 4 per standard , and installed per the pole
manufacturer ' s pole base requirements.
C. Foundations shall be formed of concrete of 3000 psi
minimum compressive strength at 28 days . All corners
of foundations above grade shall be chamferred 1 " .
D. Each foundation shall be equipped with galvanized
✓ igid conduit elbows and nipples of appropriate length
to connect between pole base and underground wiring
system. Provide grounding type bushings on each conduit.
EARI_2___ERODI CI5
2 . 01 POLES :
A. All wiring within poles and luminaires shall be #10
w ire with approved insulation.
B. All poles shall be non- tapered , extruded aluminum ,
5 " square , anodized black , and shall be furnished
complete with hand hole , anchor bolts with template,
cast base and cover and ground screw .
16530-1
C. Poles for "Types A and B " shall be 15 ° -0" in height,
as manufactured by Sterner , #SSA19-E .
D. Approved manufacturers are Gardco , Kim , or approved
equal .
2 .02 LUMINAIRES
A. All Iuminaires shall be nominally 20 " wide , by 25 "
long, by 8 " deep .
B. All luminaires shall be furnished with extruded aluminum
rectangular arm projection .
C. All luminaire housings shall be extruded aluminum
with mitered corners. Finish shall be anodized black .
Lens shall be flat, thermal and impact tempered clear
glass enclosed by a one piece gasket.
D . All luminaire integral ballasts shall operate at 120
volt.
E. All luminaire lamps shall be phospher coated metal
halide to operate at specified voltage .
F. Luminaires for Type "A " single unit shall be 400 watt,
Type III distribution . Unit shall be as manufactured
by Sterner, Executive Series.
G. Luminaires for Type "B" double units shall be 400
watt, Type III distribution. Unit shall be as manufactureu
by Sterner, Executive Series.
H. Lumina Ires for Type "F " wall mount shall have cast
aluminum face plate , shall be 250 watt, Type III distri-
bution . Unit shall be as manufactured by Sterner ,
Executive Series .
I . Acceptable manufacturers are Gardco, Kim, or approved
equal .
2 .03 BOLLARDS
A. Bollards shal I be non- tapered aluminum 8 " square ,
42 " In height with 120 volt integral ballast . Lens
shall be injection molded acrylic.
B. Bollard finish shall match pole and luminaire finish .
C. Light distribution shall be Symmetrical .
16530-2
D. Bollard lamp shall be 100 watt metal halide .
E. Unit shall be as manufactured by Sterner , Delaware
Square Series .
F. Acceptable manufacturers are Gardco, Lithonia Hi-Tek,
or approved equal .
EABI_L___EXELUI14N
3 . 01 INSTALLATION :
A. Design
1 . The lighting standard ( luminaire, pole, and base )
shall be constructed to withstand the force of
100 mph winds .
B. Grounding
1 . Each pole assembly shall be grounded by connecting
the ground wire to each of the grounding bushings
and to the pole grounding terminals.
END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
16530-3
SECTION 16620
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SET
EARI_1___SENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 16623 - Automatic Transfer Switches
1 .02 DESCRIPTION
A. Emergency generator set shall consist of an engine
driven generator assembly mounted on a rigid steel
skid in an outdoor protective housing, and with all
accessories required for a complete functioning assembly,
such as starting batteries, battery charger , engine
controls , generator controls , fuel system , exhaust
system , vibration isolators , coolant , lubrication ,
and such other items as outlined In this specification .
Vibration isolators using rubber in shear shall be
provided between the engine and the skid base to eliminate
90% of the engine vibrations.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard Product
1 . The emergency generator set shall be the standard
product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
producing such equipment. The complete set shall
be factory assembled and tested , either at the
engine manufacturer ' s factory or at the generator
manufacturer ' s factory .
2 . Accessories shall be supplied by the generator
set manufacturer and covered by his warranty
although they may be of another make .
B. Catalog Data
1 . A catalog sheet for the generator set from the
manufacturer ' s standard catalog shall be submitted
with the shop drawing submittal .
2 . Catalog sheets for accessory equipment shall
be part of the shop drawing submittal .
16620-1
C. Acceptable Manufacturers
1 . Acceptable manufacturers are : Caterpillar , Onan,
Kohler, or approved equal .
2 . Submit proof from the manufacturer of the engine
generator set of qualified service capability ,
acceptable to the Architect , in the area where
the generator will be installed .
3 . Voltage regulator shall be manufactured by Basler
or approved equal by generator manufacturer.
D . Warranty
1 . Submit with the drawing submittal , written warranty
by the generator set manufacturer for a period
of 3 yrs . or 1500 operating hours , whichever
occurs first , covering 100 percent of defective
materials and labor . Multiple warranties for
individual components will not be acceptable .
The warranty period shall begin upon acceptance
of the installation by the Owner.
E . Submittals
1 . Before fabrication, submit complete shop drawings,
equipment layout, wiring diagrams, manufacturer ' s
catalog sheets , and rating data including the
following data :
a. Output Data
b. Ventilation Requirements
c. Engine Exhaust
d. Fuel
e. Engine Starting
1 .04 GENERATOR SET FUNCTION
A. The starting cycle shall be initiated upon receipt
of a starting signal from an associated remote transfer
switch , indicating loss of normal voltage .
B. If the engine falls to start , cranking shall cease
after 45 sec. , and the corresponding derangement signal
shall be turned on .
16620-2
C . Normally , the engine shall start and accelerate to
rated frequency within 10 sec . Simultaneously , rated
voltage shall be reached .
D . The engine generator set shall be able to pick up
full load in a single step with 5% maximum speed reduc-
tion . A volts/ Hz regulator module shall permit an
initial voltage dip in order to avoid engine overload .
E . After return of normal power and return of all transfer
switches to "normal " position and after the cool - down
timer in the control equipment times out, the engine
shall shut down .
F . Alarm and safety shut-down circuits shall be electrically
supervised .
G. A manual test switch ( Run , off , Remote ) shall provide
the following functions :
Run : Test of engine starting system, simulating start
signal from transfer switch . Provide pushbutton
for bypass of cool -down cycle .
Off : Engine cannot start.
Remote : Normal operation - Remote start control .
1 .05 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Generator Set : NEMA MG-1 , Motors and Generators
B. Complete Installation :
1 . NFPA #37
2 . NFPA #30
1 .06 SERVICE CONTRACT PROPOSAL
A. Submit with the bid , a proposal for a 3-year service
contract to be performed by the manufacturer' s authorized
service shop , to cover maintenance work not included
in the warranty.
B. The Service Contract shall include a complete inspection
every 6 months or every 50 running hours , whichever
comes first.
16620-3
C . The Service Contract shall include all maintenance
work and materials recommended by the manufacturer ,
at no extra cost to the Owner . This shall include
such items as oil , filters, belts , etc .
EABI_2___EQLl1PMENI
2 . 01 ENGINE
A. The engine shall be diesel , 4-cycle , 1800 rpm with
torque characteristics as needed to meet performance
requirements . The engine shall be radiator cooled ,
suitable for full load operation at 85 degree F. outside
ambient temperature. Fan shall be pusher type. Coolant
pump shall be self-sealing and pre- lubricated . Provide
thermostatic temperature control .
B. Provide electric resistant type coolant heater of
sufficient capacity to maintain a 70 degrees F. coolant
temperature in a 10 degrees F. ambeint, thermostatically
controlled . Heater shall be for 120 volt operation .
C . The engine shall have full pressure lubrication by
gear type oil pump to all crank shaft connecting rod ,
camshaft and gear train bearings . Provide full flow
replaceable oil filter , safety pressure relief and
oil cooler . A lube oil drain shall be extended beyond
the skid base . Provide required lubricating oil as
recommended by unit manufacturer for location.
D. Fuel shall be supplied by a gear drive fuei pump to
individual fuel injectors or nozzles for each cylinder.
Piping shall be arranged to provide circulating fuel
flow with excess returning to the main fuel tank .
Piping shall be self-purging of entrained air. Provide
flexible fuel connections as required . Piping shall
be Schedule 40 black steel with threaded fittings
of screwed forged steel . Tubing shall be Schedule
K hard copper with cast solder type fittings. Check
valve shall be ball type steel .
E. Starting system shall be electric . It shall use DC
starting motor powered from industrial duty lead calcium
batteries . Provide positive engaging overrunning
type clutch between motor and engine.
F. Provide ail necessary accessories including cable
set, batteries, battery hydrometer, and battery rack .
16620-4
G. Speed control shall be by electronic isocronous governor,
maintain nearly constant frequency from no load to
full load, and permitting no more than 4 percent frequency
drop on single step application of full rated load .
Provide mechanical manual speed adjustment for trimming
set speed .
H. Provide individual alarm and protective sensors for
the following conditions :
1 . High Coolant Temperature - Alarm at 190 degrees
F min . , shutdown at 250 degrees F min .
2 . Low Coolant Temperature - Alarm at 65 degrees
F.
3 . Low Oil Pressure - Provide starting bypass of
alarm and shutdown .
4 . Engine Overspeed - Shutdown and alarm at 110
percent of rated speed .
1 . Provide gauges , reading cooling liquid temperature,
and lube oil pressure.
J . Cooling shall be by machine mounted radiator , belt
driven centrifugal fan , integral circulating pump ,
and flow modulating thermostatic valve . Drive fan
and pump directly from the engine crankshaft . Size
the fan for rated air flow through the radiator .
Use 50- 50 mixture of ethylene - glycol and water to
prevent freezing.
K. Provide a terminal box for connection of remote alarm
and control connections and contacts ( NO/ NC) for operation
of louvers .
2 . 02 GENERATOR
A. The generator shall be revolving field type , 4-pole,
brushless type or separate exciter with slip rings ,
115 degree insulation class , self- ventilated , drip
proof construction, single bearing, built In accordance
with NEMA and ANSI standards . Connection to engine
by semi - flexible coupling . Standby rating : 40 KW
at 0 . 8 pf . , 120/240 volts AC as indicated on drawings ,
single phase , 3-wire , 60 Hz . Pitch shall be 2/ 3 to
minimize third harmonies.
16620-5
B. Exciter and voltage regulator shal I be capable of
maintaining stability within 0 . 5 percent at constant
speed . Voltage regulation shall not exceed 5 percent
from no- load to full load . Maximum voltage drop shall
be 15 percent on one- step application of 100 percent
resistance type load . Unit to recover to within 0 . 5
percent rated frequency and voltage within 5 sec .
Include the regulation effects of the engine governor
in the stated generator performance figures.
C. The excitation system sha l l be self- protecting . The
manufacturer shall submit a test report on a prototype
generator verifying that a bolted fault on the generator
terminals will not cause failure of the excitation
system.
D. The generator shall have an ample size terminal box
to receive the conduits and cables indicated . All
generator leads shall be brought out . The appropriate
leads shall be connected to the neutral terminal and
not grounded to the frame.
2 . 03 SEPARATELY MOUNTED BATTERY CHARGER
A. Provide an industrial type automatically regulated
battery charger capable of re-charging the battery
in 12 hrs . after a 45-sec. cranking cycle .
B. Charger shall be current limiting , solid state full
wave rectifier type of unit construction , maintaining
the batteries at proper cell float voltage .
C. The charger shall be equipped with all normal components
including DC ammeter and DC voltmeter and circuit
breaker . Include malfunction detector with built- in
alarm for loss of charger output current, excess charger
current , and output under-voltage . Include bypass
alarm during the starting cycle . Provide sensors
for remote alarm indication of "high battery voltage"
and " low battery voltage. "
2 .04 STARTING BATTERY FOR ELECTRICAL STARTING SYSTEM
A. Starting batteries shall be of the lead calcium type ,
heavy duty , long life and low maintenance , designed
for continuous charging and engine starting service
with twenty year life .
16620-6
B. Battery rack shall be made of steel which has been
PVC coated after fabrication. The rack shall be equipped
with legs to maintain 6 " minimum clearance from the
floor .
C. Provide battery cables as necessary .
2 .05 EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Silencer shall be critical type . Silencer shall be
of size recommended by the generator set manufacturer ,
Maximum Type M- 51 or Burgess Manning Type BEO , or
approved equal .
B. Provide flexible tubing between engine and silencer ,
seamless, stainless, UL listed , gas-tight, with bolted
or screwed flange fittings . Provide lock washers
for all bolts and nuts.
C. Exhaust piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe ,
size not less than recommended by the generator set
manufacturer .
D. Drain valve shall be steel body , packless type. install
pipes and silencers with pitch toward drain valve ,
and extend drain tubing to floor drain .
2 . 06 GENERATOR CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
A. Provide an alternator mounted control and instrument
panel containing 3-1 /2" 2 percent accuracy panel type
instruments showing alternator volts and amps , with
phase selector switch , frequency meter , running time
indicator , and voltage trimming controls . include
provision for minor frequency adjustment.
B. Provide a main generator circuit breaker, either generator
mounted or installed in the control and instrument
panel .
C. Provide an annunciator module as part of the control
and instrument panel , with audible alarm and indicating
lights showing :
1 . High coolant temperature
2 . Low lube oil pressure
3 . Engine overspeed
16620-7
4 . Over crank
2 . 07 ALARM ANNUNCIATOR
A. Provide an alarm annunciator for remote installation,
surface mounted as indicated .
B. Annunciator shall be lamp type with an individual
backlighted , labeled lens for each alarm point and
common audible alarm signal . Lock- in individual point
on momentary alarm signal . Provide switch for silencing
the audible device . Turn off the alarmed point indicator
on "Return-to-Normal " without either audible or visual
signal . Provide the number of points required plus
three spare points . Provide power for the annunciator
operation from the starting battery . Provide a " lamp
test" button for checking incandescent lamp filaments .
C. Indicating Points and Alarm Points Shall Include :
1 . Generator Power On (on audible alarm)
2 . Overcrank Shut-Down
3 . Overspeed Shut-Down
4 . High Coolant Temperature, Shut-Down
5 . Low Lube 011 Pressure, Shut-Down
6 . Low Fuel , Maln Tank
7 . Battery High Voltage
8 . Battery Low Voltage
9 . All the above functions must be provided from
sensors in the generator set.
2 .08 WEATHERPROOF HOUSING
A. General
1 . Complete unit shall be factory installed in a
weatherproof steel enclosure , including but not
limited to the batteries, charger, pumps , control
panels and accessories.
16620-8
B. Enclosure
1 . The structure shall be constructed of 14 gague
sheet steel free standing and shall be integrated
w ith the structural base . The assembled unit
shall provide a complete free standing weatherproof
enclosure . The roof shall be structurally braced
to be capable of supporting the exhaust system
mounting on the exterior and shall be flashed
around exhaust riser .
2 . Enclosure shall include single door on backside
and double doors on each side and have door handles
w ith keylocking provisions.
3 . Air intake louvers shall be provided on front
and sides, shall be raintight and equipped with
mesh screens.
4 . Skid and floor design shall include an integral
diesel fuel supply tank . Tank shall be equipped
w ith supply and overflow , engine supply and return
and vent Iines , and alarm contacts and float
switches . Tank shall have a gallon capacity
for 72 hour continuous operation of the generator
set .
5 . The complete unit shall be cleaned , primed and
painted with one coat of primer and two coats
of enamel paint , and installed on a concrete
base as indicated .
2 .09 FUEL PIPING
A. All piping shall be black iron only , standard weight,
Schedule 40 , conforming to ASTM A- 120 . Connections
to engine-generator shall be with flexible connections
to prevent vibration breakage.
EARI_3.___EXECUIJON
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install generator set on a concrete base as indicated
on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer ' s
instructions and under the supervision of a factory
authorized service representative . Install coolant
and tube oil .
16620-9
B. Provide actual dimensions required for concrete pad,
including anchor bolts.
C. Obtain a signed statement from the service representative
to the effect that the installation is acceptable
before the first start- up . A copy of the statement
shall be submitted to the Architect.
D . The weatherproof housing and structural base shall
be anchored to the concrete base with anchor bolts
provided by the manufacturer .
E . Connections for piping shall be threaded fittings
of screwed forged steel . Connections for tubing shall
be cast solder type fittings . Provide flexible tubing
section wherever vibration differentials may exist .
Install return lines per diesel engine manufacturer ' s
instructions.
F. Test fuel tank with 10 lbs . air pressure for 8 hrs .
Test piping in the same manner for 4 hrs .
G. initial fill : Provide an initial fill of 1000 gals. of
diesel fuel ready for use in testing the generator
set.
H. Install the complete exhaust system with supports ,
hangers , and insulation .
I . Conduct all tests as specified herein .
J . Prov i de 2 copies of an "Operating and Maintenance
Handbook " containing catalog and performance data
for all major components as well as complete maintenance
instructions .
K. Provide 1 day of the manufacturer ' s service represen-
tatives time for instruction of the Owner ' s personnel
in proper operation and maintenance procedures.
3 .02 TESTS
A. Verify the load rating of the complete generator set
installation by operating the system for 3 hrs . at
100% of its KW rating using a load bank . Immediately
after completion of this test run , verify the ability
to pickup full rated load in a single step. Measure
frequency and voltage drop and record recovery time .
16620- 10
B. Verify proper operations of al 1 alarms and safety
shutdowns . This may be done with jumpers to short
out alarm contacts for temperatures and oil pressure.
However , an actual overspeed shutdown test shall be
conducted .
C. During the test run , record al 1 pertinent data at
no more than 15 min . intervals, including time, ambient
air temperature, KW load , amperes, voltage, frequency ,
coolant temperature , lubricating oil pressure and
day tank fuel temperature .
D. Verify the generator set ' s ability to recover by leaving
the load bank connected and throttling the engine
down to approximately 1 / 2 of normal rpm before permitting
the normal governor control to take over. The generator
set must recover to normal frequency within five seconds.
E. Submit a test report in duplicate containing a verification
of all tests, with all readings as well as any observations
and comments.
END OF SECTION
16620-11
SECTION 16622
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
EARL l__OERERtL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere :
1 . Section 16620 - Emergency Generator Sets
B. Requirements
1 . Automatic Transfer switch shall form an integral
part of the emergency power generating control
and distribution system . It shall be arranged
to automatically supply essentially continuous
power to the designated loads .
2 . Automatic transfer switch shall take power either
from the commercial power source or from the
emergency generator power source .
3 . Refer to drawings for identification of functions
required , as well as for voltage and current
rating and current withstand rating .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers :
Russelectric Inc . , ASCO , Onan , Kohler or approved
equal .
B. Design Criteria
1 . Normal Transfer Operations
a . Automatic transfer switch shall sense partial
or complete loss ( less than 80 percent )
of normal voltage in any phase . After a
time delay of 2 sec . ( adjustable 0 . 5 to
5 sec. ) a starting signal shall be transmitted
over a 2-wire circuit to the emergency generator
control system.
b. When the generator source reaches 90 percent
of rated frequency and voltage , transfer
switch shall transfer to the "emergency "
side.
16622-1
c . When normal power returns , transfer switch
shall after a time delay , re- transfer to
" normal " side . The time delay shall be
adjustable from 0 -30 min . and set at 15
min . If during this period , the generator
voltage should fail , transfer switch shall
immediately return to "normal " .
d . Pilot lights in the door of transfer switch
enclosure shall indicated "Normal " or "Emergency"
position . A selector switch ( Test- Auto
positions ) shall select the following modes
of operation :
Test : Simulation of power failure
Auto: Normal automatic operation
e . Transfer switch shal I provide an "open "
period ( with load disconnected from both
sources) of at least 0 . 1 sec . extended .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1 . In addition to the requirements of Section 16010 ,
include manufacturer ' s literature , maintenance
and operating instructions and manuals.
PARI_Z___PRQQUCI2
2 . 01 GENERAL
A. Automatic transfer switch shall be furnished by the
manufacturer of the new emergency generator set to
maintain compatibility of equipment and unit source
of responsi bi l ity .
B. Drawings shall be furnished showing complete wiring
diagrams both for power sources and for controls and
signal circuits.
C. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the control
circuitry and for supplying all auxiliary contacts
required .
16622-2
D . Provide terminal blocks with identification of all
external connections, cross-referenced to the schematic
wiring diagram.
2 .02 RATING AND PERFORMANCE
A. Automatic transfer switch shall be rated for continuous
duty when surface wall mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure .
It shall be rated for all classes of loads , including
inductive and non- inductive at 600 volts, and tungsten
map at 250 volts . The switch portion shall be designed,
built , and tested to close on an in- rush current up
to and including 20 times the continuous rating of
the switch and rated to close on and withstand a fault
current as indicated without welding or excessive
burning of contacts . The transfer switch shall be
capable of switching loads up to and including 6 times
continous rating of the switch , and capable of enduring
6 , 000 cycles of operation , at rated current , at a
rate of 6 cycles per minute , without failure . One
cycle shall consist of one complete opening and closure
of both sets of contacts on an inrush current of 10
times the continous rating of the switch .
B. Refer to drawings for voltage rating, continuous ampere
rating, RMS symmetrical withstand rating , quantity
of poles, neutral bar requirements and special features.
2 .03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Automatic transfer switch shall be surface wall mounted
in NEMA 1 enclosure.
B. Transfer switch shall :
1 . Be mechanically held , electrically operated ,
mechanically and electrically interlocked to
positively prevent the load from being simultaneously
energized by normal power and emergency power.
2 . Have all main conta,cts be silver alloy , wiping
action type.
3 . Be of blow - on construction , and protected by
arcing contacts.
4 . Have all switch and relay contacts, coils, springs,
and control elements be removable from the front
of the transfer switch without disconnection
of drive linkages or power conductors.
16622-3
5 . Sensing and control relays be continous duty ,
industrial type , with minimum contact rating
of 10 amperes.
6 . Have an enclosure with internal copper ground
bar with lugs for incoming ground wires .
7 . Have provisions for electrically disconnecting
the control section from the transfer section
to permit safe access for maintenance or service
during period of normal operation .
8 . Have provision for manual operation in case of
failure of the electrical operator .
9 . Have a cover mounted test switch ( see above )
and cover mounted pilot lights, transformer type .
10 . Have a laminated engraved nameplate on the front
of the enclosure, carrying its designation.
11 . Have a built- in bypass isolation switch . The
automatic section shall then be removable for
service , and the bypass switch shall be able
to transfer loads by manual operation .
2 .04 ACCESSORIES :
A. Time Delay to Start Emergency Power :
1 . A time delay adjustable from 1 . 0 to 5 .0 seconds
shall be provided to prevent emergency power
from needless starting and stopping during periods
of momentary voltage fluctuations from the normal
power source .
B. Adjustable Time Delay on Re-transfer to Normal :
1 . A time delay adjustable from 0 minutes to 30
minutes shall be provided to prevent emergency
power from being re-transferred back to normal
p o w e r , to i n s u r e n o r m a l power is s t a b l e . I f
normal power should return , and the emergency
source should fail , then re- transfer shall take
place immediately.
C. Spare Set of N/ O and N/ C auxiliary contacts : For
remote control and signals, operated by the main shaft.
16622-4
D . Operation counter .
E. Other accessories required to perform the functions
specified.
EBSI_�___EXEQUIIQf1
3 . 01 Install transfer switch where indicated . Transfer switch
shall be located with the top of the switch 61-0" A. F.
3 . 02 Test transfer switch operationally be opening the "normal "
source , to insure proper load transfer, and to insure that
all control and monitor signals are properly transmitted .
END OF SECTION
16622-5
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
eeRI_I___CENERML
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install , all labor , material and equipment,
required for a fire alarm system , as covered by these
Specifications , to be wired, connected , and left in
first-class operating condition . All equipment shall
be approved by the Underwriters Laboratories , and
shall bear the "UL " label .
B. The equipment furnished under this Specification shall
be the standard product of one manufacturer and shall
be equal , In every way , to that manufactured by the
Simplex Time Recorder Company. Equipment descriptions
are intended to indicate type and quality of design
and material , as well a operating features required .
Acceptable alternate manufacturers are Gamewell or
approved equal .
C. The fire alarm system shali be Simplex 2001 series
SVC Fire and Voice Communication Life Alarm System.
D. The audio tone and voice paging communications system
shall be an integral part of the system.
E . The manufacturers shall indicate as part of the Shop
Drawing submittal , module numbers for all functions
of all systems specified herein .
F. The Contractor ' s attention is directed to the General
Conditions and modifications thereto.
G. The fire alarm equipment and complete system shall
conform, in every respect, to the National Fire Protection
Association Code ( NFPA ) , and all other applicable
codes and authorities having jurisdiction .
1 . 02 SYSTEM OPERATION - "LOCAL " PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SYSTEM
( NFPA 72A)
A. The fire alarm system shall be solid state , 120 VAC
supply power rectified to 24 VDC operating power ,
with 24 VCD standby battery power , utilizing audio
tone signaling, zone coded positive series non- interfering,
16721 -1
general alarm , electrically supervised against opens,
shorts , and positive or negative grounds , and shall
be alarm and trouble annunciated , with audio tone
and voice paging communications .
B . Manual station and automatic heat and smoke detector
initiating circuits shall be current limited circuit -
2-wire, normally open , end- of- line resistor circuit ,
Class B, which shall allow alarm conditions from current
limited initiating devices such as manual stations ,
and heat and smoke detectors be reported to the control
panel . Initiating devices such as smoke detectors
require an additional 2-wire, power supply circuit.
C. Signal operations alarm circuits shall be as follows :
1 . Audio tone and voice communication DC circuit
- 2-wire, end-of- line compensator parallel circuit,
Class B , for operation of speaker signal ing ,
and for voice message reproduction .
D . The act of operation by the police dispatcher of the
manual fire alarm station ( Zone 1 ) located in Police
Dispatch 109 shall sound an alarm tone over the speakers
and cause the visual units to flash ( Symbol F) throughout
the fire departments section of the building only .
This operation is for notifying the fire department
of police dispatch receiving a 911 or outside fire
alarm call requiring fire department deployment of
apparatus.
E . The act of operation of the automatic smoke detecotrs
( Zone 2 ) shall sound an alarm tone at the fire alarm
control panel only, which is located in Police Dispatch
109 . This alarm tone shall not be sounded over the
speakers located throughout the fire department section
of the building . This operation is for notifying
the police dispatch of an in-house fire alarm requiring
immediate attention.
F. The activation of operation of both zones shall annunciate
on the main fire alarm control panel and the remote
annunciator , the zone in which the alarm was initiated .
G. The control panel equipment for automatic fan shut-down,
door release, etc . shall be signalled only by activation
of the automatic smoke detectors ( Zone 2 ) .
16721 -2
H. In the event of 120 VAC supply power failure , an open,
a grounded circuit or any disarrangement of wiring
in the system , a trouble signal and lamp shall be
activated until system Is restored to normal . The
trouble signal may be silenced by means of a switch .
Upon restoration of the system to normal , the trouble
signal shall again sound until the switch is restored
to normal position .
I . System equipment shall operate , upon loss of 120 VAC
supply power, on self-contained 24 VDC operating standby
battery power .
1 .03 AUDIO TONE AND VOICE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The voice communication system shall be solid state,
120 VAC supply power rectified to 24 VDC operating
power , with 24 VDC standby battery power furnished
from fire alarm control panel , electrically supervised
against opens, shorts, and postive or negative grounds,
and shall provide voice communications and paging ,
and alarm tones between the main control panel and
peripheral devices.
B. The act of operation of any fire alarm station , or
activation of any automatic alarm initiating device ,
in addition to those functions outlined in "Fire Alarm
System Operation" specified above, shall :
1 . Allow for voice communication to selected or
all zones.
2 . Allow for selected electronic tone signals to
selected or all zones.
PA12I_2_=_PENULIS
2 .01 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL - LOCAL PROTECTIVE SIGNALING
SYSTEM
A. Control panel for NFPA 72A shall be type 2001 , series
SVC, with all modules installed in a surface wall
mounted cabinet.
1 . Surface wall mounted cabinet shall be of size
as required to accomodate system components as
herein specified . Cabinet shall be furnished
with an outer door and frame assembly , equipped
with a lock and shatter- proof transparent door
panel .
16721 -3
B. The control panel shall provide operating and indicating
functions as follows :
1 . Al arm lock - in feature : An alarm from any zone
module is automatically locked- in until reset.
2 . Trouble lock- in feature : A trouble signal from
any zone module is automatically locked- i n u nt i t
reset.
3 . Al arm resound feature : Ability to silence one
zone alarm, yet allow subsequent zone alarms
to sound.
4 . Trouble resound feature : Ability to silence
one zone trouble alarm , yet allow subsequent
zone trouble alarms to sound .
5 . Acknowledge switch : Silences alarm and/or trouble
signals.
6 . Earth ground LED : indicated a positive or negative
ground .
7 . System trouble LED : indicates trouble condition
in system.
8 . Signal silenced LED : indicates alarm and/or
trouble signals have been silenced .
9 . LED test switch : Provides a central means of
testing zone circuits LED ' s.
10 . System flasher feature : prov ides a flashing
signal on zone LED's until alarm or trouble condition
is acknowledged.
11 . System reset switch : restores system to normal ,
after alarm or trouble condition has been corrected .
12. Remote trouble signal connection feature: provides
24 VDC power for remote trouble signal .
13 . Supervised annunciator output features : monitors
open line or open lamp filament conditions of
remote annunciator .
14 . Annunciator trouble LED: indicates remote annunciator
open line or open lamp filament trouble condition .
16721 -4
15 . Monitor circuit feature : provides interior super-
vision of all normally closed circuits , relays ,
printed circuit cards .
16 . Sonalert signal : provides audible indication
of alarm and trouble signals.
17 . Current limited zone alarm LED : indicates zone
alarm condition in system . Provide for each
zone circuit.
18 . Current limited zone trouble LED : indicates
zone trouble condition in system . Provide for
each zone circuit.
19. Timer : provides a means of silencing signalling
devices .
20 . Battery charger : dual rate battery charger with
high and trickle charge capability.
21 . Battery charger high charge rate LED : indicates
charger working at high-rate of charge.
22 . Battery monitor charger failure LED : indicates
charger trouble.
23 . Batteries : sealed rechargeable 24-volt lead
acid, series connected, with capacity to provide
standby power for operating all system components.
24 . Auxiliary relay : provides 20-amp dry contacts
for control of equipment external to the system,
such as annunciators , fans, doors, etc. Provide
for each control function.
25 . Power limited transformer : 120 VAC primary ,
24 VDC secondary , with primary fuse , sized as
required for current limited initiating devices.
26 . Power amplifier : provides 30 watt source of
power for one or multiple speaker lines , without
back-up , for reproducing voice communications ,
voice paging, and alarm tones . Provide quantity
of ampiifiers to meet power requirements of system.
27 . Amplifier monitor : supervises the power amplifier.
Provide for each power amplifier .
16721 -5
28. Oscillator all -circuit control switch : provides
a means of simultaneously sounding a manual alarm
of audio tones over all circuits .
29. Oscillator manual -alarm control switch : provides
a means of manually controlling audio tones over
any/ all circuits.
30 . Oscillator stop switch : provides a means of
stopping the oscillator tone signal .
31 . Manual control switch : provides a means of manually
selecting audio tone to signal circuit. Provide
for each signal circuit.
32 . Tone oscillator card : provides "slow whoop" for
alarm.
2 .02 ANNUNCIATOR
A. Remote annunciator shall be front lighted design ,
with the following features :
1 . One zone annunciator lamp for each zone
2 . System trouble LED
3 . Audible trouble signal with silence switch
4 . Acknowledge switch with system trouble signal
when left in abnormal position
5 . Flush trim with stainless steel finish
2 .03 PERIPHERAL DEVICES
A. Manual fire alarm stations shall be semi-flush, non-coded,
single action type, No. 2099 series.
B. Fire alarm audio/ visual unit, with speaker for voice
communications, paging and alarm tones , and integral
flashing warning light. Speaker shall be 4 " diameter ,
2 watts audio power, short re-entrant type, constructed
of a polyamide based phoenolic material which will
not support fire. Speaker shall be capable of reproducing
continuous or oscillating tones and voice signalling .
Warning light shall be protruding red acrylic lens
with 24VAC lamp . Unit shall be flush wall mounted ,
No. 2903 series.
16721 -6
C. Light refraction smoke detector shall be dual photo-cells,
soi i d state, 24 volt DC 135 degrees F . heat detector
back-up and with alarm indicating light emitting diode ,
No. 2098 series.
EABI_ ___EXELUI14N
3 .01 WIRING
A. The following function wiring shall be twisted pairs,
#12 and/or #14 AWG :
1 . All alarm and trouble zones
2 . Speakers
3 . Smoke detector power
4 . Door release power
5 . Example : "Two # 14 " or "2" indicates 1 twisted
pair #14 AWG
6 . Example : "Four # 14 " or "4" indicates 2 twisted
pairs #14 AWG
B. The fol lowing function wiring shall be # 12 and/or
#14 AWG:
1 . Flashing lights
2 . Fan shut-down
C. The fire alarm plans are schematic, indicating conduit
routings only. The plans do not indicate wiring require-
ments or conduit sizes. The system manufacturer shall
incorporate their wiring requirements on the system
schematic drawings included as part of the contract
documents . This contractor shall be responsible ,
in conjunction with the system manufacturer, for complete
w iring requirements and conduit sizes . The system
w iring shall include the Contract Document schematics ,
w ith wiring requirement and conduit sizes indicated .
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. All conduit , wiring , outlet boxes , junction boxes ,
supports , etc . , shall be furnished and installed as
required in Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods.
16721 -7
B. The manufacturer of the equipment shall provide expert
supervision in the installation and , in addition ,
shall furnish the necessary wiring diagrams and instruc-
tions required to make the installation complete .
3 .03 SERVICE FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall have supplied comparable systems
and shall maintain engineering and service departments
capable of designing and maintaining the system in
operation . Contractor shall make available to the
Owner , a local service department of a duly authorized
distributor of the equipment, which is to stock the
manufacturer ' s standard parts. On-the-premise maintenance
is to be provided during normal working hours at no
cost to the Owner for a period of 12 months from the
date of completion of installation unless damage is
caused by misuse , abuse , or accident .
B. On-the- premise service furnished at other than normal
working hours must be available also, and shall be
charged by the manufacturer ' s distributor at current
labor rates.
3 . 04 TRAINING
A. Contractor shall have employed the services of a qualified
representative of the manufacturer , to instruct the
Owner ' s personnel fully in all phases of equipment
operation upon completion of installation.
3 .05 TESTING
A. A factory trained technician shall supervise the instal -
lation and shall test and adjust all equipment upon
completion . Each detector switch and signal shall
be tested by the manufacturer ' s representative in
the presence of a representative of the Owner , and
a test report shall be made out, in triplicate , and
signed by the Owner ' s representative indicating that
he witnessed the actual individual test of the system.
This testing time is in addition to the training time .
A copy of this test report sha l l be furnished to the
Owner and Architect.
16721 -8
3 . 06 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring
free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects
for a period of one year from the date of acceptance
of the installation.
END OF SECTION
16721 -9
SECTION 16740
PUBLIC TELEPHONE CONDUIT SYSTEM
EAaI_1___EEt1ERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. The telephone system for outside telephones sha l l
consist of a complete conduit, outlet box and raceway
system as shown on the Plans and as herein specified .
This Contractor shall provide and install all conduits ,
outlets , backboards , cabinets , etc . as shown on the
plans .
B. Telephone cables , telephones , telephone equipment ,
etc . , will be furnished and installed by the Public
Telephone Company . This Contractor shall consult
with the Telephone Company before installation of
the telephone conduits to coordinate their work.
C. This Contractor shall furnish copies of all correspondence
between himself and the Public Telephone Company for
record in the Architect ' s file.
D. Prov I de in each conduit , a fish wire as specified
elsewhere in this Specification.
1 .02 TELEPHONE SERVICE CONDUITS
A. Service conduits shall be schedule 40 , heavy wall
pvc , installed 24 inches below grade , as shown on
the drawings .
1 .03 GROUNDING
A. Instal I a #6 AWG bare green ground wire in 1 " plastic
conduit from the building service entrance ground
to the telephone equipment backboard .
1 .04 TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
A. Furnish and install plywood backboards for telephone
equipment . Backboards shall be 3/ 4" Marine plywood
with 2 coats of black enamel paint on all sides .
Each backboard shall be 4 ' x 4 ' x 8 ' as noted on the
drawings and wall mounted with 1 / 2 " spacers between
the backboard and the wall . Install one 120 volt duplex
receptacle in the lower left hand corner of each equipment
backboard , as shown on the Plans.
16740-1
1 . 05 OUTLETS FOR TELEPHONES
A . All outlet boxes shall be 2-gang with 1 -gang plaster
cover . All outlets not used by the Telephone Company
shall be furnished with blank plastic cover plates .
Color to match wiring device plates .
1 . 06 CONDUITS FOR TELEPHONE OUTLETS
A. Furnish and install conduits from the outlet boxes ,
as indicated in the symbol schedule shown on the plans
or as otherwise noted . Conduits shall be installed
to within 6" of the telephone equipment backboards .
B. AlI conduit ends shall be terminated in bushings .
END OF SECTION
16740-2
SECTION 16760
INTERNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
EARI_11-__LENEEAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install , all labor , materials and equipment,
required for an internal communication system as covered
by these specifications , to be wired , connected and
left in first class operating condition. All equipment
shall be approved by the Underwriters Laboratories ,
and shall bear the "UL " label .
B. The equipment furnished under this Specification shall
be the standard product of one manufacturer and shall
be equal in every way to that manufactured by Dukane
Corporation . Catalog and model numbers are intended
to indicate type and quality of design and material
as well as operating features required . Acceptable
alternate manufacturers are : Executone, Rauland-Borg
or approved equal .
C. The internal communication system shall be Dukane
4A876 series intercom system.
D . The Contractor ' s attention is directed to the General
Conditions and modifications thereto.
E . All items of equipment , including wire and cable ,
shall be designed by the manufacturer to operate as
a complete system and shall be accompanied by the
manufacturer ' s complete service notes and drawings
detailing all interconnections.
EARI_Z_z_EBOLUM
2 .01 MASTER STATION
A. Master station shall be a desk top unit, walnut finish ,
with operating and indicating functions as follows :
1 . Twenty ( 20 ) station lighted selector switchbank
2 . Group all -call
3 . Incoming call electronic chime
16760-1
4 . Speaker microphone
5 . 15-watt solid state amplifier and circuitry
6 . Busy and privacy lights
7 . Supervisory tone
8 . Volume control
9 . Stand-By, Listen, Talk Switch
10 . Power-on switch
1 1 . MODEL 4A881B
2 .02 STAFF STATION
A. Staff station shall be flush wail mounted, satin stainless
steel finish , with operating and indicating functions
as follows :
1 . Annunciator call - in to master station
2 . Privacy , normal and call switches
3 . Positive privacy
4 . Speaker microphone
5 . Model 4A1460
PL BI_.___E?5E�UIiQN
3 . 01 WIRING
A. Speaker cable shall be a twisted-shielded pair with
overall insulating sheath, as recommended by the system
manufacturer .
3 . 02 OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE
A. Weatherproof staff stations, indicated "WP" on drawings,
shall be a surface mounted unit installed in a flush
weatherproof enclosure.
B. Weatherproof enclosure shall be flush mounted, constructed
of code gauge steel , with brushed stainless steel
faceplate and piano-hinged lockable door .
16760-2
3 . 03 JUNCTION BOXES
A. Furnish and install master station junction box, flush
mounted as shown on the drawings . Junction box shall
be constructed of code gauge steel with split screw
cover.
B. Provide screw-type terminal strips , with number of
terminals to accomodate the system wiring requirements.
Provide minimum 20 percent spare capacity .
3 . 04 OUTLET BOXES
A. All special outlet boxes required for the system equipment
shall be supplied to the Contractor by the system
manufacturer . All standard outlet boxes required
for the system equipment shall be suppl led by the
Contractor .
3 . 05 INSTALLATION
A. All conduit, wiring , outlet boxes , junction boxes ,
etc . , shall be furnished and installed as required
in Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods.
3 . 06 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring
free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects
for a period of one year from the date of acceptance
of the installation .
3 .07 SERVICE FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall make available to the Owner, a local ,
service department of a duly authorized distributor
of the equipment, which is to stock the manufacturer ' s
standard parts . On-the- premise maintenance is to
be provided during normal working hours at no cost
to the Owner for a period of 12 months from the date
of completion of installation unless damage is caused
by misuse, abuse, or accident.
END OF SECTION
16760-3
SECTION 16781
TELEVISION SYSTEMS
EARI_1_=_QENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION :
A. The television conduit systems for cable and for closed
circuit TV , shall consist of conduit, outlet box and
raceway systems only , as shown on the drawings .
B. Service Conduit
1 . Provide cable TV service conduit, 18 inches below
grade , as shown on the drawings .
2 . Contractor shall verify exact location of conduit
termination point with local cable TV company
prior to installation.
C. Outlet boxes shall be 2-gang with 1 -gang cover. Provide
blank cover plate of materials and color to match
wiring device plates .
END OF SECTION
1 6781 -1